= “VIC ra = ed in Pe eC f/f ~~ \" ewe | \ \ ( mays / cB 199% } H Victorian — Naturalist | Volume 116 (1) February 1999 Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria since 1884 From the Editors Jenny Barnett Verna Beilharz Bill Birch Peter Brown Malcolm Calder Daniel Catrice Helen Cohn Laurie Conole John Conran Margaret Corrick Leon Costermans Mike Coupar David Crosby Bob Dalgarno Peter Dann Kelvin Dunn lan Endersby Mary Gibson Alena Glaister David Gray Gwen Harden Sheila Houghton John Hunter Jeffrey Jeanes David Lindenmeyer Lachlan McKinnon Andrew McMahon lan Mansergh Richard Marchant Peter Menkhorst Adrian Moorrees Tim New Geoffrey Paterson The Victorian Naturalist would not be successful without the enormous amount of time and effort voluntarily given by a large number of people who work behind the scenes. One of the most important editorial tasks is to have papers refereed. The Editors would like to say thank you to those people who refereed manuscripts published in 1998: Martin Predavec Ross Ramsay Jon Sago Martin Schulz Peter Tyler Robert Wallis Neville Walsh Jeanette Watson Geoff Westcott The Victorian Naturalist endeavours to publish articles which are written for a wide and varied audience. We have a team of dedicated proof-readers who help with the readability and expression of our articles. Thanks to: Julie Bartlett Ken Bell Tania Bennell Phil Bock Arnis Dzedins lan Endersby Jennie Epstein Alistair Evans Arthur Farnworth Sharon Ford Mary Gibson Ken Green Murray Haby Clarrie Handreck Steve Hill Virgil Hubregtse John Hunter Glen Jamieson Genevieve Jones Peter Kelly lan Mansergh Michael McBain John McLean Geoffrey Paterson Michelle Smith Kathie Strickland Robert Wallis Gretna Weste Sincere thanks to our book reviewers for 1998 who provided interesting and insightful comments on a wide range of books and other materials. Malcolm Calder Tim Doeg Paul Downey Cecily Falkingham Linden Gilbank Caroline Gross Sara Maroske Tom May Kathleen Ralston Barbara Sharp Letitia Silberbauer Kathie Strickland John West As always we particularly thank our authors who provide us with excellent material for publication. Our editorial advisory team continue to provide valuable advice and assistance: lan Endersby, lan Mansergh, Tom May and John Seebeck. On the production side, a thank you to: the computer team - Alistair Evans, Anne Morton, Michael McBain who maintains the internet site (http://calcite.apana.org.au/fnev/) Ken Bell who prepares the annual index; Felicity Garde for printing the labels; and Printers, Brown Prior Anderson Pty. Ltd, especially Steve Kitto. The Victorian Naturalist Volume 116 (1) 1999 February Editor: Merilyn Grey Honours Australian Natural History Medallion 1998 — Peter Menkhorst, DS CRLOU OEM rastsctertenets merges sbiscetisuussressant teste icons eieisss Wiinacs etait 4 Contributions Plant Ecophysiology: the Quest to Understand How Plants Cope in a Changing Environment, by J. Williams and D. EQmus «00.1010 6 Leafhoppers in Ant Nests: Some Aspects of the Behaviour of Pogonoscopini (Hemiptera: Eurymelidae), VALS OLA RSL SEALE svete Coase topeaion Cenc r¥stasiaey ceceeaceteerevertaFracyeeare 12 The Orange Palm Dart Skipper Cephrenes augiades sperthias (Feldensin: Melbournesby J Bichlers Tr ae sussepecasneeroesvocsrjeveress 16 A Fauna Survey of Riparian and Other Revegetation Sites Pear LE ciar ea AC EON ey fee EL OU TCAND ais ez Qeas cc diene chdpias sarees vooceeseunecorravdasrees 19 A List of Native Mammals of Wilsons Promontory National Park, by P. Menkhorst and J. Seebeck .....1cccctcscsesssessseeees 26 Letters to the From N. Romanowski: Aquaculture of Silver Perch Editor BUDA US DLA VRS careocrers: Fate eget eck czeety corer cure etrcngtizhshay stuaterveosans 28 From G. Kibria: Response to N. RomanOwSKyi ........cc:ccceccesseeseeeeeeenenes 29 Naturalist Notes Some Records of the Fungus Blackfellows’ Bread Polyporus mylittae, by E, LYAGON wsesescssesesesesssesvenseneeeeretevetenensneeneess The Cordyceps Update, by R. Barker Book Reviews Flora of Australia, Volume 12 Mimosaceae (excluding Acacia), Caesalpiniaceae, reviewer I. THOMPSON ussite essere reseentesesneees 11 Climate Change 1995 — Impacts, Adaptations and Mitigation of Climate Change: Scientific-Technical Analyses, editors R.T. Watson, M.C. Zingowerd, R.H. Moss and D.J. DOKKEN ve... 25 Saving the Environment: What Will it Take? by Ted Trainer .......1.+... 33 A Long Walk in the Australian Bush, by William J. Lines, HOVICWER Te TTCLCMCP ns -ctascitte opens eschrite taricyivekat sibs tath cx ioeedenn tree ics tretece Sie George Caley, Nineteenth Century Naturalist, by Joan Webb, reviewer L. Gill Dartkrircecseccsrssarccresiusescccsvcgrecssescesseneeveegsontens tosaseatnasent 38 New Zealand Fungi: an Illustrated Guide, by Greta Stevenson, LEVIEWEr R, JONCS ververressverrnreresrenctegssceasesngesaatvncasecarsarenrrersrsgedtnevenesced 40 Tribute Daniel Ernest McInnes, 1906 — 1998, by S. Houghton... 34 Vale Joan Harry. by N. Schleiger and D. Mahler... peop ss Norman Stanford, by S. Houghton... ao) Errata Volume 115 (5) ..rvccsscsscsessessessecssecsersecsessenenestsscteenesescersaserensserseensetventaceney 5 ISSN 0042-5184 Cover. Peter Menkhorst receiving the 1998 Australian Natural History Medallion (see article p. 4). Photo by Wendy Clark, Empathy Photographics. Find us on the WEB: http://calcite.apana.org.au/fnev/ Honours Australian Natural History Medallion 1998 Peter Menkhorst “Destruction of habitat’ is a phrase heard frequently these days, and it is the reality behind this that makes the work of this years Medallionist so important and valu- able. For more than twenty-five years, Peter Menkhorst has been involved with endangered species of birds and mammals, either by field survey, research or coordi- nating recovery efforts. As a Wildlife Scientist in the former Fisheries and Wildlife Department, and since 1996 a Senior Wildlife Policy Officer with the Department of Natural] Resources and Environment, he has played a major role in improving knowledge of Victoria’s wildlife and developing recovery strategies. The Orange-bellied Parrot Recovery Project, one of the first intensive recovery efforts undertaken in Australia, required the collaboration of the wildlife agencies of the Victorian, Tasmanian, South Australian and Federal Governments, Birds Australia, and other non-government agencies. Peter Menkhorst has been the Victorian representative on this recovery team since its inception in 1983. He devel- oped and led the Helmeted Honeyeater Recovery Effort. involving the coordina- tion of scientists from a variety of disci- plines, and in 1993 he was put in charge of the recovery of the Regent Honeyeater, an ecologically complex project, also requir- ing the coordination of organisations in three States. He has collaborated in the preparation of recovery plans and Action Statements under the Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act for the Orange-bellied Parrot, Helmeted Honeyeater, Regent Honeyeater, New Holland Mouse, Squirrel Glider and the Koala in New South Wales. Peter has been involved in many field surveys, often as team leader, These included investigation of the requirements of the Squirrel Glider in northern and cen- tral Victoria, the Smokey Mouse in the Eastern Highlands, and the feeding ecolo- gy of Australasian Gannets breeding in Port Phillip Bay, Victoria. The status of the Koala is a vexed question. Overpopulation is a problem in parts of Victoria, and since 1995 Peter has coordinated Koala management across the State, including investigation of options for fertility control. He represents Victoria on the National Koala Network, which has pre- pared a National Strategy for Koala Conservation. In 1995 Peter represented Australian wildlife agencies at a workshop on Population and Habitat Viability Assessment for the Komodo Dragon, in Bogor, Java, and later encouraged and facilitated the Conservation Breeding Specialist Group of IUCN to conduct the first such workshop in Australia, for the Spotted Tree Frog. The Atlas of Victorian Mammals project was set up under Peter’s leadership in 1980, and he was responsible for the for- mation of a detailed computer database for mammal records for Victoria. This now includes records of all Victorian verte- brates and is the most comprehensive of its kind in Australia. It formed the basis for Mammals of Victoria: distribution, ecology and conservation (1995), for which Peter was the major contributor and editor. In 1996 it received a Whitley Book Award from the Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales. Other publications include contributions to books on the ecology of the Mallee, the status of Australia’s seabirds, possums and gliders, Fauna of Australia, Volume 2 -~ Aves and the Handbook of Australian, New Zealand and Antarctic Birds, and over 100 articles to journals both scientific and popular, Over 130 of Peter’s photographs have been accepted for the Australian Museum’s National Photographic Index of Australian Wildlife. Some have been used in the series of books published by the Index: others in Mammals of Victoria. and in R. Strahan’s Complete Book of Australian Mammals. Programs for the recovery and manage- ment of endangered wildlife rely very The Victorian Naturalist heavily on research, and Peter has designed and co-supervised projects at PhD and BSc Honours level on aspects of the ecology of the Orange-bellied Parrot and the Helmeted Honeyeater. Input from amateur groups is also of great value, and Peter has been very active in cooperating with them to achieve common goals. Peter is a member of Birds Australia, the Bird Observers Club of Australia, the Australian Mammal Society, the Australian Bird Study Association, the Victorian Ornithological Research Group (V.O.R.G.), who nominated him for the Honours well as various ‘Friends’ organisations. He was a committee member of V.O.R.G. for twenty years. and a member of the Healesville Sanctuary Advisory Committee between 1991 and 1995. He has presented over 50 talks to naturalist clubs, and has done much to raise public awareness of the plight of endangered species, and to involve the wider commu- nity in the protection and preservation of their habitat. Sheila Houghton 12 Scenic Court, ; P 3 ictoria 3437 Australian Natural History Medallion, as Fa gira pa: Errata ] In Volume 115 (5), Mount Buffalo Centenary Issue, the captions on pictures A and B on Plate 5 were reversed. They should read: A. Oreixenica latialis theddora. a sub- species of the Browns endemic to Mount Buffalo. Photo by David Crosby: B. Common Silver Xenica Oreixenica lathoniella herceus which flies at the same time as QO. latialis. Photo by David Crosby. These photographs accompany the paper by David Crosby entitled ‘The Butterflies of Mount Buffalo National Park’, pages 222-225. The editor apologises for any misunderstanding this has caused. Special Issues The Victorian Naturalist Mount Buffalo Centenary Issue Volume 115 (5) 1998 Wilsons Promontory Centenary Issue Volume 115 (6) 1998 Copies are available for purchase from Parks Victoria offices at the Mount Buffalo and Wilsons Promontory National Parks or the FNCV Office, Locked Bag 3, Blackburn 3130, Victoria. Send $8.50 per copy (includes postage), Farewell Message Ed and Pat Grey wish to thank all the people who have helped make our job as editors of The Victorian Naturalist over the past years rewarding, enjoyable and possible. There are far too many to list, but suffice it to say, we shall miss the contact with such a range of interesting and stimulating people. We are, however, happy to leave in the knowledge that the new editor — Merilyn Grey — will do a wonderful job. Ed and Pat Grey Vol. 116 (1) 1999 5 Contributions Plant Ecophysiology: the Quest to Understand How Plants Cope in a Changing Environment Jann Williams! and Derek Eamus? Abstract Plant ecophysiology applies physiological principles and methodologies to organisms living in their natural environment. It is a relatively new field in Australia, but 1s helping unravel the linkages between pattern and process in a range of environments and yegetation types, and is providing basic information that can be used for managing natural resources. This paper reviews recent progress in the discipline and identifies future directions for research, (7he Victorian Naturalist 116 (1), 1999, 6-10). Introduction Until recently, much ecological research into plants has been concerned with the description and classification of vegetation types, as well as the long tradition of assessing differences within and between populations of a plant species using mor- phological and demographic characters (Pryor 1956; Williams and Ladiges 1985). With the development of new approaches and methodologies. however, we are now gaining a greater understanding of the processes that underly the distribution and abundance of plants. A more quantitative approach based on knowledge of mechanisms underlying the distribution and performance of plants can further improve understanding, and hence management of systems. Ecophysiology, a hybrid of physiology and ecology provides this approach. For the purposes of this paper, ecophysiology is considered to be the application of physiological principles and methodologies to organisms living in their natural environment, or the study of the influence of the environment on plant growth and development. It gives us the tools to advance our understanding of how plants cope with a changing environment on a daily, seasonal and annual basis. Ecophysiology is a relatively new field in Australia (albeit a well established field in Europe and America), and is beginning to help unravel the linkages between pattern and process in range of environments and vegetation types (Williams and Eamus 1997), Pattern generally refers to the way plants are distributed in space and time ' School of Botany, University of Melbourne. Parkville, Melbourne, Victoria 3052, ’ School of Biological Sciences, Northern Territory University, Darwin, Northern Territory 0909, 6 across the landscape. For example, a species may only be found in locations where there is a reliable water supply, such as along river-banks. By examining the processes associated with these patterns, the aim is to identify the key mechanisms that help explain the distribution of indi- vidual plants or vegetation types. Using the previous example, the plants in question either may not be able to physiologically tolerate drier areas or could grow there but are outcompeted by other species. By using ecophysiological techniques, there is a greater chance of identifying which is the most likely explanation. Recent published examples where eco- physiological principles are used to link pattern and process are studies on the dynamics of Mulga woodlands (Anderson and Hodgkinson 1997) and some of the pioneering work on northern Australian savannas (Prior et al. 1997: Myets et al. 1997). These studies provide considerable insight into the functioning of these ecosystems and provide basic information that can be used for the management of these landscapes. In addition. modelling physiological processes, as illustrated by Studies on tree growth and nutrient cycling (Kirschbaum ef al. 1994) can help predict potential changes in vegetation dynamics as environments change, for example in response to climate change (McMurtrie et al. 1992). Models can also inform our understanding of successional changes in vegetation after disturbances such as fire, With the increasing realization of the importance of natural ecosystems to global environmental health (Mooney et a/. 1996) and the increased focus on sustainable management (Commonwealth of Australia The Victorian Naturalist 1996). the demand for information on the structure and functioning of ecosystems is likely to expand. The challenge is to pro- vide informed opinions of the linkages between pattern and process and how ecosystems respond to the actions of humans (Williams and Eamus 1997), This paper indicates how the field of ecophysi- ology can help achieve an increased under- standing of the links between pattern and process. Plant ecophysiology — the links between pattern and process The production of much of the vegetation covering the Australian continent is limited by low availability of water, nutrients, or both (Pate and McComb 1981). Superimposed on this axiomatic feature is the impact of fire upon vegetation structure and functioning. Availability of water, espe- cially after fire, is a critical factor for plant distribution and performance. The challenge for ecophysiologists is to demonstrate how the different strategies used by plants for acquiring, controlling and using water and tolerating drought can explain observed pat- terns of vegetation structure and function. In the recent special issue on plant eco- physiology in the Australian Journal of Botany (Volume 45(2)), competition for water was a constant theme across a range of ecosystems. For example, competition for water was central to the study by Anderson and Hodgkinson (1997), who showed. counter-intuitively. that grazing of perennial grasses around island-bands of Mulga Acacia aneura reduces the water supply to mulga shrubs, which then die during periods of low rainfall, leading to a dysfunctional landscape. In south-western Australia, competition for water was also important for the survival of Hakea species, especially at the seedling stage (Richards et al. 1997). Pre-dawn water potential represents a measure of plant water status and soil water availability — the lower that water potentials are, the more stressed a plant Is. In savanna woodlands in the Northern Territory (Myers et al. 1997; Duff ef al. 1997), seasonal patterns in pre-dawn water potential have been related to phenology of a species, and to the micro-climate of the environment, especially vapour pressure Vol. 116 (1) 1999 Contributions deficit (VPD). Survival of species with dif- ferent patterns of leaf-fall was apparently reliant upon differing ‘strategies’ and no single strategy appeared to confer a large competitive advantage. Some of the variability and complexity of physiological responses in these savannas include identification of the different responses of saplings and trees of the same species in the one location (Prior er al. 1997: Myers et al. 1997) and different phys- iological responses between different popu- lations of the same species (Fordyce ef al. 1997). Complementary studies using stable isotopes to investigate water-use-efficiency of different provenances of River Red Gum Eucalyptus camaldulensis (e.g. Hubick and Gibson 1993) have shown that such approaches may be successful. Even so, the record of identifying physiological charac- ters that may reflect underlying local adap- tation remains modest, even though it has long been advocated (Williams ef al. 1995). While both too much and too little water can limit plant performance (Bell and Williams 1997), under certain conditions the amount of light received by a plant can also be a major source of stress. Environmental factors which disrupt leaf functioning, such as Jow temperatures, can induce a light-dependent loss in photosyn- thetic capacity known as photoinhibition (Osmond 1981). Cold-induced photoinhi- bition has been a major topic of biochemi- cal and physiological research for the past fifteen years, but its significance for plant communities, both natural and agricultural, is still poorly known. Our understanding of the role of photoinhibition is slowly improving with an increasing number of field-based studies, as discussed in the next section of this paper. Considerable benefits can also be gained by using ecophysiological techniques to examine the below-ground dynamics of plants, as illustrated by recent studies over- seas (Vogt ef al. 1996). In Australia our understanding of this area is still in the 19th century (Williams and Eamus 1997) with Keith (1997) identifying the follow- ing two areas as critical for future investi- gation: a) the factors controlling the amount of carbon and nutrients allocated within plants to below-ground parts (most- ly roots) compared to above-ground 7 Contributions (shoots); and b) the transfer of nutrients from roots to the soil by living roots exud- ing substances or by the death of roots. Field-based techniques Recent technological advances have stim- ulated rapid progress in the discipline of ecophysiology and hence an increasingly process-based understanding is developing. In particular, recent developments in instru- mentation (Pearcy ef al. 1991) have caused a dramatic expansion of the number of pro- jects involving physiological measurements in the field, allowing studies at more than one site and at greater frequencies. Thus, portable infra-red gas analysers and leaf dif- fusion porometers, coupled with data log- gers for micro-climate studies, have allowed detailed investigations of the relationships between carbon assimilation, stomatal con- ductance and environmental factors. These instruments allow measurements of, for example, the amount of photosynthesis occurring in plants in the field, how much water a plant is using and measurements of the environment around a plant such as how much light it is receiving. Methods and interpretation of gas exchange of terrestrial plants in the field have been advanced with the availability of equipment permitting automated control of light flux density, temperature and CO, concentration. Whole tree and canopy tran- spiration rates have become routinely mea- surable using a range of techniques (sap flow sensors; eddy correlation techniques), Indeed, in reviewing the field of ecophysi- ology. it is apparent that measurements at the individual tree scale, for above-ground parts. is adequately serviced by technology (Williams and Eamus 1997), Furthermore, the even newer sub-discipline of biochemi- cal, or molecular ecology, is gaining ground — for example the developments in the use of genetically transformed plants to investigate whole plant nitrogen allocation and carbon gain (Stitt and Schulze 1994). Technological developments in the mea- surement of photoinhibition in situ have also aided our understanding of the mecha- nisms underlying plant performance (Ball 1994: King and Ball 1998). Physiological studies indicate that species should be most vulnerable to photoinhibition near their distributional limits and that seedlings 8 rather than established plants should be more vulnerable to reductions in growth associated with chronic photoinhibition. Thus. cold-induced photoinhibition may play a role in limiting regeneration, and hence also the distribution, of species along climatic gradients. Indeed, recent research has established that cold-induced photoinhibition is correlated with patterns of seedling regeneration by Snow Gum Eucalyptus pauciflora at tree line (Ball et al. 1991) and with poor growth of eucalypt seedlings planted in pasture revegetation programs (Holly ef al. 1994; Ball et al. 1997). As the understanding of photopro- tection and photodamage increases, the concept of light being a potentially over- abundant resource may receive greater attention amongst ecologists. Physiological techniques may be used to extrapolate to larger scale ecological ques- tions. For example, Battaglia and Williams (1996) showed that the relative abundance of two eucalypt species at a given site in south-eastern Tasmania could be predicted by a knowledge of the depth and texture of soil at that site. These authors, in a similar manner to that of Eamus and Cole (1997), took observations at the large scale, and then initiated small-scale experiments to provide a mechanistic understanding of the processes generating large-scale patterns. New technologies such as those described for terrestrial plants in Williams ef al. (1997) and for aquatic organisms in Westphalen and Cheshire (1997) add to the growing number of tools that can be used to increase our understanding of pattern and process. The techniques used to measure hydraulic conductance and positive stem pressures in seedlings and resprouts in the Californian chapparal species 4denostoma fasciculatum could be usefully applied in ecophysiological studies in Australia. Future Directions Williams and Eamus (1997) identified two major challenges in the discipline of ecophysiology that are clearly deserving of attention. The first was the ecophysiology of below-ground parts (mostly, but not exclusively roots), while the second was to provide the catchment/regional scale answers and predictions that are required by managers and policy makers. Both chal- The Victorian Naturalist lenges require an understanding of how plants respond to changing environments at a range of temporal and spatial scales. Furthermore, being able to meet the challenges will depend on the successful integration of two fields — modelling and remote sensing (see Moore et al, 1993) — because experiments at this scale (i.e. thousands of hectares) are not possible, and measurements of individual plants or animals would require vast amounts of replication (Williams and Eamus 1997). Ecophysiological approaches can, how- ever, currently be used to inform manage- ment practices. The diversity of ecophysio- logical responses in the Australian flora, which can be put to a wide range of applied uses, is a good case in hand, The selection of the best species to plant at a particular site can be greatly improved with good ecophysiological information, as identified by Bell and Williams (1997). For example, Walker ef al. (1993) high- lighted the need for details of water-use characteristics of species to be used for reclamation of degraded catchments. Efforts have been made in this direction (e.g. Bell et a/. 1994), but progress is slow and the rehabilitation need is great. The lack of knowledge on the type of planting material, location of plantings and planting density have been identified as factors lim- iting major catchment revegetation pro- grams in Australia (Schofield 1992). The need for more ecophysiological informa- tion is even more pressing in order to max- imise the success of the major revegetation programs currently being promoted in Australia (Commonwealth of Australia 1997). A recent review of the ecophysiolo- gy of eucalypts (Bell and Williams 1997) also concluded that greater attention to ecophysiological interactions was needed to increase our understanding of the genus in both managed and natural systems. An additional thrust for the future of eco- physiology lies in its penetration into and development with a range of other, more traditional, i.e. older, disciplines (Williams and Eamus 1997). For example, micromete- orologists are concerned with heat and momentum exchange between the planetary boundary layer and canopies and hydrolo- gists need to know how vegetation influ- ences catchment hydrology. Medium-scale Vol. 116 (1) 1999 Contributions (canopy, sub-catchment) and large-scale (regional, continental) processes will only become accessible when modellers and users of remote sensing and Geographic Information Systems (GIS) interact with ecologists and ecophysiologists on research projects at the landscape scale. Conclusions In highlighting ecophysiological research in Australia, the recent Symposia held in conjunction with meetings of the Ecological Society of Australia (see vol- umes 40(2) and 45(2) of the Australian Journal of Botany) have demonstrated that plant ecophysiology has a strong base in Australia. It is hoped that the discipline will continue to grow as the benefits of taking this approach become increasingly apparent and as new ways are developed to integrate the impact of physiological responses on the performance of a plant over its life. As the integration of small (leaf, tree), medium (canopy, sub-catch- ment) and large (regional, continental) scale studies increase, the contribution of knowledge of processes to explaining, pre- dicting and managing patterns in the land- scape will also increase. Acknowledgements We would like to thank the editors of The Victorian Naturalist tor inviting us to write this review paper and an anonymous referee for comments, References Anderson, V. and Hodgkinson, K. (1997), Perennial grass-mediated capture of resource flows and the maintenance of mulga banded pattem in a semi-and woodland. 4ustralian Journal af Botany 45, 331-342 Ball, MC. (1994). The role of photoinhibition during tree seedling establishment at low temperatures. In “Photoinhibition of Photosynthesis — from Molecular Mechanisms to the Field’ Eds. N.R. Baker and LR Bowyer, pp. 367-378. (Bios Scientific Publishers London). Ball, M.C., Hodges, V.S. and Laughlin, G.P. (1991), Cold-induced photoinhibition limits regeneration of snow gum at tree-line. Functional Ecology 5, 663-668 Ball, M.C., Egerton, J.J.G., Leuning, R., Cunningham, R.B and Dunne, P, (1997), Microclimate above grass affects spring growth of seedlings of Snow Gum (knealyptus pauciflora). Plant. Cell and Environment, 20, 155-166 Battaglia, M, and Williams, K, (1996), Mixed species stands of eucalypts as ecotones on a walter supply gradient. Ovcologia 108, 518-528. Bell, D. and Williams, J.E. (1997). Eucalypt ecophysi- ology. In ‘Eucalypt ecology: individuals to ecosys- tems’, Eds. JE. Williams and J.C.Z, Woinarski, pp. 168-196. (Cambridge University Press. Cambridge) Bell, D.T,, McComb, J.A., van der Moezel, P.G., Contributions Bennett, 1.J. and Kabay, E.D, (1994). Comparisons of selected and cloned plantlets against unselected seedlings for rehabilitation of waterlogged and saline discharge zones in Australian agricultural catch- ments, Australian Forestry 57, 21-27. Commonwealth of Australia (1996). ‘Australia: State of the Environment Report 1996’. (CSIRO Publishing: Melboume). Commonwealth of Australia (1997). “Natural Heritage Trust. A better environment for Australia in the 21st century’, (Environment Australia and the Department of Primary Industries and Energy: Canberra). Duff, G., Myers, M., Eamus, D., Williams, D., Fordyce, I. and O’Grady, T. (1997). Seasonal pat- terns in soil moisture, vapour pressure deficit, tree canopy cover and predawn Water potential in north- ern Australian savannas. Australian Journal of Botany 45, 211-224, Eamus, D. and Cole, S. (1997). Diurnal and seasonal comparisons of assimilation, phyllode conductance and water potential of three acacia and one eucalypt species in the wet-dry tropics of Australia. Australian Journal of Botany 45, 275-290. Fordyce, 1., Eamus, D, and Duff, G. (1997). The water relations of the tree Allosyncarpia ternata (Myrtaceae) at contrasting sites in the monsoonal tropics of northern Australia, Australian Journal of Botany 4§, 259-274. Holly, C., Laughlin, G.P. and Ball, M.C. (1994). Cold- induced photoinhibition and design of shelters for establishment of eucalypts in pasture. Ausrraljan Journal of Botany 42, 139-147. Hubick, K. and Gibson, A. (1993). Diversity in the relationship between C isotope discrimination and transpiration efficiency when water is limited. In ‘Stable Isotopes and Plant C-H20 Relations’, (J.R Ehrlinger, A.E. Hall and G.D. Farquhar eds.) pp 311-325, (Academie Press). Keith, H. (1997), Nutrient cycling in eucalypt ecosys- tems, In “Eucalypt ecology: individuals to ecosys- tems’. Eds. J.E. Williams and J.C.Z. Woinarski. pp. 197-226, (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge) King, D.A. and Ball, M.C. (1998). A model of frost impacts on seasonal photosynthesis of Eucalyptus pauciflora, Australian Journal of Plant Physiology, 25, 27-37. Kirschbaum, M.U_F., King, D.A,, Comins, H.N., MeMurtrie, R.E., Medlyn, B.E., Pongracic, S., Murty, D., Keith, H., Raison, R.J., Khanna, P.K. and Sheriff, D.W_ (1994). Modelling forest response to increasing CO, concentration under nutrient-limited conditions, Plant, Cell and Environment 17, 1081- 1099. MeMurtrie, R.E., Comins, H.N., Kirschbaum, M.ULF. and Wang, Y-P, (1992). Modifying existing forest growth models to take account of effects of elevated CO2. Australian Journal of Botany 40, 657-678. Mooney, H.A., Lubchenco, J., Dirzo, R, and Sala, O.E. (1996). Biodiversity and ecosystem functioning: ecosystem analyses, In “Global Biodiversity Assessment’. Eds, V.H. Heywood and R.T, Watson pp- 327-452. (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge). Moore, I,D., Norton, TW. and Williams, JE. (1993) Modelling environmental heterogeneity in forested landscapes. Journal of Hydrology 150, 717-747. 10 Myers, B.A., Duff, G., Eamus, D,, Fordyce, I,, O'Grady, A and Williams, R.J. (1997). Seasonal variation in water relations of trees differing in leaf phenology in a wet-dry tropical savanna near Darwin, northern Australia. Australian Journal of Botany 45, 225-240. Pate, J. and McComb, A. (1981). ‘The Biology of Australian Plants’. (UWA Press: Nedlands). Osmond, C.B. (1981). Photorespiration and photoinhi- bition: some implications for the energetics of photo- synthesis. Biochemica et Biophysica Acta 639, 77-98. Pearcy, R.W., Ehleringer, J.. Mooney, HA. and Rundel, P.W. (1991). Plant Physiological Ecology: Field Methods and Instrumentation. (Chapman and Hall; London). Prior, L., Eamus, D. and Duff, G. (1997). Seasonal and diumal patterns of carbon assimilation, stomatal con- ductance and leaf water potential in Eucalyptus tetrodonia saplings in a wet-dry savanna in northern Australia. Australian Journal of Botany 45, 241-258. Pryor, L..D. (1956). Variation in snow gum (Eucalyptus pauciflora Sieb.). with altitude. Proceedings of the Linnaen Society of New South Wales 81, 299-305 Richards, M.B., Groom, P.K. and Lamont, B.B. (1997). A trade-off between fecundity and drought suscepti- bility in adults and seedlings of Hakea species as influenced by leaf morphology. Australian Journal of Botany 45, 301-309. Schofield, N.J, (1992). Tree planting for dryland salini- ty control in Australia, Agroforest Systems 20, 1-23. Stitt, M, and Schulze, D. (1994), Does Rubisco control the rate of photosynthesis and plant growth? An exer- cise in molecular ecophysiology. Plant, Cell and Environment 17, 465-487. Vogt, K.A., Vogt, D.J., Palmiotto, P.A., O"Hara, J, and Asbjornsen, H. (1996). Review of root dynamics in forest ecosystems grouped by climate, climatic forest type and species, Plant and Soil, 187, 159-219, Walker, J., Bullen, F. and Williams, B.G, (1993). Ecohydrological changes in the Murray-Darling Basin. [. The number of trees cleared over two cen- turies. Journal of Applied Ecology 30, 265-273. Westphalen, G. and Cheshire, A. (1997). Quantum effi- ciency and photosynthetic production of a temperate turf algal community, d4ustralian Journal of Botany 45, 343-349, Williams, D,G., Mack, R.N. and Black, R.A. (1995). Ecophysiology of introduced Pennisetum setaceum on Hawaii: the role of phenotypic plasticity. cology 76, 1569-1580. Williams, J.E., Davis, $.D, and Portwood, K. (1997). Xylem embolism in seedlings and resprouts of Adenostoma fasciculatum after fire. Australian Journal of Botany 45, 291-300. Williams, J.E. and Eamus, D. (1997). Plant ecophysiol- ogy: linking pattern and process — a review Australian Journal of Botany 45, 351-357. Williams, J.E. and Ladiges, PY. (1985), Morphological variation in Victorian, lowland populations of Eucalyptus pauciflora Sieb. ex Spreng. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Vietorta. 7, 31-48, The Victorian Naturalist Book Review Flora of Australia Volume 12 Mimosaceae (excluding Acacia), Caesalpiniaceae Publisher: CSIRO Publishing, P.O. Box 1139, Collingwood, Melbourne. RRP $69.95. This is the fourteenth angiosperm (flow- ering plant) volume to be published in the Flora of Australia series. Of the 59 volumes to be published in this major undertaking, 46 will deal with angiosperms and the remainder with the gymnosperm, fern, bryophyte, lichen and oceanic island floras. A number of botanists, illustrators and pho- tographers have contributed to this volume in which 169 native and naturalised species from 38 genera are described. All of the Australian genera in the Mimosaceae, with the exception of the largest, Acacia, and all 22 genera in the Caesalpiniaceae are described. The majority of species in these genera have a tropical to sub-tropical distribu- tion although Senna, in particular, is a notable exception. The Mimosaceae and Caesalpiniaceae are two of three legume families, the third being the very large Fabaceae (pea family). Some authorities treat these three families as sub-families of the Leguminosae. This volume, like all volumes in this series. has been written by botanists for botanists and the style is formal. A good knowledge of plant descriptive terminology and nomenclatural terms and abbreviations is necessary if one is to fully appreciate this book, although the 64 excellent colour pho- tographs add greatly to its attractiveness to the amateur. Descriptions and keys to gen- era and species are very concise but are supplemented with detailed and clear illus- trations. Brief notes on distribution, rarity, taxonomic difficulties, horticultural value, weed status etc. are provided after each species description, For someone wishing to learn about any of the species in great detail, the treatments in this flora will serve as a useful starting point. Distribution maps are placed together near the end of the book in the same order as the taxa appear in the descriptions. This, I think, works better than having the maps scattered throughout the text as has occurred in earli- er volumes. This volume does not provide a key to angiosperm families or a glossary. These are provided in Volume 1. Although very few of the species described in this volume occur naturally in Vol. 116 (1) 1999 Victoria, several are cultivated or occur as weeds. Some members of the Mimosaceae (tribe Mimoseae) are serious weeds, e.g. Mesquites (genus Prosopis), introduced from America for their perceived benefits as soil stabilisers, food sources and stock shel- ter, and Sensitive plants of the genus Mimosa. A few species of Albizia (tribe Ingeae) are native to northern Australia and are related to the cultivated species of this genus that are grown in Victorian gardens. Cape Wattle Paraserianthes lophantha is native fo southern Western Australia and is widely naturalised and cultivated in Victoria, One of the larger genera in the Mimosaceae treated in this volume is Archidendron which is distributed widely in Asia as well as in north-eastern Australia. Familiar introduced species in the Caesalpiniaceae include Honey Locust Gleditsia triacanthos, a fodder plant intro- duced from North America and widely planted and naturalised, and Carob Ceratonia siliqua, which is also a useful food plant. The common garden plant, Caesalpinia gilliesii, has ten relatives that are native to northern Australia. A genus in the tribe Cassieae of the Caesalpiniaceae that has been given special treatment in this volume is Senna (mostly formerly known as Cassia). It appears that taxonomic resolution of sections of this genus has been thwarted by such reproduc- tive strategies as polyploidy, hybridisation and apomixis and this is discussed. In light of the lack of certainty about the current classification, the authors considered it best to identify some of the more problematic elements in the complex as ‘form taxa” rather than as species or sub-species. The desert cassias of northern Victoria previous- ly known as Cassia nemophila have been recognised as Senna form taxa ‘coriacea’. ‘zygophylla’, ‘filifolia’ and “petiolaris’. This book will be an excellent resource for professionals and may be useful for amateur botanists with a special interest in the Mimosaceae and Caesalpiniaceae. lan Thompson School of Botany, University of Melbourne, Parkville, Victoria 3052 11 Contributions Leafhoppers in Ant Nests: Some Aspects of the Behaviour of Pogonoscopini (Hemiptera: Eurymelidae) M.F. Day' and K.R. Pullen! Abstract Field and laboratory observations on a species of the leafhopper tribe Pogonoscopini have shown that it lives in nests of ants of the genus Camponotus during the day. At dusk it emerges, attended by the ants, to feed on mallee during the night. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (1), 1999, 12-15). Introduction In the 1920s the north-western Mallee district was still a remote part of Victoria when Charles Oke, at that time an amateur entomologist with a particular interest in beetles, visited the railway siding of Gypsum and Hattah Lakes with J.E. Dixon. He described their excursion in a delightful essay published in The Victorian Naturalist (Oke 1926). About this time, a fascinating Australian fauna of insects and other invertebrates living as inquilines (guests) in ant and termite nests was being brought to light, and Oke had become an avid collector of the often bizarre inquiline beetles, discovering a diversity of new species. On this trip Oke found many bee- tles, but at Hattah Lakes he was also intrigued by ‘a kind of froghopper (Cercopidae)’ which he encountered in ant nests under the ground. The ant host was apparently the ‘sugar ant’, Camponotus nigriceps (Smith). Oke states the froghop- pers “were found in all stages, except the eggs. Little larvae from slightly more than 1 mm up to fully matured imagines (adults) were seen in the same nest....On rolling over the covering log from one of the nests sometimes a dozen or 20 of these guests will be revealed’. Several froghop- pers were found at a depth of ‘over 3 feet’ (915 mm) in a large Camponotus nest ‘covered by a log and a sheet of bark’ that Oke excavated. Speculating on the habits of these inquilines, Oke said ‘it would appear that they spent their lives in these nests - unless they are taken out at night to feed on the trees’. However, his brief observations at night did not reveal any froghoppers outside the nests. Oke did not identify his inquiline froghoppers, but we ' CSIRO Entomology, GPO Box 1700, Canberra, ACT 2601 12 recognised them as one of the Pogonoscopini, a remarkable tribe of eurymelid leafhoppers. The Pogonoscopini are poorly studied, distinctive and unusual insects confined, as far as is known, to the southern and interi- or parts of Australia. The history of the discovery and description of the species and their association with ants is worth recording. In 1909 Jacobi described two leathoppers from the nests of sugar ants of the genus Camponotus from Western Australia; he accommodated the two in the existing eurymelid genus Eurymeloides, as E. aemaeops and E. levis (Jacobi 1909). In 1924 China described the new genus Pogonoscopus for a new species P. myrmex, and suggested that Jacobi’s two species probably belonged to the same genus, China (1926) subsequently revised the group, describing several new genera and species to comprise a new subfamily, the Pogonoscopinae. Evans (1966) later referred to the group as the Tribe Pogonoscopini. Representatives of this unusual group were subsequently collected mainly by myrmecologists and almost always in the nests of Camponotus. Yet the most basic aspects of pogono- scopine biology remained a mystery. They must have sucked sap like all leafhoppers, but where did they feed, and where were the eggs laid? Oke’s observations shed no light on these questions. Evans (1931), apparently unaware of Oke’s observations, was of the opinion that the pogonoscopines ‘sucked up sap from below ground level’, basing his comments on the advice of D.C. Swan, then in South Australia, Later, he stated unequivocally that the Pogonoscopini ‘feed on the roots of euca- lypts’ (Evans 1946). In a subsequent revi- sion of the Australian leafhopper fauna, The Victorian Naturalist Contributions Evans (1966) recognised five species of Pogonoscopini in four genera, placing sev- eral of China’s species into synonymy. On the behaviour of these leafhopers. he quot- ed Mr Peter McMillan of Perth, who had frequently collected them with ants in Western Australia. McMillan wrote that the ants ‘build their nests under logs and stones and have tunnels with large entrance holes which are smooth and vertical’. The leafhoppers “walk around with a peculiar rolling motion and when escaping just fold their legs and tumble down the shaft’. Field observations on Pogonoscopus myrmex An opportunity to study a pogonoscopine species under field conditions arose when three leafhoppers identified as Pogonoscopus myrmex China were caught in traps set in mallee as part of a survey of the invertebrates of the Calperum sector of Bookmark Biosphere Reserve, South Australia (Pullen 1997). The collection site (Fig. 1), situated in the old Amalia pad- dock of the former Calperum sheep station, is dominated by Red Mallee, Eucalyptus socialis F.Muell. ex Miq. Calperum is located north of Renmark and has a semi- arid climate. The manner of collection of the specimens - two nymphs in pitfall traps Vol. 116 (1) 1999 and an adult female in a combination pit- fall/flight intercept trap - dispelled the view that they passed their lives confined to ant nests. We returned to the Amalia site on 12 October 1995 with the aim of observing Pogonoscopus and collecting additional material, Since previous ant collectors had found pogonoscopines most commonly in the nests of Camponotus at the base of eucalypts, the Amalia search was begun by excavating nests of C. gouldianus Forel located at the base of mallees, The nest tunnels invariably penetrated between the mallee roots, allowing only partial excava- tion, but after several hours five adults and one nymph of P. myrmex had been found, confirming C. gouldianus as a host ant. This work was carried out during daylight hours and no leafhoppers were seen out- side the Camponotus nests. Appreciating that Camponotus are night foragers, we returned to the site at dusk. We found many ants milling around the entrances to their nests and soon one or two pogonoscopines were observed. As darkness fell, more appeared. and eventu- ally both nymphs and adults were seen to be climbing the mallee stems. The temper- ature Was approximately 12-15°C. The pogonoscopines were noticeably more 13 Contributions vem: el ae Fig. 2. A nymph of Pogonoscopus myrmex feeding at night on Eucalyptus socialis and attended by Camponotus gouldianus. affected by the torch beams and moved faster than the ants, either to the far side of the trunk or more frequently under adher- ing bark. They were not ‘herded’, but moved independently of the ants, although ants attempted to follow any leafhoppers they encountered. Finally, at about 1930 hrs, some leafhoppers were seen to begin to feed, and then they were always attend- ed by several ants (Fig. 2). During feeding, it was observed that the hind legs were often elevated and waved; the significance of this behaviour is not known. Most of the trees were above 3 m in height, so that, without ladders, it was not possible to see whether the leafhoppers ascended to the smaller branchlets. All nymphal stages and adults were present. Although they were more readily collected at night than during the day. they were not easy to capture because of their rapid movements and their aversion to light. The same behaviour was observed on the following night when the insects were photographed. Laboratory observations on Pogonoscopus myrmex Some nymphs and adult P. myrmex and their attendant ants were brought alive to Canberra where they survived for a week without food. Others were offered Eucalyptus leucoxylon F.Muell., on which they appeared to feed, even when the 14 branchlets were considerably desiccated. To test the reaction of a local non-host Camponotus to their presence, several P. myrmex were placed in a previously pre- pared colony of C.consobrinus Erichson. The leafhoppers were vigorously attacked, with no evidence of any symbiotic rela- tionship, inherent or otherwise. Observations on Australoscopus sp. During our stay at Calperum, a colleague Mr Michael Moore of Adelaide, returned from a day trip to Waikerie, South Australia, with live specimens of a second pogonoscopine, identified as a species of Australoscopus. The species is smaller than Pogonoscopus myrmex and was attended by Camponotus terebrans (Lowne) in a nest under cover on the ground. In culture, the ants on being dis- turbed were observed to pick up and carry the leafhoppers, behaviour noted by Oke (1926). On uncovering an ant nest, Oke observed that his froghoppers ‘seem to be greatly agitated’, and that ‘any ant meeting one of the guests will immediately seize it by the thorax and carry it down one of the holes.... The ants invariably carry the leafhoppers off head foremost, and gener- ally turn them over with their feet upper- most as soon as they take hold of them...’ . To Oke it was evident ‘that these froghop- pers are used to being carried by the ants’. The Victorian Naturalist It seems likely that the insect Oke was describing was a _ species of Australoscopus. We never observed Camponotus gouldianus carry P. myrmex. Discussion Our observations demonstrated that Pogonoscopus myrmex is not confined to ant nests and that. while feeding, its behav- ioural interaction with its ant host is com- parable to that of other eurymelids (Evans 1931; Buckley 1987), except that P. myrmex feeds at night, Diurnal ant inquilinism and nocturnal foraging may be a strategy that allows Pogonoscopus to avoid both predation and the hot. desiccat- ing diurnal conditions where it lives. In most characters, such as their mouth- parts, antennae, leg structure and fully developed wings, the Pogonoscopini are typically eurymeline. However, neither the nymphs nor adults are capable of jumping, so that ‘leafhopper” is an inappropriate name for these insects. The unusually long legs of all stages, even Ist instar nymphs, have been mentioned in all previous reports, several authors referring to their ‘spider-like’ appearance. The long legs could be an adaptation to allow an easier daily trip from the host ants’ nest up to the mallee branches and return. It would be of interest to learn whether the young nymphs travel long distances walking, both after hatching from the egg and to feed: such travel would represent a substantial feat. Pogonoscopus myrmex does not appear to exhibit special myrmecophile adapta- tions for permanent life in ant nests. Myrmecophiles typically have the eyes reduced or absent, and the epidermis is often unpigmented. To avoid injury by their ant hosts they are often rapid runners (e.g. Thysanura, Staphylinidae) or are able to retract the antennae and legs into grooves in the body integument (e.g. many inquiline beetles). The fat body of both adults and immature stages of pogonoscopines is very well developed, possibly an adaptation necessary to hold them over on occasions when, per- haps due to weather conditions, the insects are unable to leave the host ant nest to feed. Vol. 116 (1) 1999 Contributions The observations noted above show that significant differences exist between pogonoscopine genera in their behavioural relationships with their host ants. Much of the life history of these inquiline leafhop- pers remains completely unknown. We do not know where or at what time of the year the eggs are laid, or where the early instars live. If the eggs are inserted into the twigs or stems of the host plant, as in other eurymelids, how do the nymphs reach the nest of a host ant? We know nothing of the behaviour of the other three described pogonoscopine species. An interesting study awaits a future student. Acknowledgements We thank Mr Bruce Lambie, now of the Australian Heritage Commission, Canberra, for facilitating access to Calperum and the Bookmark Biosphere Reserve; Dr Steve Shattuck, CSIRO, and Mr Archie McArthur, SA Museum, for ant identifications; Dr Michael Braby, CSIRO, for photography: and Mr Mike Moore, Adelaide, for specimens of Australoscopus. The survey of insects at Calperum/Bookmark Biosphere Reserve was conducted with support from the Australian National Parks and Wildlife Service (ANPWS), 1994. References Buckley, R.C_ (1987). Interactions involving plants, Homoptera and ants. Annual Review of kcalogy and Sysvematics 18, 111-135 China, W.E. (1924). A new genus of Bythoscopinae (Jassidae, Homoptera) from Western Australia. Annaly and Magazine of Natural History (Ser. 9) 14, 529-531. China, W_E, (1926). Notes on the biology and mor- phology of the Eurymelidae (Cicadelloidea, Homoptera). /ransactiony of the Entomological Soctety of London 1926, 289-296 Evans, J, W, (1931). Notes on the biology and morphol- ogy of the Eurymelidae (Cicadelloidea, Homoptera). Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales 56, 210-226 Evans, J.W, (1946). A natural classification of leafhop- pers (Homoptera, Jassoidea), Part 2, Aetalionidae, Hylicidae, Eurymelidae. 7ransactions of Royal Entomological Society of London 97, 39-54, Evans, J.W, (1966). The leathoppers and froghoppers of Australia and New Zealand. Australian Museum Memotrs 12, 1-347 Jacobi, A, (1909), Homoptera, Die Fauna Sudwest Australiens. Ergebnisse der Hamburger sudwest-aus- tralischen Forschungereise, 1905. Hrsg. v. W- Michaelsen ti, R. Hartmeyer 2, 337-345. Oke, C, (1926), Two entomologists in the Mallee. 7he Victorian Naturalist 42, 279-294, Pullen, K.R. (1997), A Survey of the Invertebrates of Calperum Station, Bookmark Biosphere Reserve, South Australia. Report to Environment Australia. (CSIRO Entomology; Canberra), 15 Contributions The Orange Palm Dart Skipper Cephrenes augiades sperthias (Felder) in Melbourne John Eichler! Abstract This article provides additional locality records of the Orange Palm Dart Skipper Cephrenes augiades sperthias (Felder); Lepidoptera: Hesperiidae, in suburban Melbourne, lists larval food plants and includes observations of its life cycle. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (1), 1999, 16-18). Distribution and Range Extension The Orange Palm Dart is a relatively large skipper, whose larvae feed exclusive- ly on palms.Its natural range is eastern coastal Australia, from Cape York to the Illawarra region of New South Wales (Common and Waterhouse 1981). By the early 1980s it had become naturalised in the Perth region of Western Australia (Hutchison 1983). In 1990, Crosby record- ed specimens from Camberwell, Victoria. He concluded that they had probably developed from eggs transported from Queensland on palms and that the Orange Palm Dart was unlikely to become estab- lished in Victoria. However, subsequent records from the inner eastern suburbs led Crosby (1994) to conclude that it had become established in Melbourne. Larvae were first noted on a small Bangalow Palm Archontophoenix cunning- hamiana in my garden in the Melbourne bayside suburb of Black Rock on 5 February, 1994 and successive generations of Palm Darts have continued to use that palm. The identity of the insect was estab- lished by raising butterflies from the pupal stage and comparing male and female adults with the illustrations and descrip- tions in Common and Waterhouse (1981) and MeCubbin (1971), Later in February 1994, larvae and pupae were found in a nearby garden on numer- ous species of palm. Larvae had been known from that site since about 1992 (David Radford pers. comm.). Subsequent searches revealed that the Orange Palm Dart was present elsewhere at Black Rock, at the nearby suburbs of Beaumaris and Sandringham and at Mitcham. David Britton (pers. comm.) recorded the Palm Dart at Kew in 1992 and 1993 and has ' 18 Bayview Crescent, Black Rock, Victoria 3193 16 noted larval shelters in West Melbourne. Crosby (1994) reported a number of observations of the Orange Palm Dart from Melbourne suburbs, including East Melbourne and South Yarra, during 1990 to 1993, Description Cream coloured eggs are laid singly on various parts of palm plants. The larval and pupal stages can be found in cylindri- cal shelters, which the insect forms by joining together the margins of palm leaflets with silk. Larvae observed at Black Rock are up to 50 mm long, are light green in colour and often have two yellow spots on their back. They have a broad, cream coloured head with brown stripes. Male and female butterflies are quite different in their appearance, the following descrip- tions being based on Black Rock speci- mens. Males have a wingspan of approxi- mately 35 mm and are brightly coloured with orange and dark brown patches. Females are an almost uniform dark brown colour and are larger, having a wingspan of approximately 40 mm, The source of those insects may be from Queensland, where females tend to be darker than those from New South Wales (Common and Waterhouse 1981). Larval Food Plants In Melbourne, Orange Palm Dart larvae feed on a number of Australian and exotic palms which are listed in Table 1. Dunn (1995) records 75 palms that are larval hosts of the Orange Palm Dart in Queensland. Crosby (1994) records 5 species of palm that are used in Melbourne, of which the introduced Queen Palm Arecastrum romanzoffianum and Senegal Date Palm Phoenix reclinata, are additional to the species listed in Table 1. The Victorian Naturalist Fig. 1. Egg on upper side of Bangalow Palm leaflet. Fig. 3. Pupa in opened Bangalow Palm leaflet shelter. Life Cycle Observations and Comments The following observations were made of the Palm Dart’s life cycle in Melbourne. * Larvae were noted during February, March, April and July. * Pupation was observed in February and March. The pupation period recorded for pupae kept indoors ranged from 19 to 24 days (four observations). * Female butterflies were seen in January and March. A male butterfly was found sheltering in a wood pile in May. David Britton (pers. comm.) recorded a female in May and a male in April. + Freshly laid eggs were found on the leaflets. crown shaft (frond base) and trunk of a Bangalow Palm in December, January and March. The Orange Palm Dart is able to survive Melbourne's winters and is still active during cooler months. At first this seems surprising given its tropical to sub tropical Vol. 116 (1) 1999 Contributions shelter. ' Pao Fig. 4. Adult male on Kentia Palm frond. origin. It appears that the lack of suitable larval food plants has been more of a limit- ing factor than climatic conditions, at least in southern Victoria. Other Australian but- terflies, e.g. the Dingy Swallowtail Papilio anactus and Orchard Butterfly Papilio aegeus aegeus, have also been able to extend their range southwards into Victoria because trees have been planted that are eaten by their larvae (McCubbin 1971). A possible explanation for the Palm Dart’s activity during cooler months is that it has not yet adapted to climatic conditions in Melbourne, Conclusions The Orange Palm Dart is an adaptable insect whose spread to Melbourne coin- cides with, and presumably is a result of, the increased use of palms in landscaping since the 1980s. Because the larvae feed exclusively on palms, it is assumed that this new insect 17 Contributions Table 1. Records of larval food plants, Melbourne. Australian Palms Alexandra Palm Archontophoenix alexandrae Cabbage Fan Palm Livistona australis Bangalow Palm Archontophoenix cunninghamiana Umbrella Palm Hedyscepe canterburyana (Lord Howe Island) Kentia Palm Howea forsteriana (Lord Howe Island) Exotic Palms European Fan Palm Chamaerops humilis (Mediterranean) Canary Island Date Palm Phoenix canariensis (Africa) Canary Island and Senegal Date Palm hybrid Phoenix canariensis x reclinata (Africa) Dwarf Date Palm Phoenix roebelenii (South East Asia) Nikua Palm Rhopalostylis sapida (New Zealand) Chinese Windmill Palm Trachycarpus fortunei (Himalayas) Washington Palm Washingtonia robusta (USA) arrival will have little or no adverse impact on indigenous insects or plants in most of Victoria, although it would be interesting to know whether it is present in the stands of Cabbage Fan Palms Livistona australis near Orbost. Acknowledgments Thanks to Pat and Mike Coupar, who tentatively identified the larvae, later confirmed the identity of adults and referred me to the 1990 Crosby article, David Radford, who identified many of the larval food plants and was able to recall when larvae first appeared in his garden and David Britton, who provided some additional phe and helpful comments on an earlier raft. References Common, I.F.B. and Waterhouse, D.F. (1981). ‘Butterflies of Australia, 2nd ed.’. (Angus and Robertson: Sydney). Crosby, D.F. (1990). The Orange Palmdart Cephrenes augiades sperthias (Felder) (Lepiodoptera: Hesperiidae) in Victoria. Victorian Entomologist 20, 59 -60. Crosby, D.F. (1994). New Distribution and Food Plant Records for Some Victorian Butterflies (Lepidoptera: Hesperioidea, Papilionoidea). Australian Entomologist 21, 65-68. Dunn, K, L. (1995). Notes on the Biology and New Larval Hosts of Cephrenes (Lepidoptera: Hesperiidae) Part II, Victorian Entomologist 25, 3-12. Hutchison, M. (1983), Occurrence of Cephrenes augiades sperthias (Orange Palmdart Butterfly) in Perth. Western Australian Naturalist 15, 125-126. McCubbin, C. (1971). ‘Australian Butterflies’, (Thomas Nelson: Melbourne). Vale Joan Harry Joan Harry died on Saturday, October 17, 1998. She suffered from a brain tumour over a nine year period. When Marie Allender retired as General Excursion Secretary in February, 1990, Joan took over the job and served for about six months, when she had to stop for her first brain tumour operation. Dorothy Mahler then acted temporari- ly as Acting Excursion Secretary for Joan. However, as Joan convalesced over an extended period, she was unable to resume the position, In late 1991, Joan was feeling well enough to serve as Chairperson of the Botany Group, after Margaret Potter who had stepped down after many years in that position, Joan held that position for three years until Tom May (present FNCV President) was elected Botany Group Chairperson in December 1994. Joan was always supportive of working bees, often acting as tea/coffee lady in the kitchen, especially when we were folding the newsletter or after meetings in the evenings at the Hall. She was always a dedicated and helpful club member until she had to drop out over a year ago because of illness. Over the years she also attended most of the excursions and tours organized by the club. Noel Schleiger represented the FNCV at her funeral on Wednesday, October 21, 1998. The Club extends its sympathy to husband Graeme, and family. 18 Noel Schleiger and Dorothy Mahler The Victorian Naturalist Contributions A Fauna Survey of Riparian and Other Revegetation Sites in Eltham, Victoria Peter Homan! Abstract A fauna survey of revegetation sites was carried out over a six-month period in 1996 in Eltham, a north-east suburb of Melbourne with eleven mammals, fifty-six birds, eight reptiles and five amphib- ians being recorded. Results of the study showed an absence of small terrestrial native mammals and invasion of revegetated areas by introduced species. (The Victorian Naturalist, 116 (1), 1999, 19-25), Introduction Lenister Farm is located in Homestead Road, Eltham, approximately 28 kms north-east of Melbourne Central, within the Melbourne metropolitan area, on the south- ern edge of Eltham Lower Park. near the junction of the Yarra River and Diamond Creek. The property was originally a dairy farm, but is now owned by the Shire of Nillumbik and is leased to PEEC Services Inc., a private training provider. For some years PEEC Services (formally Skill Seekers) has conducted horticultural training at the farm and, since April 1993, has been involved in a long term riparian revegetation project along Diamond Creek and the Yarra River in conjunction with the Shire of Nillumbik. Revegetation work has also been carried out by Friends of Diamond Creek, a local volunteer group. while other habitat enhancement work has also been completed including the removal of woody weeds from Hohnes Hill, a small nature reserve of about 5 ha on the western edge of the study area. An indigenous plant nursery is also located at the farm and helps to pro- vide stock for the revegetation program, This survey was carried out to determine which species of mammals, birds, reptiles and amphibians now inhabit the general area around Lenister Farm and, in particular, the revegetation sites along Diamond Creek and the Yarra River and at Hohnes Hill (Fig. 1). Vegetation and topography The study area covers approximately 23 ha and is bounded by Main Road, Eltham to the north, Diamond Creek to the east, Yarra River and Homestead Road to the south and Jayson Avenue to the west. Much of the study area is on a flood plain at the junction of the two streams and also ' 8 Bayfield Drive, Eltham, Victoria 3095. Vol. 116 (1) 1999 includes several small gully systems and three small artificial wetlands, while the highest point is on Hohnes Hill, 60 m above sea level. A large artificial wetland has since been constructed on the flood plain beside the Yarra River. Eltham Lower Park includes two sports ovals, the Diamond Valley Miniature Railway and a pony club. A public walk- ing track leads along the two streams, which attracts large numbers of walkers, joggers and local residents walking dogs. Vegetation in the park includes remnant mature Candlebark Eucalyptus rubida, Yellow Box E. melliodora, Long-leaved Box E. goniocalyx and Narrow-leaved Peppermint E. radiata. Hollows are numerous amongst these mature trees. The riparian vegetation along Diamond Creek and the Yarra River includes Manna Gum Eucalyptus viminalis, Silver Wattle Acacia dealbata, with remnant stands of River Bottlebrush Callistemon sieberi, TRAPPING SITES CIDP PITFALL LINES O—O MAIN ROAD, BLTMAM, MINIATURE WAILWAY HOWNES f HOMESTEAD ROAD [OntsTeR PAIN py ot YARRA RIVER Fig. 1. Location of survey area and trapping sites. Melway Map 21, J11. 19 Contributions \ } ines Hill. Fig. 2. Grassy eucalypt woodland, Hol Tree Violet Hymenanthera dentata, Burgan Kunzea ericoides, Kangaroo Apple Solanum laciniatum, Dogwood Cassinia aculeata, Hop Goodenia Goodenia ovata, Spiny-headed Matrush Lomandra longif/o- lia and Poa ensiformis. All of these species have been used extensively in the revege- tation program along both streams. Unfortunately various introduced species have infested the riparian zone including Spider Wort Tradescantia fluminensis, Angled Onion Allium triquetrum, Blackberry Rubus procerus, Hawthorn Crataegus monogyna, Crack Willow Salix fragilis and Watsonia bulbillifera, Hohnes Hill Flora Reserve is an area of grassy woodland (Vig. 2) with Yellow Box E. melliodora, Long-leayed Box /2. gonio- calyx, Candlebark E. rubida, Red Stringybark /, macrorhyncha, Manna Gum /. viminalis, Burgan K. ericoides, Sweet Bursaria Bursaria spinosa, Golden Wattle Acacia pyenantha, Hedge Wattle A. paradoxa, Tree Violet, Cherry Ballart Exocarpus cupressiformis and Clematis microphylla, Grasses include Tussock Grass Poa sieberiana, Wallaby Grass Danthonia spp. and a range of introduced grasses that have invaded large areas of the reserve, Various native orchids including Greenhoods and Spider Orchids persist in reasonable numbers in the southern end of Hohnes Hill. Many of the Eucalypts are mature with numerous hollows. Survey methods The survey was conducted between May and November 1996, from Monday to Friday of each week, Survey methods included: cage trapping (Wirelainers standard bandicoot trap) placed on the ground and in trees; Elliott 20 trapping (Type A); pitfall trapping (plastic buckets, 380 mm in depth and 285 mm in diameter); an artificial nest box program and general observation and collection. Baits consisted of oats, peanut butter, honey and vanilla essence. Artificial shel- ters were also used to survey amphibians, These were made from 23 mm treated pine and measured 600 mm * 400 mm and were raised off the ground by slats of pine of the same thickness along three edges, there- fore allowing frogs to move under the shel- ter from one side. These shelters were placed around several wetlands with the entrance facing the water and were turned over for inspection daily. Only a minimal amount of spotlighting was carried out (a total of six spotlight hours) and general observation and collec- tion took place on a daily basis. Trapping took place on Monday, Tuesday and Wednesday nights only. On various occasions trapping, was not under- taken due to inclement weather and the water level in both streams. Trapping along the Yarra River and Diamond Creek took place in a narrow riparian corridor between each stream and the public walk- ing track (Fig. 1). Because much of the area is used extensively by the public, traps were set randomly and in a somewhat clandestine fashion, so as to avoid possible theft or interference with equipment, Consequently on some nights only small numbers of traps were set. Overall 707 trap-nights and 293 pit- nights were completed. Table | shows the trapping methods used and effort for each section of the study area. Artificial nest boxes were designed to survey the presence of Sugar Gliders in the area and to provide breeding records for small parrots. Four Sugar Glider boxes were placed in Hohnes Hill and seven were placed along Diamond Creek. Five small- parrot boxes were placed in the southern section of Eltham Lower Park and along Diamond Creek, All nest boxes were constructed of 19 mm exterior grade ply with an internal diameter of 240 mm and a depth of 420 mm. Entrance holes, which were 50 mm for Sugar Gliders and 70 mm for small par- rots, were 300 mm above the floor. The Victorian Naturalist Contributions Table 1. Trap-nights Pit-nights Total Cage traps Cage traps Elliott traps on ground in trees on ground Hohnes Hill nil 23 59 178 260 Diamond Creek 182 nil 54 80. 316 Yarra River 320 nil 69 35 424 All Sections 502 23 182 293 1000 Results 3. Glider, Sugar Petaurus breviceps, S. Since intensive surveys such as this are unusual, particularly within the metropoli- tan areas of large cities. the results of this survey therefore give a fair indication of those species that may exist in other urban areas with suitable habitat, especially those areas that have undergone revegetation projects. A total of eighty vertebrate species were recorded during the survey. These were made up of eleven mammals (five euther- ian, five marsupial, one monotreme: seven native, four introduced) fifty-six birds (fifty-one native, five introduced), eight reptiles and five amphibians. Fourteen species of birds were also recorded as breeding in the study area. Because the bulk of the survey took place during the winter months no harp-trapping for insec- tivorous bats took place and a number of birds that would be expected to visit areas such as this during the warmer months were also not recorded. Cogger (1996), Menkhorst (1995) and Simpson and Day (1996) were used for species names. Survey codes are the same as used by the Atlas of Victorian Wildlife: B Breeding confirmed (birds: nest with eggs, or dependent young out of nest) Seen Heard Trapped and released Indirect evidence eg. Tracks or traces, including scats, burrows, diggings. —a6yn Mammals 1. Bat, White-striped Freetail Tadarida australis, H. One individual was heard flying above trees along Diamond Creek whilst spotlighting on 8/10/96. 2. Fox, Red Canis vulpes, S. One sick/injured individual was seen near Hohnes Hill on 4/6/96 and subsequently one, presumably it. was found dead on 5/6/96. Vol. 116 (1) 1999 Three individuals were disturbed from a stag at Hohnes Hill on 15/5/96. No ani- mals were captured during trapping in trees at Hohnes Hill and none were seen during spotlighting on 8/10/96. Nest boxes were not used by this species dur- ing the survey. 4. Mouse, House, Mus musculus, T. Twenty-one house mice were captured in Elliott traps, seventeen in the oldest reveg- etation site (1993) along the Yarra River, one in revegetating Poa ensiformis along Diamond Creek and three in grassy wood- land at Hohnes Hill. Two house mice were also caught in pitfall traps along the Yarra (capture rate 5.7%) The capture rate for Elliott traps along the Yarra River was 24.6%, along Diamond Creek was 1.8% and for Hohnes Hill was 5%, 5. Platypus Ornithorhynchus anatinus, S. Platypus were seen in the Yarra River at the same location near its junction with Diamond Creek on three occasions, at 2.55pm on 4/9/96, at 10.30am on 5/9/96 and at 11.00am on 23/10/96. 6.Possum, Common Brushtail Trichosurus yulpecula, 7. This was the most common native mammal encoun- tered during the survey. Fourteen individ- uals were caught in cage traps set on the ground along the Yarra River. Cage trap capture rate overall was 3.8% and along the Yarra River was 4.4%. At Hohnes Hill the capture rate in cage traps set in trees was 8.7%. However, other substan- tial indirect evidence occurred including scats and scratch marks on trees. Several animals were also seen during the day in hollows throughout the study area. Seven adults and two juveniles were seen dur- ing six spotlight hours on 8/10/96. 7.Possum, Common Ringtail, Pseudocheirus peregrinus, S, Many individuals of this species were seen in dreys during the day along both streams, 21 Contributions Fig. 3. Water Rat Hydromys chrysogaster cap- ture site on the Yarra River. ae however, none were captured in cage traps during the survey. Eight Ringtails were seen during six spotlight hours on 8/10/96. 8 Rabbit Oryctolagus cuniculus, S. Many individuals were seen in all parts of the study area, with a marked reduc- tion in sightings during the second half of the study. A number of dead animals were found during September and October. 9. Rat, Black Rattus rattus, T. This was the most common terrestrial mammal caught amongst the riparian vegetation along both streams. Twenty individuals were caught along the Yarra River, and thirteen along Diamond Creek. Overall capture rate for these sites was 5.9%, with 6.3% for the Yarra River and 7% for Diamond Creek. Individuals were caught in both degraded areas and revegetated sites. No captures occurred at Hohnes Hill. 10. Rat, Water Hydromys chrysogaster, T. This was the only native rodent record- ed during the survey. Thirteen individu- als, six males and seven females, were caught in cage traps set along the Yarra River (Fig. 3) and Diamond Creek. Eleven animals were caught along the Yarra River adjacent to the oldest revege- tation site, and two animals were caught along Diamond Creek near remnant Poa ensiformis and Callistemon sieberi. The majority of captures along the Yarra (nine) occurred in late June and early July, with the remaining two in late September. The two captures along Diamond Creek took place in late August, Overall capture rate was 2.8%, with 3.4% for the Yarra River, and 1% for Diamond 22 Creek. Weight for males varied from 630 g to 1060 g (average 786 g) and for females, from 650 g to a pregnant animal (caught 25/9/96) weighing 1000 g (aver- age 747 g). 11.Wombat, Common Vombatus ursi- nus, J, No Wombats were seen during the study, however, substantial indirect evidence was found regularly in the form of active burrows, scratchings and scats. Birds Table 2 lists the birds that were recorded in the study area, Reptiles 1. Lizard, Blotched Blue-Tongued Tiliqua nigrolutea, S. One individual was found at Hohnes Hill on 1/8/96. 2, Lizard, Eastern Blue-Tongued Tiliqua scincoides, S. One individual was found near Diamond Creek on 28/8/96. 3. Skink, Garden Lampropholis guichenoti, 7. This was the most com- mon and widespread reptile encountered during the study. Individuals were sight- ed during each month of the survey, in particular on sunny days. Twelve Garden Skinks were captured in pitfall traps, five at Hohnes Hill (capture rate, 2.8%), five along Diamond Creek (capture rate, 6%) and two along the Yarra River (capture rate, 6%). 4. Skink, Water Eulamprus sp., S. One individual was seen by the Yarra River on 16/9/96 and two along Diamond Creek on 8/10/96, 5. Skink, Weasel Saproscincus musteli- nus, §. Three found under heavy leaf lit- ter amongst Spider Wort along Diamond Creek, one on 15/5/96 and two on 2/7/96, No individuals of this species were cap- tured in pitfall traps. 6. Snake, Eastern Brown Pseudonaja textilis, S. One individual seen at Hohnes Hill on 11/10/96. 7. Snake, Eastern Tiger Notechis scuta- tus, S. One individual seen near farm on 16/10/96. 8. Turtle, Eastern Snake-necked Chelodina longicollis, §. One seen in Diamond Creek on 7/11/96 and three more in Diamond Creek on 8/11/96. The Victorian Naturalist Table 2, Bird species recorded at the study area, Blackbird. Common Turdus merula, 8, B Bronzewing, Common Phaps chalcoptera, $ Butcherbird, Grey Cracticus torquaius, 8, B Cockatoo, Yellow-tailed Black Calyptorhynchus funereus, 8 Cockatoo, Gang-gang Callocephation fimbriatum, S Cockatoo, Sulphur-crested Cacatua galerita, S Corella, Long-billed Cacatua tenuirostris, S Cormorant, Little Pied Phalacrocorax melanoleucos, § Cormorant, Great (Black) Phalacrocorax carbo, $ Cormorant, Little Black Phalacrocorax sulcirostris, 8 Cuckoo, Fan-tailed Cuculus flabelliformis, S Cuckoo-shrike, Black-faced Coracina novaehol- landiae, S Currawong, Pied Strepera graculina, S Currawong, Grey Strepera versicolor, S Darter Anhinga melanogaster, § Duck, Pacific Black 4nas superciliosa, 8 Duck, Australian Wood (Maned) Chenonetta jubata, 8, B Fairy-wren, Superb Malurus cyaneus, S Fantail, Grey Rhipidura fuliginosa, Frogmouth, Tawny Podargus strigoides, 8 Galah Eolophus (Cacatua) roseicapilla, S Goshawk, Brown Accipiter fasciatus, § Heron, White-faced Egretta (Ardea) novaehol- landiae, 8, B Heron, Rufous Night Nycticorax caledonicus, S Ibis, Australian White (Sacred Ibis) Threskiornis molucca (T. aethiopica), 8 Amphibians 1. Frog, Brown Tree Litoria ewingi, S. Several individuals were found amongst plant pots at nursery adjacent to the farm. One also found at new wetland at Miniature Railway on 17/9/96. 2. Frog, Eastern Banjo Limnodynastes dumerilii, 7. Several individuals found near farm and others heard calling on numerous occasions in several man-made and natural wetland areas. Six Eastern Banjo Frogs were captured in pitfall traps at Hohnes Hill (capture rate, 3.3%), One was also found under an artificial amphibian shelter on 2/10/1996. 3. Frog, Spotted Grass Limnodynastes tasmaniensis, 7, Two individuals were found in new wetland near Diamond Creek on 6/6/96, and one was caught in a pitfall trap at Hohnes Hill on 4/9/96 (cap- ture rate, 0.5%). 4, Frog, Verreaux’s Tree Litoria ver- reauxii, S. One individual found near the farm on 28/8/96. 5. Froglet, Common Eastern Crinia sig- nifera, S. This species was the most Vol. 116 (1) 1999 Contributions Ibis, Straw-necked Threskiornis spinicollis, 8 Kingfisher, Azure Alcedo azurea, $ Kingfisher, Sacred Todiramphus sanctus. 8 Kite. Black-shouldered Elanus axillaris, S Kookaburra, Laughing Dacelo novaeguineae, S Lapwing, Masked Vanellus miles, S Lorikeet, Rainbow Trichoglossus haematodus, S, B Magpie, Australian Gynmorhina tibicen, S, B Magpie-lark Grallina cyanoleuca, 8, B Miner, Bell Manorina melanophrys, H Miner, Noisy Manorina melanocephala, 8, B Moorhen, Dusky Gallinula tenebrosa, S Myna, Common Acridotheres tristis, 8, B Oriole, Olive-backed Oriolus sagittatus, S Pardalote, Spotted Pardalotus punctatus, S Parrot. Australian King Alisterus scapularis, § Parrot, Red-rumped Psephotus haematonotus, S Raven, Australian Corvus coronoides, 8 Rosella, Crimson Platycercus elegans, S Rosella, Eastern Platveercus eximius, 8, B Scrubwren, White-browed Sericornis frontalis, S, B Shrike-thrush, Grey Colluricincla harmonica, H Starling, Common Sturnus vulgaris, 8, B Swallow, Welcome Hirundo neoxena, § Teal, Chestnut 4nas castanea, § Thornbill, Brown Acanthiza pusilla, S, B Thrush, Song 7urdus philomelos, S Turtle-Dove, Spotted Sireptopelia chinensis, S, B Wagtail, Willie Rhipidura leucophrys, 8 Wattlebird, Red Anthochaera carunculata, S Whistler. Golden Pachycephala pectoralis, S common amphibian encountered during the study, and readily occupied the artifi- cial amphibian shelters placed around wetlands. Common Eastern Froglets were heard calling on many occasions in all wetland areas and individuals were found covering the various colour ranges. Nest box program results Hohnes Hill: Four nest boxes designed for sugar gliders were placed at this site on 3/6/96. They were first checked on 1/7/96 and were unoccupied, however, each entrance hole had been marked. They were checked again on 8/10/96 and each box was found to contain a nest of the Common Starling. Diamond Creek and Eltham Lower Park: Twelve nest boxes were placed in these areas, four on 5/6/96, four on 1/8/96 and four on 19/8/96, Five of these boxes were designed for small parrots and seven for sugar gliders. All twelve boxes were checked on 9/10/96 and seven were found to contain Starling nests, one contained the nest of a Common Mynah, one contained 23 Contributions the nest of an Eastern Rosella (one egg) and three were unoccupied. Discussion The study site is typical of areas very close to suburban housing that have become heavily degraded by a range of invasive weeds. Much of the original understorey, shrub layer and ground cover has disappeared and in most of the study area only the tree cover remains. The avifauna in the area is dominated by the aggressive Noisy Miner. Dr. Douglas Dow, Queensland University (Pizzey 1991), found the Noisy Miner’s unpleasant trait of directing loud. concerted aggres- sion against almost every other bird unfor- tunate enough to enter its territory makes it unique among birds and possibly among all known animals. Noisy Miners were seen to chase and harass nearly every other species observed during the survey, As with other areas dominated by this species, no small honeyeaters were recorded during the study. The White-plumed Honeyeater. a species common throughout Melbourne, was not seen during the study, This species is also absent from other parts of Eltham where Noisy Miners occur in numbers. Small birds such as the Superb Fairy-wren and the White-browed Scrubwren were confined to the few areas with thick under- growth along the banks of the two streams. The Rufous Whistler Pachycephala rufiventris, a species that would be expect- ed to arrive in areas such as this during early spring (Simpson and Day 1996). was not recorded during the study. The oldest revegetation site (1993) along the Yarra River is inhabited by the Black Rat, House Mouse and Common Wombat, A drey, occupied by a ringtail possum, was also found at this site in an old Tree Violet and Superb Fairy-wrens. White-browed Scrubwrens and Brown Thornbills were often seen at this location. Several Noisy Miner nests and one Blackbird nest were found in revegetated areas and Brown Thornbills with dependant young were observed in a revegetation area along Diamond Creek. Jute-matting has been used extensively to suppress weeds in the revegetation sites and many Garden Skinks were found under this material, however, Weasel Skinks were only found under 24 heavy litter amongst Spider Wort, and none were found in the revegetation areas. Water Skinks were observed close to both streams at two sites, one degraded and one rehabilitated. There were no amphibians recorded for any of the riparian revegeta- tion sites, however, Eastern Banjo Frogs, Spotted Grass Frogs, Common Eastern Froglets and Brown Tree Frogs were found in, and heard calling at, artificial wetlands. No small terrestrial native mammals were recorded for the study area and the only native rodent recorded was the aqual- ic Water Rat. The introduced Brown Rat Rattus norvegicus was not found during the survey. On several occasions Koalas Phascolarctos cinereus were observed in Manna Gum on the Templestowe (south) side of the Yarra River, however, none were seen in the study area. No evidence of Echidnas Tachyglossus aculeatus was found during the survey, although this species has been recorded in other parts of Eltham (Menkhorst 1995). The large number of hollows in the area are used extensively by the introduced Common Mynah and English Starling. Several trees and hollow limbs fell during the time of the survey, many of which con- tained disused Mynah nests constructed with plastic and other man-made materials, items commonly used as nesting material by this species (Beruldsen 1980). Starlings were seen to enter several hollows during the breeding season and their dominance of the artificial nest boxes was overwhelm- ing. European bees were also seen to occu- py several hollows. However. all the par- rots (except the Yellow-Tailed Black Cockatoo) observed during the survey were seen entering hollows at various times, but breeding could only be con- firmed for the Eastern Rosella (nest box) and the Rainbow Lorikeet (dependant young out of nest at Hohnes Hill), Acknowledgements The following people assisted with the survey: Jan Heald, Fred Kartnig, Mark Korttinen, Steven Milne, Wayne Sibbing, Jason Stevens and Janine Werner, Funding for the project was provided by the Department of Employment, Education, Training and Youth Affairs under the New Work Opportunities Program. The survey work was carried out under Flora and Fauna permit number RP-96-006 issued by the Department of Natural Resources and The Victorian Naturalist Environment. The Shire of Nillumbik. as the local land manager, provided important advice and assistance. Equipment for pitfall traps was lent by the Fauna Survey Group, FNCV. and seyeral members of the group including Ray White, Russell Thompson and Ray Gibson pro- vided valuable advice. References Adams, G. (1980). “Birdscaping Your Garden’. (Rigby: Sydney). Beruldsen, G. (1980). “A Field Guide to Nests and Eges of Australian Birds’. (Rigby: Sydney). Cogger, H.G. (1996). “Reptiles & Amphibians of Australia’. (Reed: Port Melboume), Hero, J., Littlejohn, M. and Marantelli, G. (1991), “Frogwatch Field Guide to Victorian Frogs’. (Department of Conservation & Environment: Melbourne). Book Review Littlejohn, M, (1987). ‘Calls of Victorian Frogs’. (Department of Zoology: University of Melbourne). Melway Greater Melbourne. (1997). Edition 25 (Melway Publishing Pty Ltd: Glen Iris). Menkhorst, P_ (1995), “Mammals of Victoria’, (Oxford University Press; South Melbourne). Pizzey, G. (1991), ‘A Garden of Birds’. (Collins Angus & Robertson: North Ryde) Simpson, K. and Day, N, (1996). ‘Field Guide to the Birds of Australia’. (Penguin Books: Ringwood). Strahan, R. (1995). ‘The Mammals of Australia’. (Reed Books: Chatswood). ‘Nest Boxes for Wildlife’. Land for Wildlife: Note No. 14, October 1991, (Department of Conservation and Environment/Bird Observers Club). ‘The Nest Box-Making a Home for the Little Aussie Battlers’. (Board of Works/Healesville Sanctuary. Education Service). Climate Change 1995 — Impacts, Adaptations and Mitigation of Climate Change: Scientific-Technical Analyses Editors Robert T. Watson, Marufu C. Zingowerd, Richard H. Moss and David J. Dokken Publisher; Cambridge University Press, Melbourne. Paperback, 880 pp. ISBN 0521564379. RRP $57.95 This comprehensive volume provides a roadmap for navigating the sometimes divisive public debate about the conse- quences of climate change. It reviews what is known, unknown, uncertain and contro- versial about the potential impacts of cli- mate change and finds that: * the composition and geographic distribu- tion of many ecosystems will shift; * some regions, especially in the tropics and subtropics, may suffer significant adverse consequences for food security, even though the effects of climate change on global food production may prove small to moderate; * there could be an increase in a wide range of human diseases, including mor- tality, and illness due to heat waves and extreme weather events, extensions in the potential transmission of vector-borne diseases, such as malaria, and regional declines in nutritional status; * some countries will face threats to sus- tainable development from losses of human habitat due to sea-level rise, reductions in water quality and quantity. and disruptions from extreme events; * technological advances have increased Vol. 116 (1) 1999 the range of adaptation and mitigation options, and offer exciting opportunities for reducing emissions, but are not cur- rently available in all regions of the world. This volume will be of great value to decision-makers, the scientific community and students. The Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) was set up jointly by the World Meteorological Organisation and the United Nations Environment Program to provide an authoritative international statement of scientific opinion on climate change. The IPCC prepared its first comprehensive assessment report in 1990, with subsequent supplementary reports in 1992 and 1994. Climate Change 1995 is the first full sequel to the original assess- ment. Several hundred scientists and con- tributors, recognised internationally as experts in their fields, were brought togeth- er in three working groups to assess cli- mate change for this Second Assessment Report. During drafting, the chapters were exposed to extensive review by many other independent experts. and subjected to full governmental reviews. 25 Contributions A List of Native Mammals of Wilsons Promontory National Park Peter Menkhorst! and John Seebeck’ This list of native mammal species recorded from Wilsons Promontory National Park is derived principally from the Atlas of Victorian Wildlife, a database maintained by the Department of Natural Resources and Environment, Victoria, and which was used to pre- pare the distribution maps and species accounts in Mammals of Victoria (Menkhorst 1995). Much of the information concerning the native mammals of Wilsons Promontory was gathered during surveys carried out by the Department of Natural Resources and Environment (under earlier names) during the 1970s, but it has been enhanced by recent additions from incidental sightings and special surveys. The bat fauna is poorly docu- mented and further survey is warranted. The list is arranged as follows: vernacular name; scientific name: year of most recent record in the Atlas; our subjective assessment of the animal’s status at Wilsons Promontory and comments. Details of introduced mammals found at Wilsons Promontory are provided by Seebeck and Mansergh (1998). References Menkhorst, P.W. (ed,) (1995), ‘Mammals of Victoria; Distribution, ecology and conservation’, (Oxford University Press: Melbourne). Seebeck, J.H. and Mansergh, I.M. (1998). Mammals introduced to Wilsons Promontory. The Victorian Naturalist 115, 350-356. Species Most Status Comments Vernacular name/ Scientific name recent record MONOTREMATA Short-beaked Echidna 7achyglossus 1998 Common aculeatus Platypus Ornithorhynchus anatinus ca1940 Presence doubtful Only records are literature reports MARSUPIALIA Dasyuridae Agile Antechinus Antechinus agilis 1998 Common Formerly Brown Antechinus A, stuartii Swamp Antechinus 4. minimus 1997 Locally common Abundant on Great Glennie and Rabbit Islands; unconfirmed reports from Kanowna Island Dusky Antechinus 4. swainsonii 1996 Uncommon Spot-tailed Quoll Dasyurus maculatus Presence unconfirmed Literature records only White-footed Dunnart Sminthopsis 1992 Uncommon leucopus Peramelidae Southern Brown Bandicoot /soodon 1994 Uncommon obesulus Long-nosed Bandicoot Perameles 1997 Rare nasuta Phalangeridae Common Brushtail Possum 1997 Locally common Trichosurus vulpecula Mountain Brushtail Possum 1974 Presence unconfirmed Single sight record only T. caninus Pseudocheiridae Common Ringtail Possum 1998 Common Pseudocheirus peregrinus ' Flora and Fauna Program, Department of Natural Resources and Environment, 4/250 Victoria Parade, East Melbourne 3002. 26 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions Petauridae Sugar Glider Petaurus breviceps Acrobatidae Feathertail Glider Acrobates pygmaeus Burramyidae nanus Phascolarctidae Koala Phascolarctos cinereus Vombatidae Common Wombat Vombatus ursinus Potoroidae Long-nosed Potoroo Potorous tridactylus Macropodidae Eastern Grey Kangaroo Macropus giganteus Tasmanian Pademelon 7hylogale billardierii Black Wallaby Wallabia bicolor CHIROPTERA Molossidae White-striped Freetail Bat Tadarida australis Vespertilionidae Chocolate Wattled Bat Chalinolobus morio Common Bent-wing Bat Miniopteris schreibersii Lesser Long-eared Bat Nyctophilus geoffroyi Gould’s Long-eared Bat N. gouldi Large Forest Bat Vespadelus darlingtoni Southern Forest Bat V. regulus Little Forest Bat V. vulturnus RODENTIA Bush Rat Rattus fuscipes Swamp Rat R. lutreolus Water Rat Hydromys chrysogaster Broad-toothed Rat Mastacomys fuscus New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae CANIDAE Dingo Canis latrans OTARIIDAE Australian Fur Seal Arctocephalus pusillus PHOCIDAE Leopard Seal Hydrurga leptonyx Eastern Pygmy-possum Cercartetus 1998 1986 1996 1995 1998 1998 1998 ca 1850 1998 1998 1997 1971 1997 1983 1990 1997 1997 1998 1997 1998 1990 1996 1998 1996 Rare Uncommon Locally common Uncommon Common Uncommon Locally common Extinct Common Uncommon Uncertain status Rare Common Uncertain status Uncertain status Uncertain status Uncertain status Common Locally common Rare Rare Rare, but may be locally common Probably extinct Common Rare visitor ] Significant remnant population NOT derived from translocated stock Wholly extinct in Victoria Only a single record Animals on Great Glennie Island very large One of only four Victorian populations Replaced by feral Dog, Canis familiaris One of four Victorian breeding colonies occurs on Kanowna Island Vol. 116 (1) 1999 27 Letters to the Editor The following letter was received from a member, Nick Romanowski, in reponse to an article in The Victorian Naturalist 115 (2). 1998. 56-62 by Golam Kibria and co-authors, The paper reviewed the biology and aquaculture of Silver Perch Bidyanus bidyanus. Golam Kibria’s response follows Nick’s letter. The editorial policy of The Victorian Naturalist is to publish a wide-range of papers touching on all aspects of natural history. We are always interested to receive comments from members on the content of the journal. Editor Dear Editor What is an article on aquaculture of Silver Perch Bidyanus bidyanus (Kibria et al. 1998) doing in The Victorian Naturalist? It could be justified if it really was a summa- ry of the biology of this species, but like many aquaculture articles this one deals almost entirely with growth responses under highly unnatural conditions — from spawning induced by injection of hor- mones, to growth rates on artificial diets at stocking rates far in excess of anything ever recorded in the wild. What little mention is made of natural history in the article does not even report earlier work accurately, For example. ‘competition for food from introduced cyprinids, and predation by English Perch Perca fluviatilis, have probably [my ital- ics] played a part in [Silver Perch] decline” (Cadwallader and Backhouse 1983) remains an unsubstantiated, though plausi- ble, guess. However. this has been com- pletely rephrased as ‘its population has been greatly reduced due to competition from introduced cyprinids [and] predation by the English Perch’, The suggestion that aquaculture might have a role to play in rehabilitation of this species is spurious. All domesticated ani- mals change both genetically and behav- iourally from wild populations, although such changes may not be obvious in the first few captive generations. In the case of Silver Perch, many captive populations are derived from the original aquaculture stocks devel- oped in southern NSW around forty years ago (Lake 1967). These were bred from small initial populations collected from a rel- atively small part of the range of the species, ideal conditions for initiating genetic drift. If overseas aquaculture stocks of long standing are any guide, Silver Perch will gradually change in appearance from wild fish, becoming fleshier and less active. among other changes. Compare the thick- 28 bodied, almost scale-less Mirror Carp Cyprinus carpio to any wild fish of the same species for an example of changes under domestication in less than a century, for just one obvious example. All documented captive breeding pro- grams for fishes, whether aquaculture-ori- ented or not, have started from a very limit- ed genetic base — often as few as a half- dozen adult fish (Romanowski 1996: Caughey et al. 1990), The stocks produced by such programs are already a long way from being representative of their species, and reintroducing their offspring into natur- al waters on a large scale will only dilute whatever variability still exists in wild pop- ulations. This can also be a way to release new disease strains such as the piscine tuberculosis now common in probably all captive-bred Australian and New Guinea Rainbowfishes (Mdelanotaenia, Glossolepis and Chilatherina) (Tappin 1998). The most irritating aspect of the article in question is that it is not an unbiased appraisal of the future of Silver Perch in aquaculture at all, but a selective promo- tion of the species. A close look through the apparently exhaustive reference list shows that the authors have omitted any that don*t support their contention that “demand to cultivate the species is increas- ing both in Australia and in nearby Asia’. Silver Perch is certainly the best prospect available for Australian freshwaters, unless We are prepared to take the potentially dis- astrous risks with introduced fish that have already destroyed a variety of indigenous fisheries overseas. However, Ihave long warned (Romanowski 1994) that Silver Perch would not be so readily accepted overseas as its promoters would have us believe. More recent information from Taiwan (Walker 1996) makes it plain that the Taiwanese have already rejected this as a quality fish, with production there falling The Victorian Naturalist from a peak of 500 tonnes in 1994, to 100 tonnes in 1995, Prices of around $5 per kilogram at the time make it clear that this is regarded as a middle-quality fish only, and that acceptance was poor against the wide variety of comparably priced species already available there. Other obvious biases in the article include a claim that Silver Perch ‘represent the main endemic freshwater aquaculture industry in Australia’. With a peak produc- tion of around 50 tonnes for the entire country in 1994/1995 (Kibria et a/., 1998), this seems insufficient to compete with the 300 plus tonnes of freshwater crayfish pro- duced in Western Australia alone (O'Sullivan 1995) in approximately the same time span. There have been some excellent articles on the biology of native fishes in The Victorian Naturalist over the years, and | would certainly like to see more of them. However, | don’t feel that aquaculture adds anything of value to a natural history mag- azine. If the word ‘Biology’ had been taken out of the title “Biology and Aquaculture of Silver Perch’ it would have been a more accurate statement of what it was really about, and also made it clear Letters to the Editor where it really belongs — in an aquaculture magazine. All the best Nick Romanowski References Cadwallader, P.L. and Backhouse, G.N. (1983). ‘A guide to the Freshwater Fish of Victoria’. (Victorian Government Printing Office: Melbourne). Caughey, A., Hume, S. and Wattam, A, (1990). Melanoataenia eachamensis — History and Management of the Captive Stocks. Fishes of Sahul 6 (1), 241-247. Kibria, G,, Nugegoda, N., Faiclough, R. and Lam, P- (1998), Biology and Aquaculture of Silver Perch, Bidyanus bidyanus (Teraponidae): A Review. The Victorian Naturalist 115 (2), 56-62. Lake, J.S, (1967). ‘Freshwater fish of the Murray- Darling River System’, State Fisheries of New South Wales Research Bulletin 7 O'Sullivan, D. (1995), Yabby enhancement to Power Further Production in the West’. Ausfasia Aquaculture 9 (5), 10-12. Romanowski, N. (1994). ‘Farming in Ponds and Dams: an Introduction to Freshwater Aquaculture in Australia’. (Melbourne: Lothian Books). Romanowski, N. (1996). Fishes for Victorian Wetlands and Dams Part 3. Wetland Ways, Newsletter of the Victorian Wetland Trust 8 (4)- Tappin, A-R, (1998), TB or not TB — That is the Question! Australia New Guinea Fishes Association Bulletin 35 (February) 1-5, Walker, T. (1996). Sustainability and Family Farms: Take-home lessons for Silver Perch. Austasia Aquaculture 10 (1) 5-9. Dear Editor Response to Nick Romanowski regarding our review paper * Biology and aquaculture of Silver Perch — A review’ (Kibria et al. 1998). This is a review paper of an Australian native fish, Silver Perch Bidyanus bidyanus based on published information of the species. The paper reviewed “biology and aquaculture of Silver Perch’ in the context of its natural history, natural habitats, biol- ogy, natural food and feeding habits. aqua- culture and pollution potential. The review could be of interest to a wide of range of readers from naturalists to conservationists, aquaculturists, biologists and environmen- talists. This paper was refereed and the summary of referee's comments may reflect the intention of the review: ‘the paper is a comprehensive review of the cur- rent status of Silver Perch in terms of its known biology, conservation status and aquaculture’. Regarding the comments of Nick Romanowski about the paper, we would like to submit the following: Vol. 116 (1) 1999 1. Causes of decline: we have combined the three main reasons for the decline of the Silver Perch population; (a) competi- tion for food from introduced cyprinids, (b) predation by the English Perch and (c) the construction of dams that has prevent- ed upstream migration, affecting the repro- ductive success. However, the last and most important point, which is the main cause of decline of Silver Perch popula- tions in the wild, has been omitted. 2. Rehabilitation through aquaculture is spurious?: This statement is incorrect. Fisheries and aquaculture are interrelated disciplines, and aquaculture has been prac- tised world wide not only to increase fish production but also to enhance natura! fisheries through stocking with fry and fin- gerlings into dams, reservoirs and open waters. Rowland (1995) suggested that the 29 Letters to the Editor stocking of hatchery reared fingerlings can significantly enhance Australian native fish stocks (including Silver Perch) in nat- ural waters whose populations have declined due to modification of freshwater environments. To rehabilitate native fish, State Government hatcheries in NSW and Victoria annually produce fish for stocking public waterways for both recreation and conservation purposes (Gooley and Rowland 1993). Furthermore, to establish and maintain recreational fisheries, NSW fisheries have so far stocked 11 million Silver Perch, Golden Perch and Murray Cod fingerlings into impoundments since 1976 (Rowland 1995). Additionally, fin- gerlings of native endangered Trout Cod (Maccullochella macquariensis) and Eastern Freshwater Cod (M. ike?) produced from hatchery were also stocked into waters where they had become extinct (Rowland 1995), However, it was men- tioned that aquaculture of Silver Perch is not a solution to rehabilitate the species, If aquaculture is not a solution, what are the solutions? Unfortunately there was no solu- tion given in the letter. If there are no mea- sures taken then the Silver Perch popula- tion will continue to decline in the wild and will soon reach the “endangered* category from the present *vulnerable’ category. Secondly, it is widely accepted that over- exploited and depleted fisheries can be rehabilitated through programs of artificial breeding, rearing and restocking in natural habitats (New 1991; Casvas 1995: Gjedrem 1997). The captive breeding pro- grams are useful in conservation of aquatic Organisms, in particular commercial species, since artificial breeding creates the opportunity to preserve ova or embryos (cryopreservation) and the establishment of gene banks for future use. Therefore these programs can be the basis for main- taining biodiversity of aquatic organisms that are most threatened by the impact of human interventions (Pullin 1993; Purdom 1993). Furthermore. androgenesis tech- niques open the way for germ plasm main- tenance and the conservation of endangered fish species (Thorgaard 1986; Thorgarrd er al, 1990), Aquaculture has brought hope for the restoration and conservation of endangered fish species in many countries, for example, Reeves Shad in China, and 30 American Shad in USA, where induced breeding, and a program for the release of hatchery-produced larvae and juveniles has been carried out to supplement the stocks in rivers (Hanping 1996). Salmon larvae, fry. fingerlings., and smolts are stocked to restore populations destroyed by acid pre- cipitation and hydro-electric facilities in Norway (Torrissen e¢ a/. 1995). To increase the marine resources in Japan. several mil- lions of fry of Kuruma Shrimp Penaeus japonicus are released every year, whereas in the USA salmon enhancement programs have been based on hatchery production of juveniles (Pillay 1990). In short, aquacul- ture can play a significant role in conserva- tion of aquatic biodiversity and genetic resources (Anon 1998a). 3. About ‘initiating of genetic drift’: The high costs of keeping aquatic organisms encourage farmers to use small brood- stock populations which can lead to inbreeding and negative consequences for farmed or released stocks. This problem could arise due to lack of knowledge of the basic principles of the brood stock mainte- nance. However, the majority of aquatic species used in aquaculture today are little changed from their wild relatives with the possible exception of Common Carp and ornamental fish (Anon 1998b). Most hatchery populations of Rainbow Trout Salmo gairdnerii have approximately the same amount of genetic variation as natur- al populations (Allendorf and Utter 1979: Busack et a/, 1979). Despite all, there has been considerable progress on fish genetics to tackle the inbreeding problem. Research done overseas suggests that by maintaining effective breeding numbers (N,). it is pos- sible to avoid inbreeding or genetic drift problems (Douglas 1992), Por example. Ryman and Stahl (1980) suggested that N. could be at least 60 whereas the Food and Agriculture Organisation of the United Nations (FAO) recommends that N, be at least 50 for short term work and 500 for long term work (FAO/UNEP 1981). Allendorf and Ryman (1988) and Tave (1993) have given a specific N. of fish to be stocked in rivers and lakes for fisheries Management programs or ocean ranching. The following publications deal with N, of different species: Common, Chinese and Indian Major Carp (Jhingram and Pullin The Victorian Naturalist 1988), Tilapia (Tave 1986; Smitherman and Tave 1987: 1988) and Brown Trout (Ryman and Stahl 1980). 4, About ‘dilution of the wild population and disease concern’: There has been much development in the field of fish genetics for sustainable aquaculture and fisheries production. Through selective breeding or genetic transformation (trans- genic species) of fish and crustaceans, it has been possible to produce strain resis- tance to diseases and parasites (Gjedrem 1995; Bachere et a/. 1997). Therefore genetic transformation or selective breed- ing is also a solution to eliminate the spread of diseases at regional or interna- tional levels (Bachere ef al. 1997). Some selection experiments have shown genetic improvements for disease resistance against dropsy disease in Common Carp (llyassov 1987), furunculosis in brown trout (Cipriano and Heartwell 1986: Dunham 1987) and Brook Trout (Embody and Hayford 1925; Dunham 1987). Moreover. the creation of sterile transgenic aquaculture species will avoid any spread- ing of the strains in the natural environ- ment (Bachere ef al. 1997). Aquaculture creates the opportunity to produce triploids which are sterile fish that can be cultured on farms or used in natural resources man- agement. This process is an excellent way to utilise even exotic fishes for fisheries management while minimising adverse environmental impacts (Tave 1993). Triploids have been an important fish for stocking public waterways in the USA. For example. Striped Bass is one of the premier sport and commercial species in the USA. Fishing pressures, pollution, and destruction of spawning grounds and nurs- ery areas caused the dramatic depletion of many stocks of Striped Bass. Sterile Striped Bass (produced by crossing Striped Bass with White Bass) are being stocked in rivers and lakes around USA to help relieve the fishing pressure on Striped Bass and to help restore local fisheries, without adverse environmental consequences (Tave 1993). It has been reported recently that the Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation (CSIRO) is researching on a transgenic technology to develop aquaculture species which will complete their life cycle only on the farm. Vol. 116 (1) 1999 Letters to the Editor If the cultured stock escaped into the wild. their larvae and juveniles from wild spawning would die. This technology will improve fish production and will not pol- lute wild stocks (Anon 1998c). 5. About ‘most irritating aspect and selec- tive promotion of the species’: It appears from the above comment that we wrote the review to promote the species and perhaps we are running a fish selling business! This was further linked to an exhaustive refer- ence list. Silver Perch is a well known endemic freshwater species with a high aquaculture potential and does not need any promotional drive, and this fact was also acknowledged in the letter “Silver Perch is certainly the best prospect for aquaculture in Australia’, The impression was also expressed that we have omitted some references but the list of those refer- ences was not given. However, referees who reviewed the paper commented that “it is clear that the authors have conducted an extensive literature review’. 6. About ‘represent the main endemic fresh- water aquaculture production”: The first line of our paper clearly indicated that ‘the Silver Perch Bidyanus bidyanus is the most important fish contributing to major endem- ic freshwater aquaculture production (see the first line of the abstract in our paper). Secondly. production has been compared with Silver Perch and other native fish, but not with crustaceans (see Table 2 in Kibria et al. 1998). Table 1. Topics covered in Kibria ef al. (1998) and number of references quoted. Title Number of references quoted 1, General biology of silyer perch (a) history, natural habitats, status 10. (b) biological characteristics of silver perch 19 (c) natural food and feeding 7 36 2. Environment (a) salinity tolerance and distribution in salt water 4 (b) pollution potential 3 7 3. Aquaculture of silver perch (a) aquaculture of silver perch 15 (b) artificial breeding 3 (c) nutrition 10 (d) growth and production 10 38 31 Letters to the Editor 7. About ‘taking out the word biology from the title’: This paper was reviewed by referees, accepted by the editor and pub- lished and no suggestion. was put to us to change the title. Table 1 gives a break down of the areas covered and the number of references quoted. 8. Conclusion We hope from the above discussion, that it is clear that aquaculture has a significant role in natural stock enhancement, conser- vation of aquatic biodiversity and genetic resources, endangered species restoration. and aquatic resource management. Aquaculture is currently providing much needed support to recreational and com- mercial fishers. Our review on the “biology and aquaculture of Silver Perch’ dealt with a native species, a species which is vulner- able and is of interest to recreational and commercial fishers. The species is being stocked in Victoria's natural waterways with fingerlings produced from aquacul- ture in order to enhance the state’s fish- eries. Aquaculture is an infant industry in Australia and therefore much of its bene- fits may not be known. The primary threats to fish species are mainly due to destruction of habitat essen- tial for reproduction and recruitment and competition with introduced species. Genetic threats are lowest (Purdom 1993). We hope that research on fish genetics being carried out under different projects such as the International Network of Genetics in Aquaculture (INGA), Gene Banking and Conservation of Freshwater Fish Project (GBCFFP), Genetic Improvement of Farmed 7i/apia (GIFT), and locally by CSIRO will bring some more fruitful results for conservation of aquatic organisms, and sustainable aquatic food production. It should be mentioned here that genetically modified organisms (GMO) from aquaculture or their release for aquaculture and fisheries enhancement cannot be predicted with certainty, and in aquaculture and fisheries development, as as in agriculture and forestry (Pullin 1994), some loss of biodiversity is unavoidable, Therefore, it is necessary to assess risk and weigh potential benefits against environ- mental costs. We do agree with Pullin (1994) who stated that where GMO’s are 32 already the basis of important aquaculture and enhanced fisheries with no evidence of their having caused significant environ- mental harm, then it would be reasonable to pursue further development of such aquacullure or fisheries. We believe in ecologically sustainable development (ESD) as set out in the National strategy for ESD (NSESD) (Deville et al. 1995) and the same view has been reflected in the conclusion of our review. Thank you, Sincerely yours, Dr Golam Kibria References Allendorf, F. W_ and Ryman, N. (1988). Genetic man- agement of hatchery stocks. /n ‘Population Genetics and Fishery Management*. (Eds N. Ryman and F Utter). Washington Sea Grant Program. (University of Washington Press; Seattle, WA). Allendorf, F. W. and Utter, F. M. (1979). Population genetics, /n ‘Fish Physialogy’. Vol. VIL Bioenergetics and growth. (Eds W. S. Hoar, D. J. Randall, and J. R. Brett). (Academic Press: New York). Anon (1998a), “Saying biodiversity ; Characterising Tilapia Genetic Resources’ (International Centre for the Living Aquatic Resources Management (ICLARM). Philippines. Research Highlights ICLARM Internet News). Anon (1998b), The need for genetics in aquaculture. Agricultural and Aquatic Systems Program (AASP) Newsletter 3 (2) 5-7_ (Asian Institute of Technology (AIT): Thailand), Anon, (1998c). Genetic wins on farm and in the wild. Newsletter of the Fisheries Research & Development Corporation, 6 (2) 19. Bachere, E., Cedono, V,, Rousseau, C,, Destoumieux, D., Boulo, V.. Cadoret, J-P. and Mialhe, E. (1997), Transgenic crustaceans. World Aquaculture 28 (4) 51-55. Busack, C., Halliburton, R. and Gall, G. A. E. (1979). Electrophoretic variation and differentiation in four strains of domesticated rainbow trout (Salmo gaird- nerit), Canadian Journal of Genetics and Cytology 21, 81-94. Casvas, I, (1995). The status and outlook of world aqua- culture. Jn Symposium on Sustainable Aquaculture 1995, 11-14 June, Honolulu, Hawaii. 21 pp. Cipriano. R, O, and Heartwell. C. W, (1986) Transactions of the American Fisheries Society 55, 135-138, Deville, A.. Turpin, T. and Hill, S, (1995), ‘Australian research for ecologically sustainable development” Commissioned report no. 38. A report to the Australian Research Council on the level and nature of research relevant to ecologically sustainable devel- opment funded under ARC programs in 1993 and 1994. (Australian Government Publishing Service: Canberra), Douglas, T. (1992). “Genetics for fish hatchery man- agers’. (Chapman and Hall. Thomas Nelson Australia: South Melbourne), Dunham, R. A, (1987). American catfish breeding pro- grams /n Proceedings World Symposium on Selection, Hybridisation, and Genetic Engineering in Aquaculture, Bordeaux 27-30 May, 1986, Berlin. pp.407-416, The Victorian Naturalist Embody, G, C. and Hayford, C. D. (1925). The advan- tage of rearing brook trout fingerlings from selected breeders, Transactions American Fisheries Society 55, 135-148. FAO/UNEP (1981). ‘Conservation of genetic resources of fish : Problems and recommendations’. Report of the expert consultation of the genetic resources of fish, Rome, 9-13 June 1980, FAO Fisheries Technical Paper No. 217_ Gjedrem, R. (1995), “Genetic improvement of resis- tance to diseases and parasites in fish’. ICLARM Publication. Philippines, Gjedrem, R. (1997), Selective breeding to improve aqua- culture production. World Aquaculture 28 (1), 33-45. Gooley, G. and Rowland, S. (1993). Murray-Darling Finfish - Current developments and commercial potential, dustasia Aquaculture 7 (3), 35-36, Hanping, W_ (1996). Status and conservation of Reeves Shad resources in China. Naga, ICLARM Quarterly 19 (1), 20-22, Ilyassov, Y- 1. (1987). Genetic principles of fish selec- tion for disease resistance, Jn Proceedings World Symposium on Selection, Hybridization and genetic Engineering in Aquaculture, Bordeaux. pps 455-469_ Shingram, V. G, and Pullin, R. S. V. (1988). ‘A hatch- ery manual for the common, Chinese and Indian Carps’, ICLARM Studies and Reviews 11, 191p. Kibria, G., Nugegoda, D., Fairclough, R. and Lam, P, (1998), ‘Biology and aquaculture of Silver Perch Bidyanys bidyanus (Mitchell 1838) (Teraponidae) : A Review. 7he Victorian Naturalist 115 (2), 56-62. New, M. B. (1991). World aquaculture 22 (3), 28-49. Pillay, T. V. R. (1990). ‘Aquaculture - Principles and sae ee (Blackwell Science Pty Ltd, Victoria). Pullin, R. V, (1993). Ex-sirw conservation of the enentike of aquatic organisms. Naga, ICLARM Quarterly 16 (2-3), 15-17 Pullin, R. $. V, (1994). Exotic species and genetically Book Review modified organisms in aquaculture and enhanced fisheries : ICLARM’s position, Naga, |CLARM Quarterly 17 (4), 19-24. Purdom, C. E, (1993). ‘Genetics and fish breeding’ (Chapman & Hall Australia. Thomas Nelson Australia: South Melbourne), Rowland, S. J, (1995). ‘Stocking of freshwater fishes and policy in New South Wales’, Fisheries Management Paper. Fisheries Department of Western Australia. Translocation issues in Western Australia_ Proceedings of a seminar and workshop held on 26- 27 September 1994, pp. 50-61. Ryman, N. and Stahl, G. (1980), Genetic changes in hatchery stocks of brown trout (Sa/mo trutta), Canadian Journal of Fisheries and Aquatic Sciences 37, 82-87, Ryman, N. and Utter, F (1988) ‘Population genetics and fishery management’. Washington Sea Grant Program. (University of Washington Press: Seattle). Smitherman, R. O. And Tave, D, (1987). Maintenance of genetic quality in farmed Tilapia, Asian Fisheries Science (1), 75-82. Smitherman, R. O. And Tave, D, (1988). Genetic con- siderations on acquisition and maintenance of refer- ence populations of Tilapia. Aquabyre 1 (1), 2. Tave, D, (1986). A quantitative genetic analysis of 19 phenotypes in 7i/apia nilotica. Copeia 1986, 672-679. Tave, D. (1993). “Genetics for fish hatchery managers’, Second edition Thorgaard, G. H. (1986). Ploidy manipulation and per- formance. Aquaculture 57, 57-64, Thorgaard, G. H., Scheerer, P, D., Hershberger, W. K. and Myers, J. M. (1990), Androgenetic Rainbow Trout produced using sperm from tetraploid males show improved survival. Aquaculture 85, 215-221 Torrissen, O-J., Holm, J, C. and Hansen, T, (1995), Aquaculture in Norway. World Aquaculture 26 (3), 12-20. Saving the Environment: What Will it Take? by Ted Trainer Publisher: University of New South Wales Press, Sydney. Paperback, 64 pp. ISBN 0 86840 648 1. RRP $9.95 The environmental movement has been claimed to be the most significant social movement to have occurred internationally since the emergence of socialism. Ted Trainer argues that environmental policies in the 1990s are failing to deal with the underlying causes of environmental decline. and presents key arguments for limiting economic growth. Most people, including those who staff the government and non-profit environ- mental agencies, such as the Australian Conservation Foundation, assume that we can solve the environmental problem by more recycling, greater energy efficiency, stricter anti-pollution legislation, more national parks and greener codes for build- ing, planning and products. Trainer argues that this emphasis is distracting govern- Vol. 116 (1) 1999 ments from the real social and cultural causes of environmental decline. We are over-producing and over-consuming, he argues, and solutions to the environmental problem will fail unless we recognise this fact. A US study shows that the average per- son consumes 20 tonnes of new material every year. Trainer argues that our society is more than ‘somewhat’ unsustainable: ‘if is far beyond the levels of resource con- sumption and environmental impact that could be sustained’. Dr Ted Trainer teaches at the School of Social Work at the University of New South Wales. He has published extensively on environmental issues, and his books include The Conserver Society and Towards a Sustainable Economy. 33 Tribute Daniel Ernest McInnes 1906-1998 It was with great sadness that we learned that Dan McInnes had died on 24 September 1998, just short of his 92™ birthday. It was also difficult to compre- hend. Dan had been such an active mem- ber for so long that one could not believe that he would not be found, still busy, somewhere in the Club. Dan MclInnes was elected a member of the Club at the AGM on 7 June 1954 when the Microscopical Society of Victoria was incorporated with the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria. In 1957 he became a member of Council, and from 1958 to December 1995 Dan is listed, in one capacity or another, in The Victorian Naturalist. He was Vice-President 1958-1959, President 1959-1962, and Immediate Past President from 1962-1967. A break from official duties might have been expected, but in September 1967 the Treasurer resigned and, typically, Dan offered to carry on until a new Treasurer was appointed. At the AGM in 1968 Dan became Treasurer, and in effect held this position until 1980, although at intervals during this period the position was officially vacant, In the Annual Report 1979/80 the President, Dr Brian Smith, paid tribute to the retiring Treasurer for his untiring work for the Club: ‘His advice on Club matters in general as well as his sound financial guid- ance has been of incalculable value to the Club.” When the appointment of a new Treasurer was announced six months later the Club Reporter commented “Actually the 34 Club has been without a Treasurer since the last Annual General Meeting but Mr McInnes (being Mr McInnes) has continued to see us through although officially he was merely a “bookkeeper”’. The Club was very dear to Dan’s heart and he would not let it falter for want of a helping hand. From 1977-1983 he was Book Sales Officer, pro- viding a much-appreciated service, as well as making a considerable profit for the Club, and he continued looking after the sale of back issues of The Victorian Naturalist stored in his old shop at 129 Waverley Road until 1995. Dan may not have been in favour of the incorporation of the Microscopical Society with the Club, but from the outset he threw himself into the life of the FNCV. The Microscopical Group was formed immedi- ately, Dan was the Excursion Leader, and the first excursion was to Albert Park Lake, one of his favourite hunting grounds. Pond life was his abiding interest, and many times members will have heard him Say at a General Meeting that he had popped down to the lake for a jam jar full of water because he knew there was bound to be something of interest in it for him to exhibit under a microscope. Most likely nothing new to him, but it enabled him to pass on some item of knowledge to others, and that was equally important to him. He was never at a loss to find something to exhibit, and the breadth of his interests is revealed in the variety of specimens he dis- played: the blood circulation of a tadpole: The Victorian Naturalist a nautilus shell, the animal and its eggs, found at Middle Brighton: rock sections; the proboscis of a blowfly; fossil coral from Lilydale Quarry; rotifers; live cheese mites from matured cheese (probably found in his delicatessen stock); Wolffia and liver- worts to name but a few, His exhibits were always accompanied by notes, and he would frequently draw members’ attention to fur- ther information to be found in books in the library. In this connection it is interesting to read the report of the meeting of the Microscopical Group which was held in the Herbarium Hall in January 1955, when ‘Mr D. McInnes stressed that all members attending a future meeting should bring a microscope, irrespective of whether they have a specimen or not at the time. A slide will be supplied, and if the member is diffi- dent about making the few necessary remarks relevant to the slide, then arrange- ment will be made for a substitute to do this for him.’ People were to be involved and encouraged, and one of the things that impressed Ray Power was Dan’s ‘ability to put on a talk ata moment's notice’. Besides his involvement with the Microscopical Group, Dan was also a member of the Entomology and Marine Biology Group, the Geology Group, and in time, the Day Group. This latter was formed in 1972 to cater for leisured and retired members who did not want to attend meetings at night. Their inaugural excursion was to the Botanic Gardens. It was reported that “Mr Mclnnes took us to see an unusual Chinese Oak tree.” Although not a founder of the Hawthorn Junior Field Naturalists Club, Dan was closely connected with it for many years, and was President from April 1962, step- ping in after the sudden death of their President, until August 1971. Many mem- bers, and future Office Bearers of the FNCV, had their interest in natural history fostered by Dan, and for one member at least there has been the recent joy of hav- ing her child inspired by Dan. as she was. In 1969 he was made a Life Member of the Hawthorn Junior FNC, Dan was essentially a practical man, and nowhere is this revealed more clearly than in the construction of the FNCV micro- scope. In a series of articles in The Victorian Naturalist he outlined the prob- Vol. 116 (1) 1999 a Oe ee | ee ee ae ye ae Tribute lem with cheap commercial microscopes, which were unsatisfactory for both chil- dren and adults starting to use them, and explained his design which had been con- structed by W.C. Woollard, an engineer and keen microscopist, who had developed the original idea into ‘a really practical, first-class microscope’, So popular was this microscope, sold at a very reasonable price, that over 140 of them were made for members. Dan and W.C. Woollard both received Honorary memberships in May 1964 in recognition of this work, One of the major Club events from very early days was the annual Nature Show, held in the Lower Melbourne Town Hall. During the 1960s and 1970s Dan was chairman of the Nature Show Committee, and Jim Willis, in his centenary history of the FNCY, described Dan’s indefatigable leadership” in organising these Shows. Each one featured a particular theme. The Hawthorn Juniors played a significant part, and as an indication of the amount of work involved the report on the 1967 Show states “D, McInnes and the Hawthorn Juniors are the proprietors of Instant Caves Ltd: the caves come in assorted sizes com- plete with stalactites and stalagmites, We understand that with modern methods the manufacturing time has been cul from sev- eral million years to 26 weeks.” In 1964 the Hawthorn Juniors mounted a ‘realistic beach scene’ and demonstrated making rock slides under the FNCV microscope. On another occasion a geological scale model of the Yarra Valley was constructed under Dan’s guidance. Dan wrote a number of articles for The Victorian Naturalist, and the one called A Pond Hunter's Dream, published in 1990, wonderfully transmits his abiding interest in pond life. He describes the pond hunter as “that odd person who may be seen occa- sionally, dipping with his pond net into a lake’ and says that "pond hunters in their rambles always have that dream of the pond that has all the interesting forms of life they read about but never come across in their samples of pond life.” He goes on to describe such a dream pond. The article conveys the excitement of finding all sorts of fascinating life, and also contains much practical advice on equipment and meth- ods. It is not written to show off some 35 Tribute obscure knowledge, but to make others aware of the subject, and to assist anyone to develop an interest of their own. An inter- esting article on Wolffia australiana was the result of his being asked whether he had ever seen this tiny duckweed in flower. He hadn’t, so he investigated. Dan’s keen interest and sharp eye finally led him to the discovery in 1983 of a species previously unrecorded for Australia, a foraminiferan, Shepheardella taeniformis, in material col- lected from Black Rock. Subsequent trips to Port Phillip Bay revealed more speci- mens, which led Dan to speculate that this foram was fairly plentiful; but it had taken his keen observation and wide knowledge to identify it. The fact that Dan was never Club Librarian, nor Editor of The Victorian Naturalist did not mean that he had no involvement in these aspects of the Club. He was always willing to lend a hand in the library, he looked after the binding, and when the library went into storage he listed all the books kept out for use by the Microscopical Group, The geological map and reports collection also bears witness to his organisation. As time went on it became increasingly obvious that a supplement to the cumulative indexes to The Victorian Naturalist, which covered issues only to 1978, was necessary. Dan, embracing new technology, acquired his own computer, and in collaboration with Pat Grey, pro- duced an index covering the next ten years. When Dan became President in 1959 he introduced the idea of name cards for members at meetings. He wanted everyone to feel involved. and he saw it as part of his job to talk to people at General Meetings. A revealing item appeared in the report of the January meeting in 1960 when he appealed for people who arrived early to help set up tables, lights, micro- phone etc. so that he could have more time to greet and get to know members. This says as much about Dan’s activities in the background as about his view of his responsibilities as President. He was always very generous with appreciation of other people’s efforts. When in 1985 a pre- sentation was made to Marie Allender ‘For Outstanding Service’ it was Dan who com- piled a list of excursions Marie had arranged, and spoke of her record in this capacity and as a Councillor. 1, too, have reason to be grateful to Dan. It was he who recommended to Council that as I had been Club Librarian for eleven years, as well as holding various other offices from time to time, I should receive an Honorary mem- bership. That was when Dan was 90, and his interest in Club affairs was still as keen as ever, Delve into the Club’s activities anywhere in the last 44 years, and you will almost certainly find Dan, contributing. He will be greatly missed. Our sympathy goes to Chriss McInnes, herself a member for the last 40 years, and to the family. Sheila Houghton 12 Scenic Court, Gisborne, Victoria 3437. 1 am indebted to Tom May for assistance with this obituary. (Photo of Dan taken at the FNCV Centenary Meeting, 3 May 1980) Vale Norman Stanford We regret to announce the death of Norm Stanford on 26 November, 1998. Norm was elected to the Club in February 1983, and was Subscription Secretary from 1986 to 1988. Microscopy was his chief interest, and although he resigned from the Club when he and Helen moved from Melbourne, he continued to attend some meetings of the Microscopical Group as a member of an affiliated Club. Norm was re-elected to the FNCV in July 1997, and attended meetings until shortly before his death. Our condolences go to Helen Stanford, who was Book Sales Officer for several years. 36 Sheila Houghton The Victorian Naturalist Book Reviews A Long Walk in the Australian Bush William J. Lines Publisher: University of New South Wales Press Lid, 1998. RRP $19.95, The vexed question of land utilisation in general and forestry in particular has exer- cised the mind of Bill Lines since he was a boy growing up at Gosnells. near Fremantle in Western Australia. His for- mative years are described in his publica- tion “Taming the Great South Land’ (Allen & Unwin Ltd. 1991). As a boy he watched the sand track on which his parents lived become the Fremantle Road as bush was cleared, swamps drained and the land became yet another subdivision. The work under review is concerned with a physical and philosophical journey along the Bibbulmun Walking Track, undertaken in the spring of 1993. The Bibbulmun Track commences at Kalamunda, only a few kilometres from Gosnells, in an area Lines has been familiar with all of his life. The track, covering a distance of 650 kilo- metres, followed mainly along old logging and fire roads, and the various sections provide the story of the forest during the past 170 years. The first logs were taken in 1829, when timber was required for repair- ing HMS Sulphur. The British Admiralty was so impressed with the work that 200 tons of timber were ordered in 1831, fol- lowed by further orders in 1837. Over the next few decades intermittent logging occurred, but began in earnest during the 1870s as the ‘inexhaustible abundance’ began to be exploited. Baron Ferdinand von Mueller visited the region on two occasions during this period and recom- mended that a bureaucratic structure be established to exercise surveillance. pre- vent waste and encourage the natural upgrowth of young trees. As Lines and his companion travel along the track it is made abundantly clear that rather than exercising such care, much of the forest has been used rather as a quarry. That clearing for agriculture, some selective logging for timber, and a great deal of clear felling for wood-chipping for the Japanese market occurred becomes apparent as the Vol. 116 (1) 1999 walk progresses. Complete utilisation of the forest appears to be the aim of foresters and, in 1968, the then conservator of forests in Western Australia saw wood- chipping as the realisation of this dream. In addition, the damming of rivers and streams and their pollution by agricultural and industrial run-off have added to the destruction. As in so many other parts of the continent, salinisation has occurred on a large scale, particularly where the forest has been cleared for broad-acre farming. Distinctions are made between natural calamities and those visited upon the forest by human interference. In particular, much reference is made to the differences in land utilisation by the original inhabitants and those who displaced them. The author is at pains to emphasise the importance of the forest for its own sake and not for utilitari- an purposes, however laudable. He implores nature lovers to base their efforts at preservation on the fundamental ethic that plants and animals have a right to exist and to be left alone because they exist. Although dealing with a relatively small part of the south west of Western Australia, a narrow belt of very distinctive land between Perth on the west coast and Walpole on the south coast, the implica- tions of the story have universal applica- tion. As David Suzuki said in another place, “we assault the planet as if it is lim- itless and endlessly self-renewing’. This emphasises the fact that the story Bill Lines tells is not unique to the south west, or even to Australia, but is being repeated over and over in different parts of the world. The book, a paperback of about 200 pages, is recommended for the important observations made concerning the use and abuse of the planet. Although it makes no difference to the message that Lines is con- veying, it is noted that the track that he and his companion walked is not now in use. A new, purpose built and recently completed oy! Book Reviews Bibbulmun Track, to the east of their route and mainly through conservation areas, is now the official route and extends the track a further 180 kilometres eastwards to Albany. It has numerous campsites, each about a day’s walk apart and with conve- niences to make the long walk more plea- sureable. Whether it has the same impact 1s another story. R.J. Fletcher 28 Marjorie Avenue, Belmont, Victoria 3216. George Caley, Nineteenth Century Naturalist by Joan Webb Publisher: Surrey Beatty & Sons, 1995. 185 pp., many illustrations (black & white, colour). R.R.P $37.95. Not far from the Botanic Gardens in the Blue Mountains, NSW, a peak carries the name Mount Banks. It was given by an English botanist, George Caley, to com- memorate Joseph Banks, for whom he col- lected many Australian plants early in the nineteenth century. Caley was explorer as well as botanist and is commemorated physiographically and botanically — mainly in NSW. Three peaks, one genus and sev- eral species of Australian plants still carry his name. Robert Brown, another of Banks’ botanists, gave Caley’s name to an orchid genus — Caleana — and described Caley as ‘botanici periti et accurati — a skilful and accurate botanist. Non- Victorian species of Banksia, Grevillea and Eucalyptus, retain the specific name caleyi. Victoria’s swamp violet, Viola caleyana G. Don, also commemorates Caley. George Caley collected only very fleet- ingly on the coast of what would later become the colony of Victoria. but because his recent biography is of general botanical interest, | think it deserves mention in The Victorian Naturalist. My more detailed review is published in Historical Records of Australian Science, vol, 12, June 1998. During Flinders’ coastal survey of New Holland (1802-5), Brown collected thou- sands of plants for Banks and named many in his substantial Prodromus Florae Novae Hollandiae et Insulae Van Dieman (1810) and supplement — Supplementum Primum Proteaceas Novas (1830). Some he col- 38 lected with Caley in the vicinity of Sydney and the Blue Mountains. Brown’s influen- tial role in Australian botany is widely recognised. But Caley, who collected in New Holland over a longer period of time and may have foot-slogged a greater total land distance, published nothing, and is relatively unknown. Assisted by botanists and librarians, Joan Webb investigated herbarium specimens as well as correspondence, journals, maps and reports at the present herbarial home of Banks’ and Brown’s botanical collections — the Natural History Museum in London — and other European, American and Australian herbaria. In George Caley, Nineteenth Century Naturalist, the product of her extensive detective search for Caley, Webb discusses his Australian botanical work between April 1800 and May 1810, and the botanical consequences of that work. In 1795, Caley wrote to the great botanist Banks to introduce himself and enquire about employment, Caley mentioned that he was born on a memorable day for Banks — in June 1770, when Captain Cook’s Endeavour was almost wrecked on the Barrier Reef and Banks feared for the survival of the rich plant collection from the aptly named “Botany Bay’, Later Caley accepted Banks’ offer of employment and collected for him in New Holland. Of the relatively few Australian plants described by 1800, Caley had studied those cultivat- ed in English gardens and described in The Victorian Naturalist botanical publications. Caley made three sea voyages from Sydney. One was an exploratory expedi- tion in 1801 to survey Bass Strait and Western Port on the Lady Nelson under Lieutenant James Grant. Webb could find no Caley journal for this expedition, although he wrote to Banks that when | have nothing to do I shall write out my voyage to Western Port, but had it been more interesting I should have done so long ago. Webb mentions that Caley found few plants he had not already seen, but not whether any of Caley’s expedition speci- mens survive. In 1805, Brown took his massive New Holland collection, including some Caley specimens, back to Banks and began docu- menting it. In his Prodromus Brown estab- lished many new genera, including two orchid genera, Caleana and Pterostylis, for which he named and described many species, including Caleana major, Caleana minor and about a dozen species of Pterostylis, which are now recognised as Victorian. Meanwhile, in the antipodes, Caley was using a taxonomic system being discarded by Brown and genera established before 1801. Caley was more than a mere collector and provided new specific names for genera he recognised and sometimes ventured to create new generic names. He had a substantial orchid collection and recognised that certain hooded orchids could not be accommodated in any estab- lished genus and deserved their own genus. Because they reminded him of the hooded Druids, he called the new genus Druid's Cap, which Brown latinized and used until he established the genus Prerostylis. The Editor, FNCV, Vol. 116 (1) 1999 Book Reviews Caley provided specimens and names for other botanists to use. Some of Caley’s many Australian specimens, especially in the Proteaceae and Orchidaceae, are type specimens for taxonomic names published by others, usually Robert Brown, Furthermore, some of the published names are Caley’s manuscript names. Webb found evidence of the publication of eleven of Caley’s manuscript names. Some are for species indigenous to Victoria, including four published in Brown’s Prodromus — Leucopogon juniperinus R.Br., Thelymitra pauciflora R.Br., Seutellaria mollis R.Br. and Xanthorrhoea minor R.Br. — and one in his Profeaceas Novas — Persoonia rigida R.Br, On his herbarium label Brown wrote *‘Persoonia rigida Caley’, but because he rather than Caley published that name, Brown’s rather than Caley’s name remains attached to that plant name. Webb's book includes maps and illustra- tions including Bauer’s exquisite depiction of Caleana major, which are clear and informative; there are useful appendices, including “Plants named after Caley’ and ‘Caley’s Eucalypts’, and a good bibliogra- phy. Unfortunately, the index lacks taxo- nomic names — not even Brown’s genus Caleana! | admire Webb’s persistent detective effort in her search for clues about Caley and his collections and recom- mend George Caley, Nineteenth Century Naturalist to Vic, Nat. readers who share my interest in Australian botanical history. Linden Gillbank Department of History and Philosophy of Science, University of Melbourne, Parkville, Victoria 3052. Locked Bag 3, P.O. Blackburn, Victoria 3130. The Victorian Naturalist All material for publication to: The Victorian Naturalist, 39 Book Review New Zealand Fungi: an illustrated guide (Revised edition) by Greta Stevenson Publisher; Canterbury University Press, 1994. Paperback, 126 pp., 15 colour illustrations. RRP $19.95. These are indeed fortunate times for those field naturalists whose interests include fungi. The appearance over the past decade or so of several excellent mycological publications, as well as initia- tives such as the Fungimap project, are indicative of a positive period in mycologi- cal research in Australasia. This review of Greta Stevenson’s publication New Zealand Fungi: an illustrated guide is placed within this context. First published in 1982, under the title Field Guide to Fungi, this book includes a table of contents that would have presum- ably been eagerly sought by field mycolo- gists. The introduction and following chap- ter attempt to define fungi in terms of their position in a broad hierarchy, and by some explanation of fungal life cycles and repro- duction. Information is provided on detri- mental and beneficial roles of fungi, including the important concept of mycor- rhizal associations, Two very brief chapters on finding and collecting fungi are followed by a more detailed series of chapters dealing with the recording of information, and preservation of collected specimens. These chapters utilise illustrations of both macroscopic and microscopic detail. as well as providing a scheme for compiling notes on specimens. After a skeletal explanation of the process of nomenclature, a brief descrip- tion of the four classes to be dealt with, and a blunt explanation of the author’s choice of classification, there is a hiatus created by the insertion of a short chapter on reference literature plus a bibliography. The remaining one hundred pages of the book contain descriptions of taxa from only two of the classes mentioned above. This section includes a key to some genera of the Agaricales (with a table-format guide to genera of gilled fungi), a key to 40 orders of the Gasteromycetes, as well as a few illustrations and the 15 coloured plates. The book concludes with a reason- able glossary and index. The overview provided above presents a book that seems to contain most of the top- ics sought after in a publication of this type. A more critical look, however, reveals sev- eral features of considerable concern. The publisher’s note at the opening of the book acknowledges that a number of fungi have undergone taxonomic revision since the first edition in 1982. There seems to have been no attempt to accommodate these changes in the revised edition of 1994. In fact, no editorial changes seem to have been made at all in the revised edi- tion. This may be a result of adhering to Stevenson's conservative line of classifica- tion, expressed in Chapter 9. Although some explanation of the author’s choice of classification is welcomed, the divisive discussion dealing with this issue could well have been expressed through a more appropriate forum. The use of a wide left margin to com- ment on points of classification, and for specific referencing, is to be commended. However, the overall referencing style lacks consistency and informative detail. A lack of attention to grammar and sen- tence structure is reflected in a somewhat clumsy style of writing, and results in a loss of clarity in the text. This lack of attention to editorial detail is also exempli- fied in the entry for Gomphus, where Stevenson acknowledges that ‘two new species have been described recently by Dr Barbara Segedin in Auckland Fig. 14.1’, No reference is given as to where to find these descriptions; no illustration of Gomphus appears in Fig. 14.1, which illus- trates Podoserpula pusio, Schizophyllum commune, Stereum hirsutum and S. pur- The Victorian Naturalist pureum: and both Podoserpula and Schizophyllum are misspelt! The colour plates are a welcome addition to the revised edition and, although half of those presented are very small, the quality allows recognition of the main diagnostic features. Once again, however, the editori- al standard could be improved. The colour plate of Morchella conica is not supported by a description in the text, and does not appear in the index. A redeeming feature of this publication is the numerous descriptions of both genera and species. It is unfortunate that here too there are issues of concern. For the large and important genus Cortinarius, it is acknowledged by Stevenson that ‘the majority of species are mycorrhizal and a — ae’ Se ee Naturalist Notes seem to be specific to one species of tree’, and ‘in the Nothofagus forests they abound’, and yet no species of Cortinarius gets a mention anywhere in the book. A coloured plate depicting an unidentified species of Cortinarius was selected to rep- resent the genus. To conclude, expectations of an improve- ment in quality in the revised edition of this book have certainly not been fulfilled. If a reliable, modern field guide is what you re looking for, New Zealand Fungi: an illustrated guide is regrettably a publica- tion that should be overlooked by discern- ing field naturalists in Australasia. Rod Jones School of Botany, University of Melbourne, Parkville, Victoria 3052. Some Records of the Fungus Blackfellows’ Bread Polyporus mylittae Travelling along the Grand Ridge Road through the Eastern Strzeleckis in May 1970, I stopped to take a look at a freshly- cleared area, clear-felled, behind the cathe- dral arches of the tall Mountain Ash that fringed the roadside. It was a scene of des- olation, the southern hill slope was devas- tated save for a small group of enormous old trees that the bulldozer wouldn’t tack- le. They stood forlornly open to the four winds. The good earth had been torn to pieces, bashed and pounded and left in deep holes and humps. There had been some rain since the felling, and on any bruised but unbroken stretch of this moon- scape a crop of big white mushrooms, each one solitary, gilled and tough, had appeared. I knew them for the fruiting bod- ies of Blackfellows’ Bread and a little delving in the soil confirmed this. Evidently the disturbance of the soil, or the removal of the overhead cover, combined with the overnight rain had induced all this fungus to fruit. On a long-cleared and grassed-down farm at Nerrena, in the autumn of 1968 the Vol. 116 (1) 1999 farmer began to cultivate a paddock that had not been broken for a generation, The plough turned up dozens of large sclerotia, many in the soft. fresh stage when they resemble coarse sponge or honeycomb. In the hard stage this polypore is shiny and hard like a lump of horn. In another instance, a nurseryman at Leongatha North moved onto a bush block and began to clear an area for an orchard. He too turned up many big hard sclerotia which makes me think that in our high rainfall part of Victoria at least, this fungus must be quite plentiful under forested or long- untilled earth. It would not be noticed unless it fruited. Questioning the edibility of this fungus I once asked an Aboriginal man from the Western District if the native peoples real- ly had used it as a food item. His reply, ‘My word yes! When we could get it fresh’, makes me wish to try it myself. Ellen Lyndon 7 Steele Street, Leongatha, Victoria 3953. 41 Naturalist Notes The Cordyceps Update Well, another Cordy season is just about over — and just as well, too, seeing as how I’ve foolishly become a student again and this year’s ‘peak’ coincided nicely with semester one’s assignments! | keep think- ing ‘this year there won't be many — surely they ve wiped out the caterpillars by now’. And each year, for the last five years, up they've come! For those rapidly reaching the conclusion that we have here a raving lunatic, you are most probably right, but what I'm raving about is the common vegetable caterpillar fungus, Cordyceps gunnii (Figs. 1, 2). Cordyceps is a genus of some 300 species, the large majority of which are predators of various arthropods, mostly insects. during the ‘sexual’ phase of their life cycle. They are represented worldwide in temperate and particularly tropical envi- ronments, with several species known in Victoria, of which C. gunnii is probably the most common. | was delighted to see the inclusion of this and C. hawkesii as tar- get species in the updated fungimap pro- ject. My observations and records suggest this species will be found over a wide range of habitats, usually in the “wet” sea- son, At my place, outside Healesville, they are in evidence from March to July (some- times a bit earlier and/or later), although no individual specimen lives that long, You will remember that I described these bizarre organisms as predators, rather than as parasites, their usual description. Consider the probable lifecycle of C. gun- nii. Their spores in the soil encounter the cuticle of either one species or a few relat- OS ie ta ie Fig. 1. Cordyceps gunnii Healesville, 1995, The specimen is approximately 60 mm high and 10 mm in diameter. 42 ed species of ground living ‘goat-moth’ caterpillars (family Hepialidae), They ‘recognise’ this as a place to grow, and germinate, producing an array of enzymes and using mechanical action to penetrate into the larval haemocoel (the sloppy insides of an insect), If successful. the fun- gus then reproduces asexually, attempting to avoid the insects’ fairly primitive immune response. There may or may not be a ‘wait period’ involved here, depend- ing on exactly when the caterpillars are first penetrated. The fungus only appears to be active in *full-sized* caterpillars, but I have no idea as to whether they are only attacked late in their life cycle (perhaps as they prepare their burrows for pupation and eventual exit), or earlier. The latter seems to imply a wait and also a trigger to activate the fungus, which could be the hormonal surges associated with pupation. The fungal mass eventually completely fills the haemocoel — in effect, the entire body of the caterpillar is consumed and becomes fungus (Fig. 3). Most other species of Cordyceps also consume the body of their victim in this manner. Thus, I suggest that these organisms be more cor- rectly classified as predators. Beginning late summer-early autumn, the fungus begins growing upwards through the caterpillars tunnel. They usually begin to appear above ground in numbers after the first good rains, but some appear, albeit usually small, even in drought conditions. There is a surprisingly large variation in both the life span and size of the fertile stroma — the dark olive to black, finger to he . “aa Fig. 2. Cordyceps gunnii Healesville, 1996, A ‘double-header’. The Victorian Naturalist Naturalist Notes Fig. 3. Cordyceps gunnii Healesville, 1996. The “double-header’ exhumed, clearly showing the caterpillar’s remains. club shaped part of the fungus we actually see. Some last for only a week or two, oth- ers for several months. Some may reach 15 mm, others 150 mm, though most are around 50 mm high by 10-15 mm wide, and are generally smaller when it is drier. Unlike some of the other local species. for example C. robertsii and C. taylori, that produce stroma for several years from the same caterpillar, C. gunnii converts the caterpillar to as many spores as possible within a single season, probably using one of several strategies. These range from the tortoise — long life, slow spore production, to the hare — short life, fast spore produc- tion. After a period of fine weather, some specimens can be found with a cotton wool covering of millions of spores, which will all be ‘gone’ after the first rain — into the soil, to await the arrival of the next genera- tion of unfortunate insects. For the past five years, roughly half the caterpillars in my study area have become such unfortunates. Sometimes more than one stroma can be observed growing from a single caterpillar. Fungi can have some complex mating sys- tems, and it may be that such ‘multiple- headers’ represent the end result of incom- patible mating types “fighting” for their share of the caterpillar — intraspecific com- petition at very close quarters! Some pre- liminary DNA analyses were “suggestive , but unfortunately my technique did not prove equal to a final resolution at that time. I hope to complete this study with a specialist in this area at a future date. All parts of the fungus except the fertile layer of the stroma are eventually attacked by the larvae of fungus gnats and an assortment of other tiny arthropods, The stroma may break off the stipe. or be Vol. 116 (1) 1999 scratched out by an assortment of mam- mals and birds. The fertile layer will keep producing spores regardless, until it has exhausted its food supply, or becomes food itself for other fungi. The soil around here must be saturated with spores — it’s amaz- ing any caterpillars escape! Entomopathogenic fungi have not been seriously investigated in mainland Australia, Nor have there been many long- term ecological or population studies of any fungi. The same can be said for a num- ber of other phyla, let alone genera and species. It took me a long time to realise that a good place to look was in your own yard and I’m not even going to be able to work out the entire life cycle of just this one fungus. There's plenty to do! Cheers, Rod. P.S. I've accumulated a fair amount of lit- erature on entomopathogenic fungi, partic- ularly Cordyceps, and may be able to help others in this area. The best publication in English is Samson, Robert A., Evans, Harry C. and Latge, J. P., Atlas of ento- mopathogenic fungi, Berlin: Springer- Verlag, 1988. Glossary entomopathogenic — organisms that cause disease in insects; in this case, fungi but they are also attacked by bacteria and viruses. haemocoel — fluid-filled body cavity of an insect. stroma — the fertile or spore-producing part of a fungus, usually a ‘mushroom’ or ‘toadstool’, in this case a ‘club’. Rod Barker P.O, Box 536, Healesville, Victoria 3777 43 The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc. Reg No A0033611X Established 1880 In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria OBJECTIVES: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian flora and fauna. Membership is open to any person interested in natural history and includes beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Registered Office: FNCV, 1 Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. Postal Address: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackbum, Victoria 3130, Australia. Phone/Fax (03) 9877 9860; International Phone/Fax 61 3 9877 9860. Patron His Excellency, The Honourable James Gobbo, The Governor of Victoria Key Office-Bearers President: Dr TOM MAY, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra 3141, 9252 2319 Vice Presidents: Dt NOEL SCHLEIGER and MR JOHN SEEBECK Acting Hon. Secretary: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, | Astley Street, Montmorency 3094. 9435 8408 Hon. Treasurer: Mr ARNIS DZEDINS, PO Box 1000, Blind Bight 3980. 5998 7996 Subscription-Secretary: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. 9877 9860 Editor, The Vic. Nat.. Mrs MERILYN GREY, 8 Martin Road, Glen Iris 3146, 9889 6223 Librarian; Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130, AH 5428 4097 Excursion Co-ordinator: Mt DENNIS MELTZER, 8 Harcourt Ave, Caufield 3162. 9523 1853 Book Sales: Dr ALAN PARKIN, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. AH 9850 2617 Book Brokerage; Mr RAY WHITE, 20 Alfred Street, Essendon 3040. 9379 3602 Newsletter Editor: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, | Astley Street, Montmorency 3094. 9435 8408 Conservation Coordinator: Ms JENNY WILSON, 206 Pascoe Vale Road, Essendon 3040. AH 9370 6434 Group Secretaries Botany: Mt RAY MACPHERSON, 8 Jean Street, Lower Templestowe 3107. 9850 4319 Geology: Mr ROB HAMSON, 5 Foster Street, McKinnon 3204, 9557 5215 Fauna Survey: Ms SUSAN MYERS, 17A Park Street, Hawthorn 3122, 9819 2539 Marine Research: Mr MICHAEL LYONS, 2/18 Stonnington Place, Toorak 3142, AH 9822 8007 Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 Schotters Road, Mernda 3754. 9717 3511 MEMBERSHIP Members receive The Victorian Naturalist and the monthly Field Nat News free. The Club organises several monthly meetings (free to all) and excursions (transport costs may be charged), Field work, including botany, mammal and invertebrate surveys, is being done at a number of locations in Victoria, and all members are encouraged to participate. SUBSCRIPTIONS RATES for 1999 Year Half-Year First Member Metropolitan $40 $20 Concessional (pensioner/student/unemployed) $30 $15 Country (more than 50km from GPO) $30 $15 Junior (under 18) $15 $7 Additional Members Adult $15 $15 Junior $5 $5 Institutional Australian Institutions $55 Overseas Institutions AU$65 Schools/Clubs $35 Send to: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia, Printed by Brown Prior Anderson, 5 Evans Street, Burwood, Victoria 3125, ry) The Victorian Naturalist Volume 116 (2) April 1999 Book Review Emperor: the Magnificent Penguin by Pauline Reilly Publisher: Kangaroo Press (Simon & Schuster), Sydney 1998 32 pp, paperback, RRP $9.95 “This is a story of outstanding endurance in the coldest, windiest, driest place in the world.’ So begins Pauline Reilly's book ‘Emperor: the Magnificent Penguin’, an account of the lives of Emperor Penguins Aptenodytes forsteri in Antarctica. Living and breeding in these conditions, Emperor Penguins appear to have a woeful exis- tence until one becomes aware of some of the adaptations acquired through 55 mil- lion years of evolution (the estimated age of the earliest fossil penguin). Emperor penguins standing on ice with young sit- ting on their feet are one of the most durable of Antarctic images and indicative of the sorts of intriguing physiological and behavioural adaptations to environmental extremes which are a part of Emperor Penguins’ lives. At first glance much of what these birds are capable of doing appears to be more science fiction than fact. They can fast for five months, dive to depths of 400 metres, survive temperatures of minus sixty degrees Centigrade, raise young in the darkness of the Antarctic win- ter and travel up to 200 kilometres across ice to their breeding colonies. The author weaves these feats into the annual cycle of ‘Emperor’, the focal male of this account as he and his mate successfully rear an off- spring. The acknowledgement of Drs Barbara Wienecke and Roger Kirkwood in the text (two of the world’s leading author- ities on this species) is testimony to the factual authenticity of the account. The book is well written in a style aimed at a wide section of the community with a benign level of information and complexi- ty. There are colour photographs on every page and these provide a spectacular com- plement to the narrative. Some of the pho- tographs are particularly compelling: ‘Moonlight in winter’ (by D. Murphy), ‘A small huddle’, and *A thriving colony” the centrepiece (by G. Robertson) and another, erroneously captioned, *Moonlight in win- ter’ (by R. Kirkwood) beautifully depict 46 aspects of the lives and habitats of the pen- guins. The map of Antarctica on page six is not particularly useful and is, in my opinion, a missed opportunity to give some indication of where ‘Emperor’ breeds and feeds. It would also have been helpful to include a map of known breeding colonies and perhaps plots of where individual pen- guins have been tracked by satellites on their foraging trips. The author of this book is an interesting story in herself and well-qualified to write about penguins. Born in Adelaide. she worked as a secretary until the outbreak of World War Il and then as a censor before going to Army intelligence and finally in anti-aircraft duties. After raising a family she commenced ornithological studies and, over a 40 year period, has achieved an impressive list of honours and publica- tions. She was the first female President and first female elected fellow of the Royal Australasian Ornithologists Union (now Birds Australia), has been to Macquarie Island twice and carried out research stud- ies of both Little Eudyptula minor and Gentoo Pygoscelis papua Penguins. Her study of Little Penguins on Phillip Island began in 1968 and continues today under the co-ordination of the Penguin Study Group. It has become one of the longest running studies of a bird in Australia. I think ‘Emperor: the Magnificent Penguin’ will open the eyes of many peo- ple to this beautiful bird and its remarkable adaptations at a time when its future may be determined by processes resulting from our activities such as global warming and the exploitation of marine resources. It is an interesting and attractive production that should appeal to readers of all ages and interests. Peter Dann Phillip Island Penguin Reserve, P.O. Box 97, Cowes, Victoria 3922. The Victorian Naturalist The Victorian Naturalist Volume 116 (2) 1999 April Editor: Merilyn Grey Index to Volume 115, 1998 is in the centre of this issue Research Reports Patchiness of a Floral Resource: Flowering of Red Ironbark Eucalyptus tricarpa in a Box and Ironbark Forest, BPRIa USO. ADC TIICE 1str usenet it ey ects chpottsesrticlsneto tes 0.15), Trees associated with dams One hundred and thirty six £. tricarpa trees growing within 5 metres of a dam edge were sampled and, of these, 59% (81/137) were flowering, This was a sig- 60 — Percentage ree Wi Very sina Sinall Modlin Large Size class of tree W Percentage of trees flowering ® Percentage of trees present | J Fig. 1. The percentage of £. tricarpa trees in each size class that were flowering compared with the percentage of trees recorded for all transects over Rushworth Forest. Table 1. The number and percentage of F£. fricarpa trees in each size class for five geographic areas in Rushworth Forest. Geographic ery small Small area <20 em >20— 40 cm n % n % North 199 50 156 A) North-east 263 60 142 33 Central 219 53 161 39 South 292 6] 129 27 South-west 184 58 123 38 Total 1157 (57) 711 (35) 50 Tree size class (DBH ledium Large Total >40- 60 em 60+ em n % n %o n % 31 8 7 2 393 19.2 28 6 3 / 436 21.4 29 7 3 ! 412 20:2 43 9 15 3 479 23.5 12 eee fl 3s oi 15.7 143 Cry 20 (1) 2040 100 The Victorian Naturalist % of trees flowering North North-east Central Research Reports in | South South-west Geographic area Fig. 2. The percentage of E. tricarpa trees in each transect that were flowering in each geographic area within Rushworth Forest. Table 2. The number of trees and the percent- age of E. tricarpa trees recorded flowering within 5 m of a dam edge, and from forest tran- sects, for each of five geographic areas within Rushworth Forest. Key: No., total number of trees; %, percentage of trees flowering. Area Dams Transects No. % No. % North 64 62.5 393 10.9 North East 21 61.9 436 9.2 Central 20 523 412 13.1 South 20 40.0 479 0 South West 11 0 320 0 nificantly greater proportion than for trees sampled along forest transects (7° = 360, df= 1, p< 0.0005). In each area a greater proportion of trees around dams were flowering than trees on transects (Table 2). In the ‘south-west’, no flowering was recorded for trees on transects or at dams, while in the ‘south’ no trees on transects were recorded flowering, but one dam had trees flowering nearby. When a comparison was made between the size classes of trees on dam edges and those on transects, a significant difference was evident (7° = 39.8, df= 3, p < 0.0005), with fewer ‘very small’ trees and more Vol. 116 (2) 1999 larger trees associated with dams. However, when flowering was compared for trees of the same size class, the propor- tion of trees flowering was greater for trees associated with dams than for those sam- pled along forest transects (y? = 413.5, df= 1, p< 0.0005) (Table 3). The mean flowering intensity for flowering trees associated with dams and forest transects did not differ (t-test p = 0.74) (Table 3). Discussion This survey has revealed marked spatial variation, or patchiness, in the flowering of E. tricarpa in Rushworth Forest in central Victoria. During the peak flowering period for this species in 1997, flowering was widespread in three geographic areas in the northern parts of the forest but was not recorded in two areas in the south. In the areas where flowering was recorded, there was marked variation in the percentage of trees flowering along each transect, rang- ing from 0-42% of trees per transect. Finally, at the level of individual trees, there was significant variation between size classes of trees in the proportion that were flowering, with greater likelihood of flowering for larger trees (Fig. 1). 51 Research Reports Table 3. Comparisons between E. fricarpa trees within 5m of a dam edge and trees on transects in Rushworth Forest in relation to numbers of trees. size class distributions, percentage of trees flower- ing, and mean flower coyer of flowering trees. Tree Size Class (DBH em) Dams _ Forest Very small (S—<20) 46 1157 33.8 Small (20 —<40) 57 711 41.9 Medium (40-—<60) 27 143 19.8 Large (60+) 6 29 4.4 Is a snapshot survey such as this study representative of the overall flowering pat- tern of a tree species? Could the absence of flowering be an artifact of a single sample in time, with flowering of certain trees occurring either later or earlier than the sur- vey? Other evidence from the study area suggests that the patchiness shown in this snapshot survey is not an artifact but is typi- cal of the flowering of this species. Regular monitoring of flowering at a number of other forest stands in the southern section of the forests showed an almost total absence of flowering of E. fricarpa throughout 1997 (J. Wilson, A. Bennett, wnpubi.). Similarly, ongoing monitoring of the flowering of individual trees in this forest (J, Wilson. unpubl.) has also revealed significant differ- ences in flowering in relation to tree size. Variation in flowering between size classes of trees adds support to previous contentions that large trees are particularly important as sources of nectar for nectar- feeding birds (e.g. Webster and Menkhorst 1992: Traill 1995). Two factors appear to contribute to the importance of large trees. First, because a significantly greater pro- portion of large trees flower than small trees (Fig, 1), forest stands with large irees are likely to be a more reliable source of nectar from year to year. Second, although no significant difference in intensity of flowering was evident (measured as % foliage cover), large trees have a greater area of canopy foliage than smaller trees and will, for the same flowering intensity, support a larger number of flowers per tree. For example, Ashton (1975) reported that mature £. regnan trees produced between 1.6-15.5 times as many flowers as small trees (*pole’ and ‘spar’ stages). A significant difference between trees close to dams and those along forest tran- sects in the proportion of trees flowering (Table 3) suggests that availability of moisture may be an important influence on 52 Number of trees Percentage of trees in each size class: Dams Forest Percentage of Mean flower cover trees flowering (+ 1.E.) Dams _ Forest Dams _ Forest 56.7 58.7 3.5 0.7 (0.1) 0.7 (0,1) 34.9 49.1 9.7 0.9(0.1) 0.9 (0.1) 7.0 74.1 14.7 1.0(0.2) 1.05 (0.1) 14 100 20.7 1.0 (0.5) 1.0 (0,2) the initiation of flowering for this species. Water deficits can cause inhibited growth at all stages of tree reproduction (Kozlowski 1982). Better knowledge of the factors that determine the initiation, timing and frequency of tree flowering is central to developing an understanding of the poten- tial availability of nectar resources for birds in these forests. It is likely that flowering is influenced by genetic attributes and also by environmental features such as soil types, access to moisture, tree health and condi- lions in previous years (Florence 1964; Ashton 1975; Bolotin 1975; Porter 1978: Griffin 1980: Potts and Wiltshire 1997), Porter (1978) reported that temperatures and rainfall in the two to five years before flowering influenced tree growth and honey production of £. tricarpa (reported as /. sideroxylon), and that a wet winter two years prior to flowering encourages the initiation of a large bud crop. Two years prior to this study (i.e. 1995), Heathcote, Rushworth and Nagambie all received higher than average rainfall over the winter months (Bureau of Meteorology 1998). However, in July 1997 flowering was not heavy or widespread, and variation in rain- fall does not account for the geographic patchiness in flowering between different parts of the forest. Box and Ironbark forests in Victoria have experienced profound changes in the past 200 years of settlement with obvious impacts being the clearing of the majority of the ecosystem and the degradation of most remaining forest fragments (Environment Conservation Council 1997), Although historical data are sparse. available evidence indicates that there has been substantial change in forest structure and tree density (Newman 1961; Environment Conservation Council 1997), The effects of altered forest structure on the availability of suitable hollow-bearing trees for birds and mammals that are oblig- The Victorian Naturalist ate hollow-users has received some atten- tion (Meredith 1984; Traill 1991; Bennett 1993). However, the present results sug- gest that forest structure also has implica- tions for the presence and abundance of nectar as a resource for nectar-feeding ani- mals. Many birds and mammals, including threatened and migratory species, are dependent on eucalypt nectar in box and ironbark forests. This study has obvious implications for wildlife conservation and forest management. Spatial and temporal patterns in flowering of eucalypt species in box and ironbark forests, and processes influencing these patterns, are being inves- tigated further in ongoing studies. Acknowledgements This is a contribution from the Landscape Ecolog) Research be Deakin University, We ratefully acknowledge financial supper towards field costs from the Land and Water Resources Research and Development Corporation (LWRRDC) and Bushcare (Grant No DU 2 to A. Bennett, R- MacNally and A. Yen).Thanks to Andrew Duffel who assisted in the field. References Ashton, D-H. (1975). Studies of flowering behaviour in Eucalyptus regnans F. Muell, Australian Journal of Botany 23, 239-252, Bennett, A.F. (1993). Fauna conservation in box and ironbark forests: a landscape approach. The Victorian Naturalist 110, 15-23 Bolotin, M. (1975), Photoperiodic induction of preco- cious flowering in a woody species Hucalyptus ocet- dentalis Endl. Rotanical Gazette 136, 358-65. Bureau of Meteorology (1998), Weathercall, (Bureau of Meteorology: Melbourne) Collins, BG. and Briffa, P. (1982). Seasonal variation of abundance and foraging of three species of Australian Honeyeaters. Australian Wildlife Research 9, 557-569. Costermans, L. (1994). ‘Native Trees and Shrubs of South-eastern Australia. (Rev. ed.) (Lansdowne Publishing Pty Ltd: Sydney). Environment Conservation Council (ECC) (1997). ‘Box-lronbark Forests and Woodlands Investigation Resources Issues and Report.” (Environment Conservation Council; Victoria). ; Florence, R.G. (1964). A comparative study of flowering and seed production in six Blackbutt (Zwcalypruy pilu- laris Sm.) forest stands, Australian lorestry 28, 23-33 Ford, H.A. (1979). Interspecific competition in Australian honeyeaters depletion of common resources, 4ustralian Journal of Ecology 4, 145-164. Ford, H.A., Paton, D.C. and Forde, N. (1979), Birds as pollinators of Australian ioe a New Zealand Journal of Botany 17, 509-519. q Fripp, YJ, (1982). Allozyme variation and mating sys- tem in two populations of Eucalypiuy kitseniana (Leuhm.) Maiden. Australian Forest Research 13, 1-10. Goodman, RD, (1973), “Honey Flora of Victoria” (Department of Agriculture: Victoria). Griffin, A.R, (1980). Floral phenology of a stand of Mountain Ash (/ucalyprus regnans F, Muell.) in Gippsland, Victoria. Australian Journal of Botany 28, B93-404 Hopper, S.D. and Burbidge, A.A. (1982). Feeding behaviour of birds and mammals on flowers of Banksia grandis and Eucalyptus angulosa, In Vol. 116 (2) 1999 Research Reports ‘Pollination and Evolution’. Eds J.A. Armstrong, JM. Powell and A.J, Richards pp. 67-75 (Royal Botanic Gardens: Sydney). House, §.M, (1997), Reproductive biology of euca- lypts. /n “Eucalypt Ecology Individuals to Ecosystems.” Eds J) Williams and J. Woinarski, pp. 30-55. (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge), Keast, A. (1968). Seasonal movements in the Australian Honeyeaters (Meliphagidae) and their ecological significance. mu 67, 159-209. Kozlowski, T.T, (1982), Water supply and tree growth. Forestry Abstracts 43 (2), 57-95 Land Conservation Council (1978). “Report on the North-Central Study Area’ (Land Conservation Council of Victoria; Victoria). MacNally, R. and MacGoldrick, J. (1997). Mass flow- ering and landscape dynamics of bird communities in some eucalypt forests of central Victoria, Australia, Journal of Avian Biology 28, 171-83, Meredith, C.W. (1984). Possums or poles? — the effects of silvicultural management on the possums of Chiltern State Park, northeast Victoria. /n “Possums and gliders.’ Eds A,P, Smith and |.D. Hume. pp. 575- $77, (Australian Mammal Society: Sydney). Muir, A-M., Edwards, S.A. and Dickins, MJ. (1995) “Description and Conservation status of the Vegetation of the Box-lronbark Ecosystem in Victoria’. Flora and Fauna Technical Report no. 136 (Department of Conservation and Natural Resources: Victoria). Newman, L.A. (1961), “The Box-Ironbark Forests of Victoria, Australia,” Bulletin of the Forests Commission of Vietoria 14. (Forests Commission Victoria) Paton, D.C, (1985), Food supply, population structure and behaviour of New Holland Honeyeaters, Phylidonyris novaehollandiae, in woodland near Horsham, Victoria. /# ‘Birds of Eucalypt Forests and Woodlands, Ecology, Conservation, Management,” Eds A. Keast, H_F. Recher, H. Ford and D. Saunders, pp. 79-96, (Royal Australasian Omithologists Union; Melbourne). Paton, D-C_ and Ford, H.A. (1977). Pollination by birds of native plants in South Australia, Hu 77, 73-85. Porter, J,W, (1978). Relationships between flowering and honey production of Red Ironbark Hucalyptus sideroxylon (A, Cunn.) Benth., and climate in the Bendigo district. Australian Journal of Agricultural Research 29, 815-829, Potts, B.M, and Wiltshire, J.E. (1997), Eucalypt genet- ics and genecology. In “Eucalypt Ecology Individuals to Ecosystems,” Eds J. Williams and J, Woinarski 56-91, (Cambridge University Press, Cambridge) Pyke, G.H, (1983). Seasonal pattern of abundance of honeyeaters and their resources in heathland areas hear Sydney. Australian Journal of Ecology 8, 217-233. Robinson, D, (1993). Lest we forget to forge, The Victorian Naturalist 110 (1),6-10. Sampson, J.F., Hopper, SD. and James, 5,1. (1989). The mating system and population genebe structure of in a bird-pollinated saallee Eucalyptus rodantha. Heredity 63, 383-93. Traill, B. (1991). Box-ironbark forests: tree hollows, wildlife and manapement. /n ‘Conservation of Australia’s Forest Fauna.’ Ed. D. Lunney, (Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales: Sydney), Traill, B. (1995). Competition and coexistence in a community of forest vertebrates. PhD thesis (unpub). DEEB Monash University Webster, R. and Menklorst, P_ (1992), The Regent Honeyeater (Nanthomyza phrygia); population status and écology in Victoria and New South Wales Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research Technical Report Series No. 126, (Department of Conservation and Environment; Victoria). 53 Research Reports Effect of a Flood Retarding Basin Culvert on Movements by Platypus Ornithorhynchus anatinus Melody Serena', Geoff Williams’, Janelle Thomas', and Marianne Worley! Abstract Live-trapping and radio-tracking methods were used to investigate the movements of Platypus Ornithorhynchus anatinus through a sizeable concrete culvert (45 metres long), which was built under a soil embankment as part of a flood mitigation system in Melbourne’s southeastern suburbs. Five adult or subadult males were recorded crossing the embankment, demonstrating that the culvert does not constitute a barrier to movements by the animals. However, available evidence suggests that Platypus may avoid entering the culvert when engaged in routine foraging, presumably because there is little or no prospect of obtaining food (in the form of aquatic invertebrates) along its length. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (2), 1999, 54-57). Introduction By definition, streams and rivers are long and thin. As natural corridors, they serve to facilitate travel, both routine and occasion- al, by a wide variety of species (Bennett 1990). Creating barriers along linear waterways may be correspondingly detri- mental insofar as natural patterns of dis- persal or migration are restricted (Koehn and O’Connor 1990) or populations become separated into smaller units that are more vulnerable to local extinction than would otherwise be the case (Shaffer 1981). Concrete culverts are one of the com- monest types of man-made structures found along waterways. We report here on the results of mark-recapture and radio- tracking studies undertaken to assess the potential of a relatively long culvert. built as part of a flood mitigation system, to act as a barrier to Platypus Ornithorhynchus anatinus. The Study Area Monbulk Creek is a perennial waterway rising on the forested slopes of Dandenong Ranges National Park in the Dandenong Creek catchment, Once outside the park, it flows for about 15 kilometres through pub- lic reserves, horse and cattle paddocks, market gardens, and tracts of residential housing before merging with Ferny Creek to form Corhanwarrabul Creek. To reduce the risk of floods occurring along the lower reaches of Monbulk Creek, a flood retard- ing (or retention) basin was built about 9 kilometres upstream of the Ferny Creek ' Australian Platypus Conservancy, P.O. Box 84, Whittlesea, Victoria 3757. 54 confluence in 1980. The basin includes two lakes which are sufficiently large to hold much of the extra water generated by nor- mal storm run-off. If the capacity of the lakes is surpassed after extremely high rainfall, surplus water is contained by a large grassy embankment located immedi- ately downstream. In both dry weather and after storms, water flowing along the Monbulk Creek channel is conveyed through the embankment by means of a concrete culvert, circular in cross-section, measuring 45 metres in length and 1.35 metres in internal diameter (grade = 1 in 87.5 or 1.1%). Except in the wake of major rainfall. the depth of water flowing through the culvert is typically less than 25 cen- timetres (Fig. 1). Methods Seventeen trapping sites for Platypus were established along Monbulk Creek between Dandenong Ranges National Park and the Ferny Creek confluence, at sites located both upstream and downstream of the retarding basin embankment. The ani- mals were captured in fyke (or eel) nets, set with the length of each net partly sus- pended out of the water (Serena 1994), Nets were set in pairs in the afternoon, with one net facing upstream and the other facing downstream, and checked through- out the night. Captured Platypus were held in dry calico bags until they could be released at the exact point of capture. Each Platypus was permanently identified with a Trovan transponder tag (Grant and Whittington 1991). Sex and age class were assigned according to spur characteristics, The Victorian Naturalist Fig. 1. Upstream end of the culvert conveying water from Monbulk Creek through the flood retarding basin embankment, which enabled juveniles (6 hours). In contrast, the macropods mate for between 5-50 minutes, wombats for approximately 30 minutes, and other didelphids for 4-40 mins (Table 1). The shortest copulation (less than 30 seconds) has been reported for bandicoots (Table 1) (Taggart ef al. 1998). During detailed studies on copulatory behaviour in the Agile Antechinus (previ- ously Brown Antechinus/Brown Marsupial Mouse Antechinus stuartii) (Shimmin 1996, 1998) it was found that the time at which males were given access to females within the oestrus period dramatically influenced the length of copulation. However, factors such as order of mating and delay between two rival males secur- ing mating access had little effect on the duration of mating. Furthermore, mating behaviour varied significantly during the extended period of copulation. Males pur- sue females and tolerate high levels of female and subdominant male aggression whilst maintaining intromission and ensur- ing mating success. Females, however. can prevent male mating access in a similar manner to which they initiate the final dis- mount, through massive bouts of kicking and fighting. Subdominant males rarely force the dominant male to dismount (Shimmin 1998). Amongst macropods the Tammar Wallaby Macropus eugenii has been the most extensively studied (Tyndale-Biscoe and Renfree 1987). Female tammars come into oestrus within hours of giving birth, whereas in the Swamp Wallaby Wallabia bicolor oestrus occurs 3 days before birth and in the Red Kangaroo Macropus rufus 2 days after birth. In some other macropod species it does not appear to be related to birth. In tammars, Whip-tailed Wallabies Macropus parryi and Red-necked Wallabies, females are vigorously pursued by the males within the group following birth and the initiation of oestrus. Intense inter-male aggression results from these mating chases and, in the tammar at least, results in delaying the time of the first suc- cessful ejaculation until 1-2 hrs post-par- tum (Rudd 1994). The first ejaculation is Table 1, Maximum length of copulation in various marsupial species. Marsupial Family Species Maximum Duration of Copulation Dasyuridae (Semelparous) Agile Antechinus Antechinus agilis 18.0 hrs Dusky Antechinus Antechinus swainsonit 9.5 hrs Yellow-footed Antechinus Antechinus flavipes 11,0 hrs Dasyuridae (Iteroparous) Fat-tailed Dunnart Sminthopsis crassicaudata 11 hrs Kowari Dasyuroides byrnei 3.0 hrs Stripe-faced Dunnart Sminthopsis macroura 2.5 hrs White-footed Dunnart Sminthopsis leucopus 1.8 hrs Peramelidae Long-nosed Bandicoot Perameles nasuta <30 sec Potoroidae Long-nosed Potoroo Potorous tridactylus 2 min Macropodidae Eastern Grey Kangaroo Macropus giganteus 50 min Parma Wallaby Macropus parma 5 min Red Kangaroo Macropus rufus 15-20 min Red-necked Wallaby Macropus rufogriseus 8 min j Tammar Wallaby Macropus eugenii 8 min Vombatidae Southern Hairy-nosed Wombat Lasiorhinus latifrons 30 min Didelphidae Grey Short-tailed Opossum Monodelphis domestica 4-40mins Mouse Opossum Marmosa robinsoni >6ohrs Semelparous — all offspring produced at one time; Iteroparous — offspring produced in successive groups. SEE eee ee ee Ee eee ee ont ye erOups 60 The Victorian Naturalist usually secured by the dominant (alpha) male, which is usually the largest male within the group, Bouts of thrusting activi- ty are observed in the tammar throughout copulation with males ejaculating after each bout (although the components of each ejaculate are not known), Mate Guarding In antechinus, pelvic thrusting by the male during the extensive copulatory peri- od is greatest early in the mount time and declines towards the end of copulation. This reduced activity in the later hours of copulation is consistent with contact mate guarding behaviour which has been report- ed for other vertebrate species. Mate guarding of this nature also assists in ensuring efficient sperm transport and stor- age. and therefore increases the likelihood of siring success (Shimmin er al, 1997). In the Tammar Wallaby. the dominant male always copulates and ejaculates first (Jarman 1983), and subsequently guards the female from the advance of other males (by chasing, biting and kicking) for up to 8 hours. In macropods, subordinate male tammars, Red-necked Wallabies and Red Kangaroos that are not involved in mating, respond to the mating activity by the domi- nant male by biting and kicking the copu- lating male until he releases his hold on the female (Sharman and Calaby 1964: Johnson 1989; Rudd 1994). After the dom- inant male has finished guarding the female, some subordinate males may mate with her. In tammars and Red-necked Wallabies the dominant male has consider- able mating advantages over subordinate males in terms of timing, and is probably the most reproductively successful. As ovulation does not occur until 40 hours after birth in the latter species, it is likely that the copulatory plug deposited by the dominant male plays a significant role in ensuring a high rate of paternity success (Tyndale-Biscoe and Rodger 1978). In Long-nosed Bandicoots Perameles nasuta, males closely follow the females for several nights preceding copulation, and, although length of copulation is short (<30 seconds), the frequency is quite high with successive mounts occurring at inter- vals of several minutes. A peak in activity Vol. 116 (2) 1999 Contributions occurs ~2 hours later when about 13 mounts with intromission follow in quick succession. This is followed by a steady waning in attraction (Stoddart 1966, 1977). Whether multiple ejaculation occurs dur- ing this period has not been determined. A similar pattern of multiple, but brief, copu- lations has also been reported in members of the Potoroidae (Seebeck and Rose 1989) and is also thought to act as a type of mate guard. For the Grey Short-tailed Opossum Monodelphis domestica, only a single intromission/ejaculation per male has been observed, whereas in the Woolly Didelphis albiventris and Virginia Opossums Didelphis virginiana there are multiple intromissions and/or ejaculations (Dewsbury 1972), Locking at the conclu- sion of mating immediately prior to dis- mount is also a feature of copulation in many didelphid opossums and has also been observed in the Yellow Footed Antechinus Antechinus flavipes and Agile Antechinus. Prevalence of Mating Plugs Copulatory plugs have been observed in the urogenital sinus and/or lateral vaginae following mating and ejaculation in opos- sums, macropods, phalangerids, vombat- ids, dasyurids and the Numbat Myrmecobius fasciatus (Hughes and Rodger 1971; Tyndale-Biscoe and Rodger 1978: Taggart ef al. 1997; Taggart and Friend unpubl, obs,), The copulatory plug is thought to result from the mixing of semen and vaginal secretions, however coagulation can occur in the absence of female tract secretions in macropods. In Tammar Wallabies the mating plug is devoid of spermatozoa soon after ejacula- tion (Tyndale-Biscoe and Rodger 1978). It appears as a pale creamy coloured rubbery mass, and in macropods can often be seen protruding from the urogenital sinus for up to 24 hours after mating. Copulatory plugs in marsupials may prevent leakage of sper- matozoa, act to retain spermatozoa in the vaginae close to the cervical canal thus ensuring maximal access for spermatozoa to the cervix, and/or perhaps act as a tem- porary physical barrier to subsequent mat- ings by other males. 61 Contributions Sperm Transport in the Female Reproductive Tract In marsupials, upon ejaculation, semen is deposited in the upper part of the urogeni- tal sinus and sperm travel rapidly to the cervix. which may act as a reservoir for spermatozoa as well as a selective barrier to further sperm transport. In didelphid and dasyurid marsupials there appears to be extremely efficient transport of ejaculated spermatozoa from the urogenital sinus to the lower isthmus region of the oviduct (~1 in 7) suggesting little if any barrier to sperm transport up the female reproductive tract in species from these groups. This contrasts dramatically with the small per- centage of ejaculated spermatozoa (~1 in 10,000) which reach the oviduct in most macropods studied (Bedford et al. 1984; Tyndale-Biscoe and Rodger 1978; Taggart and Temple-Smith 1991). Sperm Storage and Release in the Female Reproductive Tract Sperm storage in the female reproductive tract is a relatively common phenomenon in insects, lower vertebrates, reptiles and birds, In eutherian mammals, as fertilisa- tion generally occurs within 24 hours of mating, spermatozoa only survive for short periods in the female tract. Long term sperm storage in this group is therefore extremely rare, with insectivorous bats being the most well-known exception (Racey 1979), In marsupials, extended periods of sperm storage in the female tract (up to 2-3 weeks) have been reported for three families. In the Dasyuridae (Bedford et al. 1984: Selwood and McCallum 1987: Breed ef al. 1989; Taggart and Temple- Smith 1991) and the Didelphidae (Rodger and Bedford 1982: Bedford ef al. 1984) sperm storage occurs in specialised crypts in the lower oviduct, whereas in per- amelids (Lyne and Hollis 1977) it occurs in the vaginal caeca. Observations on the release of spermatozoa from the isthmic storage crypts have been studied in the Fat- tailed Dunnart Sminthopsis crassicaudata using transmitted light and suggest that those located closest to the ovary are the first to be released from the crypts follow- ing ovulation (Bedford and Breed 1994), and are perhaps therefore more likely to successfully fertilise any ovulated eggs. 62 Paternity Studies The best evidence for sperm competition within marsupials has come from studies of captive colonies of two dasyurid species. the Agile Antechinus (Shimmin 1998: Shimmin ef a/. 1997) and the Brush- tailed Phascogale Phascogale tapoatafa (Millis et al. 1995). Both studies examined paternity within litters associated with competitive mating trials between two males. These studies indicate that sperma- tozoa from more than one male can con- currently occupy the sperm storage crypts in the lower oviduct prior to ovulation, and also that multiple paternity can occur with- in the one litter. Fertility studies undertak- en in the Agile Antechinus suggested that spermatozoa from second and third insemi- nations can contribute spermatozoa for fer- tilisation. In studies on the Agile Antechinus, of the 61 young on which paternity was assigned 72% were sired by the second mating male when both matings occurred early in oestrus, 62% were sired by the second mating male when one mat- ing occurred early and one in mid oestrus and 58% were sired by the second mating male when both matings occurred in mid oestrus. Overall, 64% of young were sired by the second mating male. Importantly, however, large numbers of the litters (7/11) were sired by both males given access to the female (Shimmin 1998; Shimmin ef al. 1997). This result proves that effective storage of each male’s sperm occurs and that males securing mating access early in oestrus are also gaining some siring success. Production of mixed paternity litters significantly increases the genetic diversity of the litter and, com- bined with the sex-biased dispersal of young, ensures that high levels of genetic heterozygosity are maintained in the popu- lation. Support for these findings also come from field studies of the Agile Antechinus in which radionuclide labels, individually recognisable by their spectral properties. were injected into males at the beginning of the breeding period. Labels passed to females during ejaculation were identified and counted following female capture to determine male mating success, and subsequently demonstrated that males and females did indeed exhibit a promiscu- ous mating strategy in the wild (Scott and Tan 1985). The Victorian Naturalist The Victorian Naturalist Index to Volume 115, 1998 Compiled by K. N. Bell Australian Natural History Medallion Medallionist, Peter Menkhorst, 264 Authors Adams, R., Macreadie, J. and Wallis, R. 120 Allen, T., 146 Bain, G., Steller, P. and Belvedere, M., 142 Beasley, K., 40 Belvedere, M., Bain, G. and Steller, P., 142 Birch, W.D., 306 Braby, M.F., 4 Briggs, E., Cardwell, T., Heinze, D. and O'Neill, G., 205 Brown, G., Brown, P. and Clemann, N., 81 Brown, P., Clemann, N. and Brown, G., 81 Brown, S., Edney, G., Howlett, S., Love, P. and Lawler, S., 201 Calder, J. and Calder, M., 164 Calder, M., 66 (book review), 70 (obituary) Calder, M. and Calder, J., 164 Cardwell, T., Heinze, D., O’Neill, G. and Briggs, E., 205 Chesterfield, E.A., 310, 337 Claridge, A.W., 88 Clemann, N., Brown, G. and Brown, P., 81 Crichton, G., 76 Croome, R. and Mikrjukov, K., 239 Crosby. D. F., 222 Coupar, P. and Van Bockel, D., 124 Dashper, S., Thompson, R. and Myers, S., 343 Doeg, T., 30 (book review) Douglas, J., 105 Downey, P. O., 32 (book review) Ducker, S. C., 292 Editors, The Victorian Naturalist, 38, 74, 119, 123, 299 Edney, G., Howlett, S., Love, P., Lawler, S. and Brown, S., 201 Eichler, J. and Jeanes, J., 87 Endersby, |., 26 Fairclough, R., Lam, P., Kibria, G. and Nugegoda, D., 56 Falkingham, C., 108 (book review) Fallavollita, E., Hunter, V.H. and Hunter, UT, 9 Fletcher, R.J., 21, 192 Ford, S., 210 Gillbank, L., 29, 34 (book review), 266, 286 Gillbank, L. and Maroske, S., 188 Giéy, B27 Griggs, J. and Shiel, R., 226 Gross, C., 65 (book review) Guesclin, P. Du, 83 Hawking, J., 215 Heinze, D, and Williams, L., 132 Heinze, D., O'Neill, G., Briggs, E. and Cardwell, T., 205 Hingston, A,B. and McQuillan, P.B., 116 Houghton, S, 38 (obituary), 160, 279 Howlett, S., Love, P., Lawler, $., Brown, S. and Edney, G., 201 Hunter, J.T., 94, 322 Hunter, J.T., Fallavollita. E. and Hunter, V.H., 9 Hunter, V.H., Hunter, J.T. and Fallavollita, E., 9 Jacobs, P., 245 Jeanes, J, and Eichler, J., 87 Jordan, C., 106, 145 (letter) Kibria, G., Nugegoda, D., Fairclough, R and Lam, P., 56 Lam, P., Kibria, G., Nugegoda, D. and Fairclough, R., 56 Lawler, S., Brown, S., Edney, G., Howlett, S and Love, P., 201 Love, P., Lawler, S., Brown, S., Edney, G. and Howlett, S, 201] Lyndon, E., 68, 93, 107 MeBain, M., 242 MeQuillan, P.B. and Hingston, A.B., 116 Macreadie, J., Wallis, R. and Adams, R., 120 Mansergh, I. and Seebeck, J., 350 Marion, A., 169 Maroske, S., 147 (book review) Maroske, S, and Gillbank, L., 188 May, T’., 62 (book review), 158 Meagher, D,A., 357 Meagher, D.A. and Scott, G.A.M., 325 Meisterfield, R. and Tan, Lor-wai, 231 Mikrjukov, K. and Croome, R., 239 Moir, E, and Ralston, K., 50 Myers, S.. Dashper, S. and Thompson, R. 343 Norman, R.J. de B., 18 Nugegoda, D., Fairclough, R., Lam, P. and Kibria, G.. 56 O'Neill, G., Briggs, E., Cardwell, T. and Heinze, D., 210 Ralston, K., 255 (book review) Ralston, K. and Moir, E,, 50 Sacco, E., 104 Sago, J.. 84 Schleiger, N., 175 Scott, G.A.M. and Meagher, D,A., 325 Seebeck, J. and Mansergh, [., 350 Serena, M. and Williams, G., 47 Sharp, B., 28 (software review) Shiel, R. and Griggs, J., 226 Silberbauer, L., 114 (book review) Steller, P., Belvedere, M. and Bain, G., 142 Strickland, K., 149 (book review) ‘Yan, Lor-wai and Meisterfield, R., 231 Tenner, E., 33 (book review) Thompson, R., Myers, S. and Dashper, S., 343 Traill, B.J., 135 Vafiadis, P., 100 Van Bockel, D. and Coupar, P., 124 Wallis, G., 300 Wallis, R., 264 Wallis, R. and Wood, M.S., 78 Wallis, R., Adams, R. and Macreadie, J., 120 Walsh, N., 186 Wescott, G., 296 West, |., 31 (book review) Weste, G., 274, 331 Williams, G, and Serena, M,, 47 Williams, L. and Heinze, D., 132 Wood, M.S. and Wallis, R., 78 Birds Little Raven, taken by red fox, 83 Book Reviews *A Conservation Overview of Non- marine Lichens, Bryophytes, Algae and Fungi’, G. Seott, T. May, T. Entwisle and N. Stevens (C. Gross), 65 ‘A Natural History of Australia’, T. M. Berra (C. Falkingham), 108 ‘Colour Guide to Invertebrates of Australian Inland Waters’, J.H. Hawking and F.J. Smith (T. Doeg), 30 ‘Eucalyptus: an illustrated guide to identification’, I. Brooker and D. Kleinig (P.O. Downey), 32 “Flora of Australia vol. 28, Gentianales’, 2 “Freshwater Algae in Australia. A guide to Conspicuous Genera’, T.J. Entwisle, J.A, Sonneman and S.H. Lewis (J. West), 31 “Fungi of Southern Australia’, N.L. Bougher and K. Syme (T. May), 62 ‘Hunters and Collectors, The Antiquarian Imagination in Australia’, T. Griffiths (L. Gillbank), 34 ‘Improving Nature? The Science and Ethics of Genetic Engineering’, M.J. Reiss and R. Straughan (L. Silberbauer), 114 ‘John Gould in Australia. Letters and Drawings’, A. Datta (S. Maroske), 147 “Planting Wetlands and Dams. A Practical Guide to Wetland Design, Construction and Propagation’, N. Romanowski (K. Strickland), 149 ‘Seashells of Central NSW’, P. Jansen (E. Tenner), 33 *Sub-alpine Flora of the Baw Baw Plateau, Victoria’, K. and P, Strickland (M. Calder), 67 “The Biology of Australian Weeds, volume 2”, F.D, Panetta, R.H. Groves and R.C.H, Shepherd, 67 “The Mount Buffalo Story: 1898-1998", D. Webb and B. Adams (K. Ralston), 255 Botany Acacia dealbata, defoliation of, 27 Acacia phlebophylla, Mt. Buffalo, 205 Buffalo Sallee, fire, drought adapted alpine species, 201 Botanical bridge or island, Mt. Buffalo, 186 Bryophyte flora, Wilsons Prom N.P., addition to, 325 Dieback at Wilsons Prom, is battle won? 331 Epacris impressa, nectar robbing by bumble bee, Tas, 116 Fire history at Wilsons Prom N.P., 337 Granite outcrop vegetation, Wilsons Prom N.P., 322 Lichens. Mt Buffalo, preliminary report, 210 Muehlenbeckia costata, ecology of, 9 Muellerian memoir of Wilsons Prom, 286 Olearia allenderae, at Wilsons Prom N.P., 299 Old Orbost Rd., 21 Orchid flora, Warrandyte S.P., 1991-97, 124 Orchids, rare, Nyora, 87 Pseudocephalozia paludicola, biogeography of, 84 Sallow Wattle, Mt. Buffalo, 205 Silver Wattles, defoliation of, 27 Tin Granite flora, Howell, NSW, 94 Vegetation at Wilsons Prom N.P., 310 Conservation Glenburn Pond, urban regeneration project, 50 Special Protection Zone Management. Mt. Buffalo N.P., 169 Swordgrass Brown Butterfly project, 142 Entomology Bombus terrestris, nectar robbing in Epacris impressa, Yas, 116 Butterflies at Mt. Buffalo N.P., 222 Feral honeybees and sugar gliders, nest box competition, 78 Hesperiidae, Lycaenidae, biology of in SE Australia, 4 Lycaenidae, Hesperiidae, biology of in SE Australia, 4 Swordgrass Brown Butterfly project, 142 Tatra Inn Insect displays, 225 Errata Vol 114 (6) 1997, p 283, 284, figure captions 2 and 3, 38 FNCV Historical role in Mt. Buffalo N.P., 160 Historical role in Wilsons Prom N.P., 266 Fish Bidyanus bidyanus, review of biology, aquaculture, 56 Silver Perch, review of biology, aquaculture, 56 Fungi Autumn fungi, 93 Gymnopaxillus, rare Gasteroid, first record for Australia, 76 Lepista nuda, Wood Blewitt, 107 Geology Geology of Wilsons Prom, 300 Minerals on Wilsons Prom, 306 Granite structure, Mt. Buffalo, 175 Invertebrates Aquatic microfauna, Lake Catani and environs, 226 Freshwater macroinvertebrates, Mt. Buffalo N.P., 215 Heliozoans from ice-covered ponds, Mt. Buffalo N.P., 239 Lacinularia sp. colony, 104 Octopus maorum, behaviour, 100 Testate amoebae, Mt. Buffalo N.P., 231 Localities Bunyip S.P., small mammal community. 120 FNCV Buffalo Excursion 1978, 214 Gippsland Style, A Day’s Rambling, 146 Glenburn Pond, revegetation project, 50 Glynns Reserve, Warrandyte, defoliation of Acacia dealbata, 27 Glynns Reserve, Warrandyte, Lacinularia colony, 104 Howell, NSW, botany of, 94 Melbourne Zoo, seal rehabilition, 40 Mt. Buffalo, special issue, 115(5), devoted to, 154-260 Acacia phlebophylla, 205 Aquatic microfauna, L. Catani and environs, 226 Botanical bridge or island?, 186 Buffalo Mountains (book review, 1908), 174 Buffalo Sallee, fire, drought adapted species, 201 Buffalo Sallow Wattle, 205 Butterflies, 222 FNCV Campout, 1903-4, 163 FNCV Buffalo excursion, 1940, 185 FNCV Buffalo excursion, 1978, 214 FNCV role in protection, 160 Freshwater macroinvertebrates, 215 F. von Mueller’s taxonomic imprint on flora, 188 Heliozoans from ice-covered ponds, 239 History and Natural History in pictures, Historical perspective, 245 Introduction, 158 Lichens of Mt. Buffalo N.P.: A Preliminary Report, 210 Mt. Buffalo and Percival R.H. St. John, 192 Pond life, 1903-4, 238 Scientific value, 164 Special Protection Zone Management, 169 Structure of Mt. Buffalo granite, 175 Testate amoebae, preliminary notes, 231 Mt. Buller, discovery of Mountain Pygmy Possum at, 132 New England, Muehlenbeckia costata, ecology of, 9 Nyora, rare orchids at, 87 Orbost Road, Old, botany, 21 Tower Hill $.G.R., honeybee, sugar glider nest competition, 78 Warrandyte S.P., orchid flora 1991-97, 124 Wilsons Prom N.P., special issue, 115(6), devoted to, 261-376 Annotated bibliography, Vict. Nat. articles, 279 Bryophyte flora, additions, 325 Daisy Bush, Olearia allenderae, 299 Dieback, is battle won? 331 Larly overland expedition, 292 FNCV Campout 1912-13, 273, 349 FNCV role in establishment, 266 Fire history, 337 Geology of, 300 Introduction to special issue, 264 Mammals introduced at, 350 Minerals at, 306 Muellerian memoir, 286 Origin of geographic names at, 357 Scientific importance of, 296 Small vertebrates, post-fire recolonization, 343 Vegetation at, 310 Vegetation of granite outcrops, 322 Walking, 75 years at Prom, 274 Mammals Burramys parvus, discovery on Mt. Buller, 132 Colonization, post-fire, small vertebrates, Wilsons Prom N.P,, 343 Eastern Barred Bandicoot, reptiles and birds in diet, 18 Echidna visits farm, 68 Introduced mammals, Wilsons Prom N.P., 350 Introduced predators, tracks and trails, 88 Isoodon macrourus, reptiles and birds in diet, 18 Mountain Pygmy possum, discovery on Mt. Buller, 132 Northern Brown Bandicoot, reptiles and birds in diet, 18 Ornithorhynchus anatinus, suburban hazards, 47 Perameles gunnii, reptiles and birds in diet, 18 Platypus, hazards in suburban habitats, 47 Red fox takes Little Raven, 83 Seal rehabilitation, Melbourne Zoo, 40 Small mammals, Bunyip S.P., 120 Squirrel gliders and Sugar gliders, identification of, 135 Sugar gliders and feral honeybees, nest box competition, 78 Sugar gliders and Squirrel gliders, identification of, 135 Vertebrate species, post-fire colonization, Wilsons Prom N.P., 343 Miscellaneous A day’s rambling, Gippsland-style, 146 A man with a many track mind, 105 Autumn peeper, 26 Author guidelines, 110 Early overland expedition to Wilsons Prom N.P., 292 Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 1988, updates to Schedules 2 and 3, 71 Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 1988, Recent action statements, May 1998, 150 History and Natural History in pictures, Mt Buffalo N.P., 242 Historical perspective, Mt. Buffalo N.P., 245 Natural History, 29 Origin of geographic names, Wilsons Prom N.P., 357 Rabbit Control, 119 Robert Dick, Geologist and Botanist, 106 Tatra Inn Insect displays, 225 The Victorian Naturalist - shortlisted for ‘Review Publication of the Year’, 123 Obituary Ruth Clarke (S. Houghton), 38 John Roslyn Garnet (M. Calder), 70 Reptiles Colonization, post-fire, small vertebrates, Wilsons Prom N.P,, 343 Egernia coventryi, bait selection for trap- ping, 81 Swamp skink, bait selection for trapping. 81 Vertebrate species, post-fire recolonization, Wilsons Prom N.P., 343 Software Reviews ‘Aust. Museum Information Discs’, W.D. Rudman (B. Sharp), 28 Special Issues Mount Buffalo Centenary Issue, 154-260 Wilsons Promontory Centenary Issue, 261-376 The relationship between male domi- nance and paternity has been examined in captive colonies of Red-necked Wallabies and Tammar Wallabies using elec- trophoretic and DNA fingerprinting tech- niques. Within groups of Red-necked Wallabies the dominant male sired at least 70% of young surviving to the age of pouch emergence with 30% or less young surviving being sired by subordinate males (Watson ef al. 1992). Conclusion Sperm competition is an important selec- tive force which affects the reproductive fitness of many invertebrate and vertebrate species. Unfortunately the comprehensive testing of many of the predictions associat- ed with sperm competition theory remains to be done. As the behavioural, morpho- logical and quantitative correlates of sperm competition vary dramatically across the marsupial fauna, the study of this group of mammals offers a unique opportunity to test many of the predictions which remain unresolved in mammals and will help determine how the various factors that influence the outcome of sperm competi- tion events affect male and female repro- ductive fitness, Furthermore, when data on relative testes-body mass and sperm number-bady mass are examined with other behavioural and morphological data for a particular species, this information can be used to help assess the likelihood of inter-male sperm competition occurring within a par- ticular species and thus predict the likely mating system in operation (for example monogamy. promiscuity). In addition, a better understanding of paternity within mating systems and the natural strategies for enhancing intraspecific genetic diversi- ty will assist conservation objectives and provide a new, useful and potentially rich area for further investigation. References Bedford, J.M., Rodger, J.C. and Breed, W.G. (1984) Why so many mammalian spermatozoa - a clue from marsupials? Proceedings of the Royal Soctety of London 221, 221-233 Bedford, J.M. and Breed, W.G. (1994). Regulated stor- age and subsequent transformation of spermatozoa in the fallopian tubes of an Australian marsupial, Siunthopsis crasstcaudata. Biology of Reproduction 50, 845-54 ) Birkhead, TR. (1995). Sperm competition: Vol. 116 (2) 1999 Contributions Evolutionary causes and consequences. Reproduction Fertility and Development 7, 755-75. Birkhead, T.R. and Moller, A.P. (1992). Numbers and size of sperm storage tubules and the duration of sperm storage in birds; a comparative study. Le Journal of the Linnean Society 45, 363- 372, Birkhead, T.R, and Moller, A.P. (1993). Sexual selec- tion and the temporal separation of reproductive events: sperm storage data from reptiles, birds and mammals, Biological Journal of the Linnean Society 50, 295-311. Breed, W.G., Leigh, C_M. and Bennett, J.H. (1989). Sperm morphology and storage in the female repro- ductive tract of the fat-tailed dunnart, Smiithopsis erassicaudata (Marsupialia:Dasyuridae). Gamete Research 23, 61-75. Cummins, J.M. and Woodall, P.F. (1985). On mam- malian sperm dimensions. Journal of Reproduction and Fertility 75, 153-175. Dewsbury, D.A. (1972). Patterns of copulatory behay- ri ae The Quarterly Review of Biology Dickman, C.R. (1993), Evolution of semelparity in male dasyund marsupials: A critique and an hypothe- sis of sperm competition. / “The biology and man- agement of Australasian carnivorous marsupials’, pp. 25-38. Eds M. Roberts, J. Camio, G_ Crawshaw, and M. Hutchins. (American Association of Zoological Parks and Aquariums Publishers: Toronto). Gomendio, M. and Roldan, E.R. (1991). Sperm compe- lition influences sperm size in mammals. Fr ag of the Royal Society of London 243, 181-185 Harcourt, A.H., Harvey, P.H_, Larson, SG. and Short, RV. (1981). Testis weight, body weight and breed- ing system in primates. Nature 293, 55-57. Harvey, P.H, and Harcourt, A.H. (1984). Sperm com- petition, testes size and breeding systems in primates. /n “Sperm competition and the evolution of animal mating systems’, pp. 589-600, Ed. R.L. Smith. (Academic Press: Orlando), Hughes, R.L, and Rodger, J.C, (1971). Studies on the vaginal mucus of the marsupial, /richosurus vulpec- ula. Australian Journal of Zoology 19, 19-33. Hunter, R.H,F, (1988).Transport of gametes, selection of spermatozoa and gamete lifespan in the female tract. /n ‘The fallopian tubes: Their role in fertility and infertility’. Chap IV, pp, 53-74. Ed. R.H. Hunter (Springer-Verlag: London) Jarman, P. (1983). Mating system and sexual dimor- phism in large terrestrial, mammalian herbivores Biological Reviews 58, 485-520 Johnson, K.A. (1989), Thylacomyidae. /n “Fauna of Australia. Vol Ib. Mammalia’, pp. 625-635, Eds D.W. Walton and B.J. Richardson. (Aust ralian Government Publishing Service: Canberra). Kenagy, G.J, and Trombulak, S.C, (1986), Size and function of mammalian testes in relation to body size, Journal of Mammalogy 67, 1-22. Lyne, A.G, and Hollis, DE, (1977). The early develop- ment of marsupials, with special reference to the bandicoots. /h “Reproduction and evolution’, pp 293-302, Eds J.H, Calaby and C.H, Tyndale-Biscoe. (Australian Academy of Science. Canberra). Millis, A., Taggart, D.A., Phelan, J., Temple-Smith, P_D. and Sofronidis, G. (1995), Investigation of mul- tiple paternity within litters of the brush-tailed phascogale (Phascagale tapoatafa). Proceedings of the 41st Annual Meeting of the Australian Mammal Society, Townsville, Queensland, Moller, A.P. (1988). Ejaculate quality, testis size and sperm competition in primates. Journal of Human Evolution 17, 479-488 63 Contributions Moller, AP (1989). Ejaculate quality, testes size and sperm production in mammals. Functional Ecology 3, 91-96. Parker, G.A. (1970). Sperm competition and its evolu- tionary consequences in insects, Brolozical Reviews 45, 526-567, Racey, P.A. (1979). The prolonged storage and sur- vival of spermatozoa in Chiroptera. Journal of Reproduction and Fertility 56, 391-402. Rodger, J.C. and Bedford, J.M. (1982). Induction of oestrus, recovery of gametes and the timing of fertili- sation events in the opossum, Didelphis virginiana Journal of Reproduction and Fertility 64, 159-169. Rose, R.W., Nevison, C.M. and Dixson, A.F. (1997). Testis weight, body weight, and mating systems In marsupials and monotremes, Journal of Zoology 243, 523-532. Rudd, C.D. (1994). Sexual behaviour of male and female tammar wallabies (Macropus eugenil) at post- partum oestrus. Journal of Zoology 232, 151-162. Scott, M.P. and Tan, T.N. (1985). A radio-tracer tech- nique for the determination of male mating success in natural populations. Behavioural Ecology and Sacto- biology 17, 29-33. Seebeck, J.H. and Rose, R,W. (1989), Potoroidae. /n: ‘Fauna of Australia Vol 1b Mammalia’, pp. 716-739. Eds D.W. Walton and B.J. Richardson. (Australian Government Publishing Service: Canberra), Selwood, L. and McCallum, F. (1987), Relationship between longevity of spermatozoa after insemination and the percentage of normal embryos in brown mar- supial mice (An/echinus stuartii), Journal of Reproduction and Fertility 79, 495-503, Sharman. G.B. and Calaby, J.H. (1964). Reproductive behaviour in the red kangaroo, Megaleta rufa,in cap- tivity. Wildlife Research 9, 58-85. Shimmin, G.A, (1996). Mating behaviour in the brown marsupial mice (Antechinus stuartii), 42nd Australian Mammal Society Meeting, Melbourne, Victoria. Shimmin, G.A, (1998). Sperm competition in brown marsupial mice (Amfechinus stuartti: southern form): An investigation into reproductive fitness, mating behaviour, sperm transport and siring success. (Unpublished PhD Thesis, Monash University, Clayton, Victoria, Australia.) Shimmin, G.A., Taggart, D.A. and Temple-Smith, P.D. (1997), The effects of mating behaviour on sperm SUBSCRIPTION First Member Metropolitan Concessional (pensioner/student/unemployed) Country (more than 50km from GPO) Junior (under 18) Additional Members Adult Junior Institutional Australian Institutions Overseas Institutions Schools/Clubs 64 transport, male siting success and reproductive fit- ness in the brown marsupial mouse (Aatechinus stu- artii), 28th Meeting of the Australian Soctety for Reproductive Biology, Canberra, ACT- Short, R.V. (1979). Sexual selection and its component parts, somatic and genital selection as illustrated by man and the great apes. Advances in the Study of Behaviour 9, 131-158. Stoddart, E. (1966) Management and behaviour of breeding groups of the marsupial Perameles nasuta Geoffroy in captivity. Australian Journal of Zoology 14, 611-623. Stoddart, E. (1977). Breeding and behaviour of Australian bandicoots. Jn ‘The biology of marsupi- als’, pp. 179-191, Eds B. Stonehouse and D. Gilmore. (MaeMillian Press: London). Taggart, D.A. and Temple-Smith, P_D. (1991) Transport and storage of spermatozoa in the female reproductive tract of the brown marsupial mouse, Antechinus stuartii (Dasyuridae). Journal of Reproduction and Fertility 93, 97-110. Taggart, D.A., Steele, V.R,, Schultz, D., Temple- Smith, P.D., Dibben, R. and Dibben, J. (1997). Semen collection and cryopreservation in the south- em hairy-nosed wombat Lasiorhinus latifrons; impli- cations for conservation of the northern hairy-nosed wombat Lasiorhinus kreffiii, In ‘Wombats’, Chap 17, pp. 195-206. Eds R. Wells and P.A, Pridmore (Surrey Beatty and Sons; Chipping Norton), Taggart, D.A., Breed, W.G., Temple-Smith, P.D., Purvis, A. and Shimmin, G. (1998), Reproduction, mating strategies and sperm competition in marsupi- als and monotremes, /n ‘Sperm competition and sex- ual selection’, Chap 15, pp. 623-665. Eds T.R- Birkhead and A. Moller). (Academic Press: London). Tyndale-Biscoe, C.H. and Rodger, J.C. (1978). Differential transport of spermatozoa into the two sides of the genital tract of a monovular marsupial, the tammar wallaby (Macropus eugenii), Journal of Reproduction and Fertility 52, 37-43. Tyndale-Biscoe, C,H. and Renfree, M,B. (1987) “Reproductive physiology of marsupials’. (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge). Watson, D.M., Croft, D,B. and Crozier, R.H. (1992). Paternity exclusion and dominance in captive red- necked wallabies, Macroepus rufogriseus (Marsupialia: Macropodidae). Australian Mammalogy 15, 31-36. RATES for 1999 Year Half-Year $40 $20 $30 $15 $30 $15 $15 $7 $15 $15 $5 $5 $55 AU$65 $35 Send to: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. The Victorian Naturalist Contributions Contributions A Rare Sighting of the Common Dolphin Delphinus delphis in Port Phillip Bay, Victoria Carol Scarpaci', Stephen W. Bigger’, Troy A. Saville’’and Dayanthi Nugegoda'? Abstract This paper reports a sighting of two Common Dolphins De/phinus delphis off Blairgowrie in Port Phillip Bay, Victoria. Once the dolphins were sighted they were continously observed using an instanteous sampling technique to document focal group activity, The Common Dolphins were con- tinously observed for a total of four hours. The preferred shore distance of these Common Dolphins was 150 m ina water depth of 10-15 m. The most common behaviour observed was feeding behav- iour (87.5%) followed by social behaviour (10.4%) and travel behaviour (2.1%). Two whistles and one echolocation pulse were recorded during the observation period. (/he Victorian Naturalist 116 (2), 1999, 65-67). Introduction On 15" November 1995, an opportunistic sighting of two adult Common Dolphins Delphinus delphis was Blairgowrie in Port Phillip Bay, Victoria (38°21.5°S, 144°46°E) (Fig. 1). The sight- ing occurred during a field study on Bottlenose Dolphins 7ursiops truncatus (Scarpaci 1997) in the vicinity of the Blairgowrie Yacht Club, which is recog- nized by the local fishermen as a relatively good fishing spot. The Common Dolphins were observed continously between 1000 and 1400. All observations made in this paper are within the Australian Whale Watching Regulations. A minimum dis- tance of 100 m was maintained by the research boat from the dolphins unless the dolphins approached the vessel of their own accord. Identification The dolphins were identified as the species Delphinus delphis (Fig. 2) on the basis of the following criteria: (i) a dis- tinct, triple coloration was observed on their body (Aguayo 1975) and this consist- ed of a ‘criss-cross’ pattern as proposed by Baker (1983); (ii) the dorsal sector of the cross was dark grey, the ventral sector was white, the posterior sector was grey and ' School of Life Sciences and Technology, Victoria University of Technology, St. Albans Campus, P.O Box 14428, MCMC, 7 lie Victoria 8001 > Author for correspondence: RMIT University, Department of Applied Biology and Biotechnology, GPO Box 2476V, Melbourne, Victoria 3001 * Moonraker Charters, 2 St. Aubins Way, Sorrento, Victoria 3943. * Current Address: Pet Porpoise Pool Pty. Ltd., P.O Box 532, Coffs Harbour, NSW 2450 Vol. 116 (2) 1999 made off the interior part was a creamish-tan color; (iii) the body size of each of the two Common Dolphins was considerably smaller than that of the Bottlenose Dolphin observed in the area, the rostrum was longer and the dorsal fins were relatively higher than those of the Bottlenose Dolphin, Data collected from a total of 10 strandings off the Victorian coast indicate body lengths of Common Dolphins range from 1.7—1.9 m (Warneke 1995) whereas the typical size of adult Bottlenose Dolphins in Australian waters ranges from Melbourne Port Phillip Bay 9 Blairgowrle Fig. 1. Map of Port Phillip Bay, Victoria, show- ing the region where the Common Dolphins were observed, 65 Contributions Fig. 2. Common Dolphin Delphinus delphis, showing the distinct ‘triple colouration’ of the body, Note: these animals are not the individuals described in this paper. Photo kindly supplied by David Donnelly and sourced by the Dolphin Research Institute Inc., Frankston. 1.78—3.26 m (Ross and Cockcroft 1990), the largest of which are found in Tasmania, southern Victoria and South Australia. These distinct features were eas- ily observed due to good water clarity and the frequent approaches made by the dol- phins towards the research vessel. According to Jefferson et al. (1993) two types of Common Dolphin exist: a long- beaked (coastal) and a short-beaked (off- shore) variety. Unfortunately, we were unable to distinguish if these dolphins were short-beaked or long-beaked. Behaviour and Vocalisations Once the Common Dolphins were observed an instantaneous sampling tech- nique (Shane 1990) was used to document the focal group. The two Common Dolphins were defined as the focal group. Focal group activity was documented at five minute intervals. The behavioural activities of the dolphins were grouped into three cat- egories: travel, social and feeding, as 66 defined by Shane (1990). Data on their location, distance from shore and water temperature were also noted. Vocalizations by the Common Dolphins were recorded using a hydrophone attached to a preamplifier. A standard tape recorder with a tape speed of 19 cm/sec was used. Recordings were later trans- formed into a frequency time wave (spec- trograph) on a computer work station with the aid of specialized computer software (Avisoft®) co-ordinated to a printer. The dolphins spent most of their time feeding (87.5%) in the area with little indi- cation of social (10.4%) or travel behav- iour (2.1%). This is unlike the behaviour of the Bottlenose Dolphins studied by Scarpaci (1997) in Port Phillip Bay. The dolphins remained an average distance from the shore of 150 m, in a water depth of 10-15 m; the water temperature was 19°C. A study conducted by Silber er ai. (1994) showed that Common Dolphins normally inhabit relatively clear regions at The Victorian Naturalist a distance greater than 15 km from the shore where water depths are usually greater than 30 m. The typical group size of the Common Dolphin can range from sever- al dozens to over 10 000 animals (Jefferson et al, 1993). However, on this occasion only two dolphins were sighted. Possible reasons for this may be: (i) the dolphins dispersed from their main group to forage: (ii) the dol- phins dispersed from the main group for reproductive purposes; (iii) the dolphins may have formed a solitary group of their own; (iv) this was not a typical dolphin group, or (v) Common Dolphins may not always be in large groups. Two whistles and one echolocation pulse were recorded during the observation ses- sion, with one whistle being clear enough to analyze. The duration of the whistle was 0.3 sec over a frequency range of 2.7 kHz to 4.0 kHz (Fig. 3). Generally, whistles of Common Dolphins start at 4 kHz and can sweep as high as 15 kHz, with harmonics to 30 kHz (Evans 1994). Echolocation pulses of Common Dolphins are extremely short in duration (20-50 sec), with energy levels between 15 and 100 kHz (Evans 1994), Comments The Common Dolphin is widely distrib- uted (Evans 1994) in all tropical and tem- perate seas (Warneke 1995). Common Dolphins are found both in shallow coastal environments and in deep oceanic water (Warneke 1995). Common Dolphins have been widely recorded in Australia, includ- ing Victoria, where it is the second most frequently stranded cetacean (Warneke kHz Le De Oe ye 02— 04 Seconds Fig. 3. Sound spectrogram of whistle emission by a Common Dolphin, Delphinus delphis, in Port Phillip Bay, Victoria. Vol. 116 (2) 1999 Contributions 1995). However, unlike the Bottlenose Dolphins they do not appear to be resident in Port Phillip Bay but rather a casual visi- tor (Warneke 1995). The two Common Dolphins reported here were observed on only one occasion. No further sightings of these or any other Common Dolphins occurred in the period from September 1995 to March 1996 and January 1997 to November 1998 during which continuous field observations of Bottlenose Dolphins were recorded in Port Phillip Bay. Acknowledgements Moonraker Dolphin-Seal Swim Charters for the essential provision of a research vessel, References Aguayo, A.L. (1975). Progress report on small cetacean research in Chile. Journal Fish Research Board Canada 32(7), 1123-1143 Altmann, J, (1974), Observational study of behaviour: sampling methods. Behaviour 49, 227-267, Baker, A.N- (1983). ‘Whales and Dolphins of New Zealand and Australia, An Identification Guide® (Victoria University Press: Wellington), Evans, W.E, (1994). Common Dolphin, White-bellied Porpoise Delphinus delphis Linnaeus 1758. /n ‘Handbook of Marine Mammals, Vol 5: The 15! Handbook of Dolphins’. Eds $.H. Ridgway and R Harrison. (Academic Press: London). Jefferson, T.A., Leatherwood, 8, and Webber, M.A. (1993). “FAO Species Identification Guide. Marine Mammals of the World’. (FAO: Rome). Ross, G.J.B, and Cockcroft V.G. (1990). Comments on Australian Bottlenose Dolphins and the Taxonomic Status of Tursiops aduncus. In ‘The Bottlenose Dolphin’.pp 101-128. Eds S. Leatherwood and R Reeves. (Academic Press: London), Scarpaci, C, (1997), The Distribution and Population Structure of the Bottlenose Dolphin (7ursfops trun- catus) in Port Phillip Bay, Victoria. (Unpublished Honours Thesis, Victoria University of Technology, Melboume). Shane, H. (1990). Behaviour and Ecology of the Bottlenose Dolphin at Sanibel Island, Florida, /n ‘The Bottlenose Dolphin’. pp 245-266. Eds S. Leatherwood and R. Reeves. (Academic Press: London) Silber, G.K., Newcomer M.W, Silber P.C, Perez- Cortes, H. and Ellis, G.M. (1994). Cetaceans of the Northern Gulf of California: distribution, occurrence, and relative abundance. Marine Mammal Science 10, 283-298. Warneke, R.M. (1995). Common Dolphin, /n ‘Mammals of Victoria, Distribution, Abundance, Ecology and Conservation’. pp 282-283. Ed. P.W. Menkhorst. (Oxford University Press: Melbourne). 67 Contributions Calomnion complanatum: an Endangered Moss found in Victoria David Meagher' A collection of bryophytes from wet for- est on Wilsons Promontory has yielded specimens of the moss Calomnion com- planatum (Wilson) Lindberg, one of only four mosses that are endangered in Australia (Scott et a/. 1997). This species is apparently common in suitable habitat in New Zealand (Beever ef al. 1992), but is known in Australia with certainty only from two previous collections: by W.W. Watts in New South Wales in 1903, and by Ilma Stone near Stanley, Tasmania, in 1980 (Stone 1990). An earlier record attributed to Tasmania (Whittier 1976, page 181) is thought to be an error (Stone 1990). The habitat in Tasmania and Victoria is the trunks of Soft Tree-ferns Dicksonia antarctica, and in New Zealand also almost always on certain tree-fern species (Beever et al. 1992). Because the shoots grow almost horizontally out from the tree-fern trunk, they are easily mistaken at first glance for other tree-fern mosses of a simi- lar size and habit, especially Rhizogonium distichum, R. novaehollandiae, Hymenodon pilifer and young shoots of Lopidium concinnum., Calomnion, though, is unique in having a row of almost circular leaves on the dorsal (upper) side of the stem (Fig. 1). Sainsbury (1955) mistakenly described this row as ‘ventral’. The yellow-green shoots are 10 to 15 mm long, erect, unbranched and very delicate, arising from creeping caulonema. The leaves are in three ranks, little altered when dry. Two rows (the lateral rows) are almost opposite on the stem. The ovate to obovate leaves of these lateral rows increase in size towards the stem apex, widely spaced on the lower stem but more closely arranged and rather oblong at the apex. The leaves of the third (dorsal) row are roughly circular all the way up the stem and are very variable in size, but tend to be larger towards the stem apex. The tips of these leaves are turned upwards, All leaves are strongly netved, the nerve reaching the apex in the lateral leaves and shortly excurrent in the dorsal leaves. The 'Cryptogamic Herbarium, The University of Melbourne, Parkville, Victoria 3052. 68 leaf margins are irregularly denticulate to entire. Cells in mid-leaf (similar in all leaves) are smooth and thin-walled, shortly rectangular to pentagonal but tending to be square or over-square near the leaf mar- gins. I have not seen sporophytes, but they are described in detail in Sainsbury (1955). Scott ef al. (1997) gave this species a ‘3E’ conservation status. That is, it is consid- ered to be in danger of extinction in Australia or is unlikely to survive if the factors that threaten its survival continue to operate, and it is highly localised but has a range of more than 100 km. As the Victorian population appears to be con- fined to small colonies on only five tree- ferns in an area where there is a consider- able risk of natural or unnatural distur- bance, this status is still appropriate. Acknowledgements Thanks to IIma Stone for an enlightening discus- sion on her collection of Calomnion complana- tum from Tasmania; Phil Wierzbowski of the Arthur Rylah Institute for helping to find and map the population: Paddy Dalton of the University of Tasmania for advice on his own collection and that of Gunn; and the rangers at Wilsons Promontory National Park for their support and assistance. References Beever, J., Allison, K.-W. and Child, J. (1992). The Mosxes of New Zealand. Second edition. (University of Otago Press: Dunedin). Sainsbury, G.O.K, (1955). 4 Handbook of the Mosses of New Zealand, Bulletin No. 5. (Royal Society of New Zealand: Wellington). Scott, G.A.M., Entwisle, T.J,, May, T.W_ and Stevens, G.N. (1997). A Conservation Overview of Australian Non-marine Lichens, Bryophytes, Algae and Fungi. (Wildlife Australia: Canberra), Stone, .G_ (1990). Nomenclatural changes and new moss records in Australia: including a description of the protonema of Calomnion. Journal of Bryology 16; 261-73. Whittier, H.O. (1976). Mosses of the Soctety Islands. (University Press of Florida: Gainesville, USA). Addendum Since | prepared this article for publication, Paddy Dalton has told me that Whittier’s Tasmanian record is probably attributable to a collection by R.C. Gunn held by the New York Botanic Gardens (NY), Paddy has also recently found another population in Tasmania, near Strahan (see Papers and Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania 132: 41-5), The Victorian Naturalist Contributions (a) lateral and (b) dorsal leaves whole shoot Fig. 1 Calomnion complanatum (Wilson) Lindberg: shoot (dorsal view), cells of lateral leaf in mid- leaf, lateral leaf (ventral view) and dorsal leaf (drawn from herb. D.A. Meagher 01636). For assistance with the preparation of this issue, thanks to the computer team - Alistair Evans and Anne Morton. Thanks also to Felicity Garde (label printing) and Michael McBain (web page). Vol. 116 (2) 1999 69 Contributions The Biography Behind the Bird: Grey Honeyeater Conopophila whitei (North 1910) Tess Kloot! Abstract This paper describes the naming of the Grey Honeyeater Conopophila whitei, the part played in its naming by the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria and a brief biography of Alfred Henry Ebsworth White after whom the bird was named, (/he lictorran Naturalist 116 (2), 1999, 70-72). Introduction Over ninety Australian birds commemo- rate individuals who have made a valuable contribution to our ornithology. Tracing the original publication that named and described a particular species is a fascinat- ing aspect of bird lore. The scientific nam- ing of a species is equally absorbing, as is the translation of the Latin and Greek names (see glossary). Priority is paramount in the naming of a new species, hence publication of the find. description of the species and explanation of its name are all important. The Grey Honeyeater Conopophila whitei, with its stronghold in Western Australia, inhabits dense spinifex and thickets of mulga and other acacias. An inconspicuous little bird, occupying mainly inaccessible areas, it was discovered at Lake Way, East Murchison District, on 19 July 1909 by F. Lawson Whitlock. It was officially named by Alfred J, North, Ornithologist to the Australian Museum, Sydney, in The Vietorian Naturalist in 1910. This article is No.7 in a series reproduc- ing the actual published note naming the bird and including a brief biography of the person after whom the bird was named. Previous biographies in this series cover George Arthur Keartland (Kloot 1997), Thomas Carter (Kloot 1997/1998), John Latham (Kloot 1998), Edwin Ashby and James Robert Beattie Love (Kloot 1998), Elizabeth Gould (Kloot 1998) and Keith Hindwood (Kloot 1999), As the naming of the Grey Honeyeater is associated with the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria it might be of interest to mem- bers to learn something of its story. ‘8/114 Shannon Street, Box Hill North, Victoma 3129 70 Naming the Bird ‘Description of a new genus and species of honey-eater from Western Australia.” (Read before the Field Naturalists’ Club of Victoria, 13" December, 1909). Remarks ... Lacustroica inconspicua would fittingly designate this modestly plumaged little Honey-eater inhabiting the vicinity of Lake Way, but in response to a request from the owner of the specimens [H.L.White], who has done so much recently to advance Australian ornithology, I have associated with it the name of his son, Mr Alfred Henry Ebsworth White, who, although yet young in years, | am informed is worthily following in his father’s footsteps. Although generically allied to Entomophila, White's Honey- eater is an entirely new and distinct species, having no near ally, and may easi- ly be distinguished from any other member of the family Meliphagidae inhabiting Australia.’ (North 1910), We now know it as the Grey Honeyeater Conopophila whitei (Christidis and Boles 1994) (Fig. 1). Fig. 1. Grey Honeyeater Conopophila whitei, Reproduced from ‘Atlas of Australian Birds’ (1984), M, Blakers, S.J.J.F. Davies and P.N Reilly (Royal Australasian Ornithologists Union, MUP Melbourne). By Richard Weatherly, with permission from the artist and Birds Australia. The Victorian Naturalist The Biography. ALFRED HENRY EBSWORTH WHITE (1901-1964) Alfred Henry Ebsworth White (Fig. 2) slipped into the history of Australian ornithology on the crest of the wave of his father’s fame. His father was Henry Luke White (1860-1927), the noted collector of birds’ eggs and skins. The H.L.White Collection of eggs and skins, in their very fine cabinets made expressly for the pur- pose, were donated by him to the Victorian Museum where they remain today (Whittell 1954). Alf, as he was known, was born at *Belltrees’, New South Wales, on 18 October 1901. After two daughters his father was so delighted at his birth that he decided to build a new homestead, the pre- sent day ‘Belltrees’. Wanting his son to follow in his own footsteps, H.L.White enrolled him in the [Royal] Australasian Ornithologists’ Union at the age of eight, the youngest member ever. Alf attended Geelong Grammar School and although he did well scholasti- cally his real love was cricket, a sport at which he excelled, He also acquired a rare knowledge of world geography. A reli- gious lad. Alf was awarded a divinity prize. At school during the 1914-1918 war he wanted to enlist but his father refused to allow him to put up his age. He stayed on Fig. 2, Master Alfred H.E. White of Belltrees Scone, September 1909. Reprinted from “The White Family of Bellirees’ (1981), by Judy White (The Seven Press, Sydney), with permis- sion from the author. Photo by S.W. Jackson, Vol. 116 (2) 1999 Contributions at Geelong Grammar School until 1921, then went on to attend Jesus College, Cambridge. By this time his prowess in the cricket world was well known. He played for Cambridge against South Africa, taking vital wickets and at the conclusion of the match was 53, not out. For his splendid efforts on behalf of the team he was awarded his cricket blue. Returning to *Belltrees’ in 1924, his father put him straight to work. The property was now a well established pastoral concern and with the increased work load H.L.White was very happy to have his son beside him. Alf married Judy Coombe on 20 September 1926, but by this time his father was too ill to attend the wedding (White 1981). Four children were born to the cou- ple, one son and three daughters. After the death of H.L.White in 1927 the full responsibility for “Belltrees’ fell on Alf’s 26-year-old shoulders, and from then on he devoted his life to the property. A strict, but just man, he earned respect from both friends and employees, Despite the depression of the 1930s he drove his staff to maintain high standards. Dictatorial and impulsive he rejected criticism. However, this stern facade concealed his shyness and gentle manner. A stickler for tidiness, Alf was constantly engaged in clearing away such things as unused workmen's cottages and sadly, valuable ornithological data from his father’s library. On the other hand he real- ized the historic value of some of the early buildings, and employed one of the best bush workers, a fencer who understood round timber and was brilliant with a mor- tising axe and adze, to restore an old slab store. Ultimately, ‘Belltrees* carried sheep, cat- tle and horses. During the 1950s, seasonal prices were good and the family enjoyed great prosperity, Over the desk in his office Alf had pinned his motto, “The best fertiliser of any country is the footsteps of the owner’ (White 1981). H.L.White had been strict with his chil- dren and Alf carried on this tradition with his own, although he mellowed in later years. When his eldest daughter asked her father’s permission to announce her engagement he suddenly realized how ‘Belltrees’ had been his first concern to the 71 Contributions neglect of family life. By about 1952 the “despotic camouflage’ (White 1981) start- ed to disintergrate and revealed a much kinder and approachable person. A very proud grandfather, he fired a twenty-one gun salute from the top balcony of the homestead to announce the arrival of the first White grandson! The last ten years of Alf's life were filled with contentment. “Belltrees’ had reached a very high standard of excellence; the stock, property, buildings and fences were in immaculate condition. He had attained his goal and felt that he could now dele- gate responsibilities to his only son, Michael. He and his wife travelled widely, both within Australia and overseas. Christmas, when the entire family gathered at ‘Belltrees’ were perhaps his happiest times. Alfred died suddenly on 6 March 1964. Although he made no real contribution to ornithology and will be remembered as the son of the famous Henry Luke White, he deserves a place in our ornithological his- tory, with his name perpetuated in the Grey Honeyeater Conopophila whitei. Glossary: Conopophila whitei - conops: gnat, philos: fond of, white: after Alfred H.E. White son of H.L, White. Lacustroica - lacus: lake, oicos: house. inconspicua - inconspicuous. Entomophila - entoma: insects, philos: fond of. Meliphagidae - meli: honey, phagein: to eat. (Wolstenholme 1926). References Christidis, L. and Boles, W.E, (1994). ‘The Taxonomy and Species of Birds of Australia and its Territories’, RAOU Monograph 2. (Royal Australasian Omithologists Union: Melbourne.) Kloot, T. (1997), Keartland, George Arthur. VORG Notes 32, 19-21. Kloot. T. (1997/1998), Thomas Carter, Bird Observer 781, 10-11 Kloot, T, (1998), Dr John Latham (1740-1837), Bird Observer 785, 18-19. Kloot, T. (1998). Gibberbird Ashbya lovensis [Edwin Ashby and James Robert Beattie Love]. Australian Bird Watcher 17, 297-300. Kloot, T. (1998), Elizabeth (Eliza) Gould (1804-1841). Bird Observer 791, 12-13. Kloot, T. (in press), Eungella Honeyeater [Keith Hindwood]. Australian Birds 31. North, A.J, (1910), Description of a new genus and species of honey-eater from Western Australia. 7he Victorian Naturalist xxvi, 138-139. White, J. (1981). “The White Family of BELLTREES’, (The Seven Press; Sydney.) Whittell, H.M. (1954). ‘The Literature of Australian Birds’. (Paterson Brokensha: Perth.) Wolstenholme, H. (1926). Appendix: Scientific names - notes and pronunciation. /n ‘The Official Checklist of Birds of Australia’. (Royal Australasian Omithologists Union ; Melbourne.) One Hundred Years Ago NOTES ON THE BIRDS OF THE BOX HILL DISTRICT By Robert Hall (Read before the Field Naturalists ' Club of Victoria, 13th February, 1899) ‘In this, the concluding paper of the series on the birds of the Box Hill district, | wish to bring under your notice the introduced birds of the district, which number in all seven species, Six of them, viz., the Thrush, Blackbird, Goldfinch, Greenfinch, Sparrow, and Starling, are imports from Western Europe, while the seventh is the Indian Myna, All are town birds. and pass their time in close proximity to the little townships of the dis- trict, especially Box Hill proper...... ‘I will conclude with a brief recapitulation of the birds dealt with in these notes. Altogether 113 species, including the introduced birds, have been referred to, besides which there are some 10 species which are only very casual visitors. Approximately, 43 of these reside with us all the year round, while 70 are migrants, arriving here with the advent of spring. Sixty species have been found breeding here. Grouping them accord- ing to their rarity, | would say that 42 are common, 43 less common, and 28 rare. Birds of prey are represented by 8 species: passerine birds, 88; parrots, 9; pigeons, 1; game birds, 2; hemipodes, |; and waders, 5.” The Victorian Naturalist XV, pp 156-159. April 1899, The Victorian Naturalist Tribute Jean Galbraith 28 March 1906 —2 January 1999 A Tribute Helen I. Aston! The death of Jean Galbraith, aged 92 years, marks the end of a lifetime of ser- vice to botany, naturalists, natural history organisations and gardeners, and the pass- ing of a truly loveable and remarkable woman. Jean was born at Tyers, near Traralgon, Victoria, on 28 March 1906 and lived there for most of her life. For 79 years she lived in her beloved home of ‘Dunedin’, only leaving it in July 1993 with great reluc- tance but with full acceptance of her need for care in advancing years. She moved first to a unit at “Yallambee™ village in Traralgon and then in 1996 to ‘Olivet’ nursing home at Ringwood, Melbourne, where she died peacefully on 2 January this year. From early childhood Jean displayed a great love of the natural world and a sensi- tivity and wonderment at its beauty and diversity, Her enjoyment of natural things and of life in general was intense, her enthusiasm infectious, and her hospitality legendary. Friends and visitors alike were welcomed to her home and those in trouble or in sorrow turned to her, She held a deep Christian (Christadelphian) faith which sustained her at all times and shines through in her writings. Although Jean had limited formal educa- tion. leaving school at the age of 14, she read avidly on wide-ranging topics from the classics to science. By the age of 19 she herself was already a published author, although her major works were still to come. Her enthusiasm for writing never waned, and besides the main gardening and botanical publications mentioned below she wrote poetry and seyeral books and many articles for children. Both of Jean’s parents were keen garden- ers, and gardens were also a major passion in Jean’s life. It was Jean and her parents who designed and developed the garden at ‘Dunedin’, which Jean tended and main- ‘7/5 Hazel Street, Camberwell, Victoria 3124. Vol. 116 (2) 1999 tained until prevented by age. She wrote about it, showed people through it, and treasured both its plants and the many birds which came to it. Although ‘Dunedin’ had to be sold out of the family in February 1997, it is a fitting tribute to Jean that it is now restored and maintained by the local purchasers, Max and Ollie Archbold, under the name ‘Garden in a Valley’, and opened to the public at weekends. Jean’s knowledge of botany and Australian native plants developed apace after she met the noted amateur botanist H.B. Williamson at the FNCV wildflower show in 1922, when she was only 16 years old. Struck by her keeness, Williamson offered to help and in The Victorian Naturalist 97: 116 (1980) Jean wrote how *... for the next ten years he identified plants for me almost every week and intro- duced me to Mueller’s Key. which I slowly learned to use.’ Jean joined the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria as a country member in December 1923. She soon became a frequent contrib- utor of articles to The Victorian Naturalist, contributing a total of 128 from 1925 onwards over a span of fifty-six years, Most of these have either birds or plants as their subject, but a smattering of titles encompassed other topics such as local areas, spiders, tree-frogs, and mammals. Particularly notable is a contribution of 43 articles on Australian Wattles which appeared during 1959 to 1964. Each article demonstrates Jean’s ‘plain English’ ability in descriptions and her own enjoyment and capacity in enlivening text with the feeling she held for her subject. Short notes which help to bring each plant delightfully to the reader’s eye follow each description, For example, for Acacia alpina she wrote (Vie. Nat. 79: 65; 1962) °...On the few high mountains where alone it grows ... it looks completely and cheerfully at home’, and for Acacia glandulicarpa (Vic. Nat, 79: 166; 1962) ‘the blossom is so abundant 73 Tribute that whole bushes look golden, like gay clouds along the dry roadsides”. Her final contribution to The Mietorian Naturalist was an important historical article titled Botanists and the ENCV = the first 30 years. (Vie, Nat, 97;114-120; 1980), When field naturalist’s clubs were formed in Sale, Bairnsdale and the Latrobe Valley, they increased the opportunities for participation with local naturalists, Jean played a key role in the establishment of the Latrobe Valley Field Naturalists Club (irst known as the Gippsland [’N.C,) in 1960, and was a founding member of it. She became a valued speaker, excursion leader, and mentor, and her involvement with this Club from its inception onwards was preatly instrumental in its develop- ment and growth. She was also a sometime lecturer at the Mt Beauty summer schools run by the Council of Adult Education. Although she bad no car, offers of trans- port were readily forthcoming and she travelled widely within Australia, She was a prolific correspondent with her many contacts, felt keenly the need for conserva- tion of natural areas, and was active in the preparation of conservation submissions to government authorities, As a practical measure for conservation, she donated land al Tyers for the first wildflower sanctuary established, in 1936, by the Native Plants Preservation Society of Victoria, Jean formed her own reference herbari- um of plants collected both locally and on her travels in all States, She shared her knowledge with both amateurs and profes- sionals alike and any plant which appeared unusual to her discerning eye was sent to the National Herbarium of Victoria for assessment. Many of her collections are lodged there permanently. She herself was a frequent visitor to the National Herbarium, working through the collec- tions as she compiled information for her botanical writings, and never arriving without a boiled fruit cake or similar offer- ing to add to the stalf tea table, Wriling was essential to Jean, who rev- celled in it. Her many contributions to The Victorian Naturalist have already been mentioned, She wrote gardening urticles for The Australian Garden Lover from 1926-1976 under the name of ‘Correa’, for Your Garden for some years from 1954 74 and more latterly, from 1985-1992, for The Age newspaper, Melbourne, ‘Those which appeared in the Garden Lover between August 1943 and June 1946 were repub- lished as the book 4 Garden Lover's Journal in 1989, each telling joyfully of garden happenings at ‘Dunedin’ and of the country life around. The full story of ‘Dunedin’ is beautifully told in Jean's book Garden in a Valley. First published in 1939, it was republished in 1985 to the delight of many, Undoubtedly Jean's landmark botanical publication appeared in 1950, when her Wildflowers of Victoria first came off the press from Colorgravure Publications, Melbourne, With short. simple-language descriptions of approximately 1000 species and 175 close-up, black and white pho- tographs, it filled a great void for natural- ists. The earlier work of E.E. Pescott, Native lowers of Victoria (1914), had become unobtainable and that of A.J, Ewart, ‘ora of Victoria (1931), was rare and expensive. In addition, neither of these works had the same easy-to-use text and illustrations of Jean’s volume, which was published in two further editions in 1955 and 1967 before being superceded by her greatly expanded and equally popular Field Guide to the Wild Flowers of South- Kast Australia (1977), Jean Galbraith was elected a foundation life member of the Society for Growing Australian Plants at its formation in 1957 and was also honoured with life member- ship of the Victorian National Parks Association, the Native Plants Preservation Society, and the Latrobe Valley Field Naturalists Club. In April 1959 she was elected an honorary life member of the FPNCV and in 1970 she was awarded the Australian Natural History Medallion for having conveyed “interest in natural histo- ry and conservation to the general commu- nity, and stimulated people to a greater awareness of our natural heritage’. She was only the fourth woman to receive this award since its inception in 1939, Her alertness has been responsible for the dis- covery of new plant species and of exten- sions of the Known range of rarer ones. lwo species of plants have been named after her, namely Dampiera galbraithiana (Jelopea 3: 204; 1988) and Boronia gal- The Victorian Naturalist braithiae (Muelleria 8: 24; 1993). In describing the latter species the author acknowledged Jean with this tribute: ° ... doyenne of Victorian botanists, ... whose collections and writings have contributed much to our knowledge of flora of the Gippsland region’. Much more could be written on Jean Galbraith the person, her life, and her con- tribution to others. I treasure the memories I have of her and feel very privileged to have known such a unique and selfless per- son. Warm and friendly, joyful in her Christian faith, generous, cheerful, com- passionate and caring, yet ever-modest, she had a remarkable and endearing personali- ty which will not be forgotten by all those who knew her. Tribute Further Reading Anonymous (1999). In memory of Jean Galbraith. Latrobe Valley Naturalist 416: 1 Baines, J.A. (1976). Galbraith, (Miss) Jean. /n The Victorian Naturalist. Author Index 1884-1975 (FNCV: Melbourne). pp.1 28-133 Galbraith, J. (1977). A Field Guide to the Wild Flowers of South-East Australia. (Collins: London) Galbraith, J. (1985), Garden in a Valley. (Five Mile Press: Hawthorn), Galbraith, J. (1989). A Garden Lover’s Journal 1943- 1946. (Five Mile Press: Fitzroy) Hyndman, I. (1997). Jean Galbraith, a brief account of her life and work. /n Andrew and Sarah Galbraith and family. Pioneers of Beechworth and Tyers. (Bethel Publications: Beechworth). pp, 146-151, Landy, L. (Oct.-Nov. 1992). The lore of nature Australian Country Style, pp. 90-93. Latreille, A. (14 Jan. 1999). Botanist radiated enthusi- asm. Obituary: Jean Galbraith, 7he Australian, p.10. Nicholls, J. (1986), Two Gippsland naturalists Gippsland Heritage Journal |; 33-37. Swaby, A.J. and Willis, J.H. (1970). Award of the Australian Natural History Medallion. The Victorian Naturalist 87:297-298 Jean Galbraith, surrounded by the flowers she loved so much, in her garden at ‘Dunedin’ (the Garden ina Valley). Photo kindly supplied by lan Hyndman, Beechworth, Vol. 116 (2) 1999 75 Book Review A Rich and Diverse Fauna: the History of the Australian National Insect Collection 1926 - 1991 Murray S. Upton Publisher: CS/RO Publishing, Collingwood, Victoria, 1997. xx + 385 pp. RRP $59.95 From its inception, CSIRO’s Division of Entomology has concentrated on agricul- tural problems and pest species; its first two projects involved cattle ticks and ter- mites. It is a consequence of such applied research that a large collection of insects is accumulated. bringing with it a strong demand for taxonomic work, As it is now called, the Australian National Insect Collection (ANIC) is housed within the Division of Entomology and comprises about eight million specimens. This book tells the story of its first 65 years but, in spite of its subtitle, it imbeds the story of ANIC within the story of the Division, mirroring real life. It was not until 1962 that the name ANIC was gazetted and it took until 1980 before it moved into a ded- icated building. The first three chapters describe the inception of CSIR; its first Chief Entomologist. the brilliant but tempera- mental R.J. Tillyard: and the establishment of the entomological laboratory in Canberra. Thereafter the author arranges the chapters, not chronologically, but by topic and this can lead to some repetition. For review perhaps it is best to group the chapters into ‘collecting’, ‘curating’, ‘tax- onomy’ and ‘staff’. Early ‘collecting’ is covered in chapter 6, with chapter 7 being devoted to Bill Brandt's heroic efforts in Papua New Guinea. Chapter 12 details the collecting expeditions since 1960. Each trip lists the staff involved, the route taken, the hard- ships encountered and, occasionally, some of the important specimens found. *‘Curating’ in a very general sense starts in chapter 8 when the laboratory was set up. a curator appointed, policies established and the detail of storage problems overcome. Chapter 9 emphasises the debt which the collection owes to gifts from both amateur and professional collectors over the years. Absolute numbers are astounding with donations of tens of thousands of speci- mens from individuals. Some were immac- 76 ulately preserved while others were in poor array but containing valuable type speci- mens. This is the chapter that contains the stories of theft and mislaying of loans. Numerous departmental reviews, interna- tional pressures and interstate rivalries fill chapter 10, culminating in the recognition of ANIC and its place within CSIRO. Chapter 14 produces the new building and moves the collection into it. Taxonomy is intimately connected with applied research and the housing and use of the collection. There are examples in this book of biological contro! programs which did not work, or were not necessary. because the target pest was incorrectly identified. Chapter 5 contains lots of early taxonomic research projects while those undertaken after about 1961 are detailed in chapter 13. Also included in this chapter are the publication of CSIRO journals and the monumental /nsects of Australia, A lengthy discussion of the debate concern- ing the resting place for holotypes takes up all of chapter 15. In the context of the whole history of the Division and the Collection it probably takes too much space but the author's personal involve- ment is probably the reason for the bias. Finally, ‘staffing’ matters are covered in chapters 4 and 11, with the end of World War 2 marking the separation. Comings and goings of taxonomists and major events are faithfully recorded. Between each chapter, throughout the book, are valuable archival photographs of personnel and places. Ten appendices detail staff, donated collections, standing orders, grants, publications and surveys. A comprehensive bibliography is included. This is an important history to have been written and, as it was the author who gath- ered and systematised the ANIC Archives during his term as curator and manager of the collection, he was probably best suited to produce it. Nevertheless. some of his biases show. It is not difficult to see his contributions to ANIC and CSIRO were in The Victorian Naturalist the leading of field trips, manufacture of unusual equipment, and the minutiae of curation techniques. Close reading will reveal his subtle but political comment on the vicissitudes of both Collection and Division. Three last comments on style: the book does demonstrate a curator’s mentality: a reluctance to throw out any item (e.g. the travel allowance for the use of a member’s own bicycle was 2'4d per mile in 1930). Secondly, the first time a new player is introduced a potted biogra- phy of qualifications and prior experience is included. Perhaps they would be better included as another appendix as it does break the flow of reading. Finally, inclu- sion of an item in the index seems to work Information Kit Review by the rule that it must be a direct refer- ence to the CSIRO. Peripheral people and institutions miss out. If you have any interest in Australia’s entomological history then you should read this book, all the famous names are there and their struggles (against bureaucracy and funding cuts) and triumphs are repeat- ed periodically. It might be of some com- fort to know that current difficulties are not unique, and the fit tend to survive. The book has received a Whitley Award in the history of Australian zoology category. lan EGE Shy 56 Looker Road, Montmorency, Victoria 3094 Endangered Ecosystem Series Publisher: Victorian National Parks Association, 10 Parliament Place, East Melbourne, Victoria 3002 RRP $10.00 each or $24.00 full set (postage included). Looking after Native Grasslands and Grassy Woodlands It is not often as a teacher you can pick up a kit and get all the information you would need to prepare a teaching unit. This kit satisfies that requirement, As a primary teacher I find that this kit would satisfy my learning needs to guide students through the investigative process of establishing a sound basis of grasslands education. The action section, ‘What You Can Do’ is a particularly valuable resource. Many docu- ments suggest to take action but few give practical ideas of how to do this. The action activities in this document are rea- sonably simple to do and are readily avail- able for most teaching situations. The Native Grassland Site Visit Sheet would be difficult for most younger students. A teacher could easily adapt the ideas how- ever, and produce a sheet suitable for their students. The site visit information brochures included in the kit are an excel- lent excursion resource and relevant infor- Vol. 116 (2) 1999 mation could be rewritten to suit younger students. The kit itself would be an excellent resource for levels 5-7 secondary school studies in SOSE and Science key learning areas. The plant lists are an excellent basis for classification activities and would lend themselves to excursion activities such as writing dichotomous keys. The action sec- tion could be used as a stimulus for the for- mation of an environmental club practising grassland conservation, or as a unit of work concentrating on grasslands. VCE students would find this kit an excellent resource in the biology, environ- mental studies and geography areas. The information is excellent and the Contact and Resources list invaluable as a resource for further research. As is, the kit could serve as an excellent resource document for student research and would be great addition to any school or home library. | recommend this kit to any- one who is involved in, or is considering grasslands as a teaching unit. It has excel- lent information, great action ideas and what’s more doesn’t take an eon to read. 77 Information Kit Review Looking after Marine and Coastal Areas This kit is one of the most concise docu- ments I have read on the state of Marine Ecology in Victoria. At times it is rather depressing. As a resource document it would be excellent for teachers or older students studying the marine area. For VCE it would be a valuable starting point for research. The contacts and reference section is excellent. As a teacher I would use this kit more as a resource for myself rather than using it as a kit for students. While the information is excellent and students need know the facts, I feel some parts of the document are all ‘doom and gloom’ and would be better interpreted by educators. Students need to be empowered to act, not to feel action is a lost cause. If not interpreted properly some students may only see the negatives of this document, I found information sheets | and 2 partic- ularly informative. The concise descrip- tions of the terms and the types of habitats were simply written and easily understood. These would be an excellent starting point for any marine study. Unfortunately, unlike the other kits in this series, the Marine kit did not include a site visit sheet. These sheets may not always be suitable for all levels of students but serve as a guide for educators to pro- duce their own sheet, The information in the document and the site visit brochures are sufficient for teachers to produce their own sheets however. I would recommend this kit as a valuable resource for all teachers and VCE students and it would be a suitable resource to have in the teachers’ resource section in any library. 78 Looking after Box and Ironbark Forests and Woodlands Did you know that if there are enough trees to form a canopy that shades 30% or more of the ground it is a forest, If the area is less than 30% shade, the plant community is called a woodland? This fact and many more you will read in the Box and Ironbark Information Kit. Written in a similar man- ner to the Grasslands and the Marine and Coastal Kits, this I feel is an essential resource to any school library. Teachers from Prep to VCE would find this kit use- ful. A particularly interesting section | feel for older students was Information Sheet 9. This section covered some of the govern- ment legislation involved in the Box and Ironbark Forests. While the information was minimal, it gives a good overview of some of the legislation involved in conservation processes in Victoria. I found that 1 read this document with bird and flora identification books beside me. This made Sections 3 and 5 far more meaningful. Even though there is a refer- ence list in the document I would suggest a list of readily available guides to flora and fauna in Victoria would be beneficial and should be used along with the kit. The Box-Ironbark Site Visit Sheet is extremely helpful and could be used as an excursion guide for any teacher. The infor- mation sheets for the four park areas are excellent resources and could be utilised by teachers in many ways. My immediate reaction to this kit was one of I don’t know enough about these areas and need to do some more research, visiting and teaching about these limited and threatened areas of Victoria. For this reason, plus the fact that this, like the other Kits in this series is excellent, | would rec- ommend that it be purchased as an impor- tant resource in any teachers and school library. Barbara Sharp Education Unit, Melbourne Zoo, P.O, Box 74, Parkville, Victoria 3052. The Victorian Naturalist Legislation Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 1988 The following Flora and Fauna Guarantee Scientific Advisory Committee Recommendation Reports have been received. The number following each listing is the nomination number. Final Recommendations Reports Supported for listing on Schedule 2: Flora Daisy, Yellow-tongue Brachyscome chrysoglossa — No. 449 Fauna Bittern, Black /xobrychus flavicollis aus- tralis — No. 450 Bittern, Little /xobrychus minutus — No. 439 Crake, Baillon’s Porzana pusilla — No, 447 Kite, Square-tailed Lophoictinia isura - No. 444 Rail, Lewin’s Dryolimnas pectoralis — No. 446 Shark, Great White Carcharodon car- charias — No. 419 Tern, Caspian Sterna caspia — No. 443 Tern, Gull-billed Sterna nilotica — No. 438 Communities Devonian Limestone Pomaderris Shrubland Community — No. 429 Grey Box - Buloke Grassy Woodland Community — No. 434 Limestone Grassy Woodland Community —No. 428 Semi-arid Herbaceous Pine Woodland Community — No. 432 Semi-arid Herbaceous Pine-Buloke Woodland Community — No. 433 Semi-arid Northwest Plains Buloke Grassy Woodland Community —No. 431 Semi-arid Shrubby Pine - Buloke Woodland —No. 430 Not supported for listing: Gum, Yellow Eucalyptus leucoxylon subsp connata — No. 448 (significance of threats to the survival of the species not sufficiently demonstrated) Preliminary Recommendations Reports Supported for listing on Schedule 2: Flora Daisy, Dookie Brachyscome gracilis subsp. gracilis — No. 418 Donkey-orchid Diuris tricolor — No. 457 Duck-orchid, Grampians Caleana sp. aff. nigrita — No. 456 Greenhood, Robust Prerostylis valida — Vol. 116 (2) 1999 No, 458 Leek-orchid, Fragrant Prasophyllum suaveolens — No. 451 Liverwort Pseudocephalozia paludicola — No. 462 Spider-orchid, Dwarf Caladenia pumila — No. 455 Spider-orchid, Short brachyscapa — No, 454 Sun-orchid, Basalt Thelymitra gregaria No. 463 Sun-orchid, Winter Thelymitra hiemalis — No. 464 Swainson-pea, Downy Swainsona swain- sonioides — No. 452 Water-shield Brasenia schreberi — No. 437 Fauna Albatross, Sooty Phoebetria fusca — No. 442 Shark, Grey Nurse Carcharias taurus — No. 420 Communities Coastal Moonah (Melaleuca lanceolata subsp. lanceolata) Woodland Community — No. 460 Lowland Riverine Fish Community of the southern Murray-Darling Basin — No. 459 Not supported for listing: Fauna Albatross, Black-browed Diomedea melanophrys — No. 441 (Threatening process occurs in oceanic waters beyond Victorian jurisdiction) Albatross, Shy Diomedea cauta — No. 440 (Threatening process occurs in oceanic waters beyond Victorian jurisdiction) Albatross, Wandering Diomedea exulans — No. 423 (Threatening process occurs in oceanic waters beyond Victorian jurisdic- tion) Caladenia Items considered invalid for listing: Flora Swainson-pea, Red Swainsona plagiotro- pis — No. 139 (Already listed on Schedule 2, No. 109) Fauna Frog, Giant Burrowing Heleioporus 79 australiacus — No, 241 (Already listed on Schedule 2, No. 114) Invalid Nomination Promotion and protection of environmental weeds — No. 445 (Subject considered to be covered by The Invasion of Native Vegetation by Environmental Weeds Schedule 3, No, 360) Preliminary Recommendation Reports Supported for listing on Schedule 3: Potentially Threatening Processes Human activity which results in artificially elevated or epidemic levels of Myrtle Wilt within Nothofagus-dominated Cool Temperate Rainforest — No. 453 Incidental catch (or by-catch) of seabirds during longline fishing operations — No. 424 Other Documents A list of flora (including communities) protected under the Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 1988. Schedule 2 — list of taxa and communities of flora or fauna which are threatened. Schedule 3 — list of potentially threatening processes, An index of items nominated for listing that have been considered by the Scientific Advisory Committee and the status of the nomination. Items added to schedules of the Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 1988, Copies of all FFG documents are held in the FNCY library. The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc. Reg No A0033611X Established 1880 In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria OBJECTIVES: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian flora and fauna, Membership is open to any person interested in natural history and includes beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Registered Office: FNCV, 1 Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia, Postal Address: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, P.O. Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia, Phone/Fax (03) 9877 9860; Intemational Phone/Fax 61 3 9877 9860. Patron His Excellency, The Honourable James Gobbo, The Governor of Victoria Key Office-Bearers President: Dr TOM MAY, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra 3141, 9252 2319 Vice Presidents: DY NOEL SCHLEIGER and MR JOHN SEEBECK Acting Hon. Secretary: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, 1 Astley Street, Montmorency 3094, 9435 8408 Hon. Treasurer: Mr ARNIS DZEDINS, PO Box 1000, Blind Bight 3980. 5998 7996 Subscription-Secretary: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. 9877 9860 Editor, The Vic. Nat.: Mts MERILYN GREY, 8 Martin Road, Glen Iris 3146. 9889 6223 Librarian; Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130, AH 5428 4097 Excursion Co-ordinator. Mt DENNIS MELTZER. 8 Harcourt Ave, Caufield 3162, 9523 1853 Book Sales: Dr ALAN PARKIN, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130, AH 9850 2617 Book Brokerage: Mr RAY WHITE, 20 Alfred Street, Essendon 3040. 9379 3602 Newsletter Editor; Dr NOEI. SCHLEIGER, | Astley Street, Montmorency 3094. 9435 8408 Conservation Coordinator: Ms JENNY WILSON, RMB 2930, Euroa 3666. 5798 5535 Group Secretaries Botany: Mr RAY MACPHERSON, 8 Jean Street, Lower Templestowe 3107, 9850 4319 Geology: Mr ROB HAMSON, 5 Foster Street, McKinnon 3204. 9557 5215 Fauna Survey: Ms SUSAN MYERS, 17A Park Street, Hawthorn 3122. 9819 2539 Marine Research: Mr MICHAEL LYONS, 2/18 Stonnington Place, Toorak 3142. AH 9822 8007 Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 Schotters Road, Mernda 3754, 9717 3511 Printed by Brown Prior Anderson, 5 Evans Street, Burwood, Victoria 3125. The Victorian Naturalist Volume 116 (3) June 1999 — A RN eee Published by The Field Naturalist’ @lub-of-Vietoria since 1884 Naturalist Note A Bizarre Ant A most unusual-looking ant was collect- ed at Wilsons Promontory during the research weekend in October 1998. It was found in one of the traps set in the burnt heath site (38°54°21” S, 146°21°06” E). The distinctive features of this moderately- sized (c 5 mm), rust-coloured ant include: the form of the mandibles (parallel sided and very elongate), the spines and other protuberances on the trunk, and the heart- shaped head with strongly developed occipital lobes. The antennae are also unusual in that they only have five seg- ments instead of the usual 11 or 12. Erich Sacco has drawn the specimen (front cover of this issue) which illustrates these char- acteristics, The ant keyed out to the genus Orectognathus in the sub-family Myrmicinae. Additional information indi- cated that only one species of this genus was known from Victoria — O. clarki (Andersen 1991). While the appearance of this ant is bizarre, its feeding habits are remarkable. The species feeds on Springtails (Collembola) which it hunts with its mandibles wide open. Sensory hairs on the inner part of the mandibles are triggered when they touch the prey and the jaws close on the Collembola (Brown 1953). The strike is, of necessity, extremely rapid since the escape response of a Springtail species has been measured at 4 millisec- onds (four thousandths of a second) (Hélldobler and Wilson 1994). If the Springtails preyed on by O. clarki behave in a similar way, then this ant has to sense its prey and close its jaws within this time — speed indeed! References Andersen, A.N. (1991). ‘The Ants of Southern Australia - a Guide to the Bassian Fauna’. (CSIRO; Australia). Brown, W.L. Jr. (1953), A Revision of the Dacetine Ant Genus Orectognathus. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 13, 84-104. HOlldobler, B. and Wilson, E.O. (1994). ‘Journey to the Ants’. (Harvard University Press: Cambridge, Massachusetts, USA). E.J. Grey 8 Woona Court, Yallambie, Victoria 3085, which should be corrected. and underleat are x 100. Corrigendum The editor has received correspondence pointing out the following misdetermination The determination of the liverwort referred to in ‘The Biogeography of Pseudocephalozia paludicola R.M. Schuster; an Endemic Australian Liverwort’ by Jon Sago, (The Victorian Naturalist 115 (3), 1998, 84-86) is incorrect. The liverwort has now been assigned as Lepidozia laevifolia. Also, please correct the perianth mea- surement in Para. |, p. 84 of the article to 2 x 0.25 mm. The drawing on p. 85 is of Pseudocephalozia paludicola R.M. Schuster, but the magnifications are incorrect. The correct magnifications for the drawing of the leaf 82 The Victorian Naturalist Volume 116 (3) Research Report Contributions Naturalist Notes Book Reviews Corrigendum Erratum ISSN 0042-5184 The Victorian Naturalist 1999 June Editor: Merilyn Grey Effect of Fire Frequency on Plant Composition at the Laverton North Grassland Reserve, Victoria, by /. Lunt and J. Morgan.....84 Thin-skinned Tectonics: its Application in Western Victoria, DRED, TGVIOPA ..aoysspetetrssctetyertes tee eae toes Hees Tact Tac tvisetVipetetesteted 92 An Australian Sea Lion on Phillip Island, Victoria, by R Kirkwood, J Hibble Gnd lL. Jer ret... crsscvisecsevsstony tess eeseressass 98 Hydroids from Ricketts Point and Black Rock, Victoria, by J. Watson and the late D. MCINNES .0......ccsessccsecereecceteentteseenes 102 The Booroolong Frog Litoria booroolongensis Moore (Anura: Hylidae): an Addition to the Frog Fauna of Victoria, BY Ga PHLCSPUG ANE ID. TLUTULET soy cennn tx ercacphe-eetascittact eth abueaiss) sae 112 PROS TAT Re PATNI Pes a PEY taney erro ree neers eritersevtaews teas shores rezcesseTrcae 82 The Beetle Gondwanennebous minutissimus Kaszab (Coleoptera: Archeocrypticidae) — a First Record for Victoria, LES CEA en y yon ANT ey er eres fren eB eayee eee 9] A Forester’s Log: the Story of John La Gerche and the Ballarat-Creswick State Forest 1882-1897, by Angela Taylor, Getta eat GEST Yah eaten, See PE ERE, Pare Ty rr 97 Dawn Till Dusk: In the Stirling and Porongurup Ranges, by Rob Olver and Stuart Olver, reviewer C. Falkingham «0... 115 Moelumee sa Died SOS. Pp wOA HO Ose Acancas sccsceaces eee ernr yeh vier treeeerseee 82 VicsNg aaa Ss MLA? LOO 19.94 Orc dene ce geese ea jskee spe imen tah yseas cena HaDEF 114 oo ee le ee Cover: A bizarre ant, Orectognathus clarki. This ant is about 5 mm long. (See Naturalist Note on p. 82.) Drawing by Erich Sacco. Find us on the WEB: http://calcite.apana.org.au/fnev/ email: fncv @vicnet.net.au Research Report Effect of Fire Frequency on Plant Composition at the Laverton North Grassland Reserve, Victoria Tan D. Lunt! and John W. Morgan? Abstract The plant composition of two adjacent zones with different fire histories was documented at the Lav- erton North Grassland Reserve, in western Melbourne. One area remained unburnt for 17 years, from 1978 until 1995. The other zone was burnt six times during this period. Both zones were burnt 20 months before sampling in November 1996. The two zones were superficially similar in 1978, but differed substantially in 1996. In 1996, the rarely burnt zone was dominated by exotic species (49% cover ¢.f. 40% native cover), whereas the frequently burnt zone was dominated by native species (72% cover) with just 7% exotic cover. Nearly half of the species recorded (22 species) differed significantly in cover between the two fire zones. The largest differences were for the exotic Cat’s Ear Hypochoeris radicata (33% mean cover in the rarely burnt zone c.f. 1% in the frequently burnt zone) and Kangaroo Grass Themeda triandra (22% in the rarely burnt zone c.f. 63% in the frequently burnt zone). The density of live Kangaroo Grass tussocks in the rarely burnt area was only 30% of that in the frequently burnt zone. These diff- erences are assumed to reflect different fire histories rather than underlying environmental patterns. The Jong+term absence of burning has caused the death of many Kangaroo Grass tussocks and pro- moted many perennial exotic weeds. The need for frequent biomass removal in productive Kangaroa Grass grasslands is emphasised. (The Vietorian Naturalist 116 (3), 1999, pp. 84-90). Introduction It has long been known that extended intervals without grass removal (by burn- ing, light grazing or slashing) can lead to substantial losses of native plant diversity in many grasslands dominated by Kangaroo Grass Themeda triandra in south-eastern Australia (Stuwe and Parsons 1977: Scarlett and Parsons 1982. 1990). For this reason, most grassland management plans incorporate the need for frequent biomass reduction (e.g. Craigie and Stuwe 1992; DCE 1992). However, despite the widespread acceptance of this recommendation, few studies have docu- mented the long-term outcomes of failing to regularly remove grass biomass, The Laverton North Grassland Reserve, 20 kim southwest of Melbourne (37°51°S, 144°48°E) has been managed for grassland conservation since 1978. Grazing stock have been excluded during this period and the reserve has been intermittently burnt. From 1978 to 1995, all disturbances (ine- luding fire) were intentionally excluded from one small, triangular area of about 2.5 ha, which acted as a ‘control’ plot against which the effects of burning could be ' The Johnstone Centre, Charles Sturt University, PO Box 789 Albury, NSW 2640. * School of Botany, La Trobe University, Bundoora, Victoria 3083, 84 assessed. There were no obvious differences between the control and adjacent areas ini- tially (Bob Parsons, pers. comm., July 1998). The control area remained unburnt for 17 years, until it and surrounding areas were burnt in March 1995. Despite its small size and the lack of repli- cate controls, the long-unburnt area at Laverton provides a valuable opportunity to document the impacts of the prolonged exclusion of burning and grazing, especially given the existence of detailed knowledge about the management history of the plot and surrounding areas. In this paper, we describe and contrast the plant composition of the Jong-unburnt area and an adjacent area which was burnt six times during the past 17 years, and we discuss the relevance of these results for grassland conservation. Methods Two adjacent areas within the Laverton North reserve were examined, The ‘fre- quently burnt” zone was burnt six times after 1978: in March 1980, March 1983, March 1985, February 1987, 1990 (month unknown) and March 1995 (McDougall 1989; J. Morgan unpubl. data). By con- trast, the rarely burnt zone was burnt only once during this period, in March 1995, 17 The Victorian Naturalist years after reservation, Both zones were sampled in November 1996, 20 months after the most recent fire. Five, parallel, 50 m long transects were located 40-50 m apart in the frequently burnt zone, and five mm the infrequently burnt zone. Transects in the two zones were approximately 150 m apart. A 1 nv quadrat was sampled every 5 m along each 50 m transect, giving 100 quadrats in all (50 in the frequently burnt zone and 50 in the rarely burnt zone), In each quadrat, all vascular plant species were identified and the cover of each species was visually estimated to the nearest 5%. For data analysis, species with less than 1% cover were assigned a cover value of 0.5%, To assess whether the vegetation compo- sition of the two zones was markedly dif- ferent, the quadrat data were classified using the PATN analysis package (Belbin 1994). In this program, quadrats with the same species are grouped together, whilst those with different species are grouped separately, Cover data were first range standardised, and the Bray-Curtis associa- tion index was calculated. The flexible unweighted paired group arithmetic aver- age (UPGMA) procedure was used to clits- sify data, with default fs = -0.1 (Belbin 1994). To identify species and species groups which occurred more frequently in either zone, mean percentage cover was compared for cach species and group between the two zones using the non-para- metric Mann-Whitney U-test (Sokal and Rohlf 1981), To determine how fire management affected tussock attributes of the dominant vrass, the number of live tussocks, live tillers and inflorescences of Kangaroo Grass (scientific names are given in Appendix 1) were counted in five 0.25 m’ plots randomly placed in cach zone on 23 November 1996. Total plant biomass was recorded by harvesting all plant matter to ground level in six 0.25 m’ quadrats, and drying for 72 hrs at 80°C. Significant dif- ferences between these attributes were investigated using the Mann-Whitney U- test. All plant names follow Ross (1996), and asterisks before the scientific name indicate exotic species. Vol. 116 (3) 1999 Research Report Results The classification analysis clearly sepa- rated all frequently burnt quadrats from all rarely burnt quadrats, indicating that the vegetation of both zones was substantially different, The percentage cover of native and exotic species differed between the two zones (Table 1). The frequently burnt zone was dominated by native species (72% cover) with relatively little cover of exotics (7%), whereas the rarely burnt zone was dominated by exotic species (49% cover) with just 40% cover of native species (Table 1). Almost half of the species recorded (46%, 22 species) occurred at significantly vreater cover in one of the two zones (al P< 0.01, Appendix 1). Only one species, Kungaroo Grass, exceeded 5% mean cover in the frequently burnt zone, where it averaged 63% cover. By contrast, five species exceeded 5% mean cover in the rarely burnt zone: Cat's Ear * Hypochoerts radicata, Kangaroo Grass, Rigid Panic Homopholis proluta, Squirrel-tail Pescue *Vulpia bromotdes and Spear-grasses Stipa species, The exotic Cat’s Bar domin- ated the rarely burnt area with a mean cover of 33%, but reached only 1% mean cover in the frequently burnt zone. Despite dramatic differences between the two fire zones in the mean cover ot different species, the mean number of species in each quadrat (i.e. species richness) was similar in both zones (Table 1). On aver- ave, 10.5 species occurred in each quadrat in the rarely burnt area, compared to 9.6 in the frequently burnt area: although small, this difference was statistically significant (P< 0.05; Table 1). Surprisingly, given the substantial differ- ences if management history, there was no significant difference (P > 0.05) between the two zones in the species richness or cover of all annual species when pooled together, Furthermore, when assessed indi- vidually, most annual species occurred al similar frequencies in both zones. Only four species — Mediterranean Brome *Bromus hordeaceus, Oats *Avend sp., Lesser Quaking-grass *Briza minor and Subterraneum Clover *7rifolium subterr- aneum — had a Significantly greater cover in either zone in 1996, and all were more 85 Research Report Table 1, Mean species richness and cover of native and exotic species in frequently burnt and rarely burnt zones at Laverton North in November 1996 test: NS = not significant (P > 0.05); * = P< 0.05; Significance levels using the Mann-Whitney U- =P<0.001, Attribute Frequently Rarely Significance burnt burnt (P value) Mean % cover Native species 72.0 40.5 bier Exotic species 6.6 49.0) Lae Mean species richness Number of species 9.6 10.5 4 Native species 33 3.9 f Exotic species 6.3 6.6 NS abundant in the rarely burnt zone (Appendix 1). Only one geophyte was recorded, Common Onion-grass *Romulea rosea. This species occurred in all frequently burnt quadrats (mean cover 0.5%), but none of the unburnt plots. Whilst signifi- cantly more forb species were recorded from each quadrat in the frequently burnt zone (5.4 c.f. 4.0, P < 0.0001), forb cover was significantly greater in the rarely burnt zone (37% c.f. 6%, P < 0.0001), owing to the abundance of Cat’s Ear. Quadrats in the rarely burnt zone had sig- nificantly fewer Kangaroo Grass tussocks and tillers than those in the frequently burnt zone (Table 2), However, there was no significant difference between the zones in the number of inflorescences or tillers produced per tussock (P > 0.05). Mean biomass 20 months after burning was sub- stantially greater in the frequently burnt zone, but this difference was not signifi- cant (P = 0.0549); however the P value is close to 0.05 and suggests that a Type I error might be likely, and that significant difference may have been reported had more samples been collected. Many dead Kangaroo Grass tussocks and tillers occurred in the rarely burnt area, indicating substantial Kangaroo Grass mortality in the past. Discussion The frequently burnt and rarely burnt areas at Laverton North Grassland Reserve now have very different plant composi- tions, despite their superficial similarity at the time of reservation in 1978, The most obvious differences are the abundance of exotic species and the decline of Kangaroo 86 Grass in the area which remained unburnt for 17 years. Statistically, this sampling design is termed ‘pseudoreplicated’ (Hurlbert 1984); whilst the samples (quadrats) were repli- cated, the two treatments (fire zones) were unreplicated (i.e. there was only one zone for each fire type, rather than replicates of both treatments). This problem plagues many observational and experimental stud- ies in ecology (e.g. Wahren er al. 1994), This means that, whilst significant differ- ences in plant composition between the zones can be formally demonstrated, the reasons for these differences cannot be for- mally identified from the data gathered. Since only one unburnt area exists, it is possible that the differences between the burnt and unburnt zones were not necess- arily due to burning history, but could per- haps be due to underlying differences in soil type or initial plant composition. Such a problem highlights the value of including more than one ‘control’ site in a reserve, to increase the confidence that any differ- ences between the control and other areas were due to different management treat- ments, rather than to intrinsic site factors. Notwithstanding this statistical caveat, we are confident that the differences observed are primarily due to different burning histories rather than to underlying site factors. Firstly, there are no obvious differences in topography or soils between the two areas. Secondly, when the ‘con- trol’ area was first established in the 1970s, there were no obvious differences between the control and adjacent areas (Bob Parsons and Dale Tonkinson, pers. comms, July 1998). Thirdly, the boundary between the two zones is obvious, sharp, The Victorian Naturalist Research Report = SS ee ES — eee Table 2, Comparison of mean tussock attributes of the dominant grass, Themeda triandra, between the two fire zones in November 1996, 20 months after burning. Significance levels using the Mann- Whitney U-test; NS = not significant (P > 0.05); * = P< 0.05: ** =P <0.01. Attribute Frequently Rarely Significance burnt burnt (P value) Biomass (kg/ha) 4640 3490 NS No. tussocks / 0.25m* 11.8 3.6 ig No. live tillers / 0.25m-* 406 170 a No. inflorescences / 0.25m= 46 28 NS triangular, and clearly marks the fire boundary between the two zones, The long-unburnt vegetation is now distinct- ively different from grassland vegetation throughout the rest of the Laverton North Reserve, even though soil and drainage conditions vary considerably in other areas of the reserve. Furthermore. the decline in Kangaroo Grass in the long-unburnt area follows a similar trend to that observed at the nearby Derrimut Reserve, where the poor Kangaroo Grass health was directly related to fire history (Lunt and Morgan 1999a: Morgan and Lunt 1999). Finally, the long-unburnt area at Laverton North has been observed by many grassland botanists during the past 20 years. All those we contacted had no doubt that fire management was likely to be the principal reason for the substantial differences in plant composition between the two zones (Keith McDougall, Bob Parsons, Steve Platt, Neville Scarlett, Dale Tonkinson, pers. comms, July 1998). For these reasons we ure confident that. whatever minor dif- ferences in soils and initial plant compos- ition might exist between the two areas, long-term differences in fire management are most likely to account for the patterns observed. Kangaroo Grass mortality The long-term absence of fire (and other disturbances) led to a substantial decline in the dominant Kangaroo Grass in the rarely burnt zone. There were many dead tus- socks in this zone, and the density of live tussocks was only 30% of that in the freq- uently burnt zone. A similar decline of Kangaroo Grass in the absence of fire has also been found at the nearby Derrimut Grassland Reserve (Morgan and Lunt 1999), At Derrimut, dead grass from previ- ous years’ growth steadily accumulated Vol. 116 (3) 1999 until tussocks started to senesce after about 5 years and eventually died after about 10 years. The cause of death was assumed to be self-shading by old, dead leaves. Areas which had not been burnt for 11 years sup- ported extensive swards of dead Kangaroo Grass, only 25% of which survived when tussocks were belatedly burnt (Morgan and Lunt 1999). McDougall (1989) studied the long- unburnt zone at Layerton North in 1986 (8 years after the reserve was proclaimed), and documented the poor health of unburnt Kangaroo Grass tussocks at that time. Whilst McDougall (1989) described the small basal area and poor root development of unburnt plants, which were easily killed after trampling, he did not record any sub- stantial mortality of Kangaroo Grass and this appears to have occurred since 1986, This mortality has major implications for future weed invasions, since areas where Kangaroo Grass has died are likely to be prone to invasion by exotic species such as Chilean Needle-grass *Nassella neesiana (Lunt and Morgan 1999b). Elsewhere, we have suggested a simple method of assess- ing Kangaroo Grass health to help prevent such mortality occurring in other areas (Lunt and Morgan 1998). Exotic species A number of perennial exotic species — including Cat’s Ear, Yorkshire Fog *Holcus lanatus, Paspalum *Paspalum dilatatum, Buck’s-horn Plantain *Plantago coronopus and Ribwort *Plantago lan- ceolata — were abundant in the long- unburnt area in 1996, but were rare or absent in the frequently burnt zone (Appendix |). All of these species have expanded considerably since McDougall’s 1986 survey (McDougall 1989). For instance, Cat’s Ear was recorded from just 87 Research Report 1% of quadrats in the rarely burnt zone in 1986, compared to 100% in 1996, Similarly, Ribwort, Yorkshire Fog and Buck’s-horn Plantain were not recorded from either zone in 1986, but occurred in 92%, 66% and 18% respectively of rarely burnt quadrats in 1996. These perennial weeds grow vigorously in rank, undis- turbed vegetation, and their expansion is disturbing, since all are likely to be diffi- cult to control. By contrast, another group of exotic species (including the wind-blown daisies, Aster-weed *Aster subularus, Spear Thistle *Cirsium vulgare and Ox-tongue *Helminthotheca echioides) was more abundant in the frequently burnt zone than the rarely burnt area. These three species have increased in abundance since 1986 (McDougall 1989). The reason for this expansion is unknown but worthy of fur- ther investigation. Thus, whilst frequent burning did not prevent invasion of all exouc species, it did result in significantly less cover of exotic species than did fire exclusion. Many species of exotic annual grasses and forbs are abundant at Laverton North (and in many other grassland remnants). Consequently, the impact of different fire regimes on this group of species is of some interest. Perhaps surprisingly, given the magnitude of the differences between the two zones, there was no significant differ- ence between the two zones for most exotic annuals, The abundance of exotic annual species in both zones in 1996 (20 months after burning) demonstrates their potential to rapidly re-establish large populations from a persistent soil seed bank. Thus, long-term fire exclusion did not provide a suitable method for depleting these exotic species. By contrast, long-term fire exclusion proved an extremely successful method of controlling the exotic geophyte, Common Onion-grass *Romulea rosea. This species is abundant in many grassland remnants in south-eastern Australia (McDougall and Kirkpatrick 1994) and resprouts vigorously after fire (Lunt 1990). In 1996, Common Onion-grass was not recorded from a sin- gle quadrat in the rarely burnt zone, but was found in every quadrat in the frequent- ly burnt zone. This decline has occurred 88 since 1986, as McDougall (1989) recorded the species from 98% of frequently burnt quadrats and 89% of unburnt quadrats in 1986. Unfortunately, however, this small beneficial outcome was more than com- pensated for by the negative impacts of Kangaroo Grass death and the promotion of other perennial exotic weeds in the long-unburnt area. Generality of results This study has documented a number of adverse outcomes trom Jong-term fire exclusion in a native grassland, including the decline of Kangaroo Grass and the pro- motion of vigorous, perennial exotic weeds. These findings support much of the grassland conservation literature (e.g. Stuwe and Parsons 1977; McDougall 1989; Lunt 1991) which has stressed the need for frequent biomass reduction (i.e. grass removal) to maintain grassland val- ues. However, whilst earlier recommenda- tions have focussed on potential losses of native plant diversity, these results show little change in native plant diversity, but instead show an expansion of perennial weeds and decline of the dominant Kangaroo Grass. The failure to document major changes in native plant diversity probably reflects the landuse history of the Laverton North reserve. When the reserve was established in 1978, native plant diversity was low as a result of past stock grazing (many species occurred in the reserve, but few forbs were abundant). By contrast, studies which have recorded substantial losses of native plant diversity beneath dense grass have focussed on intact, diverse remnants (e.g, rail and road reserves) or more sensitive species (e.g. Scarlett and Parsons 1990: Morgan 1997). Presumably such losses may also have occurred at Laverton North had the area been diverse in the 1970s. How relevant are these findings to other grasslands dominated by Kangaroo Grass? Since this study was conducted at one site only, it is difficult to generalise to other areas. However, we have observed similar processes in other Kangaroo Grass grass- lands in western Victoria (e.g. Derrimut and Lake Goldsmith Wildlife Reserve), Gippsland (e.g. West Sale) and the ACT, The Victorian Naturalist Conversely, grasslands exist in these and other regions with a diverse native flora and healthy swards of Kangaroo Grass, despite not being grazed or burnt for extended periods (e.g. McDougall and Kirkpatrick 1994, p. 61). Clearly, further work is required to better predict where such problems are likely to occur in the future. We would suspect however that Kangaroo Grass decline can potentially occur in many productive sites (of moderate rainfall and/or soil fertility) where Kangaroo Grass can grow vigorous- ly to form a closed sward. Elsewhere, we would simply encourage managers to remain alert to the possibility of future grass mortality, and to assess grass health regularly (Lunt and Morgan 1998). Whilst the lessons learnt from the long unburnt zone at Laverton North are nega- tive ones, we do not wish to imply that the unburnt ‘control’ plot should never have been managed in this way. On the con- trary. The long-unburnt zone has provided valuable lessons in a relatively small area. Hopefully these lessons will not have to be re-learnt elsewhere. Acknowledgements This study was funded by a grant from the Victorian Grassy Ecosystem Reference Group, to whom we are most grateful, We also wish to thank the many botanists who provided informa- tion on the history of the Laverton North reserve, including Keith McDougall, Bob Parsons. Stephen Platt, Neville Scarlett and Dale Tonkinson, Bob Parsons and Neville Scarlett kindly commented on the manuscript. References Belbin, L, (1994). “Techical Reference PATN Pattern Anilysis Package’, (CSIRO Division of Wildlife and Ecology; Canberra). Craigie, V. and Stuwe, J, (1992), ‘Derrimut Grassland Reserve Draft Management Plan’, (Department of Conservation and Environment Victoria: Melbourne). Department of Conservation and Environment (1992), ‘Laverton North Grassland Reserve Draft Management Plan’. (Department of Conservation and Environment: Melbourne), Hurlbert, S.H. (1984), Pseudoreplication and the design Vol. 116 (3) 1999 Research Report of ecological field experiments. Ecological Monographs 54, 187-211. Lunt. LD. (1990), Impact of an autumn fire on a long- grazed Themeda triandra (Kangaroo Grass) grass- land: implications for management of inyaded, rem- nant vegetations. The Victorian Naturalist 107, 45-51. sunt, 1D. (1991). Management of remnant lowland grasslands and grassy woodlands for nature conserva- tion: a review. The Vietorian Naturalist 108, 56-66. sunt, 1, and Morgan, J. (1998), Warning: Kangaroo Grass dies from neglect. Land for Wildlife News 3(10), 8-9, Lunt, 1.D. and Morgan, JW. (19994). Vegetation changes afler ten years of grazing exclusion and intermittent burning ina Themeda triandra (Poaceae) grassland reserve in south-eastern Australia. Australian Journal ef Botany 47, in press. Lunt, 1D, and Morgan, J.W. (1999b), Can competition from Themeda triandra inhibit invasion by the peren- nial exotic grass Nassella neexiana in vative grass- lands? Plant Protection Quarterly 14, 51-56. McDougall. K.L, (1989). “The Re-establishment of Themeda triandra (Kangiroo Grass): Implications for the Restoration of Grassland’, Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research Technical Report No. 89, (Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands - Victoria: Melbourne. ) McDougall, K. and Kirkpatrick, J.B, (1994), “Conservation of Lowland Native Grasslands in South-eastern Australia’. (World Wide Fund for Nature Australia: Sydney). Morgan, J.W. (1997) The effect of grassland gap size on establishment, growth and flowering of the endan- gered Rutidasis leptorrhynchaides (Asteraceae). Journal of Applied Ecolagy 34, 566-576. Morgan, JW, and Lunt, LD, (1999). Effects of time- since-lire on the tussock dynamics of a dominant grass (Themeda triandra) in a temperate Australian grassland. Biological Conservation 99, 379-386, Ross, J.H. (1996). “A Census of the Vascular Plants of Victoria’, Sth ed, (Royal Botanic Gardens Victoria: Melbourne). Scarlet, N.H. and Parsons, R.F. (1982), Rare plants of the Victorian plains. /n “Species at Risk; Research in Australia’, pp, 89-105, Ed. R.H, Groves and W.D.L, Ride. (Australian Academy of Science; Canberra). Scarlett, N.H. and Parsons, R.P. (1990), Conservation biology of the southern Australian daisy Rutidosis leptorrhynchoides, In “Management of Small Populations’, pp. 195-205, Ed. T.W, Clark and J,H, Seebeck. (Chicago Zoological Society; Mlinois). Sokal, R.R. and Rohlf, F.J, (L981), “Biometry”. 2nd ed, (W.H. Freeman and Co.: New York), Stuwe, J. and Parsons, R.F. (1977), Themeda australis grasslands on the Basalt Plains, Victoria: floristics and management effects. Australian Journal of Ecology 2. 467-476. Wahren, C-H,A,, Papst. W.A. and Williams, R.J, (1994). Long-term vegetation change in relation to cattle grazing in subalpine grassland and heathland on the Bogong High Plains; an analysis of vegetation records from 1945 to 1994, Australian Journal of Botany 42, 607-39, 4 89 Research Report Appendix 1, Percentage frequency and mean percentage cover of all plant species in the frequently burnt (freq. burnt) and rarely burnt zones of the Laverton North Grassland Reserve in November 1996. Asterisks before the scientific name denote exotic species. Differences in mean % cover were determined using Mann-Whitney U-tests, Values are highlighted where P < 0,01. Significance ley- els: NS = not significant (P > 0,05); * =P < 0.05; ** =P <0.01; *** = P< 0.001. Species Acaena echinata Agrostis aemula Agrostis avenacea ¥Anagallis minima Asperula scoparia "Aster subulatus “Avena species "Brisa maxima “Briza minor "Bromus hordeaceus Carex breviculmis *Centaurium tenuiflorum "Cirsium vulgare Convolvulus erubescens *Conyza bonariensis *Cynodon dactylon *Cyperus tenellus Danthonia species Deyeunia quadriseta Dichelachne crinita Elymus scabrus Epilobium billardierianum Eryngium ovinum "Euchiton species *Gamochaeta purpurea *Helminthotheca echioides “Holcus lanatus Homopholis proluta Common name Sheep's Burr Purplish Blown Grass Common Blown Grass Chaffweed Prickly Woodruff Aster-weed Oat Large Quaking-grass Lesser Quaking-grass Soft Brome Short-stem Sedge Branched Centaury Spear Thistle Pink Bindweed Tall Fleabane Couch Tiny Flat-sedge Wallaby-grasses Reed Bent-grass Long-hair Plume-grass Common Wheat-grass Robust Willow-herb Blue Devil Cudweed Cudweed Ox-tongue Yorkshire Fog Rigid Panic *Hypochoeris radicata Cat's Ear "Juncus capitatus *“Leontodon taraxacoides “Lolium rigidum Oxalis perennans *Paspalum dilatatum Pimelea spinescens *Plantago coronopus *Plantago lanceolata *Romulea rosea Schoents apogon Senecio glomeratus Dwarf Rush Hairy Hawkbit Wimmera Rye-grass Grassland Wood-sorrel Paspalum Plains Rice-flower Buck’s-horn Plantain Ribwort Common Onion-grass Common Bog-sedge Annual Fireweed Senecio quadridentatus Cotton Fireweed *Sonchus ayper Stipa species Themeda triandra *Tragopogon porrifolius *Trifoliun subterraneum *Vulpia bromoides ‘Vulpia myuros 90 Rough Sow-thistle Spear-grasses Kangaroo Grass Salsify Subterraneum Clover Squirrel-tail Fescue Rat’s-tail Fescue % frequency Freq. burnt 0 16 60 4 2 94 4 6 70 20 4 0 0 Rarely burnt 2 0 66 Mean % cover Freq. Rarely Signif, burnt burnt (P value) 0.00 0.01 NS 1.84 0.00 ie 4,92 1.29 NS 0.02 0.01 } 0,01 0.00 0.47 0.18 0.02 0.33 0.04 0.00 0.35 0.46 0.10 0.31 0,02 0.26 day 0.00 0.02 NS 1.04 0.02 eh 0.11 0.23 TEN O11 0.03 * 0,00 0.02 NS 0.01 0.51 NS 0),04 0.07 NS 0.02 0.14 NS 0.08 0.00 i) 0.01 0.00 NS 0.19 0.00 ok Ast 0.04 0.06 NS 0.00 0.01 NS 0.01 0,00 NS 0.64 0.01 bibles 0.00 3.10 0.00 10.82 1.24 33.41 0.00 0.02 0.20 0.12 0,02 0,02 NS 0.02 0,03 NS 0.00, fae ee 0.01 0,01 0.00, 1.50 0.00 0.46 0.50 0.00 0.02 0.00 0,01 0,02 1.24 0.05 0.01 0.32 0.01 5.49 63.40 22.07 0.00. 0.10 0.00 0.07 ue 1.78 6.65 NS 0.00 0.02 NS The Victorian Naturalist Naturalist Note The Beetle Gondwanennebous minutissimus Kaszab (Coleoptera: Archeocrypticidae) — a First Record for Victoria A number of small beetles (<3 mm) that had been collected from pit lines in the Red Box Eucalyptus polyanthemos wood- land at Glynns Reserve, Warrandyte, dur- ing the FNCV survey of the invertebrate fauna, could not be identified. The key used (Moore 1980) only works satistactori- ly with beetles greater than 3 mm in length. In some cases, there were large numbers of these small beetles. for example 143 were collected in January 1997, [14 in July 1997 and 47 in September 1997. Since non-identification would have made the overall results of the survey less mean- ingful, help was sought from Dr John F Lawrence (CSIRO Canberra, Division of Entomology) in identifying two particular groups that made up most of the unidenti- fied specimens. Dr Lawrence was very helpful, and named the two species of beetles which comprised most of the unidentified speci- mens as Thalycrodes pulchrum (Coleop- tera: Nitidulidae) and a Nargomorphus sp. (Coleoptera: Leiodidae), Furthermore, he enthusiastically selected another minute beetle (brown, ca 2 mm), unidentified from the July sampling, which he identified as Gondwanennebous minutissimus. Dr Lawrence said that this beetle had been previously known only from New South Wales. ACT, South Australia and Western Australia (Lawrence 1994). Our specimen (Fig. 1) was, therefore, the first record from Victoria. Details of the Glynns record: Date, 12-19 July 1997; Location, Warrandyte, Victoria 37°44'12” 8, 145°11°42” EB; Habitat, Red Box Eucalyptus polyanthe- mos woodland; Collecting method, pitfall traps: Collector, The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria. Vol. 116 (3) 1999 The specimen has been lodged with the Museum of Victoria who also advise this is the first and only specimen from this fami- ly in their collections (A. Yen pers. comm.). This note reinforces two important lessons — the need to retain and label all unidentified species within an order, and how easy it is to overlook important mater- ial through lack of knowledge and skill. References Lawrence, J.F. (1994). Review of the Australian Archeoerypticidae (Coleoptera) with Deseriptions of a New Genus and Four New Species, /nvertebrate Taxonomy 8, 449-470. Moore. B.P. (1980), “A Guide to the Beetles of South- Eastern Australia’, (Australian Entomological Press: New South Wales). E.J. Grey 8 Woona Court, Yallambie, Victoria 3085, Fig. 1. Gondwanennebous minutissimus (about 2 mm). Drawing by Erich Sacco. 91 Contributions Thin-skinned Tectonics: its Application in Western Victoria D.H. Taylor' Abstract Thin-skinned tectonics has become the standard framework for interpreting the crustal structure of Victoria. Steeply dipping structures visible at the surface are no longer viewed as extending down- wards to great depths. Instead such structures are interpreted to have ‘grown’ or “peeled off from discrete levels in a crust composed of several stacked layers, the topmost being a “thin-skin’. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (3), 1999, pp, 92-96), Introduction This paper was written on invitation to explain the much used term thin-skinned tectonics, with examples from Victoria being used to illustrate the concept. Tectonics is the study of the structures in rocks and the broader geometrical architec- ture of the earth’s crust which develops in response to imposed pressures. Geology is a young science and many of the accepted ideas about how structures develop when imposed pressures deform rocks are rela- lively recent. For example, theories explaining how rocks fold and develop cleavages weren't well documented until the 1960-70s, and compressional (stack- ing) and extensional (segmenting) faults were poorly understood until the late 1970s and early 1980s. The recent wide- spread acceptance and application of the concept of thin-skinned tectonics has grown out of these basic understandings of how rocks and the crust deform. The new array of concepts has allowed a much more dynamic interpretation than previously - a paradigm shift. It is now accepted that large pieces of the crust may be transported around on accommodating structures such as weak or ‘slippery’ layers and stacked or emplaced upon other crustal pieces to form a composite crust of which the upper levels may be considered a ‘thin- skin*: hence the term ‘thin-skinned tecton- ics’. The process being somewhat analo- gous to a carpet being pushed across and rucking up over a smooth floor. The view that the deformed crust we see at a site today always represents the remains of strata once deposited close to that original site may also no longer hold true. The process of continental drift is now recognised as the mechanism by ' Geological Survey of Victoria, P.O. Box 500, East Melbourne, Victoria 3002, 92 which masses of rock formed in one place on the earth’s surface may be transported and amalgmated into another region which was previously far away, thus giving rise to “exotic terranes’ (e.g. Jones er al. 1983). This burgeoning knowledge has reyolu- tionised how we interpret the architecture of the earth's crust from the mapping of the 2-dimensional surface exposure. In the past, surface structures were extended to great depths into the underlying crust which was considered to be static and essentially deformed in place. This is the view expressed in the first comprehensive synthesis of the Geology of Victoria (Douglas and Ferguson 1976). Since then the concept of thin-skinned tectonics has been applied to Victoria (e.g. Fergusson et al. 1986) and incorporated into the revised synthesis of the Geology of Victoria (Douglas and Ferguson 1988). Since the revised geological synthesis was presented, widespread detailed and ongoing geologi- cal mapping of the state by the Geological Survey of Victoria (e.g. VandenBerg er ai. 1992; Cayley and MeDonald 1995; Taylor et al. 1996) and university investigations (e.g. Cox ef al. 1991) has filled in much of the detail only addressed in principle in the revised synthesis (Fig. 1), Western Victoria: an example of thin- skinned tectonics In the first synthesis of the Geology of Victoria (Douglas and Ferguson 1976) the deformed piles of deep marine sediments that comprise most of western Victoria were viewed as different sedimentary basins (depositional troughs) separated by highs of volcanic rock (Fig, 2). The troughs contain many kilometres of sedi- ments, thickened by folding, and cut by numerous faults. Across the goldfields of western Victoria much of the structure was The Victorian Naturalist Contributions Avoca Fault Fault Moyston Fault Deformed bedrock rocks Heathcote MELBOURNE Grampians Govermor Fault Major fault younger cover Fig. 1. Map of Victoria showing the position of the major faults across the west-central region and the position (A-A’) of the section lines presented in Figs. 2, 3 and 4, inferred from the distribution of graptolite fossils (small planktonic marine organisms whose diversification over time makes them useful for determining rock ages) which also provided an estimate of the off- set across large faults (e.g. Harris and Thomas 1948). The extent and geometry of the faults below the surface were unknown but were viewed as extending sub-vertical- ly to as deep as any cross-section could show. A synthesis of how the surficial rocks were deformed and what lay beneath them was beyond the scope of the geologi- cal knowledge of the time. By the second edition of the Geology of Victoria (Douglas and Ferguson 1988) the ideas and mechanisms of thin-skinned tec- tonics had been applied to Victoria. Rather than being in-situ, separate sedimentary basins the deformed sediments were now interpreted as being parts of the same large ocean basin amalgamated along major Vol. 116 (3) 1999 faults (Fig. 3). Movement along these major faults transported the volcanic rocks, fragments of the original ocean floor underlying the sediments, to the surface. Thus the volcanic rocks are no longer viewed as ancient topographic highs sepa- rating many depositional troughs but as the deepest parts of one great big trough brought to the surface by faults! The major faults continually expose the volcanic rocks, or the oldest sediments lying just above them. In the deformed rock pile these rocks generally now reside at mid-crustal levels of about 15 km, Since the faults are steep at the surface and keep bringing rocks to the surface from roughly the same crustal level they must flatten out and tap into this mid-crustal level which is called a detachment (Fig. 3). The flattening geometry of the faults is called a listric geometry and is supported by seismic imaging of the subsurface geometry of the 93 Contributions Mt Stavely axis Heathcote axis Mt Wellington axis Common legend for all figures. Deformed Intruded va creed a granites |___] 40 Km vertical exaggeration x 2 Old crust Volcanic oceanic rocks Unknown lower crust Section looking north along line A-A’ Small arrows indicate fault movement Fig. 2. Schematic cross-section of the crustal structure of western Victoria constructed from the first synthesis of Victorian geology, Note the unconstrained extension of surface structures to depth and the implication of in-situ deformation of all the exposed rocks. Note that the legend for Fig. 218 a@ common legend for all Figures. AVOCA HEATHCOTE GOVERNOR Section looking north along line A-A’ 40 Km vertical exaggeration x | Fig. 3. Schematic cross-section of the thin-skinned tectonic interpretation of the crustal structure of western Victoria as presented in the second synthesis of Victorian geology and updated by more recent mapping. Note a top layer of folded and faulted sedimentary rocks above mid-crustal detach- ment faults in the underlying voleanics which are occasionally brought to the surface. The nature of the deeper crust is unknown. Heathcote Pault Zone in which the major fault was shown to flatten at depth (Gray er al, 1991), Such major faults stack the stratigraphy and thus effectively shorten it, helping to accommodate the deformation imposed upon the rocks. In the sediments above the level of the mid-crustal detach- ment faults, the deformation is largely accommodated by the tight folds and cleavage visible in outcrops. How the shortening 1s accommodated below the level of the mid-crustal detachment faults is unknown but it was possibly thickened by a separate system of fault stacking, Geological mapping in areas not compli- cated by strong deformation shows that the 94 original ocean basin of western Victoria probably consisted of 3-5 km of sand-rich sediment deposited upon an ocean floor of volcanic crust that is known from modern settings to be about 6 km thick. Fossils and dating of radioactive isotopes show that this ocean basin existed from about 510 to 420 million years ago. Mapping of more deformed areas suggests significant thick- ening of these rocks during deformation by folds and fault stacking to form a crust about 30-40 km thick (e.g. Gray and Willman 1991), All this deformation was driven by plate tectonic forces which forced the ocean basin of western Victoria to be pushed onto the edge of the older The Victorian Naturalist Australian rocks to the west. The age of this deformation is constrained between the depositional age of the rocks and the intrusion age of later granites to about 450- 420 million years ago (VandenBerg 1976), a timing broadly confirmed by recent dat- ing of minerals that grew during the defor- mation (Foster et al, 1998). The Moyston Fault is the big fault which emplaced the oceanic basin of western Victoria against older rocks to the west (Cayley and Taylor 1998). This fault trends northwesterly through Moyston in western Victoria. West of the fault is the flat surface of the Dundas Tableland from which the Grampians Ranges protrude, To the east is the hilly country of the Western Victorian Uplands with the well developed Great Divide. Within this belt of rocks numerous faults splay up through the “thin- skin’ of folded sediments, with the biggest bringing the yoleanic rocks from mid- crustal levels of about 15 km to the sur- face. These include the Avoca Fault which trends northerly between Maryborough and Avoca and the Heathcote Fault Zone trending northerly through Heathcote. Smaller faults which bring up sediments from just above the volcanics also occur in Victoria, with many being recognised by associated zones of more intense deforma- tion caused by the fault movement, or by disruption to the distribution pattern of graptolite fossils. Goldfields such as Stawell often lie directly on such faults Contributions while other goldfields such as Bendigo and Ballarat occur in close proximity. It is gen- erally accepted that the faults acted as con- duits for gold-rich fluids generated at depth to rise towards the surface and be deposited in favourable sites during their upwards passage (e.g. Willman and Wilkinson 1992), The structure of the rocks which form the Grampians has also recently been inter- preted as being thin-skinned (Cayley and Taylor 1997). The tilted sedimentary strata are no longer viewed as a 7000 m thick gently deformed in-situ depositional trough. Instead, a sedimentary package originally only half this thickness was stacked by a complex fault system, proba- bly forming a high mountain range which was then partially segmented and pulled apart by a different, later set of extensional faults. These extensional faults again flat- ten out into a crustal level where a detach- ment fault separates the younger Grampians rocks as a thin skin over older, unrelated rocks below (Fig. 4). This defor- mation style in the Grampians is a different type of thin-skinned tectonics to the rest of western Victoria — one driven by extension rather than shortening of the crust. Conclusions Thin-skinned tectonics has revolutionised the way the deformation history and crustal architecture of Victoria is viewed. Whilst the surface distribution of rocks on the map face is little altered, the cross-sec- Victoria Section looking north, vicinity of position A ___4 15 Km vertical exaggeration x 3 Note: Topography extremely exaggerated 4 Mt William Range Serra Range MOYSTON FAULT DT7a Fig. 4. Schematic cross-section of the thin-skinned tectonic interpretation of the Grampians region. Note the thin layer of deformed Grampians rocks separated from older underlying rocks by a fat detachment fault. Vol. 116 (3) 1999 95 Contributions tional slice representing the layered crust with respect to depth is profoundly differ- ent. These ideas have been successfully applied to much of western Victoria where hew map coverage is nearly complete. Thin-skinned tectonics is also applicable to eastern Victoria and an overall synthesis of this still ongoing mapping in this more rugged country will shortly be available. References Cayley. R. A, and MeDonald, P. A. (1995). Beaufort 1: 100 000 map geological report. Geological Survey of Victoria Report 14, Cayley, R.A. and Taylor, D-H. (1997). Grampians spe- cial map area geological report, Geological Survey of Victoria Report 107. Cayley, R.A, and Taylor, D.H. (1998), The structural framework and tectonic evolution of the western Lachlan Fold Belt. Victoria, /1 ‘Mineral Systems and the crust-upper mantle of southeast Australia’. Eds D.M. Finlayson and L.E.A, Jones. AGSO Record 1998/2, 29-33. Cox, S.F,, Etheridge. M.A,, Cas, R.A.F. and Clifford, B.A. (1991), Deformation style of the Castlemaine area, Bendigo-Ballaral Zone: Implications for evolu- tion of crustal structure in central Victoria. Australian Journal of Earth Sviences 38, 151-170, Douglas. J.G. and Ferguson, JA. (1976). Geology of Victoria. Geological Society of Australia Special Publication 5, Douglas, J.G. and Ferguson, JA. (1988). Geology of Victoria 2nd edition. Geological Society of Australia, Victorian Division. Fergusson, C.L., Gray, D.R. and Cas, R.A.P. (1986). Overthrust terranes in the Lachlan told belt. south- eastern Australia, Geology 14, 519-522. Foster, D.A.. Gray, D.R. Kwak, A.P. and Bucher, M. (1998). Chronology and tectonic framework of tur- bidite-hosted gold deposits in the western Lachlan Fold Belt, Victoria: “Ar-"Ar results, Ore Geology Reviews 13, 229-250, Gray, D. R. and Willman, C. E. (1991), Deformation in the Ballarat slate belt. central Victoria and implications for the crustal structure across southeast Australia. Australian Journal of Earth Sciences 38, 171-201. Gray, D.R,. Wilson, C.J.L. and Barton, T_J, (1991), Intracrustal detachments and implications for crustal evolution of the Lachlan Fold Belt. southeastern Australia. Geology 19, 374-577. Harris. W.J. and Thomas, D.E. (1948). Geology of Campbelltown. Mining and Geology Journal 3(3), 46-54, Jones, D.L., Howell, D.G., Coney. P.J. and Monger. H.W.H, (1983), Recognition, character and analysis. of lectonostratigraphic terranes in western North America. Journal of Geological Education 31. 295-303. Taylor, D-H... Whitehead. M-L., Olshina, A. and Leonard. J.G. (1996). Ballarat 1:100 000 Map Area Geological Report. Geological Survey of Victoria Report 101, VandenBerg, A.H.M., Nott. R.J.. and Glen, R-A., (1992). Bendoe 1:100 G00 map area Geological Report. Geological Survey of Victoria Report 90. VandenBerg, A.H.M.. (1976). The Tasman Fold Belt in Victoria. Geological Survey of Victoria Report 1976/3. Willman, C.E. and Wilkinson. H.E, (1992). Bendigo - Spring Gully, Golden Square. Eaglehawk 1:10 000 maps geological report. Geological Survey af Victoria Report 93. Letter to the Editor Sir,—I was greatly pleased, when present at your conversazione last week, to hear Professor Spencer say that at last there was some reasonable chance of an early exten- sion of the buildings at the National Museum. Having waited so long it may seem rather injudicious to propose any Opposition on account of which the matter may be indefinitely postponed, but at the risk of so doing I would venture to suggest that the Field Naturalists’ Club should exert its influence in favour of the remoyal of the National Museum to a more central and accessible site, say at the Public Library, where there is room for an annexe, similar to the picture galleries, along the Latrobe-street frontage. Here a museum would be in close proximity to the existing literature, and thus permit of greater facilities to study. It may be said that the Musuem is required at the University for teaching purposes, but | think on inquiry it will be found that bio- logical and other schools possess nearly enough typical specimens, ind that if more 96 are required they can easily be spared from the National collection. The so-called assistants’ rooms at the Museum are a dis- grace to Victoria, and the whole of the accommodation is far behind that of the Australian Museum, Sydney, as | remem- ber it some years ago. Along with others I deeply deplore the death of the late director, Sir F, McCoy, but think that now, as there is a yacaney in the management. is the time to bring the Museum more within reach of the average citizen and student. —I am, &c., KANGAROO. Melbourne, 27th May, 1899 |“Kangaroo,” and doubtless other readers. will be pleased to know that the desirabili- ty of removing the Museum as suggested above was affirmed at a meeting of the trustees on the Ist inst., and at the same time Professor Spencer was appointed hon- orary director —Ep. Vict. Nat. | From The Victorian Naturalist, one hun- dred yeurs ago, Vol. XVI. No. 3, 1899. The Victorian Naturalist Book Review A Forester’s Log: the Story of John La Gerche and the Ballarat-Creswick State Forest 1882-1897 by Angela Taylor Publisher: Melbourne University Press, 1998. 224 pp., maps and photographs (black & white). RRP $29.95, The physical appearance of a forest, or any other type of vegetation, does not reveal the complete story of its past, Certainly there are visible clues such as the diversity of species, the density and age of trees and the presence of axed stumps. Other clues exist elsewhere—in the soil pro- file and in the memories and records of Aboriginal and European Australians, Angela Taylor has used the records of an early forester to provide some late nine- teenth century glimpses of a Victorian for- est. The forester is John La Gerche and the forest is the “open forest of mixed species of eucalyptus |which| merges with serried ranks of plantation pines’ near Creswick, where Australia’s first forestry school was established in 1910, La Gerche’s work in the 1880s and 1890s significantly shaped Creswick’s eucalypt forest and pine plantations. The forest between the goldfields of Creswick and Ballarat was one of many areas which, in the second half of the nine- teenth century, were reserved as Victorian State forests. In 1882 La Gerche was appointed Crown Lands Bailiff and Forester “to supervise the Ballarat & Creswick State Forest and to take legal proceedings under the 1869 Land Act against all persons found cutting or remov- ing timber in the forest’. Using the com- ments he recorded in his official Letter Books (into which he copied all his official correspondence - inwards and outwards) and his Pocket Books (in which he pen- cilled field notes while out in the forest) Angela Taylor has re-presented La Gerche’s perceptions of the forest. Executing his dual role as bailift and forester was difficult but essential. By 1882 the forest had endured three decades of exploitation to satisfy the needs of gold- mining and other European actiyities. Its Vol. 116 (3) 1999 regeneration and survival required the pro- tection of seedlings from marauding rab- bits and goats, and saplings from men seeking mine props and fuel. As well as attempting to protect the forest to allow its regeneration, La Gerche attempted to re- clothe hillsides stripped bare by miners and tested a wide range of tree seedlings. He established a nursery at Sawpit Gully, where he germinated thousands of seedlings including Blue Guim, Black Wattle, Golden Wattle and Radiata Pine, and established plantations nearby, John La Gerche was not a Club member, However, since Angela Taylor writes so engagingly about his work in the forest, this book may interest current FNCV members and other readers of The Victorian Naturalist who share my interest in forest history. [ thank Angela Taylor for applying her historical intellect to La Gerche’s Letter Books and Pocket Books and | thank those who ensured that these unique archival records were not lost. La Gerche’s plantations in Sawpit Gully are now on the Register of the National Estate, By the time you read this review, the La Gerche Walking Track* through them should be completed. My daughter, who is beginning university forest science studies this year, returned from a prelimi- nary visit to Creswick with the hot-off-the- press track leaflet from the Creswick Landeare Centre. Now you can enjoy read- ing La Gerche’s nineteenth century forest perceptions in A Forester’y Log and walk through the landscape which has been shaped by his efforts over a century ago, *Postscript. The Track has just won a Victorian Community and Local History Award. Linden Gillbank History & Philosophy of Science Department. University of Melbourne, Parkville, Vietoria 3052, 97 Contributions An Australian Sea Lion on Phillip Island, Victoria Roger Kirkwood!, Jenny Hibble* and Ian Jerret’ Abstract A weak. adult, male Australian Sea Lion Neophoca cinerea came ashore on Phillip Island, Victoria in June 1998, the first reported sighting of this species in eastern Victoria for over 100 years. The sea lion was suffering from a severe lung infection and was euthanased to reduce the possible spread of disease. Based on growth rings in its teeth, the animal was 12 years old. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (3), 1999, pp. 98-101). Introduction Australian Sea Lions Neophoca cinerea breed at colonies in South and Western Australia and have an estimated total pop- ulation of 9900 to 12 400 animals (Gales ef al. 1994; Dennis and Shaughnessy 1996). Although they were distributed more wide- ly prior to sealing activities in the 1800s (Warneke 1982), their currently known foraging range is restricted to the coastal waters of South Australia and southern Western Australia. Occasionally, though, individuals are sighted in Victoria (Menkhorst 1995), ‘Tasmania (Kirkwood ef al. 1992), and New South Wales (Fulton 1990, P. Shaughnessy pers. comm.) (Fig. la). Here we report on the first such sighting of an Australian Sea Lion in east- ern Victoria, as well as the death of the animal and its subsequent autopsy, which aimed to determine why it could have arrived im this area, Description of sighting During the afternoon of 6 June 1998, a ‘large seal’ came ashore at Sunderland Bay, Phillip Island (Fig. 1b). Local resi- dents saw the seal move up a steep track, across a road and into a residential area, and reported the sighting to the Phillip Island Nature Park (PINP). One of us (RK) identified the animal as an adult male Australian Sea Lion and estimated it to be 1.9 m long and 150 kg in body mass. It appeared thin and weak, but was able to return to the sea during the night, as evi- denced by its tracks across the beach the next morning. ' Phillip Island Nature Park. PO, Box 97. Cowes, Victoria 3922. Wonthaggi Veterinary Clinte, 290 White Rd, Wonthaggi, Victorta 3995, Gippsland Pathology Service, Bairnsdale Regional Hospital, Bairnsdale, Victoria 3875. . 98 During the afternoon of 16 June, a *2 m- long dead seal’ at Shelly Beach, Phillip Island (Fig. 1b) was observed and reported to the PINP,. The animal was not present when searched for by us one hour after the sighting. It may have been the underweight sea lion that actually was alive and capable of returning to the sea, In the evening of 17 June, the same sea lion that had come ashore at Sunderland Bay (identified by patterns of scars on its neck and shoulders) was found in a back- yard in Ventnor (Fig. 1b). It probably came ashore on Ventnor Beach, entered a creek behind the beach, swam inland about | km, then crossed 400 m of open farmland to arrive at the residential block, The sea lion did not change its position during the night and the next morning it appeared to be close to death, in the opinion of a yeteri- narian (JH). It was thin, could only snarl (without raising its head) when approached to within 2 m, and its breathing was laboured. We suspected the animal could have had a tuberculosis infection, which is known to occur in Australian Sea Lions (Cousins er al, 1993), Under the supervi- sion of Department of Natural Resources and Environment Officers (David Cass and Grant Griffin) the sea lion was euthanased using a shot-gun fired at the head from a distance of less than 5 cm. We took precautions to ensure non-trans- ferral of the potential infection; the ground where the sea lion had lain was doused in petrol and burnt, the sea lion and its body fluids were contained in a plastic sheet and transported directly to a 3 m deep burial pit. Also, all handlers wore disposable gloves and breathing masks, Prior to being buried, the sea lion was autopsied (by JH and RK), ils stomach contents were examined and The Victorian Naturalist Bass Strait Fig. 1. a) Locations of previously reported sightings of Australian Sea Lions in Victoria (filled boxes, from the Atlas of Victorian Wildlife, Heidelberg, Victoria), The Pages, which is the nearest Australian Sea Lion colony to Victoria, and Phillip Island. b) Locations where an Australian Sea Lion was sighted on Phillip Island in June 1998, several teeth were removed from its jaw for ageing. Results and Discussion Autopsy The sea lion had no obvious external wounds. Several teeth were missing and those present were worn, but there was no sign of a major infection to the jaw, which sometimes is apparent in beachwashed fur seals (RK pers. obs.). From our experience at autopsying a range of beachwashed marine mammals, the internal tissues appeared to be normal for an otariid, in all organs except the lungs. Three-quarters of each lung exhibited generalised lesions, with only the lower sections being intact. The lesions did not have the appearance of a tuberculosis infection, which causes hard, white granulomas in fur seal lungs (RK pers. obs.). Samples of lung tissue were sent to lan Jerret at the Gippsland Pathology Service, Bairnsdale, for histopathological and bacteriological examination. The sea lion’s stomach contained three, egg-shaped stones (700 g total mass, each Vol. 116 (3) 1999 Contributions New South Wales ~ Ne eet rset s 389308 Sunderland Bay 38°35S 145°108 | 145°1SE| 70-100 mm long), 16 cephalopod beaks and approximately 50 cartilaginous verte- brae from an elasmobranch. Cephalopod beaks were sent to Robyn Ickeringill (Museum of Victoria) for identification. No flesh was present in the sea lion’s stomach to indicate that it had fed in the few days prior to death. Several ascarid parasites were removed from the intestinal walls and sent to the Gippsland Pathology Service for identification. Laboratory analysis Macroscopic examination of the sea lion’s lung tissue suggested a probable bronchopneumonia. The tissue contained numerous pale areas, 2-4 mm in diameter. Microscopic examination revealed a dif- fuse neutrophil and macrophage infiltra- tion of the bronchioles and alveoli. There were multiple peribronchial and interstitial areas of plasma cell and lymphocyte accu- mulation as well as widespread atelectasis and multifocal intra-alveolar haemor- rhages. The diagnosis was chronic suppurative bronchopneumonia; the tissue 99 Contributions Fig. 2, A cross-section of a canine from the Australian Sea Lion that came ashore on Phillip Island. Numbers indicate growth rings in the cementum of the canine. changes were suggestive of a non-specific bacterial infection but with no evidence of tuberculosis, Stomach contents The occurrence of stones in the stomach of the sea Jion was normal (Walker and Ling 1981). Australian Sea Lions deliber- ately swallow stones that remain in their stomachs and presumably assist with digestion (Needham 1997). The cephalopod beaks included three lower Sepia beaks (cuttlefish), six upper and two lower Ommastrephid beaks (squid) and five unidentified beaks. Descriptions of Australian Sea Lion diet (Walker and Ling 1981, Gales and Cheal 1992) suggest that these cephalopods, as well as elasmobranchs which were repre- sented by the vertebrae, are normal prey for this species, The ascarid parasites removed trom the intestinal walls of the sea lion were identi- fied as Contracaecumt ogmorhinis, a com- mon parasite in Australian Sea Lions (Johnston and Mawson 1941). These para- sites may cause gastric ulcers in sea lions, but generally are considered to be of low pathogenicity. Ageing Teeth from the sea lion were sectioned and stained (hematoxylin and eosin) following the procedures outlined in Johnston and Watt (1980). A total of 12 growth rings were evident in the cementum of the canines (Fig. 2). Assuming the rings represented annual growth (as has been demonstrated for other otariids such as the Antarctic Fur Seal Arctocephalus gazella, Armbom et al. 1992), 100 the sea lion was 12 years of age. This is old for male sea lions, which rarely live more than 12 years (Stirling 1972). There appeared to be a change in the growth pattern of the canine’s cementum after the laying-down of the fifth growth ting (see Fig. 2). Australian Sea Lions mature at about five years of age and the changed growth pattern in the cementum may reflect a behavioural or physiological modification in response to maturation. Conclusions This paper describes the rare sighting of an Australian Sea Lion outside South and Western Australian waters, and the first record. since sealers’ accounts, of this species in eastern Victoria. In the 1800s, Australian Sea Lions bred at several loca- tions in Bass Strait, but sealers eliminated their colonies (Warneke 1982). Since 1973, 13 Australian Sea Lions have been record- ed in western Victoria, one in southern Tasmania and three on the New South Wales south coast (Menkhorst 1995 and unpublished reports to the Atlas of Victorian Wildlife, Kirkwood er al. 1992, Fulton 1990 and P. Shaughnessy pers. comm.). Like the Phillip Island sea lion, most sightings have been of large males, although some females also have been noted. The apparently rare visits to Bass Strait waters may be occasional wanderings by individuals away from the species’ nor- mal foraging range. Alternatively, Australian Sea Lions may forage regularly in Bass Strait waters, but rarely come ashore on coasts where they can be sighted. Australian Sea Lions are known to acca- sionally trayel inland. Individuals have been found up to 10 km from the coast (Wood-Jones 1925), so it was not excep- tional for the sea lion on Phillip Island to travel | km inland. The animal’s poor con- dition (bronchopneumonia and starvation), however, probably impared its judgement, which may have influenced its movement away from the sea. The frequeney of occurrence of broncho- pneumonia in sea lions is unknown, but it has been a common infection in other otari- ids that have come ashore in poor condition on Victorian beaches (Beasley 1998), In the present instance, old age may have reduced the sea lion’s ability to tolerate infection The Victorian Naturalist making it susceptible to the bronecho- pneumonia. This sea lion was euthanased because we suspected that it had a tuberculosis infec- tion. We recommend, however, that pin- nipeds that come ashore on beaches in southern Australia normally should be left alone. If the animal appears to be suffering or diseased, a veterinarian should inspect it, Euthanasia is a last resort to end undue suffering by an individual and/or prevent the spread of disease. Acknowledgements We wish to thank Pat Russell, Bill Mitchell and Salim Malik (Phillip Island Nature Park), and David Cass and Grant Griffin (Natural Resources and Environment) for assistance with handling the sea lion, Robyn Ickeringill (Museum of Victoria) for identifying the cephalopod beaks, and Frank Busana (Victorian Institute of Animal Science) for assistance with the tooth preparation. We also thank the Atlas of Victorian Wildlife (email: bjb@nre.vic.gov.au) for supplying records of sea lion sightings in Victoria, Peter Shaughnessy for his personal communication of a recent sea lion sighting in New South Wales and an anonymous reviewer for improving a draft of the manuscript. The sea lion was autopsied under NRE Research Permit No; RP-97-236. References Arnbom, T.A., Lunn, N.J.. Boyd, LL. and Barton, T. (1992). Ageing live Antarctic Fur Seals and Southern Elephant Seals. Marine Mammal Science UW, 301-313, Beasley, K. (1998). A review of seal rehabilitation at Melbourne Zoo 1987-1997. The Vierorian Naturalist 115 (2), 40-46. Cousins, D-V., Williams, S.N.. Reuter, R., Foreshaw. D.. Chadwick. D., Coughran, D., Collins, P. and Gales, N.T.B. (1993). Tubereulosis in wild seals and characterisation of the seal bacillus. Australian Veterinary Journal 70, 92-97_ Dennis, TB and Shaughnessy. P.D. (1996), Status of the Se Contributions Australian Sea Lion, Neophood cineree, in the Great Australian Bight, Wildlife Research 23, 741-754, Fulton, W.N. (1990), First record of an Australian Sea Lion on the eastern Australian coast. The Vicrovie Naturalist WO7 (4), 124-125. Gales, N.T,B. and Cheal, Awd, (1992), Estimating diet composition of the Australian Sea-lion (Neaphoca cinerea) from seat analysis; an unreliable technique. Wildlife Research 19, 447-456, Gules, N.T.B.. Shaughnessy, P.D. and Dennis. TLE. (1994). Distribution, abundance and breeding cycle of the Australian Sea Lion Neophocu cinerea (Mammalia: Pinnipedia), Journal of Zoology 234. 353-370 Johnston, T.H. and Mawson, P.M, (1941), Nematodes from Australian marine mammals. Records of the South Australian Museum 6, 429-434. Johnston, DoH, and Watt, 1.9, (1980), A rapid method for sectioning undecaleified carnivore teeth for age ing. Jn “Proceedings of the Worldwide Furbearer Conference, Frostburg, Maryland, Volume 1°, pp. 407-422, Rds JA, Chapman and D. Pursley, Kirkwood. RJ,, Pemberton, D. and Copson, G. (1992) The conservation and management of seals in Tasmania, (Unpublished report to Department of Parks. Wildlife and Heritage; Hobart), Menkhorst, PW. (Ed.) (1995). "Mammals of Victoria: Distribution, Ecology and Conservation’, (Oxford University Press: Melbourne) Needham, DJ. (1997), The role of stones in the sea lion stomach; investigauons using contrast radiogra- phy and fluoroscopy, Jn ‘Marine Mammal Research in the Southern Hemisphere, Volume |; Status, Ecology and Medicine’, pp, 164-169. Eds M- Hinde! and C, Kemper, (Surrey Beatty & Sons: Sydney), Stirling, 1. (1972). Observations on the Australian Sea Lion, Neophoca cinerea (Péron). Australian Journal of Zoology 20, 271-279, Walker, G.E, and Ling. JK. (1981). Australian Sea Lion Nenphoca cinerea (Péron, 1986). In “Handbook of Marine Mammals. Volume 1: The Walrus, Sea Lions, Fur Seals und Sea Otter”. pp. 99-118, Eds S.H. Ridgway and RJ. Harrison, (Academic Press: Londen). Warneke, R.M. (1982). The distribution and abundance of seals in the Australasian region, with summaries of biology and current research. J “Mamunals of the Seas’, FAO Fisheries Series 5, pp. 431-475. (PAO; Rome). Wood-Jones. F, (1925), “The Mammals of South Australia, Part 3. The Monodelphia’. (Government Printer: Adelaide) Australian Natural History Medallion Trust Fund The following donations were gratefully received during 1997-1999 Albury-Wodonga Field Naturalists Club $10 Helen Aston $85 Ballarat Field Naturalists Club $20 Field Naturalists Society of South Australia $25 Geelong Field Naturalists Club $20 Dr Elizabeth N, Marks $100 Queensland Ornithological Society $50 Royal Society of Victoria $300 Victorian Ornithological Research Group $50 Western Australian Naturalists Club $100 The fund relies almost entirely on donations, and the annual administrative costs are about $100, Expenses in 1998 were high. because we had four new medallions struck, which together with the presentation boxes cost $1280, Anyone wishing to muke a donation to this fund should make cheques payable to the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria, and send to the Treasurer, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, Blackburn 3130, The Australian Natural History Medallion, which was instituted in 1939, is awarded annually toa person who, in the preceding ten years, has made a significant contribution to the understanding of natural history in Australia. Vol. 116 (3) 1999 101 Contributions Hydroids from Ricketts Point and Black Rock, Victoria Jeanette E Watson! and the late Daniel E, McInnes? Abstract Daniel McInnes, naturalist and microbiologist (3/10/1906—24/9/98) left many notes but published few results of his observations over many years on the Hydrozoa from Port Phillip Bay. In this paper his research notes on hydroids collected during the 1980s are collated and edited. The paper describes six species of athecate hydroids, two of which are first records for their respective genera in Australia, two are Australian species not reported since their first description and four thecate species including one probably new species. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (3), 1999, pp. 102-111). Introduction Daniel McInnes, naturalist and microbi- ologist (3/10/1906 — 24/9/98) left many notes but published few results of his observations over many years on the Hydrozoa of Port Phillip Bay. During the 1980s he regularly collected intertidal and shallow water hydroids from the Melbourne seaside suburbs of Black Rock (37° 58° S, 145° 01" BE) and Ricketts Point (38° 00? S, 145°02° E) in Beaumaris. He found many hydroids growing on common seaweeds near shore and in tide pools on the rock platform, Species on which he found hydroid epiphytes were the green alga Ulva, holdfasts and thalli of the brown kelps Ecklonia radiata and Cystophora sp. and the red coralline alga Corallina officinalis. He examined his collections in the small laboratory and seawater aquarium at his home in the suburb of Malvern, The aquar- ium system consisted essentially of aerated glass tanks and an array of plastic contain- ers, Interesting specimens selected under the microscope were isolated in glass petrie dishes in the containers, Hydroids that particularly caught his attention were the small, cryptic species which have received little study in Australia. A detailed account of his collection methods and aquarium maintenance are given in McInnes (1982). He kept a behavioural diary of his aquari- um specimens, including copious weekly, daily and sometimes hourly notes and dia- grams of interesting specimens. (One such note plaintively asks ‘Oh! where has my medusa gone?’ An hour later according to his diary, the errant medusa was found hid- ' Honorary Associate Invertebrate Zoology, Museum of Victoria, Melbourne, Australia 3000, Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc. 102 den under algae.) Although his measure- ments and drawings are accurate, unfortu- nately he left no preserved or mounted voucher or type specimens, presumably because he continued observations until the specimens died. A difficulty I encountered in reviewing his data is that in many instances, he did not name the specimens under observation, providing only a reference such as ‘hydroid in red container 3°, Those specimens which he was able to name were usually correct to genus and generally to species; often, how- ever, these were old names now syn- onymiused in the modern literature. I suspect that his lack of rigorous scien- tific publication was a matter of diffidence and that he (quite wrongly) considered himself to be an amateur whose efforts in taxonomy would be unworthy of scientific recognition. As a tribute to his work | now try to set the record straight. | have been able to extract and summarise from his notes the following information: two species are first records of their respective genera from Australia: two species have not been reported in Australia since their first description and gaps in life histories of some others have now been filled. Because of insufficient information and unfinished sketches I regretfully exclude several other unusual athecate species. Three thecate species including one almost certainly new to science are reported and other common athecate and thecate hydroids he found on algae are listed. For clarity in publication it has been necessary to redraw many of his sketches from the microscope. In keeping with what I am sure would have been his wish, in this paper he is referred to simply as ‘Dan’, The Victorian Naturalist Subclass Anthoathecata Family Clavidae McCrady, 1859 Clava Gmelin, 1791 Clava sp. Fig. 1A Material Colony collected 7/3/85 from underside of Ecklonia radiata holdfast; colony sur- vived until 18/4/85. Another colony of many dozens of hydranths collected 8/4/87. Contributions Description Hydranths arising directly from a creeping stolon; stolon and hydranth pedicel covered by thin perisarc. Hydranth cylindrical, young hydranth with four oral tentacles, probably moniliform, 0.3-0.4 mm long but tentacles not in a whorl; hypostome clavate. Tentacles increasing in number to 18, scat- tered over hydranth body, older (distal) ten- tacles up to 0.8 mm in length, proximal ones shorter. Hydranth up to 2 mm high at Fig. 1A-G. A, Clava sp., extended hydranth. B-G, Rathkea octopunctata, B, extended hydranth with four tentacles and medusa bud, C, medusa bud, enlarged, showing spots, D, apical view of medusa bud. E, more advanced medusa with tentacle bulbs, F. medusa with newly extended tentacles, G, lib- erated medusa. Scale bar: 0.5 mm. Vol. 116 (3) 1999 103 Contributions maturity, pedicel about 1.2 mm long. Colour Hydranths colourless to grey. Remarks One stolon grew to a length of 8.5 mm. The number of tentacles on the hydranth increased from four to 10 over a period of nine days. During this time one of the hydranths was observed feeding on an amphipod. One of the problems encountered in rear- ing very small hydroid colonies detached from their substrate is inducing re-attach- ment to new substrata in the aquarium. Dan apparently successfully solved this with Clava by embedding the stolons in a blob of petroleum jelly on the bottom of a petrie dish, This may be the species listed by Dan as Turris neglecta Lesson (McInnes 1982). In the absence of reproductive structures and without information on the cnidome the species cannot be identified. There are no previous records of the genus Clava from Australia. Family Rathkeidae Russell, 1953 Rathkea Brandt, 1838 Rathkea octopunctata (M. Sars, 1835) Fig. [B-G Cytaeis octopunctata M. Sars, 1835: 38, pl. 6, figs I4a-g. Rathkea octopunctata- Russell, 1953: 137, pl. 7, figs 3-4, text-figs 65A-E, 66, 67A- B.- Southcott, 1982: 130, fig.4.20a, b.- Schuchert, 1996: 49, fig. 34a-c.- Watson. 1998. Material Colonies first found in 1982. Colonies collected in April 1986 were maintained in aquaria until November 1986, during which period the hydranths multiplied on glass to 30 - 40 individuals and at least two medusae were released. Description Colonies stolonal, hydranths arising from a ramified, creeping hydrorhiza. Hydranths pyriform to spindle-shaped, capable of extension to 0.3 mm, with four thread-like filiform oral tentacles up to 2 mm in length. Juvenile gonophores ovoid, 0.5 mm high and 0.3 mm wide, borne erect from stolon on a very short pedicel. Viewed from 104 above, the young medusa within the gonophore has four thick internal lobes, probably radial canals, and two central red spots connected by a thin red line (Fig. 1D). After four days the gonophore became vase-shaped with two opposite, protruding, thick tentacle bulbs; base of bulbs with red spots. At this stage the medusa commenced pulsing inside the gonophore. Over several hours the gonophore extended to 0.6 mm in length and the two tentacle bulbs became elongated into two long, filiform tentacles armed with nema- tocysts in the distal third; two more thick tentacle bulbs appeared opposite the origi- nal tentacles. The red spots, present at the base of each bulb, now enlarged into perra- dial vesicles. Several hours later, the medusa was released, At this stage the umbrella was balloon-shaped, 0.6 mm high and 0.4 mm wide, slightly thickened apically, with faint radial canals passing down the umbrella to the tentacle bases. A quadrangular manubrium extended more than halfway through the bell: mouth a simple broad disk. The gonophore remained as a trans- parent deflated sheath. The observations ended with death of the medusa. Remarks There are five known species of Rathkea medusae (O'Sullivan 1984), of which Rathkea formosissima and Rathkea octop- unctata have been reported from New Zealand (Schuchert 1996) and R. ectopune- tata from Port Phillip Bay. Australia (Southcott 1982). Of these species, only the hydroid stage of R. octopunctata has been conclusively associated with its medusa (Russell 1953). Watson (1998) recorded an infertile hydroid growing on a muddy bot- tom in the Geelong Arm of Port Phillip Bay and doubtfully referred it to that species. Dan’s sketch of the hydroid exactly match- es the description and figure of Rathkea octopunctata given by Watson (1998), The newly liberated medusa of R. octop- unciata from the parent hydroid has never previously been described, the smallest specimens taken from the plankton of the British [sles being about 1 mm in height (Russell 1953). Only adult specimens 2.5-4 mm high have been reported from the plankton of New Zealand (Schuchert The Victorian Naturalist 1996) and Australia (Southcott 1982). A puzzling aspect is the red spots, devel- Oping into prominent pustules near the base of the tentacles. As they occur on the tenta- cle and not the circular canal, these are not ocelli which, in any case, are excluded from the family definition of the Rathkeidae. No such structures are mentioned in descriptions of more advanced medusae; it is possible that these are lost as the medusa matures. The family definition of Rathkeidae also includes short oral arms on the manubrium and multiple sets of tentacles on the adult medusa. Increase in the number of tentacles is a common event in maturation of hydro- zoan medusae so it is equally possible that in this species the oral tentacles may also grow at a later stage of development. Until the report by Watson (1998) and the present account, the hydroid of KR. octopunctata was known only from some cultured specimens reared in overseas lab- oratories (Russell 1953. Werner 1958). This account fills a gap in the natural lite history of the species. Family Corynidae Johnston, 1836 Coryne Gaertner, 1774 Coryne sp. Fig. 2A Material Collected trom holdfast of Ecklonia radi- ata, 24/4/85, no other information. Description Part of a small colony, simple and sparse- ly branched, diameter of branch 0.25 mm. perisare almost smooth, reaching to base of hydranth. Hydranth 1.5 mm long. with an oral whorl of four capitate tentacles and (probably) 16-18 capitate tentacles scat- tered over body. Gonophores are fixed sporosacs scattered among tentacles; gonophore balloon-shaped, about 0.5 mm long with a short peduncle and thick clear pellicle; sex probably male. Colour Sporosac orange. Remarks The specimen bears some similarities to Coryne sp.1 of Schuchert (1996), small colonies of which were found on stones and other cryptic habitats in New Zealand. Unfortunately, without information on the Vol. 116 (3) 1999 Contributions cnidome of Dan’s specimen, no further identification is possible. This is the first record of the genus Coryne from Australia. Dicoryne Allman, 1859 Dicoryne annulata von Lendenfeld, 1884 Fig. 2B Dicoryne annulata yon Lendenteld, 1884: 490, pl. 17, fig. 30. Material Colonies collected 17/5/82, 10/9/82, 5/11/82. Another colony collected from red coralline alga 22/1/82. Description Colonies infertile. No information on hydrorhiza. Hydranth pedicel cylindrical, 0.6 mm long, 0.18 mm wide, perisare mod- erately thick, deeply annulated. Extended hydranth 1.3-1.5 mm long, spindle-shaped, with 16-18 distal filiform tentacles to 0.8 mm long, hypostome an open annulus. Remarks This is undoubtedly Dicoryne annulata described by von Lendenfeld from Port Phillip Bay. Dan left no information on the species other than the scale drawing of the hydranth and hydranth bud. The species has not been recorded since its first description. Sarsia Lesson, 1843 Sarsia radiata von Lendenfeld, 1884 Fig. 2C Sarsia radiata von Lendenfeld, 1884: 583, pl. 20, figs 31, 32.- Watson, 1978: 305, fig. 2A-D, Material Collected 25/4/82; no other information. Description Hydranth | mm high, arising from a stolon (not sketched), Hydranth with four oral tentacles and nine to 10 tentacles scat- tered over body; all tentacles long, capi- tate, capitulum armed with nematocysts. Medusa 0.7 mm long and 0.6 mm wide, on a short pedicel below proximal tentacles, umbrella balloon-shaped, with four radial canals and four long tentacles armed with nematocysts; velum broad, almost quadrate in shape, opening small, circular, Manubrium cylindrical narrowing to a simple mouth. 105 Contributions , + f r i J hud | Ff g , UTED f tf ff + 4 OD] 1 ft p + K hI ! ft ff : Ri | AD \ \\ .\ Ny Nake # % R RNE A y y yy yy WH H 2 a Sy « AV WaT Mt i 3 SK Whi B72 La Re VAM AY a = = YH ah yy x ee gt?! =, = Se \ \ ON cre S Fig. 2A-C. A, Coryne sp., simple branch with hydranth and sporosacs. B, Dicoryne annulata, extended hydranth and hydranth bud. C, Sarsia radiata, extended hydranth and medusa about to be released. Scale bar: A, 0.5 mm, B, C, | mm. Remarks This is probably the species referred by Dan to Stauridiosarsia producta (Wright), (see McInnes 1982: 163). Although he pro- vided no notes and his sketch lacks detail, 106 especially in relation to the basal perisarc of the hydroid, the species is clearly Sarsia radiata, previously reported from Port Phillip Bay by Watson (1978). The medusa was released in the aquarium. The Victorian Naturalist Family Aequoreidae Eschscholtz, 1829 Aequorea Péron & Lesueur, 1810 Aequorea sp. Fig. 3A-C Material Hydroid colony with medusa bud collect- ed 25/4/82; medusa released in laboratory from colony. Medusa collected 5/11/82. Dan noted (26/9/86), that the colonies had been ‘in the (petrie) dishes for years, giv- ing birth to medusae, and are the toughest of all hydroids, despite very cold to very hot weather and “crook” seawater’. Description Colony stolonal, hydrorhiza tubular, creep- ing. Hydranth and medusa buds arising on short annulated pedicels from hydrorhiza; pedicel expanding distally from base. Contributions Hydranth 2.5 mm long, spindle-shaped, body slightly swollen below tentacle ring. Hydranth with 12 probably moniliform ten- tacles 2 mm long, a large basal tentacle web 0.25 mm wide; hypostome circular. Cnidome of hydroid consisting of two size classes of nematocysts, probably isorhizas: 1) capsule bean-shaped, 7.5 tubule 350 um long. 2) capsule bean-shaped, tubule 100 um long. Medusa buds borne on hydrorhiza and hydranth pedicel, the more advanced bud 0.5 mm high and 0.4 mm wide, showing a well developed manubrium and radial canals. Medusa at release balloon-shaped, bell 0.6 mm high and 0.6 mm wide, with four radial canals and a cylindrical x 3.5 um 15 x 7.5 um, Fig. 3A-C. Aequorea sp.. A, hydranth and medusa buds, B, newly liberated medusa, C, nematocysts from hydranth, Scale bar: A, B, 0.5 mm, C, 10 wm. Vol. 116 (3) 1999 107 Contributions manubrium narrowing to simple tubular lips; exumbrella covered by numerous scattered large nematocysts, base of bell with two opposite long moniliform tenta- cles with swollen bulbs and two opposite perradial tentacle bulbs at base of radial canals, ring canal narrow, eight interradial marginal vesicles with concretions, velum broad. Remarks There is indication in his laboratory notes (see MeInnes 1982: 163) that Dan assumed this hydroid to be a species of Perigonimus Sars. However, the medusa has features described for juveniles of Aequorea forskalea (Péron and Lesueur 1809) in the concretionary vesicles of the ring canal. and of Aequorea vitrina Gosse, 1853, in the almost complete cover of the exum- brella by large nematocysts. The figured cnidome is from the tentacle web of the hydroid and it is possible that these, and the tentacular nematocysts, are different from those of the medusa. The nematocysts cannot be further identified as there is no information on the armature of the tubule. The problem with precise identification of species of Aeguorea is that the hydroid and early life histories of most common Aequorea medusae in the world plankton are virtually unknown. A further complicat- ing factor is that the relatively large adult medusae bearing many tentacles bear little resemblance to juvenile forms. It is likely that the hydroid Aequorea phillipensis Watson 1998 from Port Phillip Bay is the same as that found by Dan; however, this can only be ascertained with collection of more material and further laboratory study. Family Cladonematidae Gegenbauer, 1857 Staurocladia haswelli (Briggs, 1920) Fig. 4A, B Cnidonema haswelli Briggs, 1920; 93 - 104, pls 17, 18. Material Several colonies collected from coralline alga, 14/1/82; colony attached to glass of aquarium; observations proceeded until 9/3/82. 108 Description New hydranths spindle-shaped, arising about | mm apart from a reptant stolon about 0.15 mm diameter; juvenile hydranth with three capitate tentacles increasing to four or five after seven to 10 days, mature hydranth at that stage about 1.5 mm long with a clavate hypostome; medusa buds appear as bulges on lower body and stolons. Medusa small. with four groups of bifurcate tentacles, each with an ocellum at base. Buds grew over four days, in which time the tentacles lengthened with one bifurcation longer than the other. Medusae were released after four to five days, creeping on floor of aquarium. At this stage the aboral tentacles were shorter, each bearing five nematocyst pads - a large terminal pad, two closely adjacent pads a short distance down the tentacle, a smaller pad, almost opposite, and one small pad opposite the bifurcation. The lower, longer (oral) tentacles without nematocysts, but with a bluntly pointed end. The medusae lived for four days after release during which time 18 tentacles developed and several new medusa buds commenced growth around the manubrium of the parent. Remarks Although Briggs (1920) collected many medusae and wrote a detailed account of Staurocladia haswelli trom the Sydney region, he never discovered the parent hydroid. From Dan’s description and sketches there is no doubt that this is the first record of the hydroid of $. haswellt. Except for the absence of a ring of aboral tentacles the hydroid resembles other known polyps of Stawrocladia; the absence of these tentacles may be a normal character of S. haswelli or possibly a consequence of the specimens being reared in an aquarium. Dan mentions that the medusae were fed on amphipods and the hydranths on tubifex worm cut into very small pieces, Subclass Leptothecata Family Syntheciidae Marktanner- Turneretscher, 1890 Hincksella Billard, 1918 Hincksella cylindrica (Bale, 1888) Fig. 4C The Victorian Naturalist Contributions Fig. 4A-C. A, B, Staurocladia haswelli, A, colony with hydranths and medusa bud with developing medusae, B, medusa. showing two sets of tentacles only, and medusa buds. C, Hincksella cylindrica, hydrothecae and extended hydranth. Scale bar; | mm. Sertularella cylindrica Bale, 1888: 765, pl. 16, fig. 7.- Ralph, 1966: 163. Material Colony collected on Ecklonia holdfast, February 1985, maintained for approximate- ly eight weeks in aquarium to May, 1985. Remarks Dan was uncertain whether the colony with faintly undulated hydrothecae was Hincksella corrugatum Millard, 1958 with Vol. 116 (3) 1999 corrugated hydrothecae or Hincksella cylindrica (Bale 1888) with smooth hydrothecae. Ralph (1966) was also uncer- tain to which species her faintly corrugated specimens from Port Phillip Bay should be referred. As the hydrothecae of Dan’s specimens are smooth the species is here assigned to H. cylindrica. Probably detailed studies will eventually show the two to be conspecific. Thecate hydroids are well known to be 109 Contributions intractable aquarium subjects so it is a remarkable achievement to have maintained a thecate colony over this period of time in relatively primitive laboratory conditions. Family Haleciidae Hincks, 1868 Halecium Oken, 1815 Halecium fragile Hodgson, 1950 Fig. 5A Halecium fragile Hodgson, 1950: 15, fig. I la-d. Material Colony collected 16/10/82; no other information. Remarks This collection date is the first record of the species from Port Phillip Bay. Halecium sp. Fig. 5B Material Colonies collected twice, the first on Fig. SA and 5B. A, Halecium fragile, stem and extended hydranths. B, Halecium sp., hydrorhiza, hydranths and gonotheca. Scale bar: | mm. 110 The Victorian Naturalist 2/4/82, the second collection a fertile colony from weed, 25/10/82; this colony maintained in aquarium until 27/12/82, Description Hydrorhiza a creeping undulated stolon; hydrothecal pedicels 0.25—-0.35 mm high, 0.12—0.13 mm diameter, arising singly at intervals from hydrorhiza; pedicels deeply annulated. Hydrophore shallow dish- shaped (but not clearly figured), hydranth tall, spindle-shaped, with 18-20 tentacles. Gonotheca borne on a short annulated pedicel from hydrorhiza or from side of hydrothecal pedicel, mitten-shaped, aboral side deeply ridged, 0.6 mm long and 0.5 mm wide, orifice (probably) cylindrical, 0.13 mm in diameter, possibly with slight- ly everted rim. One gonotheca containing several spherical ova. Remarks Dan figured the species but left no notes, assuming it to be Halecium corrugansst- mum Trebilcock, 1928. However, H. cor- rugatissimum is a tall, arborescently branched hydroid, not stolonal as is this species. As there is no other known Haleciwn similar to Dan’s figure it is almost certainly an undescribed species. Verification must, however, await the find- ing of more material. Supplementary Species List At various times Dan found other common hydroid species on algae. The list (Table 1) is extracted from his notes (1982-1985) and from McInnes (1982: 163). Acknowledgements I thank Mrs C. Melnnes tor providing me with Dan’s notes and permission to publish this resume of his researches on the Hydrozoa. References Bale, W, M_ (1888). On some new and rare Hydroida in the Museum collection. Proceedings af the Linnean Society af New South Wales 3 (2), 745-799, pls. 12-21, Briggs E. A. (1920). On a new species of crawling medusa (Cnidonema haswelll) from Australia. Records of the Australian Museum 13 (3), 93-104, pls 17. 18. Hodgson, M, (1950). A revision of the Tasmanian Hydroida, Papers and Proceedings of the Royal Saciety of Tasmania for the Year 1949, \-65. Meltnnes, D, E. (1982), Some observations on hydroids at Black Rock (Port Phillip Buy. Australia). The Victorian Naturalist 99, 159-163. O'Sullivan, D, (1984), Description of Rathkea lizzivides sp. nov. (Hydromedusie; Rathkeidae) from Antarctica and a key to the genus, Journal of Natural History 18 (6), 861-868. Péron, F., and Lesueur, C. A. (1809), Tableau des carac- téres pénériques et spécifiques de toutes les especes de meéduses commues jusqu’’ ce jour, Annaly du Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle, Puris 14, 312-366. Vol. 116 (3) 1999 Contributions Table 1. Common Hydroids on Algae from Ricketts Point and Black Rock. Species Habitat Eleutheria dichotoma Quatrefages, 1842 corallines Eudendrium capillare Alder, 1856 Silicularia rosea Meyen, 1834 Orthopyxis caliculata (Hincks, 1853) Clytia hemisphaerica (Linnaeus, 1767) Phialella quadrata (Forbes, 1848) Amphisbetia minima brown alga Ecklonia thalli brown alga filamentous red alga brown alga Ecklonia hold (Thompson, 1879) fast Plumularia Yobliqua Ecklonia hold (Johnston, 1847) fast Plumularia setacevides Bale, Ecklonia thalli 1882 Monotheca pulchella (Bale, — ?Cysiophora 1882) thalli Sertularella robusta Coughtrey, 1876 Monotheca spinulosa (Bale, not given not given I8R2) Aglaophenia plumosa Bale, — Ecklonia hold 1882 fast Ralph P. M. (1966). Port Phillip Bay Survey [957- 1963. Hydroida, Memoirs of the National Museum of Victoria 27, 157-166. Russell, PS. (1953). “The medusae of the British Isles. Anthomedusae, Leptomedusae, Trachymedusae and Narcomedusae’. (Cambridge: UK), Sars, M, (1835). ‘Beskrivelser og lagttagelser over nogle maerkelige eller nye | Havet ved den Bergenske Kyst levende Dyr, Bergen’. pp 81, pls 115, Schuchert, P. (1996), The marine fauna of New Zealand: athecate hydroids and their medusae (Cnidaria; Hydrozoa). New Zealand Oceanographic Institute Memoir W6, 1-159, figs 1-85. Southeott, R, V, (1982). Jellyfishes (Classes Seyphozoa and Hydrozoa). Jn “Marine Invertebrates of Southern Australia’. Part 1. Eds S.A, Shepherd and J. M. Thomas. pp. 115 -159. Lendenfeld, R. von, (1884). The Australian Hydromedusae. Part IV. Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales 9 (3), 467-492, pls 12-17, Lendenfeld, R. von. (1884). The Australian Hydromedusie, Part V, Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales 9 (8), 581-634, pls 20-29, Watson, J. &. (1978). New species und new records of Australian athecate hydroids. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria 90 (2), 301-33). Watson, J. B. (1998). Troglodytes of a muddy bottom: the hydroid fauna of holes in the seabed. Jn ‘Commemorative volume for the 80th birthday of Willem Vervoort in 1997’, Eds. J. C. den Hartog, A. C. yan Bruggen, P,P. S. Cornelius and L. Po van Olwegen. pp.247-256. Zovlogische Verhandelingen 323, ivxil, 1-448. Werner, B. (1958), Die Verbreitung und das jahreszeitliche Aufireten der Anthomedusa Rathkea octopunetata M. Sars, sowie die ‘Temperaturabhaengiykeit ihrer Entwicklung und Fort-pflanzung, Helgoldnder wissenschaftliche Meeresuntersuclungen 6 (2), 137-170, 111 Contributions The Booroolong Frog Litoria booroolongensis Moore (Anura: Hylidae): an Addition to the Frog Fauna of Victoria. Graeme R. Gillespie! and David Hunter’ Abstract The Booroolong Frog Litorid booroolongensis is a lotic species formerly restricted to streams in New South Wales. We report confirmation of the species in north-east Victoria, north of Burrowa Pine Mountain. This species has declined throughout much of its range in New South Wales and is currently listed as Endangered in that State. These records are therefore a significant extension to the known occurrence of the species. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (3), 1999, pp, 112-114), Introduction The Booroolong Frog Litoria boorvelon- gensis is a riverine species morphological- ly similar to Lesueur’s Frog L. lesueuri (Moore 1961, Anstis er al. 1998) (Fig. 1). It occurs predominantly along western- flowing streams of the Great Dividing Range in New South Wales, from cateh- ments draining the Northern Tablelands, to the Tumut River in the Southern Highlands, and other tributaries of the Murrumbidgee River (Caughley and Gall 1985; Heatwole et al, 1995; Anstis ef al. 1998; Hunter and Gillespie im press). Litorta boeroolongensis has been recorded close to the north-eastern Victorian border (Caughley and Gall 1985), but previous fauna surveys have not located it in Victoria. This may be because accurate identification of L. booreolongensis is dif- ficult, especially in the south of its range where the species is superficially very sim- ilar to L. lesueuri (G. Gillespie pers. obs.). The Australian Museum holds several juvenile L. boereolongensis specimens collected in 1961 from the King River, near Wangaratta in Victoria (Australian Museum record nos R90917—-R90930), However, examination of these specimens by one of the authors (GG) indicates that they are L, lesueuri. Litoria beoroolongensis was formerly abundant along streams draining the Northern Tablelands of New South Wales (Heatwole er al, 1995). There have been very few sightings of this species in the past ten years (New South Wales Wildlife Atlas), and concerns have been raised ‘Arthur Rylah Institute, Department of Natural Resources and Environment, PLO. Box 1347. Heidelberg. Victoria 3084. Applied Ecology Group, University of Canberra, P.O. Box |, Belconnen, ACT 2616 112 about ils current conservation status (Anstis et al. 1998), Further south, there are relatively few historical records (Australian Museum records; New South Wales Wildlife Atlas). A recent survey. conducted for riverine frogs along west- flowing streams in Kosciuszko National Park failed to find the species at two his- toric collection sites, and only located it in one stream in the region (Hunter and Gillespie in press). The species has recent- ly been listed as endangered in New South Wales (NSW Threatened Species Conservation Act 1995). Observations During the summer of 1998/99 we con- ducted a survey commissioned by the New South Wales National Parks and Wildlife Service, to assess the current distribution of L. booroolongensis along the south- western slopes of the Great Dividing Range in New South Wales, During this survey we located the species along three small creeks, several kilometres north of the Murray River, near Jingellic, New South Wales. This led us to suspect that L. boorvolongensis may also occur along similar small creeks feeding the Murray River from Victoria, north of Burrowa Pine Mountain. We subsequently surveyed four creeks (Burrowye, Walwa, Sandy and Cudgewa Creeks) and the Murray River tn this area. Litoria booroolongensis was located on Burrowye Creek at Burrowye (36° 2° E; 147° 33° S), and on the banks of the Murray River near Jingellic (35° 56’ E; 147° 42° S), confirming the occurrence of the species in Victoria (Fig. 2), Specimens were collected from each of these localities and lodged with the Victorian Museum The Victorian Naturalist Contributions Fig. 1. The Booroolong Frog Litoria booreolongensis, from Bombowlie Creek, southern New South Wales. Photo: G, Gillespie. (Victorian Museum record nos D69973 and D69974). Our observations in southern New South Wales suggest that L. booroolongensis and L. lesueuri have allopatric distributions in this region. We found L, /esueuri along Cudgewa Creek, and previous surveys in the region have located L. /esweuri on most other streams in this region of Victoria (Watson et al. 1991; Gillepsie and Hollis 1996; Hunter and Gillespie in press; Pvte New South Wales Tt Kosciusko Js Re a = Fig. 2. Localities of Litoria boerdolongensis (indicated by closed circles) in north-eastern Victoria. (Scale | cm = 20 km.) Vol. 116 (3) 1999 Victorian Wildlife Atlas). Litoria booroo- longensis is therefore likely to be restricted in Victoria to this region north of Burrowa Pine Mountain. Litoria boorvolongensis inhabits rocky permanent streams, ranging from small slow-flowing creeks to large rivers (Anstis et al. 1998; authors’ pers. ohs.). Adults are typically found sheltering under boulders or cobbles near riffles along the stream bank (Anstis ef al. 1998; authors’ pers. obs.). The species occurs along streams in both forested areas and open pasture. Sites where we observed the species in Victoria and southern New South Wales were high- ly modified streams flowing through pas- ture, and were heavily disturbed and pol- luted by cattle. In the southern parts of its range, breeding occurs in spring. Eggs are deposited in rock crevices in the stream or in isolated stream-side pools (authors’ pers. obs.). Tadpoles metamorphose in January and February (Anstis ef al. 1998). Identification Litoria booroolongensis is morphologi- cally very similar to L. lesueuri, which is a common and widespread riverine species in south-eastern Australia (Barker ef al. 1995), The species can be reliably distin- 113 Contributions guished from L, lesueuri by the extension of webbing to the base of the first inner toe pad on the hind foot. The webbing on L. lesueuri extends only to the base of the penultimate phalange of the first inner toe (authors’ pers. obs.). Litoria booroolon- gensis typically has a highly mottled dor- sum with a scattering of salmon-coloured flecks. Litoria lesueuri typically has a dis- tinct black stripe passing through the eye and over the tympanum to the shoulder, whereas this is less distinct in L, booroo- longensis (Barker et al. 1995). Significance Litoria booroolongensis is one of a num- ber of riverine species in eastern Australia which have suffered severe population declines over the past two decades (Tyler 1997). Its discovery in Victoria is a signifi- cant addition to the frog fauna of the State, taking the total number of species recorded to 35 (Atlas of Victorian Wildlife). Further information is required to determine the current distribution of this species and the causes of its apparent decline, and how best to manage and protect these remaining populations. Acknowledgements This work was funded by the New South Wales National Parks and Wildlife Service and the Arthur Rylah Institute, Department of Natural Resources and Environment, Victoria, Ross Saddler (Australian Museum) and John Coventry (Museum of Victoria) kindly provided access to museum specimens. R. Loyn and G. Brown provided comments on the manuscript. References Anstis, M., Alford, R.A, and Gillespie, G.R, (1998). Breeding biology of Litoria booroolongensis Moore and L. /esueuri Dumeril and Bibron (Anura: Hylidae). Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia 122, 33-43, Barker. J.. Grigg, G. and Tyler, M.J. (1995). ‘A Field Guide to Australian Frogs’, 2nd Ed. (Surrey Beatty: Chipping Norton, New South Wales). Caughley, J. and Gall, B. (1985), Relevance of zoologi- cal transition to conservation of fauna: amphibians and repUles in south-western slopes of New South Wales, Australian Zoologist 21, 513-529. Gillespie. G.R, and Hollis, G.J. (1996). Distribution and habitat of the spotted tree frog Litoria spenceri Dubois (Anura: Hylidae), and an assessment of potential causes of population declines. Wildlife Research 23, 49 - 75. Heatwole, H., De Bayay, J., Webber, P. and Webb, G. (1995), Faunal survey of New England, IV. The frogs. Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 38, 229-49, Hunter, D. and Gillespie, G.R. (in press). The distribu- tion, abundance and conservation status of riverine frogs in Kosciuszko National Park. Australian Zoologist. Moore, J-A, (1961). The frogs of eastern New South Wales. Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History 121, 302. Tyler, M.J. (1997). ‘The Action Plan For Australian Frogs’. (Biodiversity Group, Environment Australia: Canberra). Watson, G.F, Littlejohn, M_J,, Hero, M.-J. and Robertson, P. (1991). Conservation Status, Ecology and Management of the Spotted Tree Frog (Litoria spenceri). Arthur Rylah Institute Technical Report Series No. 116. (Department of Conservation and Environment: Victoria). pointing this out. Erratum Re ‘Emperor: the Magnificent Penguin’, review by Peter Dann, in The Victorian Naturalist 116 (2), 46. Pauline Reilly was not the first female President of the R.A.O.U. A Mrs. Perrine Moncrieff, of New Zealand, had that honour, She was President during 1932-33. Thanks to Mrs Tess Kloot for For assistance with the preparation of this issue, thanks to the computer team — Alistair Evans and Anne Morton. Thanks also to Felicity Garde (label printing) and Michael McBain (web page). 114 The Victorian Naturalist Book Review Dawn Till Dusk: In the Stirling and Porongurup Ranges by Rob Olver and Stuart Olver Publisher: Tuart House, 1998. 176 pp. RRP $45 hard cover, $34 paper cover. ‘Dawn Till Dusk is both a practical guide to. and a visual celebration of, the Stirling and Porongurup Ranges of South-western Australia.” This quote from the press release is an accurate description of this wonderful book. The photography, mostly done by Rob Olver, is enough to make you want to pack your bags and catch the first flight to W.A. Des Olver also supplies a stunning shot of a Western Grey Kangaroo in the Stirling Range heathland. The book covers such topics as: detailed information of natural history, bushwalks, climbs, special attractions, gliding, flying, wineries, scenic drives, facilities and accommodation, Chapter one gives a little of the known Aboriginal history. Chapter two gives a more detailed and well-researched record of early European history. Then follow chapters on: geology, climate, flora and fauna and some very useful maps for the future travellers of this magnificent area, J was pleased to read in Chapter five, on the subject of mammals, that control of feral cat and fox populations need to be addressed before the re-introduction of some of the diminishing mammal species. The topic of environmental weeds is touched upon; this and the feral animal problems faced by most land managers is often omitted from books of this nature. Also, the authors highlight the serious effects of Phytothphora cinnamomi, the fungus which has devastated many W.A. forests. A Management Plan has been pre- pared for the Stirling Range and at present twenty-five percent of the park is closed to all users on a seasonal basis. C.A.L.M. is also carrying out research on threatened and priority listed flora in the Stirling Ranges, There are 123 species of the Orchidaceae family found in the Stirling Range, 38% of all known orchids in Western Australia. As all the flowers in previous chapters give Vol. 116 (3) 1999 common and scientific names, | wondered why the authors did not do the same for the orchids that were mentioned in the text. | realise many are undergoing revision, but would have still liked the current name included. Bridal Creeper is also mentioned as a problem weed in the Stirlings. This is a common name for a highly invasive weed and once again I would have liked the sci- entific name to clarify what plant the authors were referring to. Was the plant Myrsiphyllum asparagoides? Bridal Veil and Bridal Creeper are common names used by the nursery trade and sold to the unwary. The authors state that in the Porongurup Range, 300 varieties of fungi grow. I would suggest that there are many more, but was interested that a count of species has taken place as like the non-vascular plants (mosses. lichens and liverworts) they are sometimes overlooked when Flora and Flora are being compiled. The chapter on scenic drives will be use- ful for visitors planning a trip to the two parks, but it is the bushwalking chapters that are exceptional, their enthusiasm for these two magnificent areas is apparent. Rob and Stuart have gone to great detail to explain the way to really see these two areas on foot. Maps are excellent through- out the whole book including this chapter. The rock-climbing information is given in ihe same detail with stunning photos of some challenging climbs. I highly recommend this very well researched and beautifully photographed book and congratulate the authors for shar- ing their vast knowledge on the Stirling and Porongurup Ranges. The book 1s an absolute must for any traveller planning to explore these two ranges in the future. Cecily Falkingham 27 Chippewa Avenue, Mitcham, Victoria 3132, 115 The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc. Reg No A0033611X Established 1880 In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria OBJECTIVES: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian flora and fauna. Membership is open to any person interested in natural history and includes beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Registered Office: FNCV, | Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. Postal Address: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia, Phone/Fax (03) 9877 9860; International Phone/Fax 61 3 9877 9860, Patron His Excellency, The Honourable James Gobbo, The Governor of Victoria Key Office-Bearers President: Dr TOM MAY, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra 3141, 9252 2319 Vice Presidents: Dr NOEL. SCHLEIGER and MR JOHN SEEBECK Hon. Secretary: Mrs ANNE MORTON, 10 Rupicola Ct, Rowville 3178. 9790 0656 Hon. Treasurer; Mt ARNIS DZEDINS, PO Box 1000, Blind Bight 3980. 5998 7996 Subscription-Secretary: FNCY, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. 9877 9860 Editor, The Vic. Nat.: Mrs MERILYN GREY, 8 Martin Road, Glen Iris 3146, 9889 6223 Librarian: Mts SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCY, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. AH 5428 4097 Excursion Co-ordinator; Mt DENNIS MELTZER, 8 Harcourt Ave, Caufield 3162. 9523 1853 Book Sales; Dr ALAN PARKIN, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. AH 9850 2617 Book Brokerage: Mr RAY WHITE, 20 Allred Street, Essendon 3040, 9379 3602 Newsletter Editor: Dr NOEL SCHLBIGER, | Astley Street, Montmorency 3094, 9435 8408 Conservation Coordinator; Ms JENNY WILSON, RMB 2930, Euroa 3666, 5798 5535 Group Secretaries Botany: Mr RAY MACPHERSON, 8 Jean Street, Lower Templestowe 3107, 9850 4319 Geology: Mr ROB HAMSON, 5 Foster Street, McKinnon 3204, 9557 5215 Fauna Survey; Ms SUSAN MYERS, 17A Park Street, Hawthorn 3122. 9819 2539 Marine Research: Mt MICHAEL LYONS, 2/18 Stonnington Place, Toorak 3142, AH 9822 8007 Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 Schotters Road, Mernda 3754, 9717 3511 MEMBERSHIP Members receive The Victorian Naturalist and the monthly Field Nat News free. The Club organises several monthly meetings (free to all) and excursions (transport costs may be charged). Field work, including botany, mammal and invertebrate surveys, is being done at a number of locations in Victoria, and all members are encouraged to participate. SUBSCRIPTION RATES for 1999 Year Half-Year First Member Metropolitan $40 $20 Concessional (pensioner/student/unemployed) $30 $15 Country (more than SOkm from GPO) $30 $15 Junior (under 18) $15 $7 Additional Members Adult $15 $15 Junior $5 $5 Institutional Australian Institutions $55 Overseas Institutions AU$65 Schools/Clubs $35 Send to: FNCY, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. Printed by Brown Prior Anderson, 5 Evans Street, Burwood, Victoria 3125, | The Victorian Naturalist Volume 116 (4) August 1999 Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria since 1884 Naturalist Note Intertidal Sighting of Stiliger smaragdinus Baba 1949 — an Uncommon Mollusc During the late morning of 23 February 1999, at Kitty Miller Bay, Phillip Island, a single Stiliger smaragdinus was sighted in the lowermost intertidal zone during the spring low tide. This is an opisthobranch molluse in the Order Sacoglossa (see Burn 1998). It was exposed to air on a flat rock that was situated between two rockpools rich in the seaweeds Caulerpa cactoides and Amphibolis antarctica, The day was warm but overcast. The mollusc was placed in a plastic con- tainer of seawater; it then expanded and began to move about. The estimated length was 5 cm. The specimen was a beautiful lime green with delicate yellow and bluish- white colouration at the bases of the cerata and across the bodies of some of them, The numerous cerata waved about like algal fronds when the water column was dis- turbed, The photograph below shows the elevated pericardium on the dorsum of the mollusc, with the anal opening as a raised white papilla just anterior to it (see Burn 1998), After photography, the specimen was left in the adjacent rockpool on a frond of C. cactoides, When the spot was revisit- ed half an hour later, the mollusc had not moved from its position, Stiliger smaragdinus is found in Japan, the western Pacific, around Australia and also in New Zealand (Burn 1998), to depths of 22 m (Edgar 1997). It feeds on green algae and, when sighted, is often associated with C, cactoides (Edgar 1997), The species attains lengths of up to 75 mm (Burn 1998; Edgar 1997). Acknowledgements I thank the Marine Research Group for their eager support, particularly Clarrie Handreck for his enthusiam, Robert Burn for identifying the mol- luse, and both of these and Ken Bell for valuable comments on an earlier draft of this note. References Burn, R, (1998), Order Sacoglossa, In ‘Mollusca: The Southern Synthesis, Fauna of Australia. Volume 5, Part B’, pp, 961-974, Eds PL. Beesley, G.J.B. Ross and A. Wells. (CSIRO Publishing: Melbourne), Edgar, G.J, (1997), “Australian Marine Life, The Plants and Animals of Temperate Waters’, (Reed Books; Australia), Platon Vafiadis 26 O'Donnell Street, Rosanna East, Victoria 3084, Stiliger smaragdinuy at Kitty Miller Bay, 23 February 1999, Photo by Platon Vafiadis. 118 The Victorian Naturalist The Vif y Victorian | }| Naturalist. Volume 116 (4) 1999 August Editor: Merilyn Grey Research Report Attitudes Towards Possums: a Need for Education by K. Miller, P. Brown and I, Temby.iccciscssssecvssvssccrscvicsensrsereonte 120 Contributions Letters to the Editor Naturalist Notes Book Reviews ISSN 0042-5184 A New Inland Record of the Swamp Skink Egernia coventryi Storr, 1978, by N. Clemann and C. Beardsell .....cccccccccccecceereees 127 The Use of ‘Forms’ for Denning by the Common Ringtail Possum Pseudocheirus peregrinus at Subalpine Altitudes, esa (OSCE Ral Uk ja eaieeetneie ae RGmnEe panne) RO Ri rope Oe 129 A Survey of the Vertebrate Fauna of the Rushworth State Forest. Fauna Survey Group Contribution No. 22, BHP Se NEVER SAN OOS BEF ussite sss: lata tiecbgeentenkanttstleds ets eaten cults 131 Moss Bed Lake on the Nunniong Plateau, by R. Fletcher ............. 142 From A. Thies: Determination of liverwort from Mt Torbreck PEPIGOZA LOVIOUR: saxcoussgipetagoraa tuts at VEE thtAdy sang ey Ceavee te teavas Helden 145 From N. Romanowski: Aquaculture of Silver Perch Bidyanus LEREUVAATIODSA eee een at de rested gtk Rin boj M EP ATL ed kets LEI Deaae eae 146 From G. Kibria: Response to N. Romanowski ..........:00eeeeeeee 147 Intertidal Sighting of Stiliger smaragdinus Baba 1949 — an Uncommon Mollusc, by P. Vafiddis .....cc.ccccscescescessseeseteeteenee 118 Fungi Found in a Suburban Garden, by C. Falkingham ........0...- 148 PRET RDP SRALO UM LOVED MCS PCN Sons cena usus dures rites Cor tera Oot oirrgck ceeaeeee erated 150 Mound-building Ants, by G. HOWi€......ccccrcceesrscsrssnessesseseserssaness 152 Australian Ants: Their Biology and Identification (Monographs on Invertebrate Taxonomy Volume 3), by S.O. Shattuck, reviewer D. Britton .......+ Beauty in Truth: The Botanical Art of Margaret Stones, by Irena Zdanowicz and Brilliant Careers; Women Collectors and Illustrators in Queensland, by Judith McKay, FEVEC WEI Lo ATLL OBI. «ss vccieloates cole eeBbts9t\ dom Teaszi9s ee FEAT Tee 154 Ee Cover: The Common Brushtail Possum Trichosurus vulpecula in the Fitzroy Gardens, Melbourne, eating bread left by tourists. (See Research Report, p. 120.) Photo by Kelly Miller. Find us on the WEB: http://calcite.apana.org.au/fney/ email: fncy@vicnet.net.au Research Report Attitudes Towards Possums: a Need for Education? Kelly K. Miller', Peter R. Brown! and Ian Temby* Abstract When dealing with wildlife-human conflict issues, social considerations are as important as biologi- cal and ecological considerations to the successful implementation of management strategies, This study investigated the human dimensions of the human-possum conflict, by asking people in an urban area of Melbourne for their views and knowledge of possums. The survey found that although factual knowledge of possums within the community is generally low, residents are keen to learn more about possums. It also found that respondents with a high knowledge of possum biology had a more positive attitude towards possums than respondents with a comparatively low level of knowl- edge. These findings suggest that further community education on this issue is warranted. (The Vierorian Naturalist 116 (4). 1999, 120-126). Introduction Although research into the human dimen- sions of wildlife management is well advanced in North America, it is still in its infancy in Australia (Jones 1993), North American studies over the last two to three decades suggest that an understanding of the human component of wildlife manage- ment issues is crucial to the effective implementation of management strategies. As Pomerantz et al. (1987: 357) explain, ‘understanding the public’s needs and con- cerns and communicating the rationale for agency programs back to the public are necessary steps to achieving management objectives’. This understanding is particu- larly important for wildlife-human conflicts such as those arising from the cohabitation of people and possums in urban areas. Two species of possum commonly cohabit with humans in the urban, subur- ban and rural areas of Australia: the Common Ringtail Possum Pseudocheirus peregrinus and the Common Brushtail Possum Trichosurus vulpecula. Both species are protected in the State of Victoria under the Wildlife Act 1975. While the Common Ringtail Possum can create problems for residents, such as dam- age to garden plants (McKay and Ong 1995: Temby 1992) and aesthetic problems (e.g. droppings on driveways). it is the Common Brushtail Possum that causes most concerns. The Common Brushtail Possum is nocturnal and spends the day in a den in a hollow branch, tree trunk, fallen log or, with increasing urbanisation, in the ' School of Ecology and Environment, Deakin University, 662 Blackburn Road, Clayton, Victoria 3168, * Flora and Fauna Branch, Department of Natural Resources and Environment, 250 Victoria Parade, East Melbourne, Victoria 3002. 120 roof cavity of a house (How and Kerle 1995). The occupation of house roof cavi- ties by members of this species is common in many urban areas of Australia and is the primary cause of conflict between humans and possums (How 1992), Problems associated with the Common Brushtail Possum include noise, damage to the house, damage to garden plants, aes- thetic problems, and potential health risks. 1. Noise from possum movement (in the ceiling and on the roof) and possum calls can present problems for residents. Indirect noise problems can also occur when domestic dogs bark at possums during the night. 2. Damage to the house can include urine stains and holes in the ceiling and walls. 3. Damage to garden plants can result when possums defoliate native and orna- mental trees and shrubs and eat vegeta- bles, fruit and flowers. 4, Aesthetic problems can occur when there is possum odour, droppings on dri- veways Or urine stains on cars. 5. Potential health risks can cause concern for residents (e.g. loss of sleep due to noise). In order to better understand the dynam- ics of the urban possum issue, the aim of this study was to investigate what people in an urban area feel (attitudes) and know (knowledge) about possums and explore the link between the two. Methods The City of Knox, a group of suburbs located approximately 25 km east of the Melbourne Central Business District, was chosen as the study site. This site contains The Victorian Naturalist highly vegetated areas (particularly in those areas abutting the Dandenong Ranges National Park) through to residential areas with little vegetative cover. It was therefore considered to be representative of a range of different types of urban areas. A nine-page questionnaire was mailed, in 1995, to 500 adult residents (randomly selected using publicly available ratepay- ers books) throughout the City of Knox, of whom 142 residents responded (28%). A limited time-frame did not allow follow-up of non-respondents, and the sample (referred to as the Resident Sample) was considered to be an adequate size for the exploratory nature of the study. Twenty- one percent of respondents were 18-30 years of age, 42% were 31-45 years of age. 23% were 46-60 years of age, 14% were over the age of 60 years: and 70% of the sample was female. Accompanying the questionnaire was a covering letter and reply-paid envelope. The covering letter introduced the study to potential respondents and emphasized anonymity and confidentiality of respons- es, Respondents were given the option of including their name and contact details on the questionnaire for any future studies but were not required to do so. Respondents indicating interest in the survey results were mailed a summary of the research at the conclusion of the study, The questionnaire included 44 questions on a number of topics including attitudes towards possums, human-possum con- flicts, knowledge of possums, management issues and demographic characteristics of respondents. In addition to the Resident Sample, 50 members of local special interest groups and other stakeholders were interviewed by telephone. These groups included the Knox Environment Society, Ferntree Gully Residents’ Action Group, Ferntree Gully Horticultural Society. residents who had recently hired possum traps from the Knox City Council, Wildlife Shelters/ Wildlife Foster-carers, and Veterinary Surgeons. The telephone interviews focussed on the same topics as the ques- tionnaire, but allowed for further discus- sion on certain points. Both quantitative and qualitative data analysis techniques were used. Por quanti- Vol. 116 (4) 1999 Research Report tative data, descriptive and inferential sta- tistics (two-sample ¢ test (Moore and McCabe 1993)) were used with compara- tive data statistically significant at p < 0.05, For qualitative data, open-ended questions were analysed for key themes and important comments. These compo- nents of the data are illustrated using direct quotes from respondents. Results and Discussion Respondent attitudes towards possums were assigned to three main categories based on answers to several questions including “how would you describe your overall view of possums?’ and ‘why do you hold this view?’ The attitude cate- gories were: 1. Positive attitude, where the respondent indicated that possums were welcome at the house or property: 2. Negative attitude, where the respondent indicated that possums were a nuisance or pest; and 3. Neutral attitude, where the respondent indicated an undecided opinion. From the Resident Sample ( = 142), 25.4% of respondents expressed a positive attitude towards possums, 33.1% expressed a negative attitude towards pos- sums, 37.3% expressed a neutral attitude towards possums, and 4.2% of respondents did not complete the attitude questions. Five questions were used to test the knowledge level of the resident in terms of possum biology. Fifteen percent of the respondents from the Resident Sample who completed the knowledge questions (n = 137) answered all five questions cor- rectly, and 10% displayed a low knowl- edge level answering either no questions correctly or one question correctly, The proportion of the Resident Sample that answered each of the five knowledge ques- tions correctly 1s shown in Table 1, The poor knowledge of possum biology in the Resident Sample was also apparent in the special interest group samples, with small proportions completing all knowl- edge questions correctly. Five of the 10 Knox Environment Society respondents answered all five knowledge questions correctly, compared with three of the seven responding Veterinary Surgeons, 121 Research Report Table 1. Proportion of Resident Sample that answered knowledge questions correctly. Knowledge question Response categories Proportion that answered correctly (%) (n = 137)* A full-grown Brushtail Possum is true/false/unsure 26.1 smaller than a full-grown Ringtail Possum Ringtail Possums usually have true/false/unsure 34.1 a white tip on their tail. Possums are nocturnal. true/false/unsure 92.8 A marsupial is: a nocturnal animal/a mammal 91.3 with a pouch/a mammal without a pouch Tick those of the following that dog/fox/possum/dolphin/ 75:2 are Marsupials: kangaroo ae ee ee ————————————EE * Five questionnaire respondents did not answer the knowledge questions and were excluded from this analysis. three of the 10 Ferntree Gully Residents’ Action Group respondents, three of the 10 Ferntree Gully Horticultural Society respondents, one of the 10 trap-hirers, and all three Wildlife Shelters/Wildlife Foster- carers. Of particular interest was the poor knowledge shown by the responding Veterinary Surgeons, which was surprising given the relative simplicity of the knowl- edge questions. Another indication of poor knowledge can be seen in the responses to the question that asked what species of possum was present around respondents’ homes, Of the 55 respondents from the Resident Sample who beheved they had possums around the house or property, 65% were unsure of the species. There was a clear correlation between attitudes towards possums and knowledge levels of possum biology. Sixty percent of those respondents with a high level of pos- sum knowledge (m = 20), defined as answering all knowledge questions cor- rectly, held a positive attitude towards pos- sums. In comparison, only 7% of those respondents with a low level of possum knowledge (7 = 14), defined as no knowl- edge questions answered correctly or one knowledge question answered correctly, held a positive attitude towards possums (two-sample z test: z= 3.13, p= 0.001). This trend was also observed in the Special Interest Group samples, Respondents from the Knox Environment Society and Wildlife Shelters/Wildlife Foster-carers held mainly positive attitudes towards possums and had predominantly 122 high knowledge levels. when compared with respondents from the trap-hirers group (residents who had recently hired possum traps from the Knox City Council) and the Ferntree Gully Horticultural Society. The latter two groups held mainly negative atti- tudes towards possums and had compara- tively low knowledge levels (Fig. 1). A similar correlation was noted by Schulz (1987) in a study of adult students’ attitudes towards wildlife in West Germany. Schulz found that knowledge level was the best variable to explain dif- ferent scores on the attitude scale. Schulz’s study, based on the value framework developed by Kellert (1976), showed that respondents with a very high knowledge level also had high values on the moralis- tic, naturalistic, ecologistic, and sctentistic attitude scales. Conversely, respondents with a very low knowledge level had high values on the humanistic, negativistic, and utilitarian attitude scales. Although Schulz’s study (1987) had more detailed attitude categories than our study, the results are similar. Respondents to our questionnaire who had a high knowledge of possums displayed charac- teristics consistent with the moralistic, nat- uralistic, ecologistic and scientistic atti- tudes as described by Kellert and Berry (1987). These respondents typically held positive attitudes towards possums, with sentiments such as: 1 appreciate wildlife. Possums are a natural part of the The Victorian Naturalist Research Report Proportion of sample (%) ral S W@ blank O neutral O negative BS positive Fig. 1. Attitudes towards possums in Special Interest Group and Resident samples (statistical analy- sis could not be conducted due to small sample sizes). A = Knox Environment Society (7 = 10), B = Wildlife Shelters/Wildlife Foster-carers (n = 3), C = Veterinary Surgeons (n = 7), D = Ferntree Gully Residents’ Action Group (n = 10), E = Ferntree Gully Horticultural Society (n = 10), F = Trap-hirers (1 = 10), G = Resident Sample (n = 142) Australian environment and we should learn to live with them. 1am an animal lover and enjoy seeing pos- sums in my garden. [| love animals and wildlife. We like a bush environment and enjoy all native animals, It is good for the kids to experience ani- mals and learn to live with them. They were here long before us and I believe all native fauna should be pre- served. In comparison, typical answers from respondents with a low knowledge level included: [my view is] based on friends’ experiences with possums doing damage to their houses. ... we had possums... noisy, vermin, destroyers, and their dropping mess everywhere. People live in houses with family and pets. The bush is provided (and there is plenty of it in Victoria) that possums can live in without causing problems in roof, fire- place ete. Vol. 116 (4) 1999 This correlation between knowledge of possums and attitudes towards possums raises an important question that could be explored by future research — which comes first, the positive attitude or the high knowledge level? That is, does a person with a positive attitude towards possums have more interest and therefore seek out information, or does the increased infor- mation or factual knowledge result in the positive attitude? To investigate this ques- tion, attitudes could be assessed before and after an education program (focusing only on factual knowledge and not information that could directly influence attitudes) specifically relating to urban possums. Other studies have indeed shown that public values either change or can be changed with better information (Stucky ef al, 1987). A preliminary study by Caro ef al. (1994) found that in a short period of time, education in conservation biology (via an undergraduate university course) made students more biocentric. Although this indicates that education may be an effective management tool in modifying attitudes towards nature, it may be that stu- 123 Research Report dents seeking out an environmental course already have positive attitudes towards the environment. The education they choose may simply strengthen the attitudes that they already have and encourage them to clearly express those attitudes. In order to explore this further, education could be tar- geted at those people within the communi- ty with negative attitudes towards possums in order to determine if education is effec- tive in modifying their attitudes, Implementing education programs also requires an understanding of what people wish to learn about. From our survey, 30.4% of respondents (n = 138) said they would like to learn about ‘possum ecolo- gy/biology’, 40.6% said they would like to learn about ‘how to live with possums’, 26.1% said they would like to learn ‘how to remove possums’ and 26.8% said they would like to learn about “what happens to translocated possums’. Table 2 divides these findings further into those respon- dents with a positive attitude towards pos- sums and those respondents with a nega- tive attitude towards possums. Respondents with a positive attitude towards possums were significantly more interested in learning about possum ecolo- gy and biology and how to live with pos- sums, than those respondents with a nega- tive attitude towards possums (Table 2). In contrast, those respondents with a negative attitude towards possums were significant- ly more interested in learning about how to remove possums, than those respondents with a positive attitude (Table 2), As respondents with negative attitudes towards possums were shown to be less interested in learning about possums, it may prove more difficult to change their attitudes (through education) into positive attitudes. Thus, education of children (rather than adults) may be more effective in modifying and/or shaping attitudes, because the attitudes of children are stil] forming. Similarly, Caro ef al. (1994) speculated that conservation education may be more effective in changing atti- tudes when people are exposed to it at an early age. Other studies have also shown that a person’s childhood experiences with animals are important factors in the devel- opment of adult attitudes towards wildlife (Hair and Pomerantz 1987). 124 Although a change in attitudes towards wildlife can be achieved (Temby 1995), it has been suggested by Baldwin (1995) that a change in attitude is not enough. Baldwin (1995) said ‘while basic classroom educa- tion can be effective at changing values and attitudes toward nature, direct experi- ence has the powerful effect of changing behaviour’ (p. 241). In our study, the most common factor contributing to the respon- dents’ knowledge of possums in the Resident Sample was ‘personal experi- ence’ (49%). One current possum educa- tion program in our study area incorporates “basic classroom education’ with ‘personal experience’ by showing the class a possum and allowing interaction (Y. Cowling pers.com.). Although this program focuses on childhood education, the experience of actually seeing a native animal will undoubtedly have an impact on many chil- dren and possibly instil a positive value of wildlife within them. However, further research would be required to contirm whether or not a change in attitude would lead to a change in behaviour on this issue. While childhood education is important, information must also be available to adults. The fact that 40.6% of respondents from the Resident Sample indicated they would like to learn how to live with pos- sums, clearly indicates the need to educate the general public — to inform residents of urban areas how to cohabit successfully with possums, or at least inform them that ‘harmonious’ cohabitation is possible and has many advantages. As Temby (1995; 178) has suggested for the management of kangaroos, ‘acceptance and use of alternative approaches that do not rely on destruction will only come about through appropriate extension pro- grammes that demonstrate their effective- ness and economic benefits’. Similarly, residents with possum problems must be informed of appropriate and effective man- agement techniques. Residents will have little hope of effectively resolving a con- flict if they do not have the appropriate information that will allow them to do so. The recent distribution of the “Living With Possums’ booklet' (Department of Natural Resources and Environment 1997) to key groups in Victoria, such as local councils and wildlife shelters, will undoubtedly The Victorian Naturalist Research Report oe le —EE EEE eee Table 2. Respondent attitudes (Resident Sample) versus aspects of possum ecology/biology and management the respondent would like to learn about. Option respondent would like to learn about (1 = 36) Possum ecology/biology 64 How to live with possums 61 How to remove possums 17 What happens to 33 translocated possums Other 6 One or more of the above 94 Proportion of ‘positive attitude towards possums’ subgroup (%) Significance (two-sample z test) Proportion of ‘negative attitude towards possums’ subgroup (%) (n = 47) z Pp 19 4.17 0.000 30 2.83 0.002 51 3.20 0,001 23 1.01 0,156 0 i 719 1.95 0.026 Statistical analysis could not be conducted due to small sample sizes. increase many residents’ knowledge of pos- sums, particularly those who are having pos- sum problems. Conclusion This study has demonstrated that mem- bers of the community, including special interest groups. generally have a poor knowledge of possum biology. The study also showed that there is an important link between attitudes towards possums and knowledge of possums, that people within the community are interested in learning about possums and that people with a posi- tive attitude towards possums are more interested in learning more about possums than those with a negative attitude. These findings support the suggestion that com- munication and education programs are important aspects of wildlife management (Peyton and Decker 1987; Penland 1987). The key requirement highlighted by this study is the need for community education. As well as providing basic information (via government agencies and community groups) to those who have problems with possums, it is also important that the broader community is given the opportuni- iy to learn more about and experience not only possums but all native wildlife. Acknowledgements We would like to thank the School of Ecology and Environment at Deakin University for ' The ‘Living With Possums’ booklet can be obtained by contacting the Flora and Fauna Branch, Department of Natural Resources and Environment (250 Victoria Parade, East Melbourne, 3002), or the RSPCA (3 Burwood Highway, Burwood Fast. 3151). Vol. 116 (4) 1999 financial support of this study. Special thanks go to Dr Tara McGee (Deakin University), Professor Robert Wallis (Deakin University), Dr Darryl Jones (Griffith University), and Ms Leoni Thomas (Griffith University), for critical comments on earlier versions of this manuscript and invaluable discussions on wildlife-human conflicts in Australia; Ms Yvonne Cowling (wildlife shelter operator) for providing infor- mation on her wildlife shelter and school educa- tion program; Ms Rhonda Miller (wildlife shel- ter operator) for helpful proof-reading and insightful comments; and all questionnaire and interview participants from the City of Knox. References Baldwin, R. (1995), Changes in attitude not enough. Conservation Biology 9 (2), 240-241. Caro, T.M., Pelkey, N. and Grigione. M, (1994). Effects of conservation biology education on attitudes toward nature. Conservation Biology 8 (3), 846-852. Department of Natural Resources and Environment (1997), ‘Living With Possums’. (Department of Natural Resources and Enyironment: Melbourne.) Hair, J.D. and Pomerantz, G.A. (1987), The education- al value of wildlife. Jn ‘Valuing Wildlife; Economic and Social Perspectives’, pp. 197-207. Eds D.J, Decker and G.R. Goff, (Westview Press: Colorado, ) How, R.A. (1992), Possum magic, Wildlife Australia 29, 24-25, How, R.A. and Kerle, J.A, (1995). Common Brushtail Possum, Trichosurus vulpecula. In “The Mammals of Australia’, pp. 273-275. Ed. R. Strahan, (Reed Books: New South Wales.) Jones, D.N, (1993), Dealing with the Shuman dimen- sion’ in wildlife management, Australasian Wildlife Management Society Newsletter October 1993, 8-9. Kellert, S.R. (1976). Perceptions of animals in American society. Transactions of the North American Wildlife and Natural Resources Conference 41, 533-546. Kellert, S.R, and Berry, J.K. (1987), Attitudes, knowl- edge, and behaviours toward wildlife as affected by gender. Wildlife Society Bulletin 15, 363-371. McKay, G.M. and Ong, P. (1995), Common Ringtail Possum, Pseudacheirus peregrinus, In ‘The Mammals of Australia’, pp. 254-256, Ed, R. Strahan. (Reed Books: New South Wales.) 125 Research Report Moore, D.S. and McCabe, G.P. (1993), ‘Introduction to the Practice of Statistics’ (2! edn). (W.H. Freeman and Company: New York.) Penland, S. (1987), Attitudes of urban residents toward avian species and species’ attributes. /n ‘Integrating Man and Nature in the Metropolitan Environment’. pp. 77-82. Eds L.W. Adams and D.L. Leedy. (National Institute for Urban Wildlife: Columbia.) Peyton, R.B. and Decker, D.J. (1987). The role of val- ues and valuing in wildlife communication and edu- cation. Zn “Valuing Wildlife: Economic and Social Perspectives’, pp. 243-254, Eds D.J. Decker and G.R. Goff, (Westview Press; Colorado.) Pomerantz, G,A,, Stumvoll, R. and Decker, D.J, (1987). Public values and white-tailed deer manage- ment in New York. /n ‘Valuing Wildlife: Economic and Social Perspectives’, pp. 357-365. Eds D.J. Decker and G.R. Goff. (Westview Press: Colorado.) Schulz, W. (1987). Attitudes toward wildlife in West Germany, /n “Valuing Wildlife: Economic and Social Perspectives’, pp. 352-354. Eds D.J. Decker and G.R- Goff. (Westview Press: Colorado, ) Stucky, N.P., Bachant, J.P., Christoff, G,T. and Dieffenbach, W.H. (1987), Public interest and enyi- ronmental impact assessment and mitigation, Jn ‘Valuing Wildlife: Economic and Social Perspectives’, pp. 235-242, Eds D.J, Decker and G.R. Goff. (Westview Press: Colorado.) Temby, I. (1992). *A Guide to Living with Wildlife: How to prevent and control wildlife damage in Victoria’, (Department of Conservation and Environment: Victoria.) Temby, |, (1995). Perceptions of wildlife as pests: you can teach an old dogma new tricks, /n “People and Nature Conservation: Perspectives on Private Land Use and Endangered Species Recovery’, pp. 174- 180. Eds A. Bennett, G. Backhouse and T. Clark. (Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales: New South Wales.) Mother and baby Common Brushtail Possum Trichosurus vulpecula feeding. Supplementary feeding of possums and other wildlife is a common, though not recommended, practice. Photo by Rhonda Miller. The Victorian Naturalist Contributions A New Inland Record of the Swamp Skink Egernia coventryi Storr, 1978 Nick Clemann! and Cam Beardsell' Abstract The threatened Swamp Skink Egernia coventry’ occupies a predominantly coastal distribution in south-eastern Australia, Pew inland records exist from western Victoria. This note reports a new inland record of FE. coventry’ from the vicinity of Ballarat, This population was located in habitat considered somewhat atypical for this species. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (4), 1999, 127-128) The Swamp Skink Egernia coventryi is listed as vulnerable in Victoria (NRE 1999) and has a disjunet distribution in southeastern Australia, predominantly in coastal regions (Cogger 1996), Within this range this lizard occupies swamp and salt- marsh habitat characterised by dense sedge and tussock vegetation (Smales 1981; Schulz 1985; Clemann 1997). Due to the structure of this vegetation, and the retiring nature of this lizard, E. coventryi is diffi- cult to capture by hand and is more reli- ably collected using Elliott aluminium traps (Robertson 1980; Clemann 1997), Egernia coventryi is known from only a small number of inland locations, general- ly in eastern Victoria at Yellingbo and in East Gippsland (Atlas of Victorian Wildlife database, NRE). There are also inland records for the west of the State, from the Casterton district, the Grampians National Park, and a single historical record from Ballarat. Despite recent searches, the population in the Grampians has not been observed for some time (J. Coventry pers. comm.). The details of the record from Ballarat, including collection date and specific locality, are incomplete and unsubstantiated, While conducting herpetofauna surveys for the Regional Forest Agreement process during January 1999 in the Enfield State Forest (143° 45° E, 37° 44 S), approxi- mately 20 km southwest of Ballarat, one of the authors (NC) observed what was sus- pected to be an adult individual of . coven- tryi in a low-lying area at the headwaters of a drainage line. In an effort to confirm this identification, 25 Elliott traps were posi- tioned in the vicinity of the original sighting Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research, Department of Natural Resources and Environment, 123 Brown Street, Heidelberg, Vietoria 3084 Vol. 116 (4) 1999 on 9 February 1999, and baited with pilchards, a proven bait for this species (Clemann ef al. 1998), The vegetation in the immediate vicinity of the traps was heathy woodland dominat- ed by Prickly Tea-tree Leprospermum con- tinentale and Dwart Bush-pea Palrenaea humilis with an open overstorey of Messmate Eucalyptus obliqua, Scent-bark E. aremaphloia and Shining Peppermint LE. willisii, Co-dominant vegetation in the ground layer included Small Crrass-tree Xanthorrhoea miner, Common Rapier: sedge Lepidosperma filifarmis, Many- flowered Mat-rush Lomandre muluflora, Slender Tussock-grass Poo tenera and Slender Dodder-laurel Cassytha glabella. The following morning the traps were checked and yielded a single adult female E. coventry and two Agile Antechinus Antechinus agilis. The lizard was gravid and produced four young on 14 February 1999 while it was temporarily captive, The length and weight of the adult and the neonates are presented in Table |. All ani- mals were released where caught after suit- able observations had been made and pho- tographs taken (Fig. 1), A brief survey of the immediate area revealed a number of sympatric seincid species, including White’s Skink Egernia whitti, Southern Water Skink Eulamprus tympanum, Garden Skink Lampropholis guichenoti and Eastern Three-lined Skink Bassiana duperryi. Ii is interesting to note that, despite its proximity lo a major town, this population of E. coventry’ has previously gone unde- tected. The habitat at this site is uncharac- teristic for &. coventry’ in that it has an overstorey of Eucalyptus spp., and con- tains no Melaleuca spp., usually evident in this skink’s habitat. 127 Contributions Table 1. Length and weight data of adult female and four neonate Egernia coveniryi from Enfield State Forest, Weight (g) Snout-vent length (mm) Tail length (mm) Adult female 16.5 90 92 original plus 36 regrown Juvenile | 1.0 37 48 Juvenile 2 0.9 34 44 Juvenile 3 0.9 36 44 Juvenile 4 1.0 37 48 Acknowledgements Clemann, N., Brown, P, and Brown, G, (1998). A note The authors thank Richard Loyn and Graeme Newell from the Arthur Rylah Institute, Department of Natural Resources and Environment, for encouraging the confirmation of the original tentative sighting. John Coventry (Curator of Herpetology at the Museum of Victoria) and Peter Robertson provided helpful comments on the distribution of this species. Peter also kindly measured and weighed the lizards. Geoff Brown, Richard Loyn and Graeme Newell commented on the manuscript. The authors thank an anonymous referee for reviewing the manuscript. The surveys were funded by State and Commonwealth Governments as part of the process of develop- ing the Regional Forest Agreements. References Clemann, N. (1997). Aspects of the biology and ecolo- gy of the Swamp Skink Egernia coventryi Storr, 1978 (Sauria: Scincidae). (Unpublished B.Sc. (Hons.) Thesis, Deakin University). eee we A Fig. 1, Egernia cover 128 uryi, gravid female, Enfield State Forest. Photo by Nick Clemann. on bait selection when trapping the Swamp Skink Egernia coyentryi in Elliott traps. The Victorian Naturalist 115, 81-83. Cogger, H.G. (1996). ‘Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia’. (Reed Books: Frenchs Forest), NRE. (1999). ‘Threatened Vertebrate Fauna in Victoria - 1999", (Department of Natural Resources and Environment: Victoria). Robertson, P, (1980). ‘ALCOA Portland Aluminium Smelter Environmental Study Report No. | — Mourning Skink Investigations.’ Report prepared by Peter Robertson and Kinhill Planners Pty Ltd. Schulz, M. (1985). The occurrence of the Mourning Skink, Egernia coventry? Storr, in saltmarsh in Westernport Bay, Victoria. The Victorian Naturalist 102, 148-52, Smales, I, (1981), The herpetofauna of the Yellingbo State Faunal Reserve, The Victorian Naturalist 98, 234-46. The Victorian Naturalist Contributions The Use of ‘Forms’ for Denning by the Common Ringtail Possum Pseudocheirus peregrinus at Subalpine Altitudes Ken Green! Abstract Daytime observations of Common Ringtail Possums on the ground in subalpine woodland are attrib- uted to the use of forms, similar to those used by hares, These areas of flattened vegetation are used both in summer and in winter, when they are found beneath the snow. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (4), 1999, 129-130), The local abundance of Common Ringtail Possums Pseudocheirus peregri- nus is thought to be affected by the avail- ability of nest sites (McKay 1983). The nest is usually a ball of grass or shredded bark in a hollow limb or amongst dense foliage, but at the northern extent of the range of the species a nest is rarely con- structed, although the possum still sleeps in tree hollows (McKay 1983). In stands of regrowth Snowgum Eucalyptus niphophila above 1500 m in the Snowy Mountains, relatively few trees have had sufficient time to develop hollows, but Ringtail Possums may still be observed (Green and Osborne 1994). In February 1999, Ringtail Possums were disturbed on the ground in snowgum woodland on Disappointment Spur at about 1:30-2:00 pm by Glenn Sanecki (pers. comm.) and two days later at 9 am by the author. In the first case, the possum was simply disturbed as the observer walked through thick woodland, so no deductions could be made about its behay- jour on the ground. Because the Ringtail Possum is strictly nocturnal (McKay 1983) this is, however, indicative of behaviour other than foraging. In the second instance, the author had spent some minutes within one metre of a Ringtail Possum while han- dling two captured Dusky Antechinuses Antechinus swainsonii. [t wasn’t until the animals had been released, equipment packed away and traps folded that the author, stepping over a leaning tree, dis- turbed the possum which quickly ran up a nearby tree. On investigation, there was no evidence of a ground-level nest, However, beneath a tree and under a nearby grass ' NSW National Parks and Wildlife Service, Snowy Mountains Region, PO Box 222%, Jindabyne NSW 2627, Vol. 116 (4) 1999 tussock there was evidence of flattening of the herbaceous stratum in what could best be described as a minimalist ‘form’, simi- lar to that used by Hares Lepus capensis in long grass, rushes or heath (Hewson 1977, Mahood 1983). Denning in such a ‘form’ by Ringtail Possums has not previously been recorded in the literature but their occurrence on the ground in the late after- noon has also been observed in woodland at Mt. Kaputar (Bill Foley pers. comm.) and at Round Mountain (Will Osborne pers. conum.) The use of ‘forms’ by Ringtail Possums in winter is eyen more unexpected, although conditions beneath the snow may be more comfortable than in a drey situat- ed in thick scrub, a sight uncommon above the winter snowline (Green and Osborne 1994), Generally mammals weighing more than 250 g are rare beneath the snow sur- face (Pruitt 1984) except in the case of bur- rowers and/or hibernators, which in Australia include the Fox Vulpes vulpes and Common Wombat Vombatus ursinus (Green and Osborne 1994) and Echidna Tachyglossus aculeatus (Grigg et al. 1992), In mid July 1996, in an area with no old Snowgums, the author observed a Ringtail Possum at 9.20 am emerging from a pos- sum-width tunnel chewed through thick shrubs leading to below the snow surface. The site was marked, and investigated after the thaw. All that was present at the site was a branch of down-turned gum leaves about 40-50 cm off the ground, with a space beneath but no evidence of a nest. This form was more protected than Hare forms in winter which are sometimes no more than a scrape beneath an overhanging tree (pers. obs.). Extensive movement under the snow would be impossible for 129 Research Reports such a large non-burrowing mammal as a Ringtail Possum and their tracks are sel- dom recorded on the snow (pers. obs.), so their normal behaviour would probably be to descend a tree directly to their ‘form’. In a sample of 1159 fox scats from a sub- alpine transect containing many Hares, evidence of Hares was only found in one scat while remains of Ringtail Possums were found in five. Compared with nine oecurrences of Rabbits Oryctolagus euniculus, which are Jess common than either species aboye the winter snowline (Green and Osborne 1994), these figures are quite low. This suggests that, unless the Rabbits were scavenged after dying for some other reason, denning on the ground is not as dangerous as it might first appear, as long as an animal has some well-devel- oped predator-avoidance mechanism such as speed (in the case of the Hare) or tree- climbing (in the Ringtail Possum). The greater degree of protection afforded to a Ringtail Possum in winter by submerging itself completely beneath the snow may be an indication of a low tolerance of cold. Comparative studies on the thermal biolo- gy of Ringtail Possums and Hares have not been conducted. However, the non-bur- rowing Hare (Mahood 1983) is able to sur- vive heavy snow years without moving to lower altitudes, both in New Zealand (Flux 1967) and Australia, and without being Editor's note: forced to enhance its insulation from the cold by using the space beneath the snow, Based on the observations reported here, it appears possible that the use of ‘forms’ by Ringtail Possums may be widespread but infrequently noted, The occurrence of this behaviour at subalpine altitudes raises inter- esting questions about the thermal biology of the species, particularly in winter. References Flux, J.E.C. (1967), Hare numbers and diet in an alpine basin in New Zealand, Proceedings of the New Zealand Ecological Society 14, 15-26. Green, K. and Osborne, W.S. (1981), The diet of foxes, Vulpes vulpes (L.) in relation to abundance of prey above the winter snowline in New South Wales. Australian Wildlife Research 8, 349-60. Green, K, and Osborne, W.S. (1994). “Wildlife of the Australian Snow-Country’. (Reed: Sydney). Grigg, G.C., Augee, M.L, and Beard, L.A, (1992). Thermal relations of free-living echidnas during activity and in hibernation in a cold climate. Ji *Platypuses and echidnas’, Ed. M.L, Augee. pp 160- 173. (Royal Zoological Society of NSW: Sydney), Hewson, R, (1977), Brown Hare, In “The Handbook of British Mammals 2nd ed’, Eds G,B, Corbet and H.N. Southern, pp 140-144. (Blackwell Scientific Publications; Oxford). McKay, G.M. (1983). Common Ringtail Possum, In ‘The Australian Museum Complete Book of Australian Mammals’. Ed. R, Strahan, pp, 126-127. (Angus & Robertson: Sydney), Mahood, L.-T. (1983). Brown Hare, In “The Australian Museum Complete Book of Australian Mammals’, Ed. R. Strahan. p. 480. (Angus & Robertson; Sydney), Pruitt, W.O. (1984). Snow and small mammals. In “Winter Ecology of Small Mammals’. Ed, J.P. Merritt. pp. 1-8, (Carnegie Museum of Natural History: Pittsburgh), Hewson (1977) describes a hare’s form as ‘a shallow depression in long grass, rushes, heather or scrub’. Fifty Years Ago MONTHLY NOTES FROM THE PORTLAND E.N.C. by Noel F, Learmonth Among the exhibits brought to our last meeting were two Rufous Bristle-birds (Dasyornis broadbenti), a Ground Thrush (Oreocincla lunulata), a Goshawk (Astur fascias) and an Allied Rat (Rattus assinilis) - all from among that morning's catch in a member's line of rabbit traps. Bristle-birds are frequently killed in this way and, though difficult to see in the thick undergrowth south of Portland, are quite common; the writer saw five birds on one bush track at Cape Nelson recently. Ground Thrushes are rare here, though widespread. The goshawk was only just dead when found at dawn, so it must be a very early hunter. From The Victorian Naturalist 66, p. 68, August 1949. 130 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions Fauna Survey Group (FSG) Contribution No, 22 A Survey of the Vertebrate Fauna of the Rushworth State Forest S.D, Myers' and S.G. Dashper' Abstract Surveys were conducted in the Rushworth State Forest by the Fauna Survey Group of the FNCV for about four years. The main motivation for the work was to detect and monitor the presence of Brush- tailed Phascogale Phascogale tapoatafa, but we have also kept records for all vertebrate species detected. These records include a number of species that are declining, threatened or endangered and provide a picture of the current status of the fauna in the forest. (The Victorian Naturalist, 116 (4), 1999, 131-141). Introduction Box and Ironbark forests contain some of the most threatened habitats in Victoria. Approximately 85% of these forests and related ecosystems have been cleared since pre-European settlement and less than 3% of that remaining receives any form of pro- tection (Robinson 1993). A large propor- tion of the Box-Ironbark forests in Victoria now exist only in fragmented and degraded remnants. This has had a considerable, deleterious effect on the fauna of these woodlands and forests. Since European settlement, three groups of species in par- ticular (Bennett 1993) have declined in the Box-lronbark forests. These are 1) the hol- low-dependent species requiring large areas (e.g. Powerful Ow! Ninox strenua, Brush-tailed Phascogale Phascogale tapoatafa, Squirrel Glider Petaurus norfol- censis); 2) mobile species that utilise resources in different locations (e.g. Little Lorikeet Glossopsitta pusilla, Swift Parrot Lathamus discolor, Regent Honeyeater Xanthomyza phrygia); and 3) forest-depen- dent species that utilise fallen logs and ground litter for nesting, foraging and shel- ter (e.g. Hooded Robin Melanodryas cucullata, Bush Stone-curlew Burhinus magnirostris). A range of activities such as mining, timber cutting and land clearing within the Box-Ironbark forests has led to a reduction in the resources required by these groups. The Rushworth State Forest is the largest, most intact block of Box-Ironbark forest remaining in this State. It is located in north central Victoria and lies approximately 23 km north-east of Heathcote and 12 km west '17A Park Street, Hawthorn, Victoria 3122, Vol. 116 (4) 1999 of Nagambie, covering an area of circa 32 630 ha (Environment Conservation Council 1997). Within the forest, conserva- tion reserves include the Mount Black Flora Reserve (1630 ha) and the Whroo Historic Reserve (490 ha). The remaining forest area is classified as State Forest for hardwood production (Land Conservation Council 1981). The terrain is generally flat to undulating, gentle hills with Mount Black being the highest peak at 328 m. There are many creeks throughout the Rushworth State Forest that rarely flow except during periods of heavy rain. Annual rainfall varies trom 400-700 mm (Land Cconservation Council 1981). The Rushworth-Whroo area was a major goldfield last century; the forest has been seriously damaged in the past by the activities of gold miners. To this day evi- dence of these past activities is quite visible. The forest is still heavily used for logging and firewood collection. Timber is extracted by selective logging and permit holders may take firewood. Certain areas of the State Forest have not had as many trees removed; consequently the number of hollow-bearing trees is higher in these areas (pers. obs.). The forest is also used for a number of recre- ational activities such as fossicking, rally car driving. trail biking and horse riding. Vegetation There are a number of vegetative struc- tural forms within the forest as classified by the Land Conservation Council (1981) and the Environment Conservation Council (1997). (See also Muir ef al. (1995) for a description of EVCs (Ecological Vegetation Classes) for this area.) The general vegetative structure is 131 Contributions Wanalta Cheong's Rd fe- Whr Tait-Hamilton Rd Verge's Lane , ey” Three Jim's Dam,” i Line 17k Darrocks Dam | a I Prods New Dam f- fl Line 18 Survey Points Roads Creek lines State forest border RUSHWORTH) / ‘ / / ob Arba Buffalo Diggings [ e H Reedy bake Rd F [me Henthepte-Margnmbie 1 Vig. 1. Major survey points in Rushworth State Fore classified as Open Forest Il where Red Ironbark Eucalyptus tricarpa, Grey Box Eucalyptus microcarpa and Yellow Gum Eucalyptus leucoxylon are the dominant species of the tallest stratum (Land Conservation Council 1978). The lower strata consist of Gold-dust Wattle Acacia acinacea, Hedge Wattle A. paradoxa, Chinese Tea-tree Cassinia arcuata and Austral Grass-tree Xanthorrhoea australis. Austral Grass Trees are especially conspic- uous around the slopes of Mount Black. In addition to the above forest type, large areas of Open Forest I consisting of Red Ironbark, Red Stringybark E. macrorhyn- cha and Red Box E. polyanthemos are also extant. Patchy areas of Open Forest | Woodland I, where the major tree species are Grey Box and Yellow Gum, and Open Scrub of Bull Mallee E. behriana and Blue 132 st. (Scale | km = 3.2 mm approximately) Mallee FE. polybractea, are also found within the State Forest (Land Conservation Council 1978). Most of the Open Scrub mallee in the northern section of the forest is used for Eucalyptus-oil production. Altered fire regimes combined with inva- sion by introduced herbaceous species has changed the forest’s substrata since his- toric times. The Fauna Survey Group (FSG) of The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria has been conducting fauna surveys in the Rushworth State Forest since the beginning of 1995 with particular emphasis on determining the status and distribution of the Brush- tailed Phascogale Phascogale tapoatafa (Dashper and Myers in prep.). This report serves to catalogue records of all verte- brate species recorded by the FSG in the region over the past four years. The Victorian Naturalist Contributions Table L. Total survey effort by the FSG in Rushworth State Forest. Survey No. of nest boxes Trap nights Spotlighting Bat trapping date checked (minutes) (nights) June 94 240 330 } December 94 7716 405 April 95 : 220 : Dececember 95 92 210 105 | April 96 12 - May 96 142 September 96 28 : 30 January 97 142 100 June 97 142 200 160, July 97 . 190 January 98 142 80 95 | May 98 92 30 180 Total 792 1856 1495 5 Survey Methods and Results Fauna surveys have been conducted over a period of three and a half years from 1995 to 1998, Surveys were carried out every 4 to 6 months at various locations throughout the forest (Fig. 1). A variety of survey tech- niques were used including checking nest boxes, trapping, spouighting, bird observa- tions and incidental sightings. Table | shows the survey effort for each technique. Nest boxes A total of 142 nest boxes were routinely checked including 92 nest boxes originally erected in 1992 (Soderquist et al. 1996) and 50 nest boxes erected by the FSG in 1995. The 92 nest boxes are at 23 sites consisting of four nest boxes along a tran- sect, the boxes each approximately 100 m apart. The 50 nest boxes erected by the FSG are in lines of 10 boxes, at five sites in the central section of the forest. All nest boxes have entrance holes of 35 mm in diameter, which is a size thought to favour Brush-tailed Phascogales and Sugar Gliders Petaurus breviceps (Soderquist et al. 1996). Therefore, nest box usage may not be an actual reflection of the status and distribution of mammals other than phascogales and Sugar Gliders. Table 2 shows the number of records and occupancy rates for each species observed using the nest boxes. By far the most com- monly recorded species was the Sugar Glider, followed by the Brush-tailed Phascogale, Only five species in total have been recorded using the nest boxes; of those, two have been recorded only once each and one has been recorded twice. Sugar Gliders had a significantly higher nest box occupan- Vol. 116 (4) 1999 cy rate than the Brushetailed Phascogale, the next most commonly recorded species. Trapping Cage and Elliott traps were set in lines of 10 traps about 10 m apart, The bait used was a mixture of peanut butter, rolled oats, honey and vanilla essence. Trapping was not carried out during the phascogale breeding season from August to December or during particularly cold weather. A small effort at pitfall trapping was made during a single visit in December 1994 to January 1995. One pitline with 10 buckets spaced at 10 m intervals was opened for 5 nights, Unfortunately, no ani- mals were trapped by this method. Spotlighting Spotlighting was carried out on a regular, but not intensive, basis by members during FSG camps in a number of areas, mainly in the central south section of the forest (Table 3). It was carried out on an oppor- tunistic basis and usually conducted by two groups of two to six people walking at a pace of approximately 3 km/h, Bat trapping Bat trapping was carried out using harp traps and trip lines (Table 1), Further sur- veys of bats in the area are required, Bird records A bird list was maintained during each of the eighteen mammal survey trips as well as during some independent trips by the authors (survey trips were up to four days in length), Observations were made throughout the forest (Fig. 1); while carry- ing out other survey efforts, all birds seen and heard were recorded. 133 Contributions Table 2. Species recorded in nest boxes (Total No. = number of individuals recorded) and occupancy rate (Occ. Rate = no. species records/no. boxes checked), Key: BTPh . Brush- tailed Phascogale; SG, Sugar Glider; YFA, Yellow-footed Antechinus; CBP, Common Brushtail Possum; CRT, Common Ringtail Possum. Date BTPh SG YFA CBP CRT Dec-95 I 25 | Apr-96 | 18 May-96 4 93 | Sep-96 I 34 Jan-97 6 62 | | Jun-97 4 114 Jan-98 4 76 May-98 | 68 Total No, = 22 490 2 1 1 Occ. Rate 0.03 0.77 0.01 0.01 0.01 Chance observations and indirect signs Vocalisations, scats and tracks encoun- tered were duly noted. Discussion Survey work by the FSG in the Rushworth State Forest area is an ongoing process that we hope to continue for many years to come. This is an interim report of survey records to date. The group has recorded a number of species that are of particular interest. The aim of trapping by the FSG at Rushworth was chiefly to detect the pres- ence of phascogales. Therefore, we have generally employed the strategy of setting traps in seemingly suitable habitat, espe- cially near hollow stumps and logs and at the base of hollow-bearing trees, Trapping has been a rather selective process, howev- er this has not excluded other mammals such as the Yellow-footed Antechinus Antechinus flavipes from being trapped. To date, trapping in Rushworth has not been particularly successful, highlighting the trap shyness of the animals combined with low densities of phascogales and other small mammals in this Box-lronbark for- est. Mammals The following is an annotated list of mammals recorded in the Rushworth State Forest by the FSG over the past four years. Mammals in the forest were detected by means of trapping, spotlighting and by 134 Table 3. Spotlighting results. Mean Spotlighting Rate (MSR) = No. of records/total spotlighting time (minutes); No, = Number of records. *see discussion. Species No. MSR Australian Owlet-nightjar ! 0.04 Barn Owl I 0.04 Brush-tailed Phascogale | 0.04 Common Brushtail Possum 21 0.84 Common Ringtail Possum 19 0.76 Feathertail Glider | 0.04 Koala | 0.04 Southern Boobook 3 0.12 Squirrel Glider 8% 0.32 Sugar Glider 36 1.44 Tawny Frogmouth | 0.04 indirect and chance observations (vocalisa- tions, scats, tracks), Measures of abun- dance (Tables 2 and 3) are given for mam- mals that were recorded by trapping, spot- lighting or nest box checks. Short-beaked Echidna Tachyglossus aculeatus One direct sighting of a very large, pale individual was recorded with signs of diggings reasonably common although not widespread. Despite the apparent abundance of ants in the forest, echidnas do not seem to be common; it is possible that the very hard soil limits the ability of the species to exploit this food source. Yellow-footed Antechinus Antechinus flavipes flavipes The Yellow-footed Antechinus was recorded using nest boxes, in traps and through incidental observations during the day. Scats and nests in nest boxes are also reasonably common, This indicates that it is a relatively common species in the Rushworth Forest. The Yellow-footed Antechinus is restricted to a band running roughly along the line of the Great Dividing Range from the north-east to the south- west of the State where it occurs mainly in dry forest and woodland. This species is heavily reliant on natural tree hollows for shelter (Menkhorst 1995), Naturally occurring ground litter and logs, where the Yellow-footed Antechinus forages for arthropods and small vertebrates, are also necessary. Menkhorst (1995) states that the degradation of the dry woodland habitats of this species inevitably leads to The Victorian Naturalist concern over its long-term survival prospects. Brush-tailed Phascogale Phascogale tapoatafa The most significant mammal recorded is the Brush-tailed Phascogale. The phascogale is classified as rare in Victoria by the Department of Natural Resources and Environment and listed in Schedule 2 of the Fauna and Flora Guarantee Act. This species was first recorded by others in 1993 when phasco- gale nests and scats were recorded in nest boxes, although no animals were sighted (Soderquist ef al. 1996). The FSG has 22 records in total of phascogales using nest boxes (Table 2). Phascogale tapoatafa has been observed twice during spotlight surveys and recorded three times in traps. Additionally. signs, including scats and nests, have been noted in 28 of 142 nest boxes (19%) regularly checked by the FSG. Obviously use of nest boxes by the Brush-tailed Phascogale is considerably lower than that of the Sugar Glider but we believe that even this low occupancy rate is important. The phascogale requires large areas of forest in order to maintain viable populations (Soderquist 1995), A lack of mature-age, hollow- bearing trees may lead to phascogales selecting hollows with inadequate protec- tion against predators, leading to an increase in mortality rates. As the Box- Ironbark forest continues to be degraded and fragmented, local extinctions are likely to occur. Rushworth State Forest is the largest block of Box-Ironbark forest remaining in Victoria, and is important for the conservation of this species. With the erection of nest boxes in the Rushworth State Forest it is possible we are encouraging the phascogale popula- tion to increase in number, as a lack of hollows limits populations. Common Dunnart Sminthopsis murinus One female with 5 pouch young was irapped in tall open woodland grading to low open woodland in the southern end of the forest. In Victoria the Common Dunnart's status is uncertain (Menkhorst 1995), it is classified as Rare by the Environment Conservation Council (1997). Rushworth may possibly repre- sent an important population. Vol. 116 (4) 1999 Contributions Koala Phascolarctos cinereus One Koala was recorded while spot- lighting in the Spring Creek area in the southern section of the forest. Common Brushtail Possum 7richosurus vulpecula Menkhorst (1995) records the Common Brushtail Possum as common in Box and Ironbark forests. They were the second most commonly observed species after the Sugar Glider during spotlighting (MSR 0.84 ef. 1.44; Table 3). One was recorded in a decrepit nest box. Sugar Glider Peteirus breviceps The Sugar Glider was the most fre- quently recorded mammal. Its use of nest boxes appears to be mostly in areas with low densities of hollow-bearing trees. It was the most frequently observed species when spotlighting (Table 3). This species is widespread and rela- tively common in Victoria and its status is classified as secure (Menkhorst 1995), The Sugar Glider is also dependent on tree hollows. The extremely high rate of nest box usage by Sugar Gliders (Table 2) may indicate a paucity of natural hol- lows. We often found Sugar Gliders using nest boxes in areas that are almost totally devoid of hollow-bearing trees. Lunney (1987) found that in forests such as Rushworth State Forest that are man- aged intensively as a timber resource leading to reduced numbers of hollow bearing trees, Sugar Glider numbers are consequently reduced. In the Rushworth area large stands of coppiced eucalypts have replaced much old-growth forest, leading the fauna survey group to suspect that the species’ future in the Rushworth area is by no means secure, Squirrel Glider Petaurus norfolcensis This species was observed in an area of roadside vegetation consisting of some large hollow-bearing Yellow Box on the southern border of the forest. It is possi- ble that this species has been recorded during spotlighting in the Spring Creek area but due to difficulties with identifi- cation of the Squirrel Glider (Traill 1998) further work is required in order to con- firm the existence of this species within the Rushworth State Forest. Sherwin (1996) classifies the Rushworth forest 135 Contributions block as a key location for this species. Common Ringtail Possum Pseudacheirus peresrinus The Common Ringtail Possum was recorded onee while using a nest box which was in very poor condition, The animal gained aceess to the box via the broken lid. This species was recorded many times in edge habitat during spot- lighting but rarely within the forest. This species is common in forested areus in Victoria but it appears that in Rushworth State Forest it uses hollows rather than dreys for nesting, A lack of hollows in the area may lead to reduced numbers in Rushworth State Forest. Feathertail Glider Acrobates pygmaeus One Feathertiil Glider was recorded by the group while it was foraging in a large flowering Yellow Gum near a dam. This species has only been recorded once in the Rushworth State Forest in 1990 (Atlas of Victorian Wildlife database, NRE). It may be under reported due its diminutive size, Eastern Grey Kangaroo Macropus SIVATEUS This species is common throughout the forest, particularly in areas abutting farm- land. I is commonly recorded by direct observation and signs such as seats and skeletal remains, Black Wallaby Wallabia bicolor The Black Wallaby is one of the most common mammals observed throughout Rushworth State Forest. It is frequently sighted while driving, walking and spot- lighting, Road kills are also commonly observed. The thumping, warning sound is frequently noted, as are seats, Young animals are also often seen, suggesting a high breeding rate. Gould’s Wattled Bat Chalinelobus gould One Gould's Wattled Bat was captured ina harp trap. Little Forest Bat Vespudelus vulturnus The Little Korest Bat was recorded from harp trapping in the central section of the forest. The species is common and widespread in Victoria (Menkhorst 1995). Red Fox Vulpes vulpes Four sight records of foxes were made within the forest, Seats are regularly, though not commonly, noted, Anecdotally, 136 this species does not appear to be common in Rushworth State Forest. Cat Felis catus We have one sight record of a cat, and scats have been noted on occasions. It does not appear to be common in the for- est Goat Capra hircus We have no direct sightings of Goat. Tracks and seats have been recorded in the central section of the forest. What ts believed to be goat hair has been observed in phascogale nests, Tracks have been noted at some dams. Feral Pig Sus scrofa The group has one record of a dead pig near Spring Creek in the southern end of the forest. European Rabbit Oryctolagus cuniculus Sight and sign records were frequently made. Anecdotally, we have noted a decrease in abundance since the introduc- tion of the Calicivirus, Birds Over 100 species of bird have been recorded by the FSG, with approximately 30 days of bird observations of varying intensity being carried out. This represents arich avifauna. Table 4 shows a list of bird species recorded by the FSG in the Rushworth State Forest. Measures of abun- dance are given for birds where reporting rate and abundance were measured. A number of species recorded by the FSG in Rushworth State Forest are classified by the Department of Natural Resources and Environment as depleted, These are: Collared Sparrowhawk, Wedge-tailed Eagle, Litthe Lorikeet, Australian Owlet- nightjar, White-bellied Cuckoo-shrike, Jacky Winter, Crested Bellbird, Spotted Quail-thrush, White-browed Babbler, Speckled Warbler, Chestnut-rumped Heathwren, Grey Currawong and Emu (see also Robinson 1994), Water birds such as herons and cormorants have been recorded at numerous dams scattered through the forest. Most dams are man-made for fire- fighting purposes. Interesting sightings are discussed below, Emu Dromaius novaehollandiae An artificially established population at Puckapunyal Military Reserve (Emison The Victorian Naturalist et al. 1987) was the only record for cen- tral Victoria collected over the period from 1977 to 1981. This leads the FSG to believe that the Emu has possibly spread to the Rushworth State Forest. Our per- centage-reporting rate of 22.2% suggests that the species has possibly become well established in the area although no signs of breeding have yet been observed, Little Lorikeet Glossopsitta pusilla This species mainly inhabits Box- Ironbark and associated forest but is not common in the Rushworth region. Little Lorikeets are highly nomadic and have been recorded by the group when euca- lypts are flowering in spring and winter, It is also declining in Victoria (Robinson 1994), Swift Parrot Lathamus discolor Classified as Vulnerable and listed under Schedule 2 of the Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 1998, the Swift Parrot relies on Winter-flowering eucalypts i its non-breeding range, such as are found in the Box-Ironbark forests. Powerful Owl Ninox strenua The Powerful Owl has been recorded once by the group in an area abutting Mount Black where larger, hollow bear- ing trees remain in reasonable numbers. It has been estimated that fewer than 500 breeding pairs remain in Victoria (Garnett 1992), [Tt is estimated by the Environment Conservation Council (1997) that fewer than 50 breeding pairs remain in the Victorian Box-Ironbark forests. Rushworth State Forest could therefore be an important area for the conservation of this species. The Powerful Owl is classified as rare and vulnerable in Australia and Victoria, although widespread (Environment Conservation Council 1997), Yellow-rumped Pardalote Pardalotus punctatus xanthopygus The Yellow-rumped Pardalote was only ever observed in the mallee area in the north of the forest. This is probably an isolated population and may hybridise with the more commonly occurring nom- inate race, Spotted Pardalote Pardalotus punctatus punctatus. Chestnut-rumped Heathwren Hylacola pyrrhogia We have found this species to be local- Vol. 116 (4) 1999 Contributions ly common within the Rushworth State Forest, although it is declining in Victoria (Robinson 1994), Speckled Warbler Chithonicola sagittata This species is classified as declining by Robinson (1994); it is a ground leed- ing and nesting species that is particular ly vulnerable to introduced predators. The Speckled Warbler’s main distribu- tion in southeastern Victoria ts within the dry Box forests and woodlands. Where the habitat is highly modified or dis- turbed (e.g. where timber cutting occurs as in Rushworth) the populations disap- pear (Robinson and ‘Traill 1996), Regent Honeyeater Nanthomyca plirygia The Regent Honeyeater is listed as a threatened taxon in Schedule 2 of the Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 198SS and classified as Endangered by the Department of Natural Resources and Environment, This species has declined in or disappeared from much of its range. lis present population may be less than 1000 individuals, and its decline is believed to be due to habitat loss, degra- dation and fragmentation (Garnett 1992). Tawny-crowned Honeyeater This species was recorded only in areas of mallee near the town of Rushworth in the northern section of the forest. Black Honeyeater Certhionyx niger A single bird was observed drinking at a dam in January 1995 alter a period of below average rainfall, Rushworth forest may represent an important drought refuge area for such species. The impor- tance of these sites to species such as Black Honeyeater, in terms of long-term viability, requires further research (Mord and Paton 1986) especially in view of continuing fragmentation of dry wood- land habitats. Red-capped Robin Pefroica goodenovii The Red-capped Robin is classified as declining in Victoria (Robinson 1994), I appears to be uncommon in Rushworth State Forest. White-browed Babbler Pomarostomus superciliosus The White-browed Babbler is declining in Victoria (Robinson 1994), and although not uncommon in Rushworth, anecdotally we have noted a decrease in numbers. The White-browed Babbler 137 Contributions Table 4, Birds Recorded in Rushworth State Forest. Surveys = number of survey trips in which the Species was detected out of 18 carried out; % = percentage of surveys on which the species was recorded. Common and scientific names follow Christidis and Boles (1994). Common Name Scientific Name Surveys % Emu Dromaius novaehollandiae 4 22.2 Brown Quail Coturnix ypsilophora 2 11] Australian Wood Duck Chenonetta jubata 3 16.7 Pacific Black Duck Anas superciliosa 4 22.2 Australasian Grebe Tachybaptus novaehollandiae 5 27.8 Pied Cormorant Phalacrocorax varius l 5.6 Great Cormorant Phalacrocorax carbo | 5.6 White-faced Heron Egretta novaehollandiae 2 11.1 White-necked Heron Ardea pacifica | 5.6 Nankeen Night Heron Nyeticorax caledonicus | 5.6 Brown Goshawk Accipiter fasciatus 4 22.2 Collared Sparrowhawk Accipiter cirrhocephalus | 5.6 Wedge-tailed Eagle Aquila audax 4 BPE Little Eagle Hieraaetus morphnoides | 5.6 Peregrine Falcon Falco peregrinus ] 5.6 Painted Button-quail Turnix varia 4 san Common Bronzewing Phaps chalcoptera 12 66.7 Brush Bronzewing Phaps elegans 2 11.1 Crested Pigeon Ocyphaps lophotes 3 16,7 Galah Cacatua roseicapilla 12 66.7 Sulphur-crested Cockatoo Cacatua galerita 1] 61.1 Rainbow Lorikeet Trichoglossus haematodus I 5.6 Musk Lorikeet Glossopsitta concinna 12 66.7 Little Lorikeet Glossopsitta pusilla a 50.0 Purple-crowned Lorikeet Glossopsitta porphyrocephala 4 22,2 Crimson Rosella Platycercus elegans Ley 94.4 Eastern Rosella Platycercus eximius 15 83.3 Swift Parrot Lathamus discolor 1 5.6 Pallid Cuckoo Cuculus pallidus 2 jival Fan-tailed Cuckoo Cacomantis flabelliformis 3 16.7 Shining Bronze-Cuckoo Chrysococeyx lucidus 4+ 22,2 Horsfield’s Bronze-Cuckoo Chrysococcyx basilis 2 [1.1 Powerful Owl Ninox strenua | 5.6 Southern Boobook Ninox novaeseelandiae 4 22.2 Tawny Frogmouth Podargus strigoides | 5.6 White-throated Nightjar Eurostopodus mystacalis 2 11.1 Australian Owlet-nightjar Aegotheles cristatus 5 27.8 White-throated Needletail Hirundapus caudacutus 5 21.8 Laughing Kookaburra Dacelo novaeguineae 13 72,2 Sacred Kingfisher Todiramphus sanctus 3 16.7 Rainbow Bee-eater Merops ornatus 2 WAL White-throated Treecreeper Cormohates leucophaeus 15 83,3 Brown Treecreeper Climacteris picumnus 10 55.6 Superb Fairy-wren Malurus cyaneus 12 66.7 Spotted Pardalote Pardalotus punctatus 16 88.9 (includes Yellow-rumped Pardolote) Striated Pardalote Pardalotus striatus 12 66.7 Chestnut-rumped Heathwren Hylacola pyrrhopygia i 16.7 Speckled Warbler Chthonicola sagittata 2 1.1 Weebill Smicrornis brevirostris 14 771.8 Western Gerygone Gerygone fusca i 5.6 Brown Thornbill Acanthiza pusilla | 5.6 Chestnut-rumped Thornbill Acanthiza uropygialis 2 [11 Buff-rumped Thornbill Acanthiza reguloides 16 88.9 Yellow-rumped Thornbill Acanthiza chrysorrhoa 4 22.2 Yellow Thornbill Acanthiza nana 2 11.1 Striated Thornbill Acanthiza lineata 4 22.2 Red Wattlebird Anthochaera carunculata 18 100.0 Little Wattlebird Anthochaera chrysoptera I 5.6 138 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions Table 4. continued. Common Name Scientific Name Surveys % Noisy Friarbird Philemon corniculatus 16.7 Little Friarbird Philemon citreogularis 5.6 Regent Honeyeater Xanthomyza phrygia 5.6 Noisy Miner Manorina melanocephala 16.7 Yellow-faced Honeyeater Lichenostomus chrysops 38.9 White-eared Honeyeater Lichenostomus leucotis I 61.1 Yellow-tufted Honeyeater Lichenostomus melanops | 100.0 Yellow-plumed Honeyeater Lichenostomus ornatus 16.7 Fuscous Honeyeater Lichenostomus fuscus I 94.4 White-plumed Honeyeater Lichenostomus penicillatus 44.4 Black-chinned Honeyeater Melithreptus gularis 44.4 Brown-headed Honeyeater Melithreptus brevirostris | 94.4 White-naped Honeyeater Melithreptus lunatis 27.8 New Holland Honeyeater Phylidonyris novaehollandiae 27,8 Tawny-crowned Honeyeater Phylidonyris melanops 16.7 Eastern Spinebill Acanthorhynchus tenuirostris 2 Black Honeyeater White-fronted Chat Jacky Winter Scarlet Robin Flame Robin Red-capped Robin Rose Robin Hooded Robin Eastern Yellow Robin White-browed Babbler Spotted Quail-thrush Varied Sittella Crested Shrike-tit Crested Bellbird Gilbert’s Whistler Golden Whistler Rufous Whistler Grey Shrike-thrush Satin Flycatcher Restless Flycatcher Magpie-lark Grey Fantail Willie Wagtail Black-faced Cuckoo-shrike White-bellied Cuckoo-shrike White-winged Triller Olive-backed Oriole Black-faced Woodswallow Dusky Woodswallow Grey Butcherbird Australian Magpie Pied Currawong Grey Currawong Australian Raven Little Raven White-winged Chough Diamond Firetail Mistletoebird Welcome Swallow Tree Martin Silvereye Common Blackbird Common Starling Vol. 116 (4) 1999 Certhionyx niger Epthianura albifrons Microeca fascinans Petroica multicolor Petroica phoenicea Petroica goodenovii Petroica rosea Melanodryas cucullata Eopsaltria australis Pomatostomus superciliosus Cinclosoma punctatum Daphoenositta chrysoptera Falcunculus frontatus Oreoica guituralis Pachycephala inornata Pachycephala pectoralis Pachycephala rufiventris Colluricincla harmonica Myiagra cyanoleuca Myiagra inquieta Grallina cyanoleuca Rhipidura fuliginosa Rhipidura leucophrys Coracina novaehollandiae Coracina papuensis Lalage sueurti Oriolus sagittatus Artamus cinereus Artamus cyanoplerus Cracticus torquatus Gymnorhina tibicen Strepera graculina Strepera versicolor Corvus coronoides Corvus mellori Corcorax melanorhamphos Stagonopleura guttata Dicaeum hirundinaceum Hirundo neoxena Hirundo nigricans Zosterops lateralis Turdus merula Sturnus vulgaris KOK—NCe—WHEK- NOK H—ONWODN HSH KH KH UDWH—K-fWUNIAOTWWORe Hwee Ww 10 NW. DADOWAIDADY 22.2 HKHUbaA- Dut =UNNNAUHB—HNeYNAUWAWSU—-DE-_AVHUASEWS HANKNNIDWENRCHORADA D-AbReEUNMNAIXCARDS! Wa Ww oor ~100Nm in mwNnwn— 139 Contributions previously occurred in the Geelong area but now only occurs north of the Great Dividing Range in Victoria. Spotted Quail-thrush Cinclosoma punc- tatum The Spotted Quail-thrush is declining in Victoria (Robinson 1994) and was observed infrequently by FSG members. Crested Bellbird Orevica gutturalis This species is fairly widespread, though not common in the Rushworth State Forest. Since the local extinction of this species in the Chiltern forest (Traill et al. 1996), the Rushworth population possibly represents the easternmost popu- lation in Victoria and is likely to be an important population at the outer limit of the birds south-eastern distribution, Grey Currawong Strepera versicolor Although declining in Victoria (Robinson 1994), this species is fairly common in Rushworth State Forest. Herpetofauna (Tables 5 and 6). No systematic surveys for reptiles and amphibians have been carried out to date. However. casual observations have revealed a number of species. In particular Bibron’s Toadlet Pseudophryne bibronit and Eastern Banjo Frog Limnodynastes dumerelli are common around dams within the forest. Given that these dams are rela- tively recent, man-made additions to the landscape it seems likely that populations of these species have increased since his- toric times. Both Varanus varius and V. gouldii have been observed on one occa- sion. They require hollow logs and dense litter for shelter. Both of these commodi- ties have been depleted in Box-Ironbark forests since European settlement. Conclusion The Fauna Survey Group has recorded a number of species that fall within the three groups of declining species described by Bennett (1993). The relative paucity of records for many of these species suggests that a lack of Jarge hollow bearing trees has had an impact on the distribution and abundance of these species. Other distur- bances in the Rushworth State Forest have led to a decline in species reliant on fallen and rotting logs and a deep litter layer. Unfortunately, the Box-Ironbark forests of Victoria have, in the past, fallen victim 140 a SS Table 5. Amphibians recorded at Rushworth State Forest. Common and scientific names fol- low Cogger (1996). Common Name Scientific Name Crinia signifera Geocrinia victoriand Limnodynastes dumerili Pseudophryne bibronii Common Froglet Eastern Smooth Frog Eastern Banjo Frog Bibron’s Toadlet Southern Brown Tree Frog Peron’s Treefrog Litoria ewingii Litoria peronii EEE ——— re Table 6, Reptiles recorded at Rushworth State Forest. Common and scientific names follow Cogger (1996). Common Name Marbled Gecko Tree Dragon Scientific Name Christinus marmoratus Amphibolurus muricatus Gould’s Monitor Varanus gouldit Lace Monitor Varanus varius Bougainville Skink Lerista bougainvillii South-eastern Morethia Morethia boulengert Common Bluetongue Tiliqua scincoides Red-bellied Black SnakePseudechis porphyriacusEastern Brown Snake Pseudonaja textilis to an unglamorous image. In large part the forest was all but destroyed before people had a chance to realise its intrinsic value (Calder et al. 1994). Compared to the wet forests of Victoria, dry forests have received little attention in recent years. The importance of this type of forest to Australia’s history and ecology cannot be overstated. An increase in awareness of conservation issues in regard to biodiversi- ty has recently helped to overcome some of these problems but ongoing effort is required, Many species rely wholly or in large part on the Box-Ironbark forest. In order to protect biodiversity in this State the protection of Box-Ironbark forest is of tantamount importance. The Fauna Survey Group is continuing its work in the Rushworth State Forest in the hope that a picture can be created of the fauna in this area in regard to status, distribution and occurrence. We will con- tinue to place emphasis on the Brush-tailed Phascogale as we believe this species to be not only of particular intrinsic interest but an indicator of the overall health of the for- est. At the same time we will of course keep records of all species detected. The Victorian Naturalist Acknowledgements The Fauna Survey Group would particularly like to thank the M.A. Ingram Trust for financial support with this survey. The authors wish to express their gratitude to Ray Gibson, Rob Gration, Russell Thompson and Ray White, as well as all FSG members who assisted with fieldwork, Trapping was carried out under Research Permit number RP-97-144 under the provisions of the Wildlife Act 1975. We would like to thank an anonymous referee for helpful comments on the draft of this paper. References Bennett, A.F, (1993). Fauna Conservation in Box and Ironbark Forests: A Landscape Approach. The Victorian Naturalist 110, 15-23. Calder, D.M., Calder, J. and MeCann, 1, (1994). *The Forgotten Forests: a field guide to Victoria’s box and ironbark country’. (Victorian National Parks Association Inc.: Melbourne). Chrisitidis, L. and Boles, W.E. (1994), “The Taxonomy and Species of Birds of Australia and its Territories’, (Royal Australasian Ornithologists Union: Melbourne), Cogger, HG. (1996), ‘Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia’. (Reed Books; Melbourne), Emison, W.B., Beardsell, C.M., Norman, F.1. and Loyn, R.H. (1987). ‘Atlas of Victorian Birds’. (Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands and the Royal Australasian Ornithologists Union: Melbourne). Environment Conservation Council (1997). *Box- Ironbark — Forests and Woodlands Investigation Resources and Issues Report’. (Environment Conservation Council: Melbourne). Ford. H.A, and Paton, D.C. (Eds) (1986). ‘The Dynamic Partnership-Birds and Plants in Southern Australia’, (The Flora and Fauna of South Australia Handbooks Committee). Garnett, S. (Ed.) (1992). “Threatened and Extinct Birds of Australia’, (R.A.O.U, Report 82). Contributions Recommendations, North Central Area’. Conservation Council: Melbourne). Land Conservation Council (1978). ‘Report on the North Central Study Area’, (Land Conservation Council: Melbourne), Lunney, D. (1987), Effects of logging, fire and drought on possums and gliders in the coastal forests near Bega, NSW. Australian Wildlife Research 14, 263- 274, Menkhorst, P.W. (Ed.) (1995). ‘Mammals of Victoria; Ecology, Conservation and Distribution’. (Oxford University Press: Melbourne). Muir, A.M., Edwards, S.A., and Dickins, MJ. (1995), Description and conservation status of the vegetation of the Box-Lronbark Ecosystem in Victoria, Flora and Fauna Technical Report 136. (Department of Conservation and Natural Resources: Melbourne). Robinson, D, (1993). “Lest We Forget to Forge.” The Victorian Naturalist 110, 6-10. Robinson, D. (1994). Research plan for threatened woodland birds; ARI Technical Report No, 133, (Department of Conservation and Natural Resources: Melbourne). Robinson, D. and Traill, BJ, (1996), Conserving woodland birds in the wheat and sheep belts of southern Australia, RAOU Conservation Statement No, 10. Sherwin, C. (1996). “The Box and Ironbark Forests and Woodlands of Northern Victoria’, (Victorian National Parks Association: Melbourne), Soderquist, T.R. (1995). Spatial organisation of the arboreal carnivorous marsupial Phascogale tapoatafa. Journal of Zoology 237, 385-398. Soderquist, T.R., Traill, B., Faris, F. and Beasley, K. (1996). Using nest boxes to survey for the Brush- tailed Phascogale Phasecogale tapeatafa, The Victorian Naturalist 113, 256-261, Traill, BJ, (1998), Identification of Squirrel Gliders and Sugar Gliders in Victoria, The Victorian Naturalist 115, 135-141. Traill, B.J., Collins, E., Peake, P., and Jessup, S. (1996), Current and Past Status of the Birds of Chiltern — a Box-lronbark Forest in North-Eastern Victoria. The Australian Bird Watcher 16, 309-326, (Land Land Conservation Council (1981). ‘Final One Hundred Years Ago A Large Dingo - [ wish to bring under the notice of this Club particulars regarding a large half-bred Dingo killed recently at Tatong, about 20 miles south-east of Benalla. A paragraph in the Age of 24th April last stating that a Dingo a shade over 6 feet long had been captured at Tatong, struck me as being very interesting, on account of the size of the animal, and I accordingly made inquiries on the matter. Mr, Z. Anthony, of the Vermin Destruction Branch of the Department of Lands and Survey, kindly wrote to Mr. M.J. Delahenty, the Vermin Inspector of the Benalla district, who replied that the animal was a half-bred Dingo, black in colour, and nearly as large as a Newfoundland dog. As this is a most unusual size, even for a half-bred wild dog, the fact appears worthy of record. - A.E. Kitson, 10th July, 1899. From The Victorian Naturalist XVI, p. 76, August 1899, Vol. 116 (4) 1999 141 Contributions Moss Bed Lake on the Nunniong Plateau R.J. Fletcher’ Abstract A pristine sphagnum bog on the Nunniong Plateau is visited and a start is made to determine the suite of plants that furnish it. (7he Victorian Naturalist 116 (4), 1999, 142-145). A network of tracks of varying quality, virtually all of them created for logging, covers the Nunniong Plateau in Gippsland. On the one hand this has destroyed much of the habitat, but on the other has made a rather remote area accessible. Many of these tracks have fascinating names, such as Jam Tin, Blue Shirt, Diggers Hole and so on. Following an excursion to Brumby Point in April 1998, we took some time to examine some of the tracks and follow a circuit beginning at Brumby Point Track, then along Diggers Hole Road to Wheatfield Road and to Ryans Creek Road, which comes to a dead end at Ryan Creek below Mount Nunniong. A short distance further along Wheatfield Road there is the Missing Link, less than a kilometre long, which connects with Moss Bed Track. Along Moss Bed Track, about 1.25 km short of its intersection with Mellick Munjie Road, and just to the south, there is an expanse, quite circular, of water forming a sphagnum bog and bordered by a eucalypt forest. It is marked on the Deception-Deddick 8523-N Mapsheet, co- ordinates EU953906 and accessible by a track from the Moss Bed Track. The winter and spring of 1997 were par- ticularly dry, and followed by a hot sum- mer, so that when we first saw the ‘Lake’ it was in fact a completely dry vista of dried Sphagnum moss extending over the whole bed, which is about 300 m in diameter. Clumps of dried rushes broke the monoto- ny (Fig. 1). Time was not available to make any real examination, but having estab- lished the locality we determined to come back at another time, preferably after rain. In a normal or average year this alpine area, altitude approximately 1180 m, could expect a rainfall of between 1000 tol400 mm (Bureau of Meteorology). In addition to this precipitation there would be runoff from higher country, much of the surrounding area, particularly to the west, being in excess of 1300 m. Characteristically, the '28 Marjorie Avenue, Belmont 3216. 142 Fig. 1. Moss Bed Lake. Dry in April 1998. alpine bog community occurs on a more or less impervious clay or peat (Ashton and Hargreaves 1983). This particular bog would appear to be on the latter base, and possibly also with a granite underlay. This observa- tion is made because the area surrounding the Lake is covered with decaying granite in pieces up to football size. The soil depth is not very great and this is easily observed from the root structure of fallen trees. Substantial timber surrounds the Lake, including Mountain Gum Eucalyptus dalrympleana, Messmate FE. obliqgua and Narrow-leaf Peppermint E. radiata. Not far away, within a kilometre and within earshot, one could hear the chainsaws and bulldozers clear-felling. In addition to this destruction, the tracks had been widened to allow for the passage of timber jinkers, by the simple expedient of bulldozing the margin of Moss Bed Track. This road widening technique can also be observed on other parts of the Nunniong Plateau, noteably along Nunniong Road, so timber extraction 1s set to continue for some time yet, Huge areas have been clear-felled along Mellick Munjie Road and also fur- ther west in the Emu Plains area west of The Victorian Naturalist Fig. 2. A border of Gahnia sieberiana separates Moss Bed Lake from a stand of Eucalyptus dal- rympleana. the Nunniong Road. In this area, the unwanted logs have been piled into exten- sive windrows in preparation for burning. So much for the uses of the forest. The good rains early in 1999, breaking the long drought, encouraged us to revisit Moss Bed Lake and the marked difference can be seen in Fig. 2. This picture illus- trates well the abrupt demarcation from bog to timber, with a substantial interven- ing border of Red-fruit Saw-sedge Gahnia sieberiana between the Lake and a stand of Mountain Gum. Much of the foreground in Fig, 2 is occupied by a dense mat, with the common name of Marshwort Nymphoides montana, growing in shallow water. The handsome golden-yellow flowers of this aquatic plant make a marvellous mass dis- play under these conditions, as soon as the sun has risen sufficiently high (Fig. 3). Apart from the extensive sheets of Marshwort, and the general distribution of Sphagnum over most of the area, the bog is dominated by clumps of Mountain Cord-rush Restio australis (Fig. 4), whose flowering heads make quite a splendid Vol. 116 (4) 1999 Contributions Fig. 3. Flower of Nymphoides montana opened up by the warmth of the sun. show. Another dominant plant is the Tall Spike-rush Eleocharis sphacelata, which tends to grow in separate stands. Specimens of this plant growing near the margin of the Lake had been grazed by brumbies. We in fact observed a small mob doing just this on the western side of the Lake. We later found it was a spot where they commonly came to drink. To obtain an illustration of the flowering spike (Fig. 5) it was necessary to rather gingerly walk some distance out on a fallen log, the only alternative to wading waist deep. Keeping just clear of the Sphagnum moss it was possible to walk more or less dryshod around the Lake, although close to the margin there were tracks through the moss where brumbies and wombats had been foraging or drinking. In this wet area between the open water and the beginning of the forest occur many rushes and sedges, and Table | contains a list of those we were able to identify. Also in this wet area there were Alpine Water-fern Blechnum penna-marina, Bat’s Wing Fern Histiopteris incisa and lots of Chickweed i i SSS earl Table 1. Some Rushes and Sedges at Moss Bed Lake. es Carex appressa Tall Sedge C, gaudichaudiana Fen Sedge C, jackiana Sedge Eleocharis sphacelata Tall Spike-sedge Empodisma minus Spreading Rope-rush Gahnia sieberiana Red-fruit Saw-sedge Juncus subsecundus Finger Rush Luzula modesta Southern Woodrush Restio australis Mountain Cord-rush 143 Contributions Fig. 4. Mountain Cord-rush Restio australis clum Stellaria media. In some of the wetter spots were mats of the Small River Buttercup Ranunculus amphitrichus,. Within a few metres of the margin, making an understorey of the eucalypts already mentioned, there is a wide variety of herbs and shrubs. River Lomatia Lomatia myri- coides was just beginning to flower, although at lower altitudes we saw many in full flower. Cinquefoil Cranes-bill Geranium potentilloides made a splash of colour here and there as did the Alpine Podolobium Podolobium alpestre and Grass Trigger-plant Stylidium graminifolium, and some clumps of Golden Eyerlasting Bracteantha bracteata. Twining its way through some of the shrubs was Purple Appleberry Billardiera longiflora (Fig. 6). More time and expertise would be required to make a complete census of the plants growing in and around Moss Bed Lake, but Table 2 contains a list of those identified during or since the excursion. Acknowledgements Thanks to Ken Hollole and Dagmar Savva for their company and assistance, and especially to John Reid and Helen Aston of the National Herbarium of Victoria for the identification of Carex appressa and Nymphoides montana respectively. 144 ps at Moss Bed Lake. fe ree Table 2. Some Dicotyledons in and around Moss Bed Lake (* = introduced). Acacia mearnsii A, siculiformis Acaena novae-zelandiae Baeckea gunniana Billardiera longiflora Bracteantha bracteata Cassinia longifolia Coprosma hirtella Derwentia derwentiana Epilobium gunnianum Eucalyptus dalrympleana E. obliqua E. radiata Gaultheria appressa Geranium potentilloides Leucopogon hookeri Linum marginale Lomatia myricoides Nymphoides montana Podolobium alpestre Polyscias sambucifolia Ranunculus amphitrichus Rubus parvifolius *Stellaria media Stylidium graminifolium Tasmannia xerophila Black Wattle Dagger Wattle Bidgee-widgee Alpine Baeckea Purple Appleberry Golden Everlasting Shiny Cassinia Rough Coprosma Derwent Speedwell Gunn's Willow-herb Mountain Gum Messmate Narrow-leaf Peppermint Wax Berry Cinque-foil Cranesbill Mountain Beard-heath Native Flax River Lomatia Marshwort Alpine Podolobium Elderberry Panax Small River Buttercup Small-leaf Bramble *Chickweed Grass Trigger-plant Alpine Pepper The Victorian Naturalist Fig. 5. Flowering spike of Tall Spike-rush Eleocharis sphacelata. Letters to the Editor Fig. 6. Purple appleberry Billardiera longiflora. i Bibliography Ashton and Hargreaves (1983), Dynamies of subalpine vegetation at Echo Flat, Lake Mountain, Victoria. Proceedings of the Ecological Society of Australia 12, 35-60. Aston, H.L. (1977). ‘Aquatic Plants of Australia’ (MUP: Melbourne.) Map: ‘Deception-Deddick’ 8523-N* (1992). 1:50 000 (Survey and Mapping Victoria) Sainty, G. and Jacobs, $.W.L. (1994). ‘Water Plants in Australia’ (CSIRO: Melbourne) Foreman, D.B, and Walsh, N.G. (Eds) (1993). ‘Flora of Victoria’ Vol,I. (Inkata Press: Melbourne.) Walsh N.G. and Entwistle T.J, (Eds) (1997), ‘Flora of Victoria’ Vol,IL. (Inkata Press: Melbourne.) Walsh N.G. and Entwistle T.J. (Eds) (1999), ‘Flora of Victoria’ Vol.II. (Inkata Press: Melbourne.) Dear Editor, This note refers to “The Biogeography of Pseudocephalozia paludicola R.M. Schuster, an endemic Australian Liverwort’ by Jon Sago (The Victorian Naturalist 115 (3), 1998, 84-86). This liverwort has been found only twice in Victoria: (1) At Mt Baw Baw above ski run 5; leg. and det. G.A.M Scott s.n. 25 June 1977, confirmed J. Engel 1981; MUCV 3217; and (2) On the Alpine walking track NW of Mt Kernot; leg. and det. A.W. Thies Vol. 116 (4) 1999 1452Q 26 January 1986; MEL 23301/ 242732 and MUCV 23301. The latter location is within 5 km of the former. No collections are known from Mt St Gwinear and Mt Erica. The plant from Mt Torbreck was Lepidozia laevifolia as stated in the corrigendum on p. 82 of The Victorian Naturalist 116 (3). The location should be added to the first sentence of the corrigendum so that it reads ‘The determi- nation of the liverwort from Mt Torbreck referred to in “The Biogeography...” ’. Arthur W. Thies National Herbarium, Royal Botanic Gardens, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, Victoria 3141. 145 Letters to the kditer Dear hditor, Kibria’s (1999) response to my letter which protested the inclusion of an article primarily on aquaculture (Romanowski 1999) in The Victorian Naturalist intro- duces new information which is dealt with from an aquaculture perspective only. In particular, Kibria suggests I should have described an alternative to aquacul- ture us a way of rehabilitating Silver Perch populations, but this would have been inappropriate as the only mention of the entire subject in the original article ts ‘Such measures [to increase population] inight include aquaculture’, However, as Kibria has introduced these new aspects, | will briefly show how far removed aqua- culture is from conservation, a) I is not ‘widely accepted that overex- ploited and depleted fisheries can be reha- bilitated through programs of artificial breeding, rearing and restocking in natural habitats’ except in aquaculture circles, which is why only aquaculture references ure cited in support of this sweeping gener- alisation. | dont know of any evidence of successful population enhancement of this kind for any fish, anywhere in the world, All improvements haye been achieved by restoring habitat, and reducing fishing pressure (see also Horwitz 1995; Cadwallader and Lawrence 1995), b) Electrophoretic methods of comparing variation between wild and hatchery popu- lations of Rainbow Trout tell us litthe, but there is abundant evidence that hatchery and wild populations of trout are very dif- ferent behaviourally and physiologically. Schweibert (1979) describes a comparison of a wild strain of Brook Trout with a hatchery stock originally from the same source, kept in identical adjacent pools on an identical diet for a year, At the end of this time “the domestic strain had reached more than five inches, while the wild fish were an inch and a half smaller... the domestic fish were obyiously attracted to the biologists, displaying no fear and expect- ing food, while the wild fish continued to flee’. Not surprisingly. after release into the same stream the wild fish showed higher survival and growth rates than the hatchery strains, These same phenomena can be observed in any aquaculture stock which has been captive bred for any length of time, 146 because aquaculturalists select for individu- als which breed most readily under artificial conditions, and which convert feed into flesh most efficiently, ¢c) Few captive breeding programs for fishes in Australia come close to using even the minimum FAO breeding group size of 50 Kibria cites. Thus, the Trout Cod restocking program he mentions uses eight fishes for breeding, while for Eastern Freshwater Cod the entire breeding group is 20 (Walker 1994), Even this figure is based on early theoretical work by Frankel and Soulé (1981), which is now universal- ly regarded (including by Frankel and Soulé) us far below the minimum viable populations of hundreds, or perhaps even thousands, suggested by practical work on island biogeography (see for example Fiedler and Jain 1992). The remainder of Kibria’s response is largely irrelevant to the original article, or my letter = for example, discussion on ‘improvement’ of fish strains via triploidy. This has not been achieved with Silver Perch, but if it is, the production of faster- growing, sterile Silver Perch is certainly not going to be of any value in conservation! Nick Romanowski Dragonfly Aquatics, RMB AB 366 via Colac, Victoria 3249. References Cadwallader, PL. and Lawrence, B.W, (1995), Rehabilitation of native fish stoeks in the Murray- Darling River system, /n ‘Reintroduction Biology of Australian and New Zealand Fauna’, pp. 81-85. Ed. M. Serena, (Surrey Beatty and Sons: Chipping Norton), Fiedler, PLL. and Jain, SK, (Eds) (1992). ‘Conservation Biology: The Theory and Practice of Nature Conservation, Preservation and Management’. (Chapman and Halls New York). Fronkel, O.H. and Soulé, MB. (1981), “Conservation and Evolution’. (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge), Horwitz, P. (1995). An environmental eritique of some freshwater captive breeding and reintroduction pro- grimmes in Australia’. 1 “Reintroduction Biology of Australian and New Zealand Fauna’, pp. 75-80. Ed, M, Serena, (Surrey Beatty and Sons; Chipping Norton), Kibria, G. (1999). Response to Nick Romanowski regarding our review paper Biology and aquaculture of Silver Perch. The Victorian Naturalist 6, 29-33 Kibria, Gi., Nugegoda, N., Patrelough, R. and Lam, P, (1998), Biology and aquaculture of Silver Perch, Bidvanus bidyanus (Teraponidae): a review, The Vierorian Naturalist 115, 56-62. Romanowski, N. (1999). Letter in response to un article by Kibria. Nugegoda, Pairelough and Lam, 1998, The Victorian Naturalist 1G, 28-29. Schwiebert, E. (1979). “Trout’, Volume 1. (Andre Deutsch; London), Walker, T. (1994). Enthusiast hooks onto Mary River Cod, Avlasia Aquaculture 8 (A), 20-22. The Victorian Naturalist Dear Editor, | refer to my earlier letter (Kibria 1999) in which I responded to a letter from Nick Romanowski regarding our review paper ‘Biology and aquaculture of Silver Perch: A review’ (Kibria ef al. 1998). In response to the latest letter from Romanowski, | am submitting the follow- ing: (1) Lam unsure what Romanowski means by ‘aquaculture circles’. However, it is important to mention that fisheries and aquaculture scientists from all over the world work under one umbrella. Since these are interrelated disciplines (see also Kibria 1999), an integrated approach is required for sustainable fisheries and aqua- culture development and management pro- grams. Research findings generally com- plement each other (see the Annotated Bibliography for examples). (2) Most of references cited in my letter (Kibria 1999) were from non-aquaculture related journals. Most importantly, the key conclusions were drawn from the findings of the world’s recognised International Centre for Living Aquatic Resources Management (ICLARM), which is devoted to the management and conservation of biodiversity of aquatic organisms in Asia, Africa, Caribbean and Pacific islands. (3) A recent paper shows that “all research and production of Silver Perch to date used the progeny of wild broodfish and there has been no artificial selection’ (Rowland 1997). Therefore the original claim, and its theoretical consequences mentioned by Romanowski (1999), is questionable. (4) Some more examples of the success of stock enhancement programs are presented in the annotated bibliography (see also Kibria 1999), Thank you once again. Sincerely yours, Dr. Golam Kibria Lincoln Marine Science Centre Port Lincoln, South Australia 5606 Letters to the Editor References Kibria, G, (1999), Response to Nick Romanowski regarding our review paper “Biology and aquaculture of Silver Perch. The Victorian Naturalist 116, 29-33. Kibria, G., Nugegoda. D., Fairclough, R. and Lam, P. (1998). Biology and aquaculture of Silver Perch, Bidyanus bidyanuy (Teraponidae): a review. The Victorian Naturalist 115, 56-62, Rowland, S$. (1999). Silver perch aquaculture. Ja “Fish Cuts’, (Ed. M. Huggan). (Fisheries Research and Development Corporation: Canberra, ) Romanowski, N. (1999). Letter in response to an article by Kibria, Nugegoda, Fairclough and Lam, 1998. The Victorian Naturalist 115, 28. Annotated Bibliography Leber, K. M. (1994). The need for a responsible approach to marine stock enhancement. / Marine fish culture and enhancement. Conference proceed- ings, Washington Sea Grant Program, Pp.17-22. (Washington Sea Grant Publications; Seattle). |The principal tools available to fishery managers for replenishing depleted species and managing fishery yields through propagation and release. | Leber, K. M., Brennan, N, P. and Arce, S. M. (1995), Marine enhancement with Striped Mullet; Are hatch- ery releases replenishing or displacing wild stocks, American Fisheries Society Symposium 15, 376-387, [The cultured Striped Mullet when released increased in abundance and could help replenish the depleted fishery, | Mueller, R. (1990), Management practices for lake fisheries in Switzerland, Management of freshwater fisheries, Kuropean inland fisheries advisory com- Mission symposium, Wageningen, Netherlands. Pp. 477-492. [Management of freshwater fisheries through stock enhancement to achieve a high sus- tained yield of the commercially important fish species. | Nicolajsen, H., Danielssen, D. S. and Moksness, E. (1993). Reeapture, migration and growth of reared Turbot released in the Limfjord, Denmark in 1989, The International symposium on sea ranching of cod and other marine species, Arendal, Norway, 15-18 June 1993, Programme & abstracts, P, 42, [The growth of enhanced Turbot was similar to the growth of wild Turbot |. Stoner. A. W. and Davis, M. (1994), Experimental out- planting of juvenile queen conch, Sirombuy gigas: Comparison of wild and hatchery-reared stocks. Fishery Bulletin 2, 390-411, [Stock enhancement With hatchery reared juveniles as a means to rebabili- tate overlished populations. | Sreenivasan, A. (1989), Fish stock enhancement in larger Indo-pacifie water bodies, FAO Fisheries Report No. 405, Pp. 6-33. {Stock enhancement ts a major input in increasing und sustaining fish yields from large water bodies, | Svaasand, T., Joerstad, K. E. and Kristiansen, T. 5, (1990). Enhancement studies of coastal cod in west ern Norway, Part 1.Reeruitment of wild and reared cod to a local spawning stock. Journal du Conseil International Pour L’Exploration de la Mer 471), 5- 12. [No difference in recruitment patterns between wild and reared Cod was found, | Editors note: The correspondence on this subject has now been closed, Vol. 116 (4) 1999 147 Naturalist Notes Fungi Found in a Suburban Garden Most naturalists are very aware of the interesting and intriguing things that can be found in their own gardens. There is always an assortment of invertebrates, lizards, frogs, birds and if you are lucky, mammals. For many years I have prowled around my garden at night (regardless of weather conditions) with a torch or spotlight. A few hours spent gardening can also easily turn into double the time allowed because of interesting discoveries. On 23 May (1999) I was unable to attend a fungi excursion led by Tom May (FNCY President) to Yarra Bend. To quell a little of the disappointment, I decided to search my own garden with a more thorough method than ever before and look for fungi. I had previously recorded enough species lo give me hope of some interesting finds. Fungi such as: Gymnopilus pampeanus, Paxillus involutus, Schizophyllum com- mune, Lactarius torminosus, Amanita mus- caria, a slime mould Stemonifis sp., and the ubiquitous Agaricus xanthodermus, the poisonous yellow-staining mushroom which seems to me to have become much more common in recent years (some com- mon names of fungi are listed in Table 1). Our block is the average quarter acre block, planted with exotic. native and some indigenous plants, the majority being native to Australia and indigenous to the Mitcham/Donvale areas. The block is fairly steep which allows water to run off in winter, and is reasonably well drained. We are situated on the down side of a very steep hill where, in the sixties when we arrived here, a small creek once trickled past our house. The creek flowed into a tributary of the Mullum Mullum val- ley and on into the Mullum Mullum Creek and our block was surrounded by indigenous vegetation and lots of blackberry bushes In my search, I set off with a hand lens, plastic container and a knife, heading for the area that had yielded the minute Mycena viscidocruenta in past years. Grasping a small stick lying on the soil I started to probe the leaf litter, I soon unearthed the first half dozen of these diminutive glistening red jewels, then something on the stick | was holding 148 caught my eye. I could hardly believe my eyes or contain my excitement. I was look- ing down on a Bird’s Nest Fungus, possi- bly Cyathus olla. This species has been listed as growing on soil, straw, twigs. fir cones, felled wood and planks in gardens. My specimen was growing on a small gar- den stake. The fungi did not haye hairy cups as in Nidula emodensis and measured only 6 mm across the top of the goblet-like structure. The spore-bearing chambers (peridioles) were 1-2 mm. I found on fur- ther reading that this species prefers manured ground and is more frequently found in gardens than forests. My speci- men was in a small vegetable garden! As I worked my way assiduously around the garden in a clock-wise fashion | found the Smooth Ink Cap Coprinus atramentar- ius. Then as | crawled beside some railway sleepers I spied a tiny beige Mycena species peeping out from the cracks in the timber; next a patch of brown capped Cortinarius sp. growing among grass. Then a Trametes sp. — a polypore with pores instead of gills — growing on a dead stump, pure white, softly hairy on top at the back of the bracket, possibly Trametes hirsuta. Another velvet brown Trametes sp. with no distinctive zonation and a white under-surface remained a mystery. Finding the name adds to the interest of fungi study, but just understanding their important role in the environment and appreciating their wondrous colours and diversity of shapes is enough to keep my enthusiasm from ever diminishing. By now a fine misty rain clothed the whole garden in a silver/grey curtain. I did wonder at the strange picture that | present- ed to the neighbours, looking down at me from the lofty heights of their windows oyer-looking our garden, as I crawled around in my wet weather gear on all fours! Inspired by the discovery of the Birds Nest Fungus I very optimistically searched the fallen Banksia cones for the Banksiamyces sp. believed to grow on Banksia spinulosa, which is growing in my garden. With the aid of my hand lens I found tour different types of fungi growing on a number of cones. One of the FUNGIMAP target species (the second for the The Victorian Naturalist Naturalist Notes Table 1. Some of the fungi found in Cecily’s garden at Mitcham Scientific Name Common Name Agaricus xanthodermus Amanita muscaria Coprinus atramentarius Coprinus micaceus Cyathus olla Gymnopilus pampaenus Lactarius torminosus Lepista nuda Mycena viscidocruenta Nidula emodensis Paxillus involutus Schizophyllum commune Stropharia aurantiaca Trametes hirsuta day, Mycena viscidocruenta being the first, see below for more details on FUNGIMAP) Mycoacia subceracea and a small white Ascomycete (Cup Fungus) with a stalk measuring 0.5 to | mm with hairy, deeply concave cups measuring 1.5 mm. As the cup matures it flattens out, possibly a Lachnella sp, The third species found on the cones was a small 2 mm white fungus with a 4—5 mm long translucent stalk (stipe). Under the lens it looked incredibly beautiful and fragile. The fourth species was a tiny pink gilled fungus with a cap 1.5 mm wide and a white stipe: a tiny gem with all the beauty of its larger counterparts that anyone with a land lens can enjoy. The common red capped agaric Stropharia aurantiaca followed growing in some wood chips (mulched from cut- tings from our own garden), while Glistening Ink Cap Coprinus micaceus was seen in grass near an old Acacia elata stump, looking like some exquisite art work trom a child’s fairy story book. On the stump, a mass of bracket fungi was growing in heavy brown solid tiers. This stump had been a source of fascination for some time as the mass had just continued to grow. During the dry autumn I had watered it, aS an experiment to see just how big it would get. Unfortunately, I was unable to get spore prints from most of the Bracket species and ils species name remains a mystery. Another fascinating mystery is a small agaric with a plain white cap (diameter 5-6 mm) which will not yield a spore print. The gills have a pink tinge (maybe a clue) and the stem has a ring somewhat like a Lepiota without the freckles. This species Vol. 116 (4) 1999 Yellow Stainer Fly Agaric Smooth (Common) Ink Cap Glistening (Mica) Ink Cap Bird's Nest Fungus Woolly Milk Cap Wood Blewit Bird’s Nest Fungus Brown Roll Rim Split Gill Hairy Trametes also grows in indigenous bushland in the nearby Mullum Mullum valley. Out in the front garden under the Silver Birch Betula pendula was a Wood Blewit Lepista nuda . This must surely be one of the more beautiful of fungi with its mauve gills and stem (see Bruce Fuhrer’s lovely photo in A Field Companion to Australian Fungi). | have seen it many times before; another target species, | was delighted to find it in my own garden. Hebeloma sp., Fly Agaric Amanita muscaria and the Woolly Milk Cap Lactarius torminosus almost completed the collection, I found several types of “paint fungus’ on sticks and small logs which were beyond my skills of identification. Some of them were white and some were fawn or brown. Twenty-one species was the total that I found, many more possibly lay concealed under the ground or in places | missed altogether. [ believe the total at Yarra Bend on the excursion I missed was 30, I was only 9 species down on that total and had not travelled out of my garden, This was an interesting lesson to me to be more observant in the future, and brought to mind Tom May’s suggestion recently that we could all note the fungi that we see while walking the dog, getting the paper or anywhere we take our recreation. | consid- er myself one of the lucky ones, I have the opportunity to walk in the nearby Mullum Mullum valley several times a week and have been recording the fungi for some time. I also walk in many bushland reserves on other days of the week. But I also believe that we can all contribute (if the interest is there). Look for some of the FUNGIMAP target species, many of which 149 Naturalist Notes are illustrated in Puhrer (1985). This scheme records target fungi species from all parts of Australia (recent or old records ure accepted) so that their distribution can be mapped. FUNGIMAP has produced a kit and beginners can start participating by using the coloured photos of the first target species for a guide. These are included in the instruction sheet. FUNGIMAP is a joint project by the FNCV, the National Herbarium of Victoria and the School of Ecology and Environment at Deakin University'. People who for whatever reason Cannot travel far can also contribute to basic data on fungi. What a wonderful record we could build up of our garden fungi and what they grow on, without even leaving our own homes. Now more than ever home owners both rural and suburban are planting indige- nous, so our gardens have never before had such a variety of plants mixed with both native and exotic, This variety of flora reflects the variety of fauna visiting the home block. For example, whilst conduct- ing this fungi survey | found native cock- roaches, dozens of cicada nymphal skins, spiders of many varieties and a wonderful steel blue/grey 5-inch centipede. | am visit- ed by many different bird species and even ‘Tf you would like to participate in this exciting new project, or for more information, contact Funamar, National Herbarium of Victoria, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, Victoria 3141, email fungimap@rbgmelb.org.au. occassionally a Blue-tongue Lizard and Possums. I] found the survey yielded many more species than | could have imagined. It was heaps of fun and 1 would love to hear from others about their garden discoveries. Fungiphiles unite — your gardens await you. Cecily Falkingham 27 Chippewa Avenue, Mitcham, Victoria 3132 Further Reading Bougher, N.L. und Syme, K. (1998). ‘Fungi of Southern Australia’, (University of Western Australia Press; Perth). Cleland, J.B, (1934-1935), *Toadstools and Mushrooms and Other Larger Fungi of South Australia’, (Reprinted 1976), (Government Printer: Adelaide). Cole, H,, Fuhrer, B, and Holland, A, (1984), *A Field Guide to the Common Genera of Gilled Fungi in Australia’,(Inkata Press: Melbourne). Dickinson, C, and Lueas, J, (1979), "The Encyclopedia of Mushrooms’, (Orbis Publishing: London), Fuhrer, B, (1985). ‘A Field Companion to Australian Fungi’. (The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria: Blackburn), Fuhrer, B. and Robinson, R. (1992), ‘Rainforest Fungi of Tasmania and South-East Australia’. (CSIRO Publishing; Melbourne), Macdonald, R. and Westerman, J. (1979), ‘A Field Guide to Fungi of South-eastern Australia’, (Nelson: West Melbourne). Phillips, R. (1981). “Mushrooms and other Fungi ol Great Britain and Europe’. (Pan Books: London). Svreek, M. (1983), "The Hamlyn Book of Mushrooms and Fungi’. (Hamlyn/:artia, Prague). Watling. R. (1973). ‘Identification of the Larger Fungi’, (Hulton Educational Publications: Amersham, Bucks). Wood, A. (1990). ‘Australian Mushrooms and Toadstools: How to Identify Them’. (NSW University Press: Sydney). Young, T. (1982), ‘Common Australian Fungi’. (NSW University Press: Sydney). Ant Behaviour During a recent FNCV Botany Group excursion to the Brisbane Ranges, my attention was drawn to a well-worn trail made, and being used, by the “Meat Anv Iridomyrmex purpureus, In one place, this trail passed near a small depression in which ants of the genus Camponotus (com- monly known as Sugar Ants) had built a nest. At the nest site, minor Camponotus worker ants were bringing soil out of the nest under the “watchful eyes’ of a number of majors. Occasionally an /. purpuretuy crossed this depression, whereupon all the Camponotus immediately retreated into the nest even though no contact was made between the two species. This behaviour 150 was not related to size since the Meat Ants were smaller than both the minor and major Camponotus workers. Iridomyrmex purpureus is a monomor- phic species with worker castes all aproxi- mately the same size — c. 8 mm. On the other hand Camponotus is a polymorphic genus with worker castes showing a large, continuous range in size from the small (minor) to large (major) workers (Shattuck 1999), The Camponotus sp. in my obser- vation ranged in size from c. 10 mm (minors) to c. 15 mm (majors). This behaviour of Iridomyrmex and Camponotus species has been reported by a number of authors — including Andersen The Victorian Naturalist Naturalist Notes Table 1. P.J.M. Greenslade’s Ecological Categories of Ants in Australia (Andersen 1987). Relevant features Category Major taxa I. Dominant species Iridomyrmex 2. Subordinate species Camponotus 3. Climate specialists (a) Hot Melophorus Meranoplus (b) Cool Prolasius Notoncus 4. Cryptic species Solenopsis many Ponerinae in . Opportunists Rhytidoponera Paratrechina Monomorium Pheidole Crematogaster 6. Generalised myrmicines 7. Large, solitary foragers = Myrmecia Highly abundant; active and aggressive: able to monopolise resources Large body size: polymorphic; submissive behaviour; nocturnal foraging Behavioural and morphological specialisations Restricted to cool and wet regions where Iridomyrmex is at its climatic limit Activity confined to soil and litter Unspecialised: likely to interact strongly with Iridomyrmex Unspecialised species; recently arrived in evolutionary time Large body size; low population densities; unlikely to interact strongly with other ants (1984, L986a, 1986b, 1987, 1990, 1991 and 1992), and Greenslade (1976 and 1979). Table 1 shows seven ecological cat- egories of ants, the most important of which consists of dominant species. chiefly /ridomyrmex (abundant, highly active and aggressive) which are often associated with subordinate species such as Camponotus (large size, mainly nocturnal and submissive towards /ridomyrmex). Table | is based on Greenslade’s work and is taken from Andersen (1987). Dominant ants have been described as ‘both abundant and influential’ (Greenslade 1976) and as ‘highly active and aggressive ants that show rapid recruitment to food resources and an important competitive influence on the remainder of the ant community’ (Andersen 1992), Although my observation was made on a single occasion, for only a few minutes, and the ants were identified by sight alone, the observed behaviour of the Camponotus species does appear to agree with the ‘sub- missive towards /ridomyrmex’ behaviour described in the literature. Andersen (1992) also notes that Camponotus sp. often retreat when challenged (by Iridomyrmex). However, this behaviour raises a ques- tion. What triggers the submissive behav- iour of Camponotus towards Iridomyrmex? Is it recognition by sight, recognition by Vol. 116 (4) 1999 odour (pheromones) or is it an instinctive behaviour? Can anyone help with answers? References Andersen, A.N. (1984).Community Organization of Ants in the Victorian Mallee, The Viererian Naturalist OL, 248-257, Andersen, A.N. (1986a),Patterns of Ant Community Organization in Mesic South-eastern Australia. Australian Journal of Ecology WW, 87-97. Andersen, A.N. (1986b). Diversity, Seasonality and Community Organization of Ants at Adjacent Heath and Woodland Sites in South-eastern Australia Australian Journal of Zoology 34, 53-64. Andersen, A.N, (1987). “Ant Community Organization and Environmental Assessment’ in ‘The Role of Invertebrates in Conservation and Biological Survey’. Majer. J. D, (ed.), Western Australian Department of Conservation and Land Management Report. Andersen, A.N, (1990), "The Use of Ant Communities to Evaluate Change in Australian Terrestrial Evosystems - a Review and a Recipe’, Proceedings of the Ecological Society of Australia 16,347-357 Andersen, A.N. (1991), ‘The Ants of Southern Australia - A Guide to the Bassian Fauna’, (CSIRO: Australia). Andersen, A.N, (1992), Regulation of ‘Momentary’ Diversity by Dominant Species in Exceptionally Rich Ant Communities of the Australian Seasonal Tropics. The American Naturalist 140, 401-420, Greenslade, P.I.M, (1976). The Meat Ant /ridomiyrmes purpureus (Hymenoptera; Formicidae) as a Dominant Member of Ant Communities. Journal ef the Austalian Entomological Society 15, 237-240, Greenslade, P.J.M, (1979), ‘A Guide to the Ants of South Australia’, (South Austalian Museum: Adelaide), ’ Shattuck, $.0. (1999), Australian Ants. Their biology and Identification’ (CSIRO Publishing: Australia). J. Grey § Woona Court, Yallaumbie, Victoria 3085, 151 Naturalist Notes Mound-building Ants I was interested to read “Leafhoppers in Ant Nests’, published in your February issue (Day and Pullen 1999), having lived adjacent to the mallee areas adjoining the Berri Irrigation areas until I left school. My wife and I have visited the Calperum area on many occasions and the Cooltong paddock (west of Renmark) which is now the Conservation Park of the same name. About 15 of my visits over later years, with the South Australian Field Naturalists Society's Botany and Mammal Clubs, have been to Calperum and adjacent areas of the Bookmark Biosphere Reserve. My wile pointed out that in Fig. | of Day and Pullen’s article, above the first four letters of the word ‘characteristic’ in the caption, there is apparently a soil mound of Camponotus clarior, This ant species usually nests under the base of mallee and where possible brings out the excavated soil via a hollow stem and drops it from the farthest projection which often results in an almost perfect cone. I have been collecting ant specimens for Mr Archie McArthur, mentioned in the acknowledgements, since he spoke to a meeting of the Mammal Club on ant col- lecting. He pointed out that pitfall traps can serve a secondary purpose as a source of ant specimens. The last paragraph you published poses ‘If the eggs are inserted into the twigs or stems of the host plant, as in other eurymelids, how do the nymphs reach the nest of a host ant?’ I have discussed the matter with Archie and have suggested the ants collect the eggs of the leafhoppers and tend the eggs as their own. Apparently this is the case with the juvenile stages of the Ogyris butterfly, which feeds on mistletoe and is escorted by a species of ant related to the mound builders mentioned. Cone- -shaped mound of Camponotus clari- or, Munyaroo Conservation Park, South Australia. Photo by G.L. Howie. Some estimates are that there may be as many as 250 species of ants in mallee associations and I suspect there may be a number of examples of this behaviour with other ant species. The photograph (above) of the ant mounds mentioned clearly shows the exca- vated soil as having been dropped from hollow stems of mallee. G.L. Howie 53 Gladys Street, Clarence Gardens, South Australia 5039. References Day, M.F, and Pullen, K-R. (1999). Leathoppers in Ant Nests: Some Aspects of the Behaviour of Pogonoscopini (Hemiptera: Eurymelidae), The Victorian Naturalist 116, 12-15, For assistance with the preparation of this issue, thanks to the computer team — Alistair Evans and Anne Morton. Thanks also to Felicity Garde (label printing) and Michael McBain (web page). 152 The Victorian Naturalist Book Reviews Australian Ants: Their Biology and Identification (Monographs on Invertebrate Taxonomy Volume 3) by S. O. Shattuck Publisher: CS/RO Entomology, ISBN 0 643 06032 4.R.R.P. $89.95, Ants comprise an important group of organisms in most Australian terrestrial habitats. They are conspicuous and impor- tant in Australian ecosystems, especially in our arid regions. As such, they have become increasingly crucial to studies of the Australian environment, with many researchers, students, and natural histori- ans with no prior history of entomology taking an interest in ant communities, Ants are now considered to be useful indicators of environmental disturbance, and are often included in habitat assessments along with plants and vertebrates. This obviously creates a need for a com- prehensive and user-friendly guide to the identification and biology of Australian ants, and in this book Steve Shattuck has produced just such a publication. Prior to this excellent book, researchers and stu- dents have relied on regional publications, such as Alan Andersen’s The Ants of Southern Australia; a guide to the Bassian fauna and Peter Greenslade’s A Guide to Ants of South Australia, both of which dealt admirably with the regions they cov- ered, but were inappropriate for usage in the more northern and western parts of Australia, and did not include generic changes from recent taxonomic revisions. Additional guides to ant genera were to be found in global publications such as Barry Bolton’s Identification Guide to the Ant Genera of the World, and within Holldobler and Wilson’s The Anis, but the keys in both of these publications are unwieldy and diffi- cult to use for people without background knowledge of ant taxonomy and anatomy, with few illustrations in the case of Hilldobler and Wilson, and with only SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope) pho- tographs in the case of Bolton. Shattuck has rectified virtually all of these shortcomings in the literature by pro- ducing a clear and well-illustrated book of the Australian ant genera. The text of the book is set into an introductory section, a Vol. 116 (4) 1999 key, and a section which details each genus. There are also 30 colour plates illustrating aspects of ant biology and their interactions with the environment. The introductory section briefly and suc- cinctly summarises the general patterns of ant diversity in Australia, the biology and life-history of ants, ants as pests, the use of ants in environmental monitoring, the clas- sification of ants, use of keys for identifi- cation, anatomical terms, ant collection techniques, specimen preparation and cura- tion, and suggested reading for those wish- ing to look further into aspects of ant biol- ogy and taxonomy. These sections have been kept to an admirable minimum - com- mendable given the vast quantity of pub- lished information. The key is the heart of this book, and the author has spent much time developing and fine-tuning the key by allowing active ant researchers to use drafts during the key’s development. Every couplet is illus- trated, often with more than one character. The illustrations, produced by Natalie Barnett, are uncluttered, and the characters are indicated by arrows, or shading so that there is no ambiguity. Given an adequate stereo dissecting microscope, and a good light source, this key should allow confi- dent identifications of most ants to the generic level, even for the inexperienced ant enthusiast. The layout of the key ts fairly standard for ant identification; speci- mens are first keyed out to subfamily then, in a separate key, to genus. The final section of the book deals with each subfamily and genus. There are 103 ant genera currently known from Australia, so this section comprises a large part of the publication. For each subfamily there is a section detailing identification, and an overview of the subfamily in Australia. For each genus there are sections detailing identification, biology, distribution and habitats, and a list of names of the current- ly described Australian species. There are 153 Book Reviews also two or more SEM photographs for each genus, usually of a frontal view of the head and a lateral view of the alitrunk, and a distribution map which shows collection sites. The identification section is an important part of the generic descriptions, as it allows the key user to confirm their placement of a specimen. Similar genera are compared, and the characters used to separate them described, so that the reader can further clarify their identifications. The descriptions of biology are fascinating, and the reader will soon realise just how much work remains to be done on the natural his- tory of Australia’s ants. The scope of research areas available is also emphasised by the inclusion of three undescribed gen- era within the book; no doubt this book will encourage field workers to locate even more! The associated distribution and habi- tat information tells us the general distribu- tion of ant genera both within and outside Australia. This gives the reader an idea of the endemicity of many Australian genera, I could find no errors in this publication, and if | had any complaints at all, it might be that it would have been good to put some basic taxonomic history in the gener- ic descriptions. This would enable the read- er to compare previously published names in the literature where there have been tax- onomic changes in recent times. For exam- ple, /ridomyrmex, a diverse and ecological- ly significant ant genus, formerly included the ant genera Papyrius, Ochetellus, Anonychomyrma, Doleromyrma, Linepithema, and Philidris within its scope until recently revised by Shattuck. Shattuck has put together a book which will become the standard text for researchers, enthusiasts and students who wish to understand Australian ant diversi- ty. It will find use in areas well removed from general entomology, such as in envi- ronmental management and botany, and is a fine inclusion in CSIRO’s Monographs on Invertebrate Taxonomy series. David R. Britton Agronomy and Soil Science, School of Rural Science and Natural Resources, University of New England, Armidale, NSW 2351. Beauty in Truth: the Botanical Art of Margaret Stones by Irena Zdanowicz Publisher: National Gallery of Victoria, 1996. 96 pp.. LOS colour plates, Brilliant Careers: Women Collectors and Illustrators in Queensland by Judith McKay Publisher: Queensland Museum, 1997. 80 Pp.. numerous illustrations (black & white and colour). RRP $19.95. Exhibitions are limited in time and space. But their associated publications endure and some deserve a continuing readership. I think that these two books certainly do. Dr Margaret Stones is a remarkable and renowned botanical artist, She began her botanical work in Victoria in the 1940s, and has lived for most of her life near the Royal Botanic Gardens at Kew, England, 154 from where she has travelled back and forth across the world to draw plants in their native habitats. In Beauty in Truth Irena Zdanowicz provides an insightful biography of Margaret Stones and a description of her working methods. Rarely does an exhibition catalogue include illustrations of all work exhibited, but Irena Zdanowicz convinced the The Victorian Naturalist Gallery that this should be done for the mavellous retrospective exhibition held in 1996, which spanned fifty years of Margaret Stones’ work. Irena Zdanowicz also insisted on high quality illustrations in the catalogue. While no reproduction can ever match the incredible light and life — the beauty and truth — in Margaret Stones’ original work, the illustrations in Beauty in Truth are stunning — all 108 plates. They include work carried out during two major projects: on the endemic flora of Tasmania (in conjunction with the botanist Dr Winifred Curtis) and on the flora of Louisiana (USA). Botanical notes for each plate were prepared by Professor Carrick Chambers, and Drs. Don Foreman, Linden Gillbank, David Hunt and Lowell Urbatsch. The index includes taxonomic and common plant names. Dr Judith McKay prepared Brilliant Careers to accompany the Queensland Museum’s 1997 exhibition in its series of annual exhibitions for International Women’s Day. Brilliant Careers > pays tribute to a remarkable group of women who, as scientific collectors and illustrators over the past 150 years, haye extended our knowledge of the Queensland environment and people. All have left a public legacy in their contributions to museums and herbar- ium collections, or in their publications and advocacy of conservation causes.” The work of 34 women is discussed by various authors. Maida Allan, Elizabeth Coxen, Harriette Biddulph, Ada McLaughlin and Mabel Hobler collected specimens in the vicinity of their Queensland pastoral homes. In the 1860s Book Reviews Amalie Dietrich was employed to collect natural history specimens for a German museum, After retiring from teaching in 1895 Selina Lovell collected plant speci- mens in Cooktown, where in the 1970s Vera Scarth-Johnson, inspired by the beau- ty of the Endeavour River and the early work of Joseph Banks and Daniel Solander, began collecting and painting the local flora. An earlier artistic visitor was Ellis Rowan, about whom Judith McKay wrote Ellis Rowan — A Flower-Hunter in Queensland, which was published in 1990 by the Queensland Museum in concert with an exhibition of its collection of 125 Queensland flower paintings by Ellis Rowan. Dr Dorothy Hill taught geology and paleontology at the University of Queensland from 1946-72 and became the first female Fellow of the Australian Academy of Science. Many of the women discussed in Brilliant Careers, including Joan Cribb, Doris Goy, Hilda Geissmann, Mabel Hobler and Estelle Thomson, were members of the Queensland Naturalists’ Club. It is too late to visit these two exhibi- tions, but it is not too late to enjoy these beautiful books. Unfortunately Beauty in Truth is out of print, but Brilliant Careers is still available at the Queensland Museum, and | would hope elsewhere. They should both be in any library which claims to have a good Australiana or Australian natural history collection, Linden Gillbank History & Philosophy of Science Department, University of Melbourne, Parkville, Victoria 3052. FNCV ee - Vol. 116 (4) 1999 The Victorian Naturalist All material for publication to: The Editor The Victorian Naturalist Locked Bag 3 P.O. Blackburn Victoria 3130 The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc. Reg No A0033611X Established 1880 In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria OBJECTIVES: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian flora and fauna. Membership is open to any person interested in natural history and includes beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Registered Office: FNCY, | Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. Postal Address: FNCY, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Ausiralia. Phone/Fax (03) 9877 9860; International Phone/Fax 61 3 9877 9860. Patron His Excellency, The Honourable James Gobbo, The Governor of Victoria Key Office-Bearers President: Dr TOM MAY, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra 3141, 9252 2319 Vice Presidents: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, | Astley Street, Montmorency 3094. 9435 8408 and Mr JOHN SEEBECK, 113 Arundel Road, Park Orchards 3114, AH 9876 1762 Hon. Secretary; Mrs ANNE MORTON, 10 Rupicola Court, Rowville 3178. 9790 0656 Hon. Treasurer; Vacant Subscription-Secretary:; FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. 9877 9860 Editor, The Vic. Nat.: Mrs MERTLYN GREY, 8 Martin Road, Glen Iris 3146. 9889 6223 Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. AH 5428 4097 Excursion Co-ordinator; Mr DENNIS MELTZER, 8 Harcourt Avenue, Caufield 3162. 9523 1853 Book Sales: Dr ALAN PARKIN, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130, AH 9850 2617 Book Brokerage: Mr RAY WHITE, 20 Alfred Street, Essendon 3040, 9379 3602 Newsletter Editors; Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, as above and Mr, KEITH MARSHALL, 8/423 Tooronga Road, Hawthorn East 3123. 9882 3044 Conservation Coordinator: Vacant Group Secretaries Botany: Mr RAY MACPHERSON, 8 Jean Street, Lower Templestowe 3107. 9850 4319 Geology: Mr ROB HAMSON, 5 Foster Street. McKinnon 3204. 9557 5215 Fauna Survey: Ms SOPHIE SMALL, 13 Park Road, Glen Iris 3146. AH 9809 0076 Marine Research: Mr MICHAEL LYONS, 2/18 Stonnington Place, Toorak 3142. AH 9822 8007 Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 Schotters Road, Mernda 3754. 9717 3511 MEMBERSHIP Members receive The Victorian Naturalist and the monthly Field Nat News free. The Club organis- es several monthly meetings (free to all) and excursions (transport costs may be charged). Field work, including botany, mammal and invertebrate surveys, is being done at a number of locations in Victoria, and all members are encouraged to participate. SUBSCRIPTION RATES for 1999 Year Half-Year First Member Metropolitan $40 $20 Concessional (pensioner/student/unemployed) $30 $15 Country (more than 50km from GPO) $30 $15 Junior (under 18) $15 $7 Additional Members Adult $15 $15 Junior $5 $5 Institutional Australian Institutions $55 Overseas Institutions AUS$65 Schools/Clubs $35 Send to: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. Printed by Brown Prior Anderson, 5 Evans Street, Burwood, Victoria 3125, Z / / : Tis + ‘ ~< = | Q SS Vi ctorlan N atur ali st Volume 116 (5) October 1999 Honours FNCV Honorary Life Member Jack Hyett Jack Hyett worked for the Education Department of Victoria from 1933 until 1976, first as a primary school teacher, and after 1963 as a professional officer, Teachers’ College at Burwood. Later he worked as a Science lecturer at Burwood State College. He lectured for the Council of Adult Education on Bird Study in Australia, directed their Outback Study Schools, and led birdwatching and wildlife tours in Australia and overseas. He toured places such as the Galapagos Islands, Ecuador, Sri Lanka, India and South Africa. Jack can tell stories of some interesting events that occurred on some of those tours, especially the African ones. In 1933 he joined the Bird Observers’ Club of Australia, and was the custodian of their historic photographic collection for several years. He was the foundation presi- dent of the Ringwood Field Naturalist Club and the Victorian Ornithological Research Group, and is a member of several natural history clubs including the FNCV, RAOU (now Birds Australia) and the Wildlife Preservation Society of Sri Lanka. He served for seven years on the bird sur- vey of Wilson’s Promontory, and also con- ducted the mammal survey of the Promontory. Jack Hyett has published several books and numerous articles on birds and mam- mals, edited four volumes of The Emu, and has sub-edited The Australian Birdwatcher, for which he has prepared indices, as well as a bird species index to the first 100 volumes of The Victorian Naturalist. Jack was the Australian Natural History Medallionist in November 1985, N.W. Schleiger | Astley Street, Montmorency, Victoria 3094, from archives made available by Sheila Houghton, Hon, Librarian. Jack Hyett (right), receives his honorary certificate of FNCV Life Membership from Vice President Noel Schleiger at Covenant House, Canterbury Road, Blackburn on Friday, 28 May, 1999. 158 The Victorian Naturalist The Victorian Naturalist Volume 116 (5) 1999 October Editor: Merilyn Grey Honours FNCV Honorary Life Member — Jack Hyett, SUEY Pan Be Rory Mla Bes ory da eg bt recs] Varney PERS), ee eae Pe REPEPIE 158 Australian Natural History Medal 1999 - Mary Patricia Cameron, Dy I. Endersby .....ccccccccccsecseseesesessesees 160 Research Reports Fire Effects on Selected Terrestrial Invertebrate Fauna in Heathland at Wilsons Promontory, Victoria — a Preliminary PITLIV OY VIER BOT ON a sacha ae ec BAEK AS ees Paes ET Pe cake aed acoetnicaees 162 New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae (Rodentia: Muridae): Further Findings at Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory National Park, by B.W. Atkin and B.R. Quin .......... 169 Contributions Observations of Platypus Ornithorhynchus anatinus Mating Behaviour, by M. De-La-Warr and M. Se€rend ...ccccccccececseeeseecees 172 A Diary of The Saunders Casemoth Oiketicus elongatus, PRIEST CICA DE WAVE diiron cosets el saldaschatan'vaMras tua thcl wire iet uss 175 New Records of the Striped Worm-lizard Aprasia striolata in South-western Victoria, by C. Beardsell, N. Clemann, EA SULETIN COLE HIVE DID on face ate ENP Sta SEGRE yom Pe eaeapecen ataSeny 179 Early Devonian Fossils from Eglinton Road and Rail Cutting, Alexandra, Central Victoria, Dy Co Barpi....cccccccscsscccsssccrssascsases 181 Naturalist Notes Corroboree Frog Pseudophryne corroboree, by E. Lyndon.,......... 168 Australia’s Flying Frogs? by T.J. Annable .o.c.cscececcessssstessesssseeees 187 Southern Right Whale in Port Phillip Bay, by J. Seebeck............. 188 UR EGER eee 3h CaN ERA (es Se, ea 190 Book Reviews Defending the Little Desert: the Rise of Ecological Consciousness in Australia, by L. Robin, reviewer D. Cheal.....191 ISSN 0042-5184 Cover: Adult male Saunders Casemoth Oiketicus elongatus. See story on p. 175. Photograph by Arthur Farnworth. Find us on the WEB: http://calcite.apana.org.au/fncvy/ email: fnev @vicnet.net.au Honours Australian Natural History Medal 1999 Mary Patricia Cameron The Queen Victoria Museum and Art Gallery in Launceston has a botanical col- lection of such high standard that its Herbarium is now recognised as a major centre of botanical research in Tasmania. Mary Cameron, in her voluntary capacity as Research Associate, curates the collec- tion and provides a plant identification ser- vice for the public as well as private com- panies. The Herbarium contains some 20,000 plants together with a collection of Tasmanian timbers. The City Council hon- oured Mary in recognition of 5,000 hours of work for the Launceston Community. In 1947 Mary Cameron graduated as Bachelor of Science from the University of Tasmania with a major in botany, and she taught science subjects in Tasmanian sec- ondary schools for several years. She also gave long service as part time reference librarian at the Northern Regional library, Launceston, until her retirement. Mary maintained her botanical studies and pur- suits wherever possible while raising a family of six children and fulfilling the demands of employment. As spare time became available she devoted an ever increasing amount of time and energy to botany. In about 1969 she became Honorary Curator of the Herbarium at the Queen Victoria Museum and set about reorganising and improving the presenta- tion of the collection in addition to the for- mal tasks of collecting, identifying and preserving specimens. In 1972 she was appointed Honorary Botanist and in 1987 the City of Launceston recognised her ‘enormous contribution ... to the Museum’s botanical collection and to the community through the provision of infor- mation’ by elevating her to the position of Honorary Research Associate of the Queen Victoria Museum and Art Gallery. Mary Cameron’s botanical investigations and vegetation surveys date from the 1960s and have been the basis for a num- ber of publications. She collected plants and provided distribution information for Lord Talbot de Malahide who published the six volume work ‘The Endemic Flora 160 of Tasmania’ during the period 1967-1978, and she edited and wrote much of the text of the Launceston Field Naturalists Club’s publication ‘Guide to the Flowers and Plants of Tasmania’ and its three revisions. With the support of the Plomley Foundation and the Museum she has been studying the flora of many different types of wetlands in north east Tasmania, result- ing in a number of jomt publications on flora lists and ecological details. With the assistance of the Museum’s photographer, Mark Bartkevicius, Mary has amassed a large slide collection of Tasmanian orchids to record details of soft tissues which are lost in preservation. The collection and dis- tribution records have been used in the writing of volumes of the ‘Flora of Australia” and a forthcoming ‘Atlas of Tasmanian Orchids’. The Royal Society of Tasmania and the Launceston Field Naturalists Club have benefited from Mary’s contributions oyer many years. She joined the Royal Society in 1946, became a life member in the 1950s and was a member of its Council on several occasions. Also she was vice chair- man and Chairman of its Northern Branch, contributing to the planning and conduct of the Branch’s program of lectures and excursions. The Field Naturalists Club made her an honorary life member recog- nising her long service as committee mem- ber, librarian, vice president and president. She has given numerous talks to the Club, arranged and led botanical excursions, and written detailed reports for its publications. In 1993 Mary Cameron was made a Member of the Order of Australia for ‘out- standing service to the study of the botany of Tasmania, and botanical and environ- mental conservation’, She has a long histo- ty of service on a number of conservation committees and advisory groups. The Tasmanian Conservation Trust, the Australian Heritage Commission Evaluation Panel (Tasmanian Section), the Department of National Parks and Wildlife’s Flora Advisory Committee and its Rare and Threatened Species The Victorian Naturalist Committee are among the bodies on which she has served. She is a member of the Tasmanian Arboretum Inc. which, in an endeavour to prevent the loss of woody plant species through forest destruction, has established collections of flora from various parts of the world on a 45 hectare property at Eugenana. At a local level, Mary has directed the planting of Australian sub-alpine flora on a 60 hectare property of the Launceston Field Honours Naturalists Club and a collection of endemic flora at a site near Scottsdale as a Bicentennial project. The Launceston Field Naturalists Club had great pleasure in nominating Mary Cameron for the award of the Australian Natural History Medallion. Ian Endersby 56 Looker Road, Montmorency, Victoria 3094. Editor’s note: The Australian Natural History Medallion will be presented to Mary Cameron at a meeting of the FNCV on Monday, 8 November 1999 at 8:00 pm. The pre- sentation will take place at the FNCV Hall, | Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria, After the presentation, Mary Cameron will speak on ‘Conservation of Tasmanian Plants’. All welcome. Mary Cameron, awarded the Australian Natural History Medal for 1999. Photo by John Simmons, Tasmania. Vol. 116 (5) 1999 161 Research Reports Fire Effects on Selected Terrestrial Invertebrate Fauna in Heathland at Wilsons Promontory, Victoria — a Preliminary Survey EJ. Grey! Abstract A preliminary study of ants, beetles and spiders was conducted at two heathland sites in Wilsons Promontory National Park one most recently burnt in 199], the other in 1998, There was sufficient difference in the ant fauna, particularly in the abundance of Rhytidoponera species, to indicate that a more Comprehensive study is warranted, (Phe Victorian Naturalist 116 (5), 1999, 162-168.) Introduction The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Ine, conducted a research trip to Wilsons Promontory in October 1998, The work undertaken included this invertebrate survey, as well as the identification of grasses and sedges by workshop and field study, mam- mal surveying by trapping and spotlighting and freshwater invertebrate sampling. The invertebrate survey aimed to provide baseline data on ant (Hymenoptera), beetle (Coleoptera) and spider (Araneae) fauna in (wo heathland sites — one unburnt since 1991 and referred to in the text as the unburnt site, and the other burnt in 1998 and referred to as the burnt site, An evalu- ation of the differences in species abun- dance and diversity between the two habi- tals Was also made. The study was set up so that further work could continue in order to monitor the changes in inverte- brate fauna as the recently burnt heath regenerated, using the site last burnt in 1991 as a control. Earlier work on ant diversity, seasonality and community organisation had been con- ducted by Andersen (1986) in heath and woodland sites near Tidal River, toward the southern end of the Park, Andersen's study found that total ant activity was tem- perature and weather dependent, and also that Opportunistic species, such as Rhytidoponera, predominated, Study site In May 1998, Parks Victoria burnt some of the heathland in an area along Five Mile Track overlooking Corner Inlet at the northern end of the Park. The two study sites Were located on an exposed saddle at 38"54'52" 8, 146°21°06" E, with an eleva- 'S Woond Court, Yallumbie, Victoria 3085 162 tion of 140 m above-sea-level. Both sites had a slight westerly slope but were on opposite sides of the track c. 100 m apart, and both had similar soils, derived from granite, with high clay content and medium lo coarse quartz grains. Due to the clay con- tent, the soil has low water permeability. The heath site on the north side of the track, although not burnt in 1998, has had an extensive fire history, having been burnt in 1951, 1957, 1973, May 1988 and October 199]. In contrast, the heath site burnt in May 1998 (a preseribed burn), which lies on the south side of the track, had only been burned in 1951 and 1957 (Jim Whelan pers. comm.). Vegetation on the unburnt heath site was dominated by Prickly Tea-tree Leptospermum continentale, Dwart Sheoke Allocasuarina paradoxa and White Kunzez Kunzea ambigua. Other plants included Butterfly Flag Diplarrena moraea, Australian Dusty Miller Spyridium parvi- folium, Pink Heath Epacris impressa, Silver Banksia Banksia marginata, Dagger Hakea Hakea teretifolia subsp. hirsuta, Furze Hakea H. ulicina, and Silky Hakea HM. sericea, Vegetation height was approxi- mately 1.0-1,.5 m (Fig. 1), There was little vegetation on the burnt heath site except for isolated clumps of Butterfly Flag and a scattering of emerging seedlings which were not identified (Fig. 2). However, prior to the May 1998 burn, the vegetation was higher and denser than at the unburnt site with Allocasuarina paradoxa being the most abundant species (Vim Whelan pers. comm.). Methods At each site, five lines of five pitfall traps Were put in (25 traps at each site) to form a The Victorian Naturalist Billi square grid. Each line was separated by five metres, with five metres spacing between traps. For the traps, plastic coffee cups were used with 200 ml capacity, height 80 mm and a top diameter of 72 mm. Each trap was dug in, so that the top was flush with the ground, and 30 ml of preserving fluid put in each trap. The pre- serving liquid consisted of a 50/50 mixture of ethylene glycol and ethanol (70%). The traps were open for a seven-day period from 3-10 October 1998. The weather, while the pitfall traps were open, was cool and windy with some rain. Rainfall and min/max temperatures were measured on site — 29 mm of rain was recorded, and a temperature range of 7- L6G. Hand collecting for ants and beetles and spiders was carried out within the bound- aries of each site for 30 minutes by ten people on 10 October 1998, when the weather was mild and sunny. Material was collected from foliage, under litter and on the ground. In order to equalise the collect- ing effort, the same ten people were involved at each site. Identification of ants was taken to species level, where possible, or they were assigned to a species group (indicated Vol. 116 (5) 1999 Fig. 1. The unburnt heath site. Installing pit-fall traps — Elsbeth Sacco, Pat Grey and Erich S Research Reports ‘ih acco. throughout this report by inverted com- mas). Andersen (1990) defines a ‘species group’ by saying that ‘even though most species cannot be confidently named, many can be readily assigned to groups with distinct morphologies, habits and dis- tributions’. AS an example, Anonychomyrma (was Iridomyrmex) “itin- erans’ refers to a complex of species close- ly allied to, and including, A. itinerans. However, some ants could only be identi- fied to genus. Beetles and spiders were identified to family level. All other materi- al captured was retained as ‘miscella- neous’. The keys used for identification were taken from a variety of sources : ants — Andersen 1991, Greenslade 1979 and one derived from New et al. 1996; beetles — Moore 1980; and spiders — Davies 1986. Results Pitfall trapping Total numbers of ants, beetles and spi- ders recorded from pitfall traps are shown in Table |. Ants were by far the most numerous group in both sites, while beetles and spiders comprised only 17% and 9.5% respectively in the unburnt site, and 4.2% and 6% respectively al the burnt site. 163 Research Reports Fig. 2. The burnt heath site. Table 1. Total numbers of ants, beetles and spiders collected in pitfall traps. Ants (Hymenoptera) Unburnt Heath 219 Burnt Heath 210 Ants (Hymenoptera: Formicidae) The ants, when identified to sub-family level, showed considerable differences in numbers between the two sites (Table 2). In the unburnt heath, the sub-family Ponerinae far outnumbered the Ponerinae found in the burnt heath (175 v 47), while the sub-families Myrmicinae, Dolicho- derinae and Formicinae in the unburnt heath were greatly outnumbered by those at the burnt site. However, the total num- bers of individual animals at both sites were fairly equal (219 in the unburnt site and 210 in the burnt site). In contrast, ant diversity was decidedly higher in the burnt heath with 24 taxa (species, species groups or genera) com- pared with 14 in the unburnt heath (Table 2). In the unburnt heath site, the two most abundant species were Rhytidoponera tas- maniensis and R. victoriae (153 and 21 respectively), which together accounted for 79% of all ants collected. Species of Dolichoderinae and Formicinae made up 164 Beetles (Coleoptera) Spiders (Araneae) 54 38 10 14 most of the balance. Rhytidoponera tas- maniensis and R. victoriae were also recorded in the burnt heath, but in much lower numbers, 80% less than in the unburnt heath, and members of the subfam- ilies Dolichoderinae, Myrmicinae and Formicinae were more equally represented. The greatest variety of taxa for both sites was found in the sub-families Myrmicinae (unburnt 4, burnt 8) and Formicinae (unburnt 4, burnt 10). Monomorium kiliani was the most numerous of the Myrmicinae in the unburnt heath, while Crematogaster sp., Meranoplus sp, and Pheidole sp. were the most numerous in the burnt heath. In the Formicinae, the most numerous were Pseudonotoncus sp. (unburnt site, 11), and Paratrechina ‘minutula’ (burnt site, 22), Beetles (Coleoptera) In contrast to ants, the unburnt heath had the greatest number of individuals captured in pitfall traps (Table 3) and the greatest beetle richness at family level — eight fami- The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports Table 2. Total ants (Hymenoptera: Formicidae) in Pitfall Traps. + This species was only collected by hand and did not appear in the pitfall traps. Sub-family Species Unburnt Heath Burnt Heath Myrmeciinae Myrmecia forficata 0 | Myrmecia nigriscapa 1 0 Myrmecia ‘pilosula’ + Total 1 1 Myrmicinae Aphaenogaster longiceps 0 1 Crematogaster sp. | 14 Meranoplus sp. l 17 Monomorium kiliani 3 1 Monomorium sp. 1 3 Orectognathus clarki 0 1 Pheidole sp. 0 17 Solenopsis sp. 0 2 Total 6 56 Ponerinae Amblyopone australis | Rhytidoponera tasmaniensis 153 43 Rhytidoponera victoriae 21 3 Total 175 47 Dolichoderinae Iridomyrmex ‘bicknelli’ (0) I Anonychomyrma ‘itinerans’ 13 3 Anonychomyrma ‘nitidiceps’ 6 65 Tapinoma minutum + Total 19 69 Formicinae Camponotus ‘claripes’ 3 2 Camponotus sp. 0 | Camponotus ‘nigroaeneus’ + + Notoncus ectatommoides 3 0 Notoncus hickmani 0 4 Paratrechina ‘minutula’ 0 22 Paratrechina sp. 0 2 Plagiolepis sp. | | Polyrachis patiens 0 8) Prolasius sp. nr. bruneus 0 | Prolasius sp. 0 | Pseudonotoncus sp. 11 0 Stigmacros (Hagiostigmacros)sp. 0 l Total 18 37 Total number of individuals recorded 219 210 Total number of taxa in pitfall traps 14 24 fl cent al el ee oe Table 3. Total beetles (Coleoptera) in pitfall traps. + This family was only collected by hand and did not appear in the pitfall traps. Family Unburnt Heath Burnt Heath Buprestidae (Jewel Beetles) Carabidae (Ground Beetles) Curculionidae (Weevils) Chrysomelidae (Leaf Beetles) Elateridae (Click Beetles) Pselaphidae Ptinidae (Spider Beetles) Staphylinidae (Rove Beetles) Tenebrionidae (Darkling Beetles) Trogidae Undetermined Fete eo Nuno p —_ woljooKnccodc wn aoh;—-Lhon-—v— Total number of individuals Total number of families in pitfall traps Vol. 116 (5) 1999 165 Research Reports Table 4. Total spiders (Araneae) in pitfall traps. + This family was only collected by hand and did not appear in the pitfall traps. Imm = immature; damed = damaged. Family Unburnt Heath Burnt Heath Male Female Male Female Amaurobiidae | 0) 0 0 Clubionidae 5 (2 imm) | 3 O Dictynidae 0 0 I 0 Gnaphosidae 2 | (1 imm) 0 0 Hadrotarsinae 0 0 + 0 Lycosidae 19 6 4+ 1 Miturgidae 1 (1 imm) 0) 1 10) Salticidae 0 + + 0 Theridiidae 1 0 0 0 Thomisidae 0 0 | 0 Undetermined ] 0 3 (2 damed) 0 Total number of individuals 30 8 13 1 Total number from each site 38 14 Total number of families 6 3 lies were identified in the unburnt site compared with three in the burnt site. Rove Beetles (Staphylinidae) were the most abundant family at both sites, and apart from Tenebrionidae, the families found in the burnt heath were also found in the unburnt site. Spiders (Araneae) Male spiders (83% of the total) far out- numbered females, This is not unexpected since it is the habit of male spiders to wan- der around in search of mates. Active, hunting spiders from the families Clubionidae, Gnaphosidae, Lycosidae (Wolf Spiders) and Miturgidae were the most abundant of the spider fauna captured in pitflall traps — 92% of the total in the unburnt heath and 69% of the total in the burnt heath. One individual was trapped from each of the following families — Amaurobiidae (unburnt site) and Dictynidae (burnt site). These spiders build lacy webs. similar to those built by the commonly seen Black House Spider. The single Theridiidae found in the unburnt site elongs to the same family as the Redback Spider and builds a gum-foot- ed snare. One Flower Spider (Thomisidae) was found in the burnt site. Hand Collecting The results of hand collecting are shown in Tables 5 and 6, Table 5 shows the total number of indi- viduals collected in each order. Again, 166 Table 5. Total numbers of ants, beetles and spi- ders collected by hand. Ants Beetles Spiders Hymenoptera Coleoptera Araneae Unburnt Heath 86 5 4 Burnt Heath 56 3 2 over 90% were ants. Table 6 shows the breakdown of the ants into subfamilies and species. Numerically, 60.5% were caught at the unburnt site. In the unburnt heath the most abundant fami- ly was the Dolichoderinae (55% of total) with Anonychomyrma ‘nitidiceps’ being the most abundant species (36 individuals), The latter was also abundant at the burnt site (17), but Meranoplus sp. from the sub- family Myrmicinae (13) and Camponotus ‘nigrodeneus’ from the sub-family Formicinae (12) were a fairly close second. The numbers of beetles and spiders col- lected by hand were small and no further analysis was done. Discussion It was unfortunate that no pre-fire data are available on the fauna present at the sites, and this study started five months after the 1998 burn. Another factor that must be taken into account is the differ- ence in vegetation between the two sites prior to the 1998 burn which may have contributed to the differences in fauna found in this survey. Additionally, the burnt heath site had a long, 40 year period The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports Table 6. Ants (Hymenoptera) collected by hand. Family Species Unburnt Heath Burnt Heath Myrmeciinae Myrmecia forficata 0 2 Myrmecvia nigriscapa | 0 Myrmecia ‘pilosula’ 0 2 Total 1 4 Myrmicinae Aphaenogaster longiceps 0 3 Meranoplus sp. 9 13 Monomorium ‘kiliant’ 0) Total 16 16 Ponerinae Rhytidoponera tasmaniensis 20 4 Rhytidoponera victoriae 0 3 Total 20 7 Dolichoderinae Iridomyrmex ‘bicknelli’ 5 0 Anonychomyrma ‘itinerans’ 4 0 Anenychomyrma ‘nitidiceps’ 36 \7 Tapinoma minuion 2 () Total 47 17 Formicinae Camponotus ‘nigroaenets’ 2 12 Total 2 12 Total number of individuals 86 56 Total number of species 9 8 without burning and this may be a further factor in the faunal differences found, Also the cool, damp weather experienced during the trapping period may well have inhibit- ed total ant foraging activity and influ- enced the number recorded, However,the results obtained from the survey show sul- ficient variation in the species composition of the ant fauna at each site to enable com- parison with future work. For the unburnt heath ant fauna, the out- standing feature was the abundance of the opportunistic, omnivorous Rhyidoponera species in contrast to the low numbers of highly active, aggressive Anonychomyrma species. In part this may be due to the cool weather, since Anonychomyrma sp, are more active in sunny areas (Andersen 1991), but a paucity of Anonychomyrma also occurs with less insolation (solar radi- ation) at ground level, for example in dense heath vegetation (Andersen 1986), In the burnt heath site, a number of fac- tors may have affected the results: open ground, as in the bare, burnt heath site favours pitfall trapping and thus, the results might be an artefact of the method used, as well as site differences; open habi- tats favour the ant species Anonychomyrma (33% of the total), where their aggressive behaviour and numbers suppress the subor- dinate Rhytidoponera species (Andersen Vol. 116 (5) 1999 pers. comm. November 1998), hence the difference in Rhytidoponera numbers between the two sites (79% and 22% of the total), However, a number of generalised Myrmicines such as Crematogaster, Meranoplus, Monomorium and Pheidole species (25% of total) which are seed har- vesters/ honeydew feeders and have flexi- ble foraging times, Le, can forage both during the day and night, appear able to coexist with Anonychomyrma at this site, The nocturnal, litter-foraging Paratrechina minutula (11%) would not be a competitor. An interesting aspect is the virtual absence of Aphaenogaster at both sites compared with the numbers found in heath near ‘Tidal River by Andersen (1986). It is possible that the high clay content of the soil may be an influence as this species is more abun- dant in sandy soils (Andersen 1991). ‘The greater amount of insolation received on the bare ground surface of the burnt heath may have induced greater ant activity, The beetle fauna was relatively similar at both sites, The greater numbers recorded in the unburnt heath might be associated with shelter and availability of food. The abun dance of the predacious Rove Beetles is a point of interest, since these beetles tend to prefer wetter areas because their short ely- tra (wing covers) and slender form does not allow them to resist dry conditions 167 Research Reports (Moore 1980). The cool, damp weather experienced during the trapping would have suited them, Given the limitations of this study - the fire history of both sites, vegetation differ- ences before the 1998 burn, no pre-fire data ~ the results still provide a useful start- ing point for documenting changes in the faunal composition as the burnt heath regenerates, Acknowledgements The field work was conducted under Parks Victoria Permit LOO00179 and, made possible with help from Parks Victoria Rangers, mem- bers of the invertebrate survey team from the PNCYV and other field naturalists, Special men- tion should be made of the contribution made by Erich and Elsbeth Sacco for help in setting up the trapping lines, and to members of the survey team for identification work. Alan Andersen (CSIRO) also made valuable comments on the differences in behaviour of the ant fauna. Jim Whelan (Ranger-in-Charge) provided valuable information on fire histories. Alan Yen (MOV) made suggestions which improved an early draft. References Andersen, A.N. (1986). ‘Diversity, seasonality and community organization of ants at adjacent heath and woodland sites in south-eastern Australia’. Australian Journal of Zoology, 34, 53-64. Andersen, A.N. (1990), “The use of ant communities to evaluate Change in Australian terrestrial ecosystems: a review and a recipe’. Proceedings of the Evological Society of Australia, 16, 347-357, Andersen, A.N, (1991). ‘The Ants of Southern Australia, A Guide to the Bassian Fauna’. (CSIRO: Australia.) Davies, V.T, (1986). ‘Australian Spiders — Collection, Preservation and Identification’. (Queensland Museum Booklet 14; Queensland.) Greenslade, P.J.M. (1979). *A Guide to Ants of South Australia’. (South Australian Museunt: Adelaide.) Moore, B.P. (1980), ‘A Guide to the Beetles of South Eastern Australia’. (Australian Entomological Press: New South Wales.) New, T.R., Britton, D.R., Hinkley, S.D, and Miller, LJ. (1996). “The ant fauna of Mt. Piper and its rele- vance to environmental assessment and the conserva- tion of a threatened invertebrate community’. Flora and Fauna Technical Report 143, (Department of Natural Resources and Environment: Melbourne.) Corroboree Frog Pseudophryne corroboree My late husband and I were at Mt Kosciusko in the summer of 1968, Naturally, we enquired where we could find the frog and were directed to a sull- able location, Here in the very wet sphagnum beds we found frogs galore, along with their eggs. The eggs were larger than those of lowland frogs. Every puddle was full of tadpoles. The frogs were curious things; they didn’t hop but crawled persistently out of focus, proving difficult to photograph as they were constantly crawling away. J. Barker and G. Grigg (1977), in ‘A Field Guide to Australian Frogs’, have this to say: ‘Found in sphagnum bogs above 1500 m. Ten or twelve large eggs. Short breeding season, December to February, Tadpoles similar to other Pseudophryne.’ | wonder how the dry years are affecting them. Certainly ‘ordinary’ frogs seem to have gotten scarcer. 168 Ellen Lyndon 7 Stecle Street, Leongatha, Victoria 3953 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae (Rodentia: Muridae): Further Findings at Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory National Park Bruce W. Atkin' and Bruce R. Quin? Abstract Trapping for the New Holland Mouse Pseudomyy novaehollandiae was carried out on the Yanakie Isthmus area of Wilsons Promontory National Park, southern Victoria, in May 1996 as part of a pro- gram aimed at determining appropriate habitat management for this species. During previous sur- veys in the vicinity, the New Holland Mouse had been captured only on vegetated dunes. However, on this occasion a number were trapped in open swales. This finding may increase our understanding of the habitat requirements of the New Holland Mouse. The shrub layer in the swales, dominated by Coast Tea-tree Leptospermum laevigatum, had been slashed within the previous three years; it is possible that the regrowth had reached a stage of succession where it was providing sufficient cover for New Holland Mice, perhaps coupled with an increased abundance of food. This paper describes the results of the trapping program and provides recommendations for future management of the New Holland Mouse and its habitat at Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory National Park. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (5). 1999, 169-172.) Introduction The New Holland Mouse was first recorded on the Yanakie [sthmus area of Wilsons Promontory National Park during 1993. It was found on dunes vegetated with mature Banksia and Allocasuarina woodland, with an understorey dominated by sedges and low shrubs (Quin 1996; Quin and Williamson 1996). It had previ- ously been recorded on the Promontory near Darby Swamp and Fiye-Mile Road (Fig. 1) in the early to mid-1970s (Seebeck et al. 1996). In an attempt to determine appropriate management of dune and swale vegetation for the New Holland Mouse, a trial exclu- sion plot of 25 m x 25 m was proposed, to prevent grazing by herbivores (Chesterfield et al. 1995). The purpose of the plot was to assist managers in determining whether or not the elimination of grazing would lead to restoration of a Kangaroo Grass Themeda triandra native grassland/ open woodland, thus conserving habitat of the New Holland Mouse (Quin and Williamson 1996), The aim of this study was to determine the presence and distribution of the New Holland Mouse in the vicinity of the pro- posed exclusion plot. Future trapping would then reveal whether the New Holland Mouse utilised the restored grass- land as habitat. Department of Natural Resources and Environment. 310 Commercial Road, Yarram, Victoria 3971- * Department of Natural Resourees and Environment, P.O. Box 264, Woori Yallock, Victoria 3139. Vol. 116 (5) 1999 Study Area, Materials and Methods The study site was immediately west of the main access road to Tidal River, about three kilometres south of the entrance to the Park and 10 km north of Darby River (Fig. 1). The dunes in the area are generally three to five metres in height and vegetated as described in the introduction. The vegeta- tion in the swales, which are generally up to 50 m wide, has been described as rough grassland (Chesterfield ef al. 1995). Grazing pressure from Eastern Grey Kangaroos Macropus giganteus, Common Wombats Vombatus ursinus and European Rabbits Orycrolagus cuniculus is heavy and bare ground is common, ranging from <5% to 40% (B.W. Atkin, pers. obs.). The vegetation is dominated by a few apparent- ly unpalatable species, particularly Black- anther Flax-lily Dianella revoluta, Silky Guinea-flower Hibbertia sericea and Coast Tea-tree Leptospermum laevigatum. The swales in the study area were slashed initially in March 1992 and again in December 1993, to control the spread of Coast Tea-tree (P. McDiarmid, Ranger, Parks Victoria, Yanakie pers. comm.). Coast Tea-tree invasion of dune vegetation is believed to threaten populations of the New Holland Mouse because the resulting Tea-tree thicket out-competes the vegeta- tion community it occupies. The New Holland Mouse has not been located in well established Tea-tree monocultures (Quin and Williamson 1996). At the time 169 Research Reports Waratah Bay ey “@ Trapping Site pping SONS PROMONTOH WATIOWAL PARK Tidal N 4 Kilometres 5 o 5 10 15 20 Fig. 1. Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory National Park. of the study, the Tea-trees and Flax-lillies had grown to around 0.3 m in height. The area had not been burnt for 20-30 years and previous surveys in the vicinity had located the New Holland Mouse only in the dunes (Quin 1996). Since 1992, bait- ing with the poison 1080 has been carried out annually in the swales for the control of Red Foxes Vulpes vulpes and rabbits. Baiting for rabbits has been excluded from sites where the New Holland Mouse was known to occur, The baiting aims to reduce rabbit numbers and therefore assist in restoration of the Kangaroo Grass Themeda triandra native grassland-open woodland which formerly occurred over parts of the Yanakie Isthmus (Quin and Williamson 1996), The weather throughout the survey peri- od, May 7-9 1996, was generally cloudy and cool, with showers on the first two nights. The third and final night was clear and cold. A total of 88 Elliott folding box traps (Elliott Scientific, Upwey, Vic.) measuring 33 x 10 x 9 cm was used. The survey con- centrated on several dunes where New Holland Mice had been trapped earlier in 1996 (D. Carmen, pers, comm.) and adjoin- ing swales, and included the site chosen for the proposed exclusion plot. Five lines of traps (63 taps) were positioned on or at the 170 Table 1. Total captures of small ground mam- mals during Elliott trapping at Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory National Park, May 1996. Date New Holland Mouse Bush House Swales Dunes Rat Mouse 7 May 4 10 3 0 8 May 7 IS 2 fi! 9 May 3 10 3 I Total 14 35 8 3 base of dunes, and four lines (25 traps) were positioned in open vegetation in the swales. Traps were spaced at 10 m intervals and baited with a mixture of peanut butter. honey and rolled oats. Traps were checked early each morning and then closed to pre- vent capture of diurnal animals. They were re-opened in the late afternoon, and rebait- ed where necessary. Trapping was carried out on three con- secutive nights, realising a total of 264 trap-nights. The survey initially aimed to determine presence or absence of the New Holland Mouse in the study area, However, in view of the number captured on the first night, it was considered impor- tant to take morphological measurements thereafter. Weights of New Holland Mice were recorded on the second morning of capture; weight, gender, tail, and pes (foot) length were recorded on the third morning. A Pesola spring balance was used for measurement of weight, vernier calipers for pes measurement and a ruler for measurement of tail length. After examination, each individual animal was released at the location where it was cap- tured. Results Three species of rodent were recorded during this survey: New Holland Mouse, Bush Rat Rattus fuscipes and House Mouse Mus musculus. Total captures for each species are shown in Table 1. The overall success rate was 22.7%. The mean success rate for the New Holland Mouse was 19.3%. On 8 May the success rate for the New Holland Mouse was high- est, at 25%. Over the three nights, 14 (28.6%) New Holland Mice were captured in swale veg- etation, On the first night, four New Holland Mice (28.6%) were trapped in the swales; on the second night, seven (31.8%) and on the third night, three (23.1%). No The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports Table 2. Morphological measurements for New Holland Mice captured at Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory National Park, May 1996, *one individual not included as part of tail missing. Measurement Male Female mean s.d. range n mean s.d. range n Mass (2) 19.2 1.32 18-21 d, 16.9 1.56 15,5-19.5 5 Tail length (mm) 94.6 8,22 80-105 7 91.5 5.07 85-96 4* Pes length (mm) 16.7 0,25 165-17.2 7 16,4 0.47 15.7-16.8 5 House Mice or Bush Rats were captured in the swales; all were on or immediately at the foot of dunes. One New Holland Mouse shed the last 35 mm of the skin of its tail while being han- dled. This technique is used by some rodents to avoid capture (P. Myroniuk, pers. comm.,). Another had recently lost approximately one third of its tail (.e, not only the outer skin). Following their release, most New Holland Mice paused for three or four seconds before bounding away rapidly toward cover. One individual covered a distance of about 20 m in an estimated five-six seconds. One of the 13 New Holland Mice trapped on the night of 9 May escaped before mea- surements or gender were recorded, Of the remaining 12, seven were males and five were females. Range, mean and standard deviation for all measurements are record- ed in Table 2. Discussion The capture rate of New Holland Mice (19.3%) obtained in this survey was higher than that recorded by Quin (1996), whose work in the same area in February and April 1993 yielded 25 New Holland Mice from 157 trap nights (15.9%). The vegetation in the swales may have been too low and sparse in 1993 to provide sufficient cover for the New Holland Mouse. Vegetative cover had increased since that time (B.R, Quin pers. obs.); this could be attributed to a reduction in graz- ing pressure due to the extensive rabbit baiting program, As a result, by 1996 the patchy Coast Tea-tree may have provided sufficient cover to enable the New Holland Mouse to venture into the swales. Alternatively, food abundance may have increased in association with the increase in cover, However, Carmen (pers, comm.) recorded breeding in May, so an alterna- tive explanation may be that the New Holland Mouse population at Yanakie Vol. 116 (5) 1999 Isthmus was highest in May (see Kemper 1988) and competition had forced some mice into the swales. The on-going baiting for rabbits and foxes, although peripheral to the New Holland Mouse population, may well be having a beneficial effect, leading to a higher population, Smith and Quin (1996) have demonstrated that some Australian rodents have undergone decline where feral predator abundance has been elevated by high levels of introduced prey species such as rabbits. Thus, more than one factor may be responsible for the apparent increase in size of the New Holland Mouse population. Previous studies have demonstrated the preference of the New Holland Mouse for an actively regenerating (post-fire or post- clearing). heathy understorey (e.g. Wilson 1994: Braithwaite and Gullen 1978). The vegetation in the swales at this study site was at an early stage of succession follow- ing slashing. It is probable that in time, as Coast Tea-tree regrowth comes to domi- nate the site, thereby excluding other plant species, the area will become unsuitable as habitat for the New Holland Mouse as appears to haye been the case at other sites on Wilsons Promontory (Quin and Williamson 1996), The establishment of grazing exclusion plots alluded to in the introduction, was intended to be a management measure which might enable the New Holland Mouse to venture out of the dune yegeta- tion as the Themeda grassland/woodland in the swales established sufficient cover. As New Holland Mice were found in the swales during this survey, and some cap- tures oceurred on the actual exclusion plot site, the proposal requires modification. (The planned grazing exclusion plot was established shortly after this survey took place.) Future management for the New Holland Mouse should include systematic monitor- ing of their numbers, and monitoring of 171 Contributions vegetation under three different manage- ment regimes within and outside a much larger exclusion zone: © an area of swale which is slashed every 3-5 years to keep it at a stage of succes- sion which is currently believed to be suitable for New Holland Mice; e an area of swale in which the Coast Tea- tree is left to regenerate, to determine the post-slashing regeneration age at which the mice are no longer present: ® an adjacent area of dune yegetation. This should provide useful information on the effect of grazing by large herbivores on swale and dune vegetation composition and on New Holland Mouse population growth and distribution. Acknowledgements We would like to thank the following people who assisted with this project: Susan Taylor and Ross Williamson for supervision; Linda Rippon, Susan Taylor and Sonya Feodorotf for assis- tance with field work; Paul McDiarmid for information; and Gordon Friend, Darren Quin, John Seebeck, Susan Taylor, Ross Williamson and Wendy Williamson for constructive criti- cism of drafts of this report. References Braithwaite, R-W. and Gullen, P.K. (1978). Habitat selection by small mammals in a Victorian heathland. Australian Journal of Ecology 3, 109-127. Chesterfield, E., Trumbull-Ward, A.. Hopmans, P. and Whelan, J. (1995). ‘Early Changes in Vegetation from a Grazing Trial on Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory National Park’. (Flora and Fauna Technical Report. Department of Conservation and Natural Resources.) Kemper, C. (1988). New Holland Mouse. /n ‘Complete Book of Australian Mammals”, pp. 408-409. Ed- Ronald Strahan, (Reed Books: Chatswood.) Quin. B.R. (1996), New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae (Rodentia: Muridae) in South Gippsland, Southern Victoria Part One - Distribution and Status. The Victorian Naturalist 113, 236-246, Quin, B.R. and Williamson, R.C. (1996). New Holland Mouse Pseudomys_novaehollandiae (Rodentia: Muridae) in South Gippsland, Southern Victoria Part Two - Conservation and Management. The Victorian Naturalist 113, 281-288. Seebeck, J., Menkhorst, P., Wilson, B. and Lowe, K. (1996). New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehol- landiae Action Statement No. 74. Flora and Fauna Branch, Department of Natural Resources and Environment, East Melbourne. Smith, A.P. and Quin, DG. (1996). Patterns and causes of extinction and decline in Australian conilurine rodents. Biological Conservation 77, 243-267. Wilson, B. (1994). The Distribution of the New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae (Waterhouse 1843) in the Eastern Otways, Victoria. The Victorian Naturalist 111. 46-53. Observations of Platypus Ornithorhynchus anatinus Mating Behaviour Mark De-La-Warr' and Melody Serena’ Abstract Only three instances of apparent Platypus mating behaviour have previously been described in the wild, with three additional examples of mating described in captivity. We report here on a presumed mating sequence observed in the wild at Lake Elizabeth in the Otway Ranges, Victoria. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (5), 1999, 172-174.) Introduction Remarkably little is known about the reproductive behaviour of the Platypus Ornithorhynchus anatinus. Given that eggs have been recorded in underground nests from late August to October and that gesta- tion and incubation are respectively believed to last about one month and ten days, Platypus presumably may breed as early as July, with some evidence that eggs ' Otwild Adventures, PO, Box 36, Birregurra, Victoria 3242. * Australian Platypus Conservancy. P.O. Box 8&4, Whittlesea, Victoria 3757. 172 appear somewhat earlier in Queensland and northern New South Wales than in Victoria (Griffiths 1978). To the best of our knowl- edge, the breeding behaviour of wild Platypus has previously been described by only two authors, with three additional accounts of mating recorded in captivity. Verreaux (1848, quoted in Burrell 1927) witnessed two Platypus mating in the mid- dle of a reed bed after the male had chased the female ‘for nearly an hour’. The male gripped the female’s neck with his bill and her hindquarters with his back legs. The The Victorian Naturalist female struggled violently and vocalised increasingly loudly (‘plaintive cries rather like the squeaks of a young porker’) until the pair separated after five or six minutes. Afterwards, ‘the two animals played together for more than an hour’, Burrell (1927) (who doubted the accura- cy of Verreaux’s observations) reported two separate incidents along the Namoi River in August 1909 and September 1921. In the first incident, one animal floated ‘perfectly still’ with its body and tail sub- merged below the surface, while the sec- ond approached slowly and then mounted the first ‘in a leisurely fashion’. The sec- ond animal then ‘threw himself back into a sitting posture’ at which point “there was a great splash, and both animals disap- peared’. These events were directly pre- ceded by the animals swimming in a tight circle at the surface for about one minute. In the second incident, two Platypus were initially observed “floundering, or wallow- ing’ at the surface, facing in opposite directions and upside down so the tail of each animal was laid flat along the other's abdomen. At short intervals, the animals rotated around their long axis (whence the floundering) so each could breathe tn turn at the surface, with these manoeuvres undertaken ‘in a calm, slow, deliberate manner, and almost noiselessly”. After three minutes, the pair separated underwater and then rose together to the surface before div- ing and disappearing from view. In captivity, Fleay (1980) observed a pair mating on | October 1943, The interaction began with the animals swimming in pro- cessional circles in the tank, the male grasping the end of the female’s tail in his bill. While still holding the female’s tail, the male doubled his body under her to achieve intromission. The pair subsequent- ly adopted the posture observed by Burrell along the Namoi River in 1921, facing in opposite directions and upside down rela- live to each other so they had to breathe alternately. The pair separated after ten minutes. At Taronga Zoo in Sydney, mating sequences were recorded on 10 October 1990 and 11 October 1991 (Hawkins and Fanning 1992), In both cases, the male mounted the female by grasping her tail between one hind foot and his own tail Vol. 116 (5) 1999 Contributions (which was curled forward) while moving his body forward so his head lay over her shoulder. The animals were supported by a log lying approximately 10 cm below the water's surface, although in 1991 the female swam the length of the tank on sey- eral occasions while the male was mounted. The pair remained coupled for 17 minutes and 28 minutes, respectively. We describe below a fourth example of presumed Platypus mating behaviour in the wild, observed on 28 September 1998 at Lake Elizabeth, Victoria. Description of the Waterway Lake Elizabeth is located & km southeast of the township of Forrest in the Otway Ranges (143°40°55” E, 38°30°45" S). The lake was formed in 1952, when a natural landslide dammed the East Barwon River, creating a waterbody which is about 500 m long x 200 m wide at its widest point and typically 4.5- 6 m deep. The habitat surrounding the lake consists of wet sclerophyll forest and sub- temperate rainforest dominated by Manna Gum Eucalyptus viminalis and Southern Blue Gum E. globulus. Since 1994, one of us (MDLW) has regularly conveyed small numbers of people around Lake Elizabeth by canoe, in order to observe the behaviour of a number of species living in and around the lake, including Platypus, Up to seven Platypus are seen over a period of two hours around dawn. The animals continue to feed and otherwise appear to be undisturbed by the presence of the boat as long as its occu- pants remain quiet and reasonably still when Platypus are at the surface. The observations reported below were made on a sunny day following a windy, rainy night. After a long spell of dry weather, nearly 70 mm of rain had fallen in the previous three days, causing the lake level to rise. Description of Mating Behaviour Two Platypus were observed at approxi- mately 0700 hours resting in 12 cm of water on a partly submerged hollow log (60 cm in diameter, with the hollow portion extending at least 2 m back from the entrance) located perpendicular to the bank along the shady northeast margin of the lake. One animal was lying on top of the other, with its bill moving slowly back and forth along the 173 Contributions other’s back. The animals then began rolling over in tandem in a halting manner. Their bodies were pressed together closely, with their underparts mostly hidden by a tangle of legs as they rotated slowly. Both animals had their eyes shut and otherwise appeared oblivious to the presence of the observer's canoe, 8-10 m away. After completing about four full rotations over a period of two to three minutes. the two Platypus separated and swam in a leisurely manner for a distance of about one metre to the exposed opening at the end of the log. After both animals entered the hollow, one turned around and used its bill to re-arrange some reeds growing around the entrance. The animal continued to manipulate the vegetation in a diligent manner for 30 to 40 seconds, until the opening into the hollow had been hidden from the observer’s view. While it is known from radio-tracking studies that Platypus burrow entrances are often con- cealed from view by undercut banks, over- hanging vegetation, etc. (e.g. Serena er al. 1998), this is the first time that a Platypus has apparently been seen actively disguis- ing the entrance to a resting site. The log’s location and orientation suggested that it may have led directly to a burrow in the bank. Alternatively, Platypus are occasion- ally known to shelter during the day in sizeable hollow logs at the edge of the water (Burrell 1927; M. Serena pers. obs.). Discussion Considered collectively, the accounts of Platypus breeding behaviour summarised above suggest that the following generali- sations apply to this species: (1) Platypus may mate either while sup- ported by a structure in a few centimetres of water or while floating in deeper water. (2) In shallow water, a pair will mate with the male mounted on top of the female. In deeper water, the animals may end up fac- ing in opposite directions and positioned upside down relative to each other. (3) A pair of Platypus may remain coupled for a few minutes to as long as about half an hour. (4) Mating may be immediately preceded by the pair swimming in tight processional circles on the surface. In captivity, such circling behaviour has sometimes been recorded on a number of days in the breed- ing season (Strahan and Thomas 1975; Fleay 1980), possibly due to the animals being forced to share a relatively small space throughout this period. Acknowledgements We thank P. and C. Brown and T., V. and A. Rowe for helping to confirm the details of the observations reported here. References Burrell, H. (1927). “The Platypus’. (reprinted in 1974 by Rigby Ltd: Adelaide). Fleay, D, (1980). “Paradoxical Platypus’. (Jacaranda Press: Brisbane), ariffiths. M. (1978). “The Biology of the Monotremes’. (Academie Press: New York). Hawkins, M, and Fanning, D, (1992), Courtship and mating behaviour of captive Platypuses at Taronga Zoo. In ‘Platypus and Echidnas’, pp. 106-114. Ed, M.L. Augee. (Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales: Sydney). Serena, M., Thomas, LL. Williams, G.A. and Officer, R.C.E, (1998), Use of stream and river habitats by the Platypus, Ornithorhynchus anatinus, in an urban fringe environment. Australian Journal of Zoology 46, 267-282. Strahan, R. and Thomas, D-E. (1975), Courtship of the Platypus, Ornithorhynchus anatinus, Australian Zoologist 18 (3), 165-178. Special Issues Next year (2000) we will publish two special issues of The Victorian Naturalist, One of the issues will celebrate the life and scientific work of Sir Frederick MeCoy (1823-1899) on his centenary. Frederick McCoy was the first President of the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria and held this office for three years, from 1880- 1883. The second special issue will concentrate on The Murray River, its billabongs and creeks. If you wish to contribute articles, research reports or notes to either of these issues, please contact the editor (FNCYV, Locked Bag 3, P.O. Blackburn, Victoria 3130). 174 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions A Diary of the Saunders Casemoth Oiketicus elongatus Joan Broadberry' Abstract This paper includes field observations of the larval and pupal stages of the male and female Saunders Casemoth Oiketicus elongatus, including method of climbing vertical surfaces, indications of eclo- sion, timespan of pupal stage and a description of winged male and wingless female moths. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (5), 1999, 175-178.) Observations of the larval stage On Sunday 21 February 1994 I picked up a 15 cm long, twig-decorated case of a Saunders Casemoth Ojketicus elongatus, which had fallen out of a prickly Grevillea in our yard, These cases are quintessentially Australian. Most of us learn as children to recognise them, but beyond the mere act of recognition there is total ignorance. I con- sulted Coupar (1992), and found that case- moths are the larval or caterpillar stage of a moth, and as they are interesting to keep and observe, I installed the animal in an old esky and provided several food plants Grevillea, Acacia and Eucalyptus, not being sure of what it ate. I keep a regular nature diary. and the following account is from the field notes | made over the next year. That evening I was home alone when I heard a faint noise. I'll never forget the delight of that first sight of the head and thorax of a handsome orange and black caterpillar. Initially we only caught glimpses of the caterpillar if we peeped quietly into the container. But the creature gradually became used to us and began to move around freely, somehow crawling up the vertical sides of the esky and attaching near the top. It always quickly closed its case for privacy when disturbed, but over time, this action became slower. After a day or two we established the food plant as Grevillea glabrata by seeing the caterpillar eat it. By the way, the best sign of casemoth ‘life’ and activity are the faecal pellets (frass) lying on the bottom of its container. | took many photos of the orange head and black body segments, blotched with bright orange. Up to seven body segments came out of the case, the last three showing being totally black, On the thorax were three pairs of legs tipped with curved claw-like feet (Fig. 1). A week later the casemoth became very 2 Shaun Court, Templestowe, Victoria 3106. Vol. 116 (5) 1999 restless, climbing the sheer sides of the esky again and again. It took us another week of observation to realise that the caterpillar climbs vertical surfaces by mak- ing a silken ladder, with steps about 7 mm apart. The animal builds each step by mov- ing its head from side to side and laying down many strands of the silk secreted from its mouthparts. This becomes a rung of its ladder. The caterpillar, using its first pair of legs, then pulls itself and its stick case up, until its head projects beyond the rung. It stretches its head a further few mil- limetres and lays down another step. The whole process is repeated over and over again. The silken ladder left behind shows clearly where the casemoth has climbed. Fig. 1. Larval stage of casemoth showing the caterpillar’s head, Photograph by Joan Broadberry, 175 Contributions More observations. I noticed the back end of the animal came right out of the case when faecal pellets were being expelled. While they feed, casemoths attach the top of their case to a twig with a few strands of silk. This is cut when they are ready to move on, The case can be very tightly shut by twirling it around a stick or pulling it inwards like an old-fashioned drawstring purse. Saunders Casemoths readily climb around in foliage using their strong, hooked feet to grip onto twigs, the body inside the case always being pulled behind. I started reading Common (1990). The Saunders Casemoth belongs to a world- wide family of the Psychidae, commonly called case or bag moths. The family includes about 600 species with an esti- mated 145 found in Australia. Oiketicus elongatus occurs in Southern Queensland, New South Wales and Victoria in all sea- sons of the year. Each individual animal seems to have a preferred food plant, but the species is polyphagous and has been recorded on Eucalyptus, Leptospermum, Melaleuca, and introduced plants including Citrus and Cotoneaster. Grevillea subsp., the plant our casemoth feeds on, is not mentioned as a food plant. Casemoths go through many instars over a period of years, during which they seal up their cases, become inactive and shed their skin. This is known as ecdysis. The number of instars of the Saunders Casemoth is not stated, A study of a simi- lar West Indian species, Oiketicus kirbyi, estimated 12 to 20 instars. On 10 March 1994 [ observed that our casemoth appeared to be going through ecdysis. It had been hanging from the side of the esky for several days, not moving and produc- ing no frass. An alternative explanation may be that the caterpillar was going through a period of diapause, a time of decreased metabolism, On 25 March the casemoth commenced feeding again and on 21 May we released the captive animal outside to live freely on its foodplant. Observations of the male pupal stage On 11 March my daughter found a sec- ond, smaller casemoth attached low down on a nearby telephone box and brought it home. After a couple of days, as it wasn’t eating, I put it back in the tanbark about five 176 metres from the phone box and forgot about it. However, this little creature was destined to play a much bigger part in our lives. Some time later, on 23 March, I noticed a small casemoth hanging in the same place on the telephone box. It may have been the same one we found earlier because it was attached on exactly the same spot. It seems intriguing that it would ‘home’ to the identi- cal place. Observing closely, I noticed it seemed shrunken inside, Looking carefully I realised there was an orange and black caterpillar head and thorax, detached and dangling below the case (Fig. 2), Reasoning that this might be a sign of pupation before the emergence of an adult, I took the case home and hung it inside a glass Jar resting on a cool, south facing windowsill over the sink, where I would notice it every day. We just dared to hope for an adult moth, but realised it would require patience. Sunday 12 October 1994. What excite- ment! My daughter had the honour of find- ing a perfect adult male casemoth inside the jar (see photo on front cover). Our patience had paid off. It was a truly beauti- ful moth and so seldom seen, although Fig. 2. Detached caterpillar head and thorax dangling below the twig case. Photograph by Joan Broadberry. The Victorian Naturalist Fig. 3. Pupal case. after male adult casemoth has emerged. Photograph by Joan Broadberry, they must be common, It had a wingspan of 45 mm; a black furry body 26 mm in length; a long, pointed, orange and black striped abdomen; a large hairy orange patch on its back; and black antennae. The bold orange and black colour scheme echoed that of the caterpillar. The forewings were an elongated oval shape, transparent, with a bee-like texture. The hindwings were similar but much smaller. The two pairs of wings rested in a horizon- tal position. The twig case had a dark, shiny cylindri- cal pupal case, open at the bottom, protrud- ing from it (Fig. 3). Now, years later. | sometimes observe such cases, a sure sign the moth has flown. Regrettably, after being photographed the adult gave its life for science, ending as a pinned specimen. Mission accomplished. But there was to be a further chapter. Observations of the female pupal stage The large casemoth had been outside, lost in the prickly embrace of the Grevillea. During the colder winter months we made no observations at all, but we spotted it again at the end of October mov- ing around the shrub. On 14 January 1995 I recorded that the twig home measured 16 em from tip to tip. This is considerably larger than the 12 cm maximum recorded in Common (1990), From my photographs of the distinctive case, there is no doubt it was the original animal. That day the caterpillar was very restless. It climbed part way up the house wall and attached near the front door. Next day we lost the animal, but tracked it by means of the silken ladder. The caterpillar had climbed the whole height of the house up to the eaves. Later it fell to the ground. Vol. 116 (5) 1999 Contributions Fig. 4. Female adult Saunders Casemoth, show- ing pupal case. Photograph by Joan Broadberry. Was it too heavy or was this the only way down? How do casemoths go backwards? This behaviour was observed off and on until 5 February when it finally climbed up to the middle of a low window and made a very strong attachment. I was able to get excellent views from inside the glass, of the movement of the head in making the ladder, and the awkward heaving of the heavy body up each silken step. That final journey took tremendous effort. More of the caterpillar body segments than I had ever seen previously came out of the case. Once secure. there it stayed, tightly closed. Saturday 1] March. I became aware of a faint movement and a shiny yellow head just peeping out of the back end of the case. What was happening? The animal seemed the wrong way around as the female is fer- tilised inside the case and IT would not expect the head to be at the rear opening. I was consumed with curiosity but the only way to look inside would have been to destroy the twig home. Again patience was required. Looking back now, I know this meant the caterpillar had turned into a mature, adult wingless female moth (Fig. 4), The pupal stage lasted only about five weeks, in comparison with the male’s pupation, which took at least five months. | re-read Common (1990) more carefully. In the sub-family Psychidae, both male and female newly emerged adults turn inside the case, meaning the female genital organs are facing away from the rear opening. The male is able to greatly extend its abdomen to contact them, This is the origin of the species name ‘elongatus’. On 21 March I noticed that the rear end of the case was gaping open, and glancing at the ground, saw a fat, yellowish grub- like animal lying there. Because I had ear- 177 Contributions / ere) Fig. 5. Part of a colony of casemoths containing over 70 individuals, Photograph by Joan Broadberry, lier glimpsed its head, | realised this was the wingless adult moth. It was a very happy occurrence, as | would never have damaged the case to see the animal. Again great excitement, as | photographed the live female Saunders Casemoth, The wingless moth, 6 cm long, looked just like a bloated yellow Egyptian muminy, with a large mustard coloured head, The body texture was smooth, with five indistinct segments covered by very loose baggy skin, The moth was very swollen, with its ovipositor extended from a brown furry ring around its rear opening. Its helpless body heaved and pulsated in a wave-like motion starting from the head and travelling to the back. Three pairs of minuscule legs were just visible below the head, but the creature was not designed to walk or fly, simply to spend its whole life inside the protective case. Next day [ cut the empty twig case open for photographs. Inside was a velvety soft silk lining and the remains of a black, shiny, tube-like pupal case similar to the one I had seen protruding after the male moth emerged. The animal had pupated head up, but must have turned after emerg- ing from the pupal case. Later, | decided to replace the moth in its damaged home and leave it out overnight, just in case exes were laid. The most exciting thing of all would be to watch them hatch and see tiny Saunders Casemoth larvae start to build their homes. But it was not to be, and the wingless female died about 26 March. In Common (1990), I read, “Sometimes the spent female is said to drop from the case after oviposition.” The female had probably been fertilised and laid the eggs of the next generation, before dropping from the case. 178 Directions for the future investigation There are many more aspects of Saunders Casemoth biology to explore: the number of instars and lifespan for example. The significance of the dangling remains of the head and thorax is not yet clear. It seems to be an indicator of eclosion in the male ani- mal. I have observed this sign on two other occasions, collected the cases and in both instances, after some time, a male moth has emerged. I continue to learn, In a recent interesting encounter with the Saunders Casemoth we found a group of over 70 individuals clus- tered together on a Cypress tree in an inner suburban garden (Fig. 5). In this colony J found two cases fused together. Each con- tained a healthy caterpillar, but the two were forced to move about together, like Siamese twins, as their cases were joined (Fig. 6). This large group raises the ques- tion of how gregarious the caterpillars are? Studying this unique Australian animal is a fascinating part of my life. It is seeming- ly so common but also so secretive. The caterpillar and female moth, always hidden from our eyes inside the case, and the male, so elusive that few photographs or specimens exist. References Coupar, P. and M, (1992), ‘Flying Colours’. (NSW University Press: Sydney.) Common, 1.F,B. (1990), ‘Moths of Australia’. (Melbourne University Press; Melbourne.) Fig. 6, Larval stage of casemoth, showing two twig cases fused logether. Photograph by Joan Broadbury. The Victorian Naturalist Contributions New Records of the Striped Worm-lizard Aprasia striolata in South-western Victoria Cam Beardsell', Nick Clemann*!, John Silins' and Edward McNabb! Abstract The Striped Worm-lizard Aprasia striolata has been infrequently recorded in Victoria, and is official ly listed as a threatened species. This article reports two new localities for this species in south-west- ern Victoria. One individual was captured in an invertebrate pitfalltrap in heathy woodland south of Edenhope, Nine adults and five juveniles were hand-caught after being located beneath limestone slabs in the Glenelg River gorge south-west of Casterton. Numerous sloughs of this species were also discovered beneath rocks at this site, Sympatric reptiles species noted during brief surveys at both sites are listed. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (5), 1999, 179-180.) Introduction The Striped Worm-lizard Aprasia striola- ta Lutken 1863 is a small, worm-like pygopodid (legless) lizard, adapted to bur- rowing in loose sandy or loamy soils (Cogger 1996) (Fig. 1), It has two main distributions in semi-arid regions of south- ern Australia (Cogger 1996). One is in the south of Western Australia, whilst the other extends from Portland to the Big Desert in western Victoria across South Australia to the Eyre Peninsula. Populations within this range may be localised and fragmented due to natural discontinuity in habitat and land clearing. Aprasia striolata has been infrequently observed in Victoria and is officially listed as Lower Risk — Near Threatened (NRE 1999). In recent years (1990-1998) there have been only three records of this species. Similarly, for the period 1970-1990 there are 1] records and, prior to 1970, another 11 records (Atlas of Victorian Wildlife database, NRE). Most records haye come from sand-hill mallee communities of the Little and Big Deserts. There is a scattering of records from heathy woodlands in the Edenhope-Casterton region, with an outly- ing population on limestone cliffs along the southern coast around Portland. This note reports two new records detected in sum- mer— autumn 1998/99, during fauna surveys for the Regional Forest Agreement Process. These were of a single animal captured in an invertebrate pitfall-trap south of Edenhope and a population located during searching of the Glenelg River gorge south- west of Casterton. ' Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research, Department of Natural Resources and Environment, 123 Brown St, Heidelberg, Victoria, Australia 3054. * To whom correspondence should be addressed. Vol. 116 (5) 1999 fastigiata Habitats at the new sites The Edenhope site was at the northern end of an extensive sand-plain which extends south-west to the South Australian border, To the north lie the Wimmera Plains which once supported grassy wood- lands, though they are now largely cleared for grazing and cropland. Heathy woodland on the sand-plain contained an Overstorey of Desert Stringybark Eucalyptus arenacea, The heathland understorey con- sisted of tall shrub copses of Desert Banksia Banksia ornata and a moderately dense stratum of low shrubs including Heath Tea-tree Leptospermum myrsinoides, Daphne Heath Brachyloma daphnoides and Flame Heath Astroloma conostephioides. The ground stratum consisted of sedges including Tassel Rope-rush Hypolaena and Black Rapier-sedge Lepidosperma carphoides. In the Glenelg River gorge, A. striolata occupied limestone cliffs, escarpments and upper river terraces. The overstorey con- sisted of an open shrubland of Drooping Sheoke Allocasuarina verticillata, Wedge- leaf Hop-bush Dodonaea cuneata and Tree Violet Hymenanthera dentata, The ground stratum on the escarpment consisted of an open tussock grassland dominated by Grey Tussock-grass Poa sieberiana and Rough Spear-grass Austrostipd scabra. The ter- race supported a closed grassland of Common Tussock-grass Poa labillardiert. Cliffs were formed of horizontal bedded limestone while small, flat slabs lay on the escarpment. Rock screes occurred on the terrace at the foot of the cliffs. Soil consist- ed of friable brown alluvium. 179 Contributions New records of the Striped Worm-lizard A single A. striolata was captured in an invertebrate pitfall-trap near Edenhope. It had a snout-vent length of 92 mm, and a tail length of 31 mm. Other reptile species recorded at this site included Garden Skink Lampropholis guichenoti, Bougainville’s Skink Lerista bougainyillii, Eastern Three- lined Skink Bassiana duperreyi and Tree Dragon Ampibolurus muricatus. Fourteen A. striolata were located under limestone slabs in the Glenelg River gorge during a 90-minute search by the authors on 25 March 1999. Nine of the individuals were adult (one collected, Fig. 1) and five were juvenile. Numerous shed skins (sloughs) were also observed beneath the slabs. A single animal was captured during a brief search of the same area the previous day. Sympatric reptiles recorded during the search of the Glenelg River gorge included Common Brown Snake Pseudonaja textilis (two juveniles), Bougainville’s Skink (two adults), Garden Skink (three adults) and Southern Grass Skink Pseudemoia entre- casteauxii (four adults). This site was pri- vate property which retained most of its original vegetation and had not been sub- jected to ground disturbance. These factors probably account for the persistence and density of the lizards in the area. Acknowledgements The field work was a component of the Regional Forestry Agreement wildlife survey of western Victoria. The authors thank Ivor Graney of the Portland Field Naturalist Club who drew our attention to the presence of unspecified worm-lizards in the Glenelg River gorge. Geoff Brown and Richard Loyn, both of the Arthur Rylah Institute, provided helpful comments on the manuscript. References Cogger, H.G. (1996). ‘Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia’. Revised edition, (Reed Books: Port Melbourne.) NRE (1999). ‘Threatened Vertebrate Fauna of Victoria — 1999°_ (Department of Natural Resources and Environment: Melbourne.) Fig. 1, The Striped Worm-lizard Aprasia striolata. Photo by Nick Clemann. 180 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions Early Devonian Fossils from Eglinton Road and Rail Cutting, Alexandra, Central Victoria Clem Earp! Abstract A brief report is given of an allochthonous fossil assemblage of Pragian (Early Devonian) age from marine shale at a location near Alexandra, central Victoria, Australia. The fossils include large early land plants. of which illustrations are given of an unnamed species, possibly related to Drepanophycus (Lycophytina, Drepanophycales). Rare shelly fossils include Hercynella (Mollusca, Bivalvia); the literature relating to this genus is reviewed. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (5), 1999. 181-186.) Introduction Eglinton Cutting is a large road cutting approximately 4 km northwest of Alexandra on the Goulburn Valley Highway (Fig. 1). At the crest of the road, another cutting branches off to the north- east; this was formerly the line of the Yea- Alexandra railway. In 1994, the local council reduced the slope on the south side of the cutting to prevent rockfalls. On inspecting the new face, | found that numerous fragments of the Siluro-Devonian fossil plant, Baragwanathia, were visible. On subse- quent visits, | found a number of other fos- sils, mostly in the talus left by the road works. Some of these fossils are described below, others are still under study, Those figured in this paper are deposited with the National Museum of Victoria (indicated by NMY specimen numbers). Previous studies The area was examined in 1929 by a team of geologists from the Mines Department, who were specifically looking for Baragwanathia and associated grapto- lites. The north end of the cutting (road and rail combined) was referred to as loca- tion 8 in the published report by Harris and Thomas (1941), and the railway cutting was referred to as location 9. Location 9 produced specimens of grap- tolites and Baragwanathia longifolia occurring together, which were pictured by Lang and Cookson (1935) in the first description of this species. At location § however, Harris and Thomas reported only a succession of basal shelly ‘grits’, over- lain by sandstones, and mudstones contain- ing Monograptus. ! 1/270 Albert Road, South Melbourne, Victoria 3205 Vol. 116 (5) 1999 The shelly fossils collected in 1929 were subsequently examined by Dr. J, A. Talent, who identified the brachiopods Boucotia australis and B, loyolensis, as well as not- ing the occurrence of indeterminable gas- tropod remains (Couper 1965). On this basis, Couper (1963) considered the hori- zon at location & to represent the Flowerdale Sandstone Member of Williams (1964). As for the graptolites, location 9 is one of the original localities for the species Monograptus thomasi Jaeger 1966 (see also Jaeger 1967). A specimen from Eglinton Cutting was figured by Garratt and Rickards (1984, fig. 5E). Lithology The new south face of the cutting expos- es a stratigraphic thickness of nearly 40 m (Fig. 2). The rock is almost entirely thin- bedded light to dark grey mudstone, weathering to a buff colour at the top 2-3 m of the cutting. The beds dip uniformly at around 82° to the southeast, and strike at about 130°. Near the top of the exposure are two beds of massive ungraded fine- Fig. 1. Small dots show fossil localities north of Alexandra, from Harris and Thomas (1941), redrawn on a modern map base. The large dot (8) shows the location of the Eglinton Road and Rail Cutting. 181 Contributions grained quartzitic sandstone, 15 and 30 cm thick, separated by 60 cm of mudstone. The thickness of the mudstone beds varies from millimetres up to about 15 cm, but is most commonly in the range 6-9 cm. Many of these thin beds are graded. with siltstone (sometimes very fine sandstone) and minor current-bedding at the base, fin- ing up to laminated claystone at the top. The contacts between the beds are usually planar and often marked by a millimetre- thick iron oxide stain; this is taken to rep- resent oxidation of sulphides from organic matter which settled at the top of the bed, The lithology indicates deposition by tur- bidity currents in quiet, deep water. [have not closely examined the north side of the cutting, which is now overgrown and weathered, except to note that the bedding and structure are more complex. I have been unable to find any ‘grits’ (coarse sandstones and granule conglomer- ates) corresponding to those seen by the Mines Department geologists in 1929. This can be accounted for by the vastly altered nature of the cutting. In 1929 the road 40 metres G 35 30 25 20 15 10 0 Fig. 2. Stratigraphic column, south face of Eglinton Cutting. G — graptolites, P — plants, H — Hercynella, ss — sandstone. 182 would have been little wider than a modern single lane. It is now a four-lane highway, with a parking area equivalent to a fifth lane. Clearly, an enormous amount of material has been removed from the south side of the cutting. The strata are part of a marine shale sequence, at least 500 m thick, to judge by exposures to the south of Alexandra. This sequence, in turn, belongs in the formation known as the Norton Gully Sandstone (VandenBerg 1975). The name is some- what misleading, by the way, as the formal definition states: ‘The predominant type consists of claystone and siltstone shale with thin bedded fine sandstone’. This describes the observed facies exactly. The relationship between the Norton Gully Sandstone and beds previously assigned to the Flowerdale Sandstone Member is cur- rently under investigation (see e.g. Edwards et al. 1997). Palaeontology General remarks All the fossils | have so far found have been on the bedding planes between mud- stone layers. I have seen none in the sand- stone, whereas at Mt Pleasant, on the other side of Alexandra, where the lithology is very similar, it is the thin-bedded sand- stones which are known for their plant fos- sils, while the mudstones are barren (Cookson 1935). The stratigraphic distribution of known fossil horizons is shown in Fig. 2. Although the fossil biota is rather scanty, the locality in this paper shares some species with localities in the Lilydale dis- trict. Numbers given in the following text for the Lilydale locations correlate with those on a chart in Garratt (1983. fig. 5). Most localities from the Lilydale district comparable with the locality in this study are well into the Boucotia loyolensis zone, suggesting an age younger than that for the Flowerdale Sandstone Member (Garratt 1983, fig. 6). Flora Numerous fossil plant remains have been exposed; they include vague carbonaceous films, well-preserved coalified compres- sions, mineralized impressions and leached-out moulds. The better preserved specimens will be described at a later date; The Victorian Naturalist for now a brief summary will be given. Baragwanathia longifolia Lang and Cookson. Very common; occasional specimens can be definitely identified in at least five differ- ent horizons, ranging from the top to the bot- tom of the cutting. Sometimes all that can be seen is a vague outline of an arched branch, at other times there are splendidly foliaceous specimens with coalified remnants. Hedeia corymbosa Cookson. As well as a couple of isolated stems, the site has yielded a substantial specimen with more than 20 sporangial heads. This is thought to be the largest specimen of Hedeia yet found (J. G, Douglas pers. comm). Yarravia cf. oblonga Cookson. A single stem 12 cm in length with poorly preserved sporangia appears identical to one described by Cookson (1949, Plate 4, figs. 4 and 5) from location G1, Lilydale. These forms are more slender overall than Y. oblonga Lang and Cookson sensu stricto. Zosterophyllum? sp. Thin axes up to 10 cm in length, occa- sionally branching dichotomously, No con- nected sporangia have been found, the sug- gested assignment is based purely on the appearance of the axes. Unknown tracheophyte. Naked stems 5-15 mm diameter, one of which has a pseudomonopodial branch 7 mm in diameter, There is a prominent vas- cular trace. More frequent short branches 2-3 mm in diameter and 2-3 cm long occur at intervals, often springing from the same ¥ = cy, J Fig. 3. tracheophyte. P208597A. Detail of two secondary branches im K configuration, «1.75. At left, a third branch originates from the opposite side of the axis. Vol. 116 (5) 1999 Contributions locus, in a K-configuration (Fig. 3). These seem to terminate in club-shaped endings, which are sometimes surrounded by a halo suggesting the remains of a globose struc- ture, or in other instances, there seem to be a number of short, erect sporangia-like objects attached (Fig. 4). This last species I regard as identical to plants found in the Wilson Creek Shale at Frenchman’s Spur, described in manu- script by Tims (1980), Tims assigned the species to the zosterophylls on the basis of their branching, but the size and appear- ance of the specimens is so remarkable that this hardly seems likely. Specimens with larger diameter axes somewhat resemble an Eifelian (Middle Devonian) plant, Drepanophycus devonicus Weyland and Berendt, as illustrated by Schweitzer and Giesen (1980), but the secondary branches are significantly longer in our specimens (Fig. 5). Fauna The observed fossil fauna consists of abundant graptolites, and a very few isolat- ed, more or less complete brachiopod and bivalve shells. The latter are relatively large (smallest diameter > 1 cm). Whereas the graptolites have left substantial car- bonaceous remains, the shelly fossils are reduced to impressions. which leads to dif- ficulty in identification. All fossils are highly compressed parallel to the bedding, and there is a further component of distor- tion which is most obvious in the grapto- lites (Jaeger 1966). Although the very rare brachiopod and bivalve shells may have been directly emplaced by turbidity currents, little sup- the clavate termination. 183 Contributions porting evidence for this mode of deposi- tion is present, The size of the shells is anomalous in the fine sediments. There are no coarse sand grains, lithic clasts or bro- ken shell fragments which one would expect to be entrained by currents suffi- ciently strong to carry the large complete valves. | consider the association with the abundant drifted fossils, such as the land plants. to be significant, and suggest that these shells were rafted by epibiotic sea- weed and dropped into position. Graptolithina Monograptus thomasi thomasi Jaeger. This is observable at intervals at all lev- els of the cutting (Fig. 2). This well-known index species fixes the age of the rocks as Pragian — for a recent discussion see Carey and Bolger (1995). Brachiopoda Fascicostella? sp. A battered fragment of an external mould shows coarse angular ribs arranged in bun- dles of 3, the middle being more promi- nent, at either side of a central area occu- pied by a panel of finer ribs. This type of ornamentation is characteristic of the Resserellinae (Walmsley and Boucot 1971). Two species of this subfamily have previously been reported from the Lower Devonian of Victoria. Of these, the one with coarse ornament is a Fascicostella, which Gill (1942) considered identical to specimens from New Zealand, then called F. gervillei, but now known as F. batonen- sis Walmsley and Boucot. Gill reported this species from locations G7, G9, G20 and G2] at Lilydale. Two other brachiopod specimens have Fig. 5. Unnamed tracheophyte, NMV P208598A. Detail of a single branch with clavate termination, originating from a thick axis: X2. 184 been found, but the impressions are not clear enough to be identifiable. Mollusca (Nautiloidea) Geisonocerina? sp. Two poorly preserved specimens were encountered in this study. One is a faint impression which shows the apical 6 cm of an orthoconic nautiloid conch with the numerous transverse striae (8-10 per cm) common in this genus. Although G. aus- tralis Chapman has been recorded from the Norton Gully Sandstone at “Kelly’s Hill’ (Mt Matlock), it differs from the specimens examined in this study by having nodular rather than smooth striae (Chapman 1912). Mollusea (Bivalvia) Hercynella killarensis Gill. Two reasonably clear impressions of right valves, both having the hinge portion missing. One of these was the only shelly fossil found in place within the outcrop exposure; it was concave side up. In the field, Hercynella is easily recognised as a large. almost circular shell with one radius marked out by a low ridge (Fig. 6). Hercynella killarensis was originally described from location G35, Killara, near Lilydale (Gill 1950), Hereynella also occurs at Seymour in a very similar lithol- ogy (Schleiger 1964). Notes on Hercynella The previous Victorian papers on Hercynella were written at a time when it was thought to be a gastropod. This Fig. 6. Hereynella killarensis Gill, NMV P303521A. Inner mould of a right valve, x0.625. The anterior ridge, at upper right, is intact only in its central half. The Victorian Naturalist includes two palaeo-ecological studies (Chapman 1917; Gill 1950), and one can appreciate that the ecology of a bivalve may very well be different trom that of a gastropod. As the overseas literature is rel- atively inaccessible, 1 think it worthwhile to summarize it here. Hercynella is thought to have evolyed during the Upper Silurian from the genus Silurina, by migration of the apex of the shell from its normal place at the margin, towards the centre (Termier and Termier 1950). The two genera are members of the family Antipleuridae. Hercynel/a is found in Europe, North Africa and North America as well as in Victoria, and was considered characteristic of the Old World faunal province of the Early Devonian by Forney et al, (1981). Following the discovery of articulated Specimens at a couple of European loca- tions, Prantl (1960) emended the original diagnosis of Kayser (1878) as follows (my translation): “‘Homomyarian, with strikingly inequry- alve asymmetric shells with a subcen- tral to submarginal summit. The shells are subconical to clypeate, with a prominent anterior wing. The wing is convexly arched on one radius, forming a ridge along its course from the sum- mit to the hinge. The hinge is curved inwards with a prominent external liga- ment groove. The pallial line is entire.’ It should be added that the valves are eden- tulous. The external ornament consists of concentric growth lines, and in some species a radial sculpture (e.g. H. victoriae Chapman, illustrated by Gill 1950). The anterior ridge mentioned in the diag- nosis is referred to in the older literature as a ‘fold’, a term more appropriate to gas- tropods. It is perhaps the location of the byssal gland (Termier and Termier 1950), but my personal opinion is that it serves some function analogous to that of the pos- terior ridge in many other bivalves. Following the recognition of the genus as a bivalve by the Termiers, Prantl (1960) observed that there were numerous instances of pairs of similar species report- ed from the same location. Given the inequivalye nature of known articulated specimens, he suggested that these pairs of species represented opposing valves of a Vol. 116 (5) 1999 Contributions single species. One of his examples ts the pair H. petasoida and H. killarensis, which Gill (1950) described from the same loca- tion; but any conclusive proof must await the discovery of an articulated specimen. As regards the ecology of Herevnella, it is now believed that this genus followed a reclining mode of life in deep water (Kriz 1979, 1984). By ‘reclining’. it is meant that the shell was lying on or just beneath the sediment surface, with the sagittal plane at an oblique angle to the vertical, and with- out a strong, permanent byssal attachment (Stanley 1970, p. 35-36). Kriz (1984) con- sidered Hercynella to represent the perfec- tion of a trend among the Antipleuridae towards the reclining lifestyle. Members of this family began life as equivalved semi- infaunal juveniles attached to the substrate by a byssus. As they grew, one of the valves (randomly left or right) became lower than the other as the oblique position demands. The lower valve developed a conical shape (ef, MH. petasoida) while the upper became more flat and lid-like (ef. H. killarensis); left and right valves are to be found equally among either form. Conclusions The fossils reported in this paper repre- sent the remains of species which were free-swimming (nautiloids) or floating marine organisms (graptolites), or which drifted out to open sea, either on their own (plants) or attached to floating debris (the rare molluses and brachiopods). On settling to the ocean floor, they were buried by deposition from turbidity currents, which at this location consisted of very fine sedi- ment, indicating some distance from land. Acknowlegements The author wishes to thank N.W. Schleiger and J.G, Douglas for their comments on an early draft of this paper; thanks are also due to an anonymous referee for suggesting clarification of some points. References Carey, 8. P. and Bolger, P. F. (1995), Conodonts of disparate Lower Devonian zones, Wilson Creek Shale, Tyers-Walhalla area, Victoria, Australia, Aleheringa 19, 73-86. Chapman, F. (1912). Lower Silurian fossils of eastern Victoria - Part I, Recards of the Geological Survey of Victoria 3, 224-233. Chapman, PF. (1917), On the Probable Environment of the Palaeozoic Genus Hercynella in Victoria, Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria 29, 123-126. Cookson, 1. C, (1935). On plant remains from the 185 Contributions Silurian of Victoria, Australia, that extend and con- nect floras hitherto described. Philoyophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London B225, 127-147, Cookson, 1. C, (1949), Yeringian (Lower Devonian) plant remains from Lilydale, Victoria, with notes on a collection from a new locality in the Siluro- Devonian sequence. Memoirs of the National Museum of Victoria 16, 117-131. Couper, J. (1963), The Geology of the Yea-Molesworth District, Unpublished diploma thesis, Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology. Couper, J. (1965). Late Silurian to Early Devonian stratigraphy of the Yea-Molesworth District, Victoria. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria 79, |-9. Edwards, J. E., Olshina, A. and Slater, K. R. (1997), Nagambie and part of Yea 1:100 000 map geological report, Geological Survey of Victoria Report 109, 1- 142, Forney, G. G., Boucot. A. J. and Rohr, D, M, (1981). Silurian and Lower Devonian zoogeography of selected molluscan genera. Jn “Communities of the Past’. pages 119-164, Eds J. Gray, A. J. Boucot and W.B.N. Berry, Garratt, M. J. (1983). Silurian and Devonian biostratig- raphy of the Melbourne Trough, Victoria. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria 95, 77-98. Garratt, M. J. and Rickards. R, B. (1984). Graptolite biostratigraphy of early land plants from Victoria, Australia. Proceedings of the Yorkshire Geological Society 44, 377-384, Gill, E. D. (1942). The thickness and age of the type Yeringian strata. Lilydale, Victoria. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria 54, 21-52, Gill, BE. D, (1950). A Study of the Palaeozoic Genus Hercvnella, with Description of Three Species from the Yeringian (Lower Devonian) of Victoria. Proceedings of the Royal Society af Victoria 59, 80-92. Harris, W. J. and Thomas, D. E. (1941). Notes on the Silurian Rocks of the Yea District. Mining and Geological Journal 2, 302-304, Jaeger, H (1966), Two late Monograptus species from Victoria, Australia and their significance for dating the Baragwanathia flora, Proceedings of the Royal Sactety of Victaria 79, 393-413. Jaeger, H. (1967). Preliminary stratigraphical results from graptolite studies in the Upper Silurian and Lower Devonian rocks of south eastern Australia. Journal of the Geological Society of Australia 14. 281-286, Kayser, E. (1878). Die Fauna der iltesten Devon- Ablagerungen des Harzes. Abhandlungen zur geola- gischen Specialkarte von Preussen und den Thiiringischen Staaten, 2 (4). Kriz, J. (1979). Devonian Bivalvia. Special Papers in Palaeontology 23, 255-257. Kriz, J, (1984), Autecology of Silurian bivalves. Special Papers in Palaeontology 32, 183-195. Lang, W- H. and Cookson, I. C. (1935). On a flora, including vascular land plants, associated with Monograptus, in rocks of Silurian age, from Victoria, Australia. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London B224, 421-449. Prantl, F. (1960), Die systematische Stellung der Gattung Hercynella Kayser (Pelecypoda), Paléontologische Zeitschrift 34, 150-153. Schleiger, N. W. (1964). Primary scalar bedding fea- tures of the Siluro-Devonian sediments of the Seymour district, Victoria, Journal of the Geological Saciety of Australia 11, 1-31. = Schweitzer. H. J. and Giesen, P, (1980). Uber Taeniophyion tnepinatum, Protolycopedites devoni- cus und Cladoxylon scopariwm aus dem Mitteldevon yon Wuppertal, Palaeontographica B173, 1-25. Stanley, S$. M. (1970). Shell form and life habits of the Bivalvia (Mollusca). Memoirs of the Geological Society of America 125, 1-296. Termier, H. and Termier, G. (1950). On the systematic position af the genus Hercynella Kayser. Proceedings of the Malacological Society of London 28, 156-162, Tims, J. D. (1980). The early land flora of Victoria. Unpublished doctoral thesis, University of Melbourne, VandenBerg, A. H, M. (1975). Definitions and deserip- tions of Middle Ordovician to Middle Devonian rock units of the Warburton district, East Central Victoria, Geological Survey of Victoria Report 1975/6. Walmsley, V. G. and Boucot. A. J, (1971). The Resserellinae - a new subfamily of Late Ordovician to Early Devonian dalmanellid brachiopods, Palaeontology 14, 487-531. Williams, G, E. (1964). The geology of the Kinglake District, Central Victoria. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria 77, 272-327. One Hundred Years Ago A report of the botanical results of the excursion to Cheltenham on Saturday, 19th August, was read by the leader, Mr. C. French, jun., who stated that a very inter- esting afternoon had been spent. Some twelve varieties of orchids had been noted in bloom, besides numerous other plants. On one of the orchids a parasitic fungus new to science had been found. Mr. J. Stickland stated that those members iner- ested in pond life had also experienced a profitable outing, as among other captures were the males of the rotifers Lacinularia pedunculata and L. elliptica, which are somewhat uncommon. 186 A paper was read by Mr. D. M’ Alpine, entitled “Description of a New Parasitic Agaric’ The author described a new species of fungus of the genus Hebeloma (Agaricacex), which had been found by Mr. C. French, jun., during the Cheltenham excursion, growing on the stem of an orchid, Pterostylis pedunculata, R. Br., it being most unusual for a Hebeloma to be parasitic. From The Victorian Naturalist XVI, October 5, 1899. The Victorian Naturalist Naturalist Notes Australia’s Flying Frogs? A number of ‘flying frogs’ are known from around the world e.g. Literia graminea from New Guinea (Tyler 1976), Hyla miliaria from Mexico (Pough e7 al. L998) and Rhacephorus pardalis trom Indonesia (Heusser 1974). A detailed analysis of gliding performance by two species of Rhacophorus frogs has been published (Emerson and Koehl 1990), but to my knowledge no-one has investigated the gliding (or parachuting) abilities of Australian frogs, If a frog is able to fall at an angle less than 45 degrees it is said to glide whereas if the angle is greater than 45 degrees it is said to parachute (Pough et al, 1998). While examining a live specimen of a large Peron’s Tree Frog Litoria peronti from north of Wagga Wagga, New South Wales, it took a flying leap off my desk and landed about a metre away on the cur- tain. There was nothing special about that except that it appeared to land a little high- er on the curtain than what | thought it should have done, given the take-off veloc- ity and initial trajectory. | decided to inves- tigate further and observed several jumps. On close examination of the frog | found an axillary webbing which stretched from approximately mid-body almost to the elbows. The photograph (Fig. 1) shows this webbing which is slightly less than fully extended here, Furthermore, the spreading of this webbing appeared to be under voluntary control, As the muscle involved in the stretching of the axillary webbing has an origin in the lateral body wall and an insertion in the distal humerus Fig. 1. Peron’s Tree Frog Litoria peronti, Wagga Wagga. N.S.W., showing axillary web- bing. Photo by T. Annable. Vol. 116 (5) 1999 area, it may represent a component of the pectoralis muscle, When subjected to a simple stretch reflex by drawing the fore- leg forwards (as might occur naturally when a frog was in flight or about to land) the webbing was extended briefly and then partially relaxed, At maximum extension the webbing appeared to pull the sides of the abdomen out a little too, so that the effective increase in planing area stretched almost from the groin to the elbows. The efficiency of gliding depends on a number of factors such as mass, velocity, drag, shape of planing surfaces, angle of attack as well as the dimensions and orien- tation of the planing area. The axillary webbing of L. perenii together with finger and toe webbing and the head, body and limb surface areas is significantly less than in the oriental flying frogs (e.g. Rhacophorus species) which are able to glide up to 1S m or more at an angle of about 18 degrees (Pough ef al, 1998), but certainly sufficient in my opinion to give significant lift. Whether the frog was glid ing or parachuting is not certain as the angle of fall appeared to be close to 45 degrees, Unlike Rhacophorus species the interdigital webbing is not extensive in Litoria species, Whether the frog can actually steer in flight with this webbing is another interest ing question, The fact that the webbing has voluntary muscle control suggests the pos- sibility, The excellent diurnal and noctur- nal vision of these frogs would certainly be a very useful adjunct to controlled gliding, Such an ability would be very useful in the high, swaying branches of trees in which the species lives. Examination of several other arboreal or semi-arboreal Literia species (Green Tree Frog 1. caerulea, fastern Dwarf Tree Frog LL. fallan, Bleating Tree Frog L. dentate and Jervis Bay Tree Frog L. jervisiensis) shows they all have extensible axillary webbing to varying degrees, but whether all Litorta species do is not known, Other questions needing investigation involve a compari- son of the terrestrial and arboreal species of the genus Litoria, bearing in mind that the genus as currently accepted is probably 187 Naturalist Notes polyphyletic (Cogger 1996); also whether or not other hylid frogs possess a similar structure. More detailed research on struc- ture and function with high-speed cine- matography and moving targets is needed to clarify this interesting phenomenon. Acknowledgement The helpful comments of an anonymous review- er are much appreciated. References Cogger, H.G. (1996). “Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia’. Fifth edition with amendments. (Reed: Sydney.) Emerson. 8.B. and Koehl, M.A.R. (1990), The interac tion of behavioral and morphological change in the evolution of a noyel locomotor type: “flying frogs’. Evolution 44, 1931-1946, Heusser, H.R. (1974). Higher Anurans. /n “Grzimek’s Animal Life Encyclopedia. Volume 5. Fishes Il, Amphibians’, chapter 6, pp. 397-454. (Van Nostrand Reinhold: New York.) Pough. F.H., Andrews, R.M,, Cadle, J-E., Crump. M. L., Savitsky, A.H. and Wells, K.D. (1998). ‘Herpetology’. (Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, USA.) Tyler, M. (1976), ‘Frogs’. (Collins: Sydney.) T.J. Annable Faculty of Science, Avondale College. Box 19, Cooranbong, N.S.W, 2265, Southern Right Whale in Port Phillip Bay Southern Right Whales Eubalaena aus- tralis are regular visitors to Victorian waters. They migrate from their summer feeding grounds in the sub-Antarctic to the coastal waters of southern Australia during late autumn/early winter and remain until mid-late spring. The coastal range is from about Perth, WA to Sydney, NSW. In the 1830s and 1840s, the annual visits to shallow bays in western Victoria and Wilsons Promontory were the basis for an intense shore-based whaling industry. Indeed, the first settlement in Victoria was at Portland Bay and focussed on this natur- al resource. The intensity of the hunting soon reduced the numbers, although Southern Right Whaling continued until the 1950s — but not in Victorian waters — and the species came very close to extinc- tion, It is now estimated that there are about 6-800 Southern Right Whales in Australian waters during the winter months. The largest concentration of these is at the Head of the Bight. in South Australia, where some 200 animals may congregate. Southern Right Whales are fully protected under State and Commonwealth legislation. In Victoria, the species 1s listed under the Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 1988 and manage- ment and conservation actions have been prepared and were recently published (Seebeck er al. 1999) in a formal Action Statement. 188 The principal Victorian site is centred on Logan’s Beach, just east of Warrnambool, a regular calving and nursery area. Numbers of whales present vary from year to year; in 1997 there were five adults and a calf, in 1998 three adult females, each with a calf. An observation platform has been built and many hundreds of people watch the whales each season. The Department of Natural Resources and Environment (NRE) closely monitors the whales and collects and collates sightings of the species from other places along the Victorian coast. In August 1998, a Southern Right Whale paid a visit to Port Phillip Bay. This was an unusual occurrence; since 1977 there have been four records of this species in the Bay — August 1977, July 1988, May 1989 and August 1992. All these involved single animals. There is no evidence to suggest that Southern Right Whales have been anything more than occasional visi- tors to the Bay, even at the beginning of European settlement. The animal was first observed close to the shore in the Mornington/Mt Martha area on Saturday | August, and reported to NRE Fisheries and Wildlife officers during the weekend. It was not reported on 3 August, but on the following day was seen cruising along the coast between Martha Point and Balcombe Point. It was only some 10-15 m offshore for much of the The Victorian Naturalist time, and excellent video footage and still photographs were obtained, The character- istic callosities on its head were clearly visible, as was a diamond-shaped white mark on its back. The pattern of callosities is unique and is used as the basis for iden- tification of individuals. A National Photographic Index is maintained for all Southern Right Whales, to help in popula- tion monitoring, Many of these pho- tographs are obtained using extensive aeri- al surveys for the species, or at congrega- tion sites such as Head of the Bight. All the whales which visit Logan’s Beach are photographed from the air by local NRE staff. I visited Mornington on 5 August. The whale had been seen off the Mornington Jetty earlier that morning, but had left and was reported to be heading up the Bay. Over the next couple of hours I followed the steady stream of whale watchers to var- ious vantage points along the coast and had good views of the animal. [t was swim- ming quite rapidly, about 3-400 m off the coast and I last saw it off Olivers Hill at Frankston. It was seen that evening in the shipping channel off Black Rock, On 6 August, NRE mounted a shore search and the whale was located in Sorrento Harbour in the afternoon, at which time its presence caused the Sorrento-Queenscliff ferry to delay berthing for a short while until the whale moved out of the way. At sunset, it was seen heading north, off Blairgowrie. Despite a 3-1/2 hour flight by NRE offi- cers on 7 August, during which the Bay was searched intensively, the whale was not seen again, and it is presumed that it safely left the Bay late on 6 or early on 7 August. Naturalist Notes Several points emerge from this event. Probably the most exciting was that so many people were able to get a good look at the animal, which was often very close to shore. Many people did as I did, and fol- lowed the whale from vantage point to vantage point along the coast. The regula- tions that are in place to protect whales from interference by boats or aircraft were obeyed, with only a couple of boats yen- turing too close and having to be warned, Media interest was high, with television, radio and newspaper stories over several days, Other than some minor traffic con- gestion, whale watchers were able to share this rare event in a great spirit of coopera- tion and wonder. NRE’s Port Phillip region were responsi- ble for managing issues of concern, but were only required to maintain their watching and recording role, and the many staff involved in this exercise have helped the community to experience a truly great natural event. Acknowledgements Rod Barber and Bob Hutton, from NRE’s Mornington office, were instrumental in record- ing the movements of the whale, obtaining video footage and managing the public, Bob Warneke provided comment on early records of Southern Right Whales in Victorian waters. The Atlas of Victorian Wildlife database provided records of the species in Port Phillip Bay, and the account in Mammals of Victoria (P.W. Menkhorst, ed., p. 195) and the Action Statement (Seebeck, J.. Fisher, J., Warneke, R. and Lowe, K. 1999, Action Statement No, 94, Southern Right Whale Eubalaena australis, NRE: Victoria) the relevant background material. John Seebeck Flora and Fauna Program, Department of Natural Resources and Environment, 4/250 Victoria Parade, Fast Melbourne, Vietoria 3002, The Southern Right Whale near Mornington, August 1998. Note the callosities on the whale’s head. The white patch on its back is just visible. Photo by Rod Barber, NRE, Mornington, Vol. 116 (5) 1999 189 Naturalist Notes The Weaver Autumn is my favourite time of year. The mild, drawn out, in the main sunny days, followed by cool or comfortably warm evenings. Often wind free or perhaps with just a gentle breeze. It is almost as if nature is having a rest in preparation for the heavy work it has to do in winter. Describing permaculture gardens around the world, a series of ABC TY programs during January gave me a renewed interest in my garden. To see what I would have to do to turn my backyard into a permaculture plot, I went for a walk. Frankly, what I saw was a wilderness, the grass under the apple tree was up into the branches. But there was also a great surprise. For the apple tree was struggling with an enormous load of apples. Really unbelievable. Without any human attention, nature, assisted by the bees, had just been doing its own thing. To start things, I planted some sweet corn, some silverbeet and a few parsley seedlings given to me by a friend. I also developed the habit of taking a walk around the garden before going to bed, The sweet corn was planted late in the season and when it has noticeably grown a bit I praise and encourage it. The warm weather may last just long enough to bring me some corn cobs. Then over to the com- post heap. Putting my hand on the top. I feel the reassuring warmth telling me that in this world of uncertainty Nature continues in its mysterious wisdom, no matter what. Thus it was that one evening, two months ago now, in the dark, | walked into a spider web. That is to say. my face walked into it while the spider must have seen me com- ing. For there was no trace of ‘The Weaver’. Coming back half an hour later to see how things stood, the Weaver was busily restoring its shop front, the work already half completed. Since then I call on the Weaver every night, a beautiful Garden Orb Spider. Seen from up close. its back is a light sandy brown. Superimposed in black is a motif that looks a bit like the Crown and Anchor of the merchant navy. The first segment of each front leg is a brilliant red. On the underside, the hind legs are set off in alternate short lengths of black and white bands. The outer 190 hind legs are a different length from the other legs, enabling one claw to be above the other as the Weaver descends to the ground. Head down, it rapidly abseils by its own spi- der line, | assume that those claws, one above the other clasping the thread, keep the strain off the spinnerets while they exude the spider silk during the descent. Belonging to the sheet web family of spi- ders, the web is some 30 by 50 centime- tres. It is started every night at dusk and is packed up again at early dawn. Strung out between the ground and over- head twigs, high enough from the ground for me to walk under, it is quite a large and elaborate affair. With guy lines going here and going there to secure it. When you consider that the Weaver’s legs easily span 3 to 5 centimetres from claw to claw, it is not surprising that the Weaver can move with the speed of lightning across its scaf- fold. This was brought home to me when an electronic flash from the camera dis- turbed the Weaver. It went suddenly into the packing up behaviour which you can observe every morning before dawn. The Weaver moves around the centre a bit, I think undoing key tie points in the web, for it then drops half the web in a flash, gath- ering the web into what seems an untidy bundle of thread. It then packs up the top half and takes the untidy bundle of fluff with it into the branches. During wind-still nights the Weaver sits in the centre of the web waiting, quite flat in the web. But when one night a breeze sprang up, the centre of the web was tossed 3 to 4 centimetres backwards and for- wards, at times quite forcefully. The Weaver now stood off the web, hanging on in a manner which reminded me of a sail surf-board rider in a storm. When it was warm and wind-still, the Weaver wove those large nets every night. Abseiling to the ground to set its guy lines, returning to the canopy of leaves by climb- ing, head up, in a hand over hand manner. However when a large high pressure area developed over the Bight and Adelaide, the anti-clockwise winds brought cold air from the Antarctic and some rain. I noticed that the Weaver then built a very much smaller The Victorian Naturalist web, sheltered to some extent by hanging amongst the canopy of leaves. I had hoped that the Weaver would find a mate and reproduce, to keep the unwanted bugs down. Well it seems my hopes will be fulfilled. We have passed the autumn equinox and relative calm has returned for a while. While I haven't seen the Weaver again, there are lots of tiny Weavers. With bodies the size of grains of barley, they make just like Mammie did. Playing at Book Review abseiling, hanging around in very small bits of web hung up between the leaves. And like Mammie, you don’t see hide nor hair of them during the day. A new cycle has started, a new generation is taking over. That is how life is. Gert van Wessem 84 Adele Avenue, Ferntree Gully, Victoria 3156. Defending the Little Desert: the Rise of Ecological Consciousness in Australia by Libby Robin Publisher: Melbourne University Press, 1998. 203 pp., paperback, RRP $24.95. The controversy that developed around the Victorian government proposals to sub- divide and clear the Little Desert for agri- culture in the late 1960s has entered folk- lore as a turning point in conservation in Australia. The anti-development campaign is important in that it prevented the destruc- tion of an area of extraordinary natural rich- es. However, the campaign's role in deyel- oping the ecological consciousness of the 1970s, and beyond, is seen by many ats even more important. Out of this controversy grew the ‘balanced’ approach to land devel- opment and reservation that characterised the subsequent 15 years or so — particularly through the Land Conservation Council of Victoria; but also in national issues such as the Lower Gordon in Tasmania, Fraser Island in Queensland and Kakadu in the Northern Territory. The “Little Desert Controversy’ is important in itself. It is also important because of the accretion of histor- ical perceptions and retrospective assess- ments of those exciting times. This new account grew out of a postgrad- uate project, but the book's style is certain- ly not that of a dry academic thesis. It is decidedly readable. The book is divided into chapters based on the Little Desert issue itself and the various protagonists, Vol. 116 (5) 1999 and attempts to place the people and events in the wider social context. The book opens by presenting a simple history of the development of the region and the dispute, wisely avoiding an account of the natural history of the area. After all, many other references have covered these values and, for many of us, they are best ‘discoy- ered’ directly and personally. Subsequent chapters deal with the campaign from the perspectives of the Victorian National Parks Association, ‘ecologists’, the locals in the Wimmera and the bureaucrats from Melbourne. The political perspective is not presented in depth, but I suspect that this is no intentional oversight by the author. Verbatim records of cabinet meetings and other political discussions are still not avail- able. Politicians are renowned for respond- ing to the questions they would like to have been asked, rather than the questions they were asked. The book is obviously the result of meticulous research, all of which is thor- oughly referenced. Robin has had access to many sources, At times this has led to notably different styles in the various chapters. The points of view of the main public conservationists are engagingly and personally presented. By contrast, the 191 chapter dealing with the contributions from public servants is clearly based on volumi- nous records from public service archives and less so on personal interviews. Nevertheless, Robin astutely realised that such contributions, although less visible, were no less important, and perceptively presents this critical input. The aboriginal material is least satisfactorily treated, either from a current or an historical con- text. However, I suspect that this is a ‘fact of life’ for historians dealing with a non- literate culture and a dispersed and sub- stantially dispossessed remnant. We are offered some insights into the way the central characters approached their various roles in the unfolding drama. Personal aggrandisement seems to have driven no-one, except perhaps the politi- cians. Ego played only a small part and grandstanding was used to further a public cause, rather than personal profiles. Unlike more recent controversies, the ‘conflict’ was relatively respectful — at least in pub- lic. In some respects, times have changed. In other respects, very little has changed, as those with a longer perspective than the next election were painted as naive and out of touch with ‘modern economic realities’. After the specifics of the Little Desert Controversy have been presented and tied together as a coherent story, Robin attempts (a little less successfully) to put the implications of this history and its per- ceptions into a wider and current social context. There is a tendency to categorise and classify people and points of view, occasionally losing sight of the distinctive- ness of individuals and their particular per- sonalities. But as with all good historical accounts, by the final few sentences, read- ers will find themselves drawing further lessons and conclusions pertinent to cur- rent issues, beyond the Little Desert itself. My most significant reservation about the book is its approach of seeing ‘history’ as an unfolding of events with a certain inevitability about them, given a particular social context. As Robert Ingpen has argued elsewhere (1980, Turning Points in the Making of Australia, Rigby: Melbourne), history is a weaving together of chance and contrivance, of planning and happenstance. As with other turning points, the ‘Little Desert Controversy’ is also a mixture of the inevitable with the purely fortuitous. [diosyncrasies did matter and were important in the unfolding of events. Robin seems to have emphasised the social streaming of events and down- played the input of chance. Nevertheless, this reservation may be saying as much about the prejudices of this reviewer as it says about the book itself. The book is very readable. It is an inter- esting and informative history of the devel- opment of environmental consciousness in Australia. It is an insight into people and social attitudes, not too far removed in time. It resonates with contemporary issues, such as alienation of the public estate for private profit and publicly-sub- sidised native forest destruction for wood chip export. Perhaps it is true that ‘the only lesson of history is that we do not learn anything from history’. | hope not... David Cheal Parks and Wildlife Commission, P.O. Box 496, Palmerston, N.T, 0831. The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc. Reg No A0033611X Established 1880 In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria OBJECTIVES: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian flora and fauna. Membership is open to any person interested in natural history and includes beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Registered Office: FNCY, | Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. Postal Address: FNCV, Locked Bag 3. PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia, Phone/Fax (03) 9877 9860; International Phone/Fax 61 3 9877 9860, The Victorian Naturalist Volume 116 (6) December 1999 Sal ‘hs F.N.C Nz. Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria since 1884 From the Editor The Victorian Naturalist would not be successful without the enormous amount of time and effort voluntarily given by a large number of people who work behind the scenes. One of the most important editorial tasks is to have papers refereed. The Editors would like to say thank you to those people who refereed manuscripts during 1999: Nigel Ainsworth Dennis Black Sue Briggs David Britton Jane Calder Malcolm Calder Graeme Coulson David Crosby lan Davidson John Duggin Steven Gallagher Mary Gibson Louise Gilfedder Kevin Hill Roger Kirkwood Murray Littlejohn Richary Loyn Tan Lunt Mali Malipatil Brian Malone Tan Mansergh Tom May Peter Menkhorst Martin Predavec Gerry Quin John Seebeck Melody Serena Todd Soderquist Heinar Streiman Barry Traill Robert Wallis Simon Ward Mark Warne Dick Williams Jenny Wilson The Victorian Naturalist endeavours to publish articles which are written for a wide and varied audience. We have a team of dedicated proof-readers who help with the readability and expression of our articles. Thanks to: Julie Bartlett Ken Bell ‘Tania Bennell Phil Bock Arnis Dzedins lan Endersby Jennie Epstein Alistair Evans Arthur Farnworth Sharon Ford Mary Gibson Ken Green Pat Grey Murray Haby Clarrie Handreck Virgil Hubregtse Genevieve Jones lan Mansergh Tom May Michael McBain Geoffrey Paterson John Seebeck Robert Wallis Gretna Weste Jenny Wilson Sincere thanks to our book reviewers for 1998 who provided interesting and insightful comments on a wide range of books and other materials. Rod Jones Barbara Sharp lan Thompson David Britton David Cheal Peter Dann lan Endersby Cecily Falkingham Ron Fletcher Sharon Ford Linden Gillbank As always we particularly thank our authors who provide us with excellent material for publication. Our editorial advisory team continue to provide valuable advice and assistance: lan Endersby, lan Mansergh, Tom May and John Seebeck. On the production side, a thank you to: the computer team - Alistair Evans, Anne Morton, Michael McBain who maintains the internet site (http://calcite.apana.org.au/fnev/) Ken Bell who prepares the annual index: Felicity Garde for printing the labels; and Printers, Brown Prior Anderson Pty Ltd, especially Steve Kitto. 194 The Victorian Naturalist The Victorian Naturalist Volume 116 (6) 1999 December Editor: Merilyn Grey Assistant Editor: Alistair Evans Research Reports Is the Home Range of the Heath Mouse Pseudomys shortridgei an Anomaly in the Pseudomys Genus? by Edward P. Meulman and Nicholas 1. KIOMP vsscscscssecscsvseseseees 196 Germination and Sowing Depth of Wallaby Grass Austrodanthonia eriantha: Techniques to Maximise Restotation Batons By GO! Dyer oaccccsktcnes nec dzeeestsacescs.roresesy 202 Barbed Wire Fencing as a Hazard for Wildlife DY ROGHEPWOIPUE REE APT tastiest tet tse 210 Contributions Recent Foraminifera and Ostracoda from Erith Island, Bass Strait, by KN: Bell and. JV. NeUD .tccc.ccccsceccisescesevsscteesereiseass 218 Naturalist Notes Bizarre Encounters with Wildlife: Observations from Around Wattle Glen, by Maria Belvedere vescscecccccccecscscsssecsesseees 228 Book Reviews Australian Plants for the Garden: An Australia’s Best Garde Guides byG wen BLliOrn Lek. Min Si etal 209 Plant Collecting for the Amateur, by T. Christopher Brayshaw, FEVIEWCESNATOMED-E OFA eae es ai init anal. silaaetnei geese 229 Guidelines for Authors at the end of this issue. ISSN 0042-5184 Cover: The Heath Mouse Pseudomys shortridgei, photographed at Pomonal in the Grampians by John Seebeck. See Research Report on p. 196, Find us on the WEB: http://calcite.apana.org.au/fnev/ email: fncev@vicnet.net.au Research Reports Is the Home Range of the Heath Mouse Pseudomys shortridgei an Anomaly in the Pseudomys Genus? Edward P. Meulman' and Nicholas I. Klomp!” Abstract The home ranges of Heath Mice in three different areas of the Grampians National Park, Victoria, were determined by radio-tracking and trapping. Eight individuals were radio-tracked over 11 days in February-March 1996, revealing a mean home range, using the Minimum Convex Polygon method, of 5.65 ha (se = 1.72 ha). This was significantly larger than the mean home range revealed by trapping on three grids of 91-100 folding aluminium traps during 1995-1997 (0.74 + 0.47 ha, 7 = 57 ammals). There were no significant differences between the mean home ranges of males and females, nor among the three different areas, despite differences in floristics and time since fire. The home ranges recorded in this study are significantly larger than those predicted from allometric equations based on the size of the Heath Mouse (70 g) of 0.07-0.18 ha. Although this anomaly has been recorded in other Pseudomys species, it is yet to be explained adequately. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (6), 1999, 196-201.) Introduction The area used by an animal for its home range is likely to be the minimum neces- sary lo provide the key resources required, with the actual shape of the home range being determined by the nature and distrib- ution of these resources. Among adult mammals, a primary determinant of home range size is access to food (Hansson 1979: Hixon 1980). Therefore, it is not sur- prising to find that among different species of mammals there is a clear relationship between home range size and body weight (McNab 1963: Turner et al. 1969; Harestad and Bunnell 1979), and between home range and metabolic rate (Mace ef al. 1983; McNab 1988). Given such rela- tionships, one might predict that popula- tions of the same species, living in habitats of differing productivity, would occupy ranges of correspondingly different sizes. Studies of the home ranges of many ani- mals are inherently difficult, particularly for the more cryptic and nocturnal small mammals. Before the development of miniature radio-tracking packages, most home range studies of small mammals were based on live-trapping and mark- recapture techniques (e.g. Broughton and Dickman 1991; Stoddart and Challis 1991). The data obtained from trapping grids can be used to provide an estimate of the home ranges of animals within the pop- ulation if the trapping areas are greater than the home ranges of the animals, and if The Johnstone Centre, Charles Sturt University, PO Box 789, Albury. NSW 2640. “to whom correspondence should be addressed, 196 there are an adequate number of captures of individuals (Stoddart and Challis 1991). Eight to ten repeat captures are considered the minimum required to estimate home range size with reasonable accuracy (Hawes 1977, Montgomery 1979, Desy er al, 1989). Still, there are often significant differ- ences between the sizes of trap-revealed home ranges and estimates obtained using radio-tracking (Jones and Sherman 1983: Attuquayetio et al. 1986; Desy et al, 1989). Bubela et al. (1991) reported that trapping underestimated the home range of the Broad-toothed Rat Mastacomys fuscus by as much as 40-60%. Further, resources are not evenly distributed over the home range of an animal; rather, certain areas will be rich in resources while other areas are poor. Certain “core areas’ are likely to be used more frequently than other areas and would probably contain the nest site and dependable resources (Desy et al. 1989). Despite these limitations, studies of home range atford a greater understanding of various aspects of a species’ biology, such as food requirements, population density, territoriality and competition. Home range size might also reflect mating systems (Gaulin and Fitzgerald 1988). Several studies have recorded disproportionately large home ranges of some species of Pseudomys, perhaps reflecting an anomaly in this genus (e.g. Brandle and Moseby 1999). This paper investigates the home range size of the Heath Mouse Pseudoniys The Victorian Naturalist shortridgei, as revealed by live-trapping and radio-tracking and considers whether the sizes recorded are an artefact of the methods used to determine home range, an anomaly of this group of mammals and/or a reflection of the biology of the Pseudomrys species. Methods Study area The Grampians National Park is located in central western Victoria approximately 270 km northwest of Melbourne. Three areas of heathland in the park (locations A, B and C; Fig. 1) were surveyed every 1-2 months over three years (1993-1996). One hundred individual trap sites in a 10 x 10 grid formation (sites 20 m apart) were established at locations A and B, while location C comprised 91 individual trap sites in a 13 x 7 grid configuration. Locations A and B had last been burnt in 1987, giving a seral stage of 7-8 years, while location C was last burnt in 1980 (15 years earlier). Trapping procedures and data collection A single folding aluminum Elliott trap was placed at each trap site and baited with a mixture of peanut butter, rolled oats and honey. Each trap was covered with a plas- tic bag and a liberal amount of clean cotton wool was placed in each trap ta provide insulation for captured animals. During hot weather, traps were closed during the day and reset in the evening. Captured Heath Mice were weighed, examined for sex and reproductive condition, given an individual mark (ear-clipping) and released at the point of capture. Only those animals that were caught ten or more times were used in the analysis of trap-revealed home range. For paired com- parisons of home ranges of individuals in breeding and non-breeding seasons (October-February and March-September respectively), only those animals that had been caught five or more times in each season were used in the analyses. Radio-tracking procedures and data col- lection Five male and three female Heath Mice were each radio-tracked for 10-11 days during February-March 1996 at Locations A and B. Bach Heath Mouse was fitted Vol. 116 (6) 1999 Research Reports with a small radio transmitter attached around the neck (Fig. 2) just behind the mandible and secured using surgical tubing (Meulman and Klomp 1997), Each radio- collar weighed approximately 3.5 g, repre- senting 5-6% of the body weight of the animals. After attachment of the collar, animals were placed in a holding cage (Meulman and Klomp 1996) for five min- utes of observation prior to release. Radio- tracking of Heath Mice was conducted using two fixed towers and a null-peak system (after O’Connor et al. 1987). The direction of each transmitted signal was recorded simultaneously by each operator, but independently from each tower (after Swihart and Slade 1985), yielding a mint- mum of 14 and a maximum of 42 recorded locations for each individual Heath Mouse. The operators at each tower synchronized their hourly readings during the tracking period, although successive fixes of a given animal (i.e. successful triangulation) were often several hours apart. Previous studies have shown this species to be largely nocturnal, although data were col- lected over 24-hour periods on a number of occasions. The accuracy of bearings taken from the two fixed towers and the accuracy of deter- mined signal directions were validated using radio transmitters removed from Moston | s Mebane y Fig. 1. The Grampians National Park showing trapping and radio-tracking locations (A, B and C) used in this study. 197 Research Reports Fig. 2. Heath Mouse fitted with a small radio transmitter. The surgical tubing used to secure the transmitter is clearly visible. Photo by Reeto Zollinger. individual Heath Mice and a surveyors theodolite (see Meulman and Klomp 1997). Data analysis Bearings taken from the two towers were converted to local co-ordinates using Locate H, a computer program, and an error ellipse was described around each group of co-ordinates for each Heath Mouse, allowing rejection of any reading having too large an error. Co-ordinates obtained from radio-tracking and trapping were analyzed using another computer pro- gram, Ca/home, to estimate home range using the minimum convex polygon method (MCP). The MCP method deter- mines home range from the convex poly- gon formed by joining the most peripheral points (fixes) with straight lines (Mohr 1947, Trevor-Deutsch and Hackett 1980), Core areas were defined as the area encap- sulating 75% of all captures, and were cal- culated using the harmonic mean (75% isopleth) method. The 75% isopleth was chosen as the core area following Dixon and Chapman (1980), because estimates of home range expand rapidly when the out- lying 25% of points are included, All data were checked for normality of distribution (Kolmogrov-Smirnoy, all Ps > 0.2) and homogeneity of variances (Bartlett’s test, all Ps > 0.7) prior to any parametric-tests being used to test the significance of any differences recorded among groups. 198 Results Home range revealed by trapping The mean size of trap-reyealed home range of Heath Mice was 0.74 + s.d. 0.47 ha (a= 57). A two-way ANOVA revealed no significant differences between the home range sizes of male and female Heath Mice (F, 4 = 0.361. P = 0.550), or among the home range sizes of Heath Mice occupying different locations (F; 4, = 0.969, P = 0.415), and no significant two- way interaction was found between loca- tion and sex (F, 4, = 0.062, P = 0.980). A two-way ANOVA was used to examine differences between mean home range sizes observed in breeding and non-breeding sea- sons and different sexes, No significant dif- ference was found between sexes (F, 5. = 0.272, P = 0.607), nor between seasons (F, » = 0,011, P = 0.918), and no significant two-way interaction was found between sex and season (F, 5, = 0.026, P = 0,958). The mean trap-revealed core areas of male Heath Mice (0.31 + s.d. 0.22 ha, n = 31) and those of female Heath Mice (0.27 +s.d. 0.21 ha, n = 26) were not significant- ly different (Student's ¢ = 0.591, d.f. = 55. P = 0,556), While MCPs overlapped for some individuals, the core areas of female Heath Mice did not overlap, but rather adjoined along common boundaries. The shape of core areas varied considerably among individual females, depending on the number of intensively used sites within the home range. The core areas of five males overlapped almost completely (90- 100%) with female core areas, However, not all male core areas were associated with individual females, but overlapped the core areas of both females and other males. Home range revealed by radio-tracking Table 1 presents the home range sizes of the eight Heath Mice radio-tracked in this study. The mean home range size (MCP) determined from radio-tracking (5.65 + s.d. 4.85 ha) was significantly larger than trap-revealed home range size (Student’s t = 2,897, df. = 66, P = 0.005). The mean home range size of radio-tracked male Heath Mice (7.48 + s.d. 5.18 ha) and that of female Heath Mice (2.60 + s.d. 2.52 ha) did not differ significantly (Student’s ¢ = 1.492, df. =6, P = 0.186). The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports Table 1. Home ranges and core areas (in ha) of the adult Heath Mice Pseudomys shortridgei radio- tracked in this study. Areas were estimated using the harmonic mean method (Dixon and Chapman 1980), and minimum convex polygon (MCP) (Mohr 1947). n = number of fixes per animal. Sex Weight (g) n Core area size Home range size Home range size (harmonic mean) (MCP) P 62 19 0.005 0.26 0,37 F 68 37 0.590 3.99 5.34 F 63 20 0.290 5.90 2,09 M 64 32 0.327 4.01 5.67 M 60 41 0,328 3.09 4.95 M 65 35 0.433 8.32 11.60 M 68 42 0,827 2.84 13.94 M 70 14 0.018 0.68 124 Mean 65.0 30.0 0.35 3.64 5.65 se 1.21 0.10 0.93 1.72 Discussion sion. This result is also consistent with The mean weight-loss incurred by ani- mals wearing radio-collars was 5.0 g (+ 3.2 g), approximately 7% of body weight. No animals were injured as a result of the radio-collar attachment. The minimum convex polygon method was used for home range analyses in this study because it is the only technique that is strictly com- parable between studies, and is more robust than other techniques when the number of locations is low (Harris ef al. 1990). Many authors have reported sex- related differences in home ranges of rodents, with larger home ranges occupied by males, particularly during the breeding period (Mineau and Madison 1977; Wolton 1985; Attuquayefio er a/. 1986). Gaulin and Fitzgerald (1988) suggested that home range size might be a predictor of mating systems. In rodent populations characterised by a promiscuous mating system, males haye larger home ranges than females because of the intense male to male competition for mates. In contrast, monogamous rodent species would have home range areas that are similar for both sexes (Swihart and Slade 1989), with breeding pairs normally sharing a home range that they defend against same-sexed conspecifics (Kleiman 1977). Home ranges of Heath Mice examined in this study were found to be similar for both sexes. Although the sample size of radio-tracked animals is too small to be confident of this result, the total number of trapped animals from which trap-revealed home range sizes were calculated (1 = 57) is comparatively large, and strongly supports this conclu- Vol. 116 (6) 1999 Happold’s (1976) suggestion that Heath Mice are largely monogamous, so would be expected to have similar home ranges. Variations in the size of home ranges of mammals have been associated with social factors, such as access to females (Bubela and Happold 1993), metabolic require- ments (Mace ef al, 1983) and dispersion of resources (Montgomery et al. 1991). Comparative studies of mammals have repeatedly indicated that home range size correlates positively to body size (McNab 1963; Harestad and Bunnell 1979; Lindstedt et al, 1986; Reiss 1988; Swihart et al, 1988; du Toit 1990; Gompper and Gittleman 1992), A number of allometric equations have been developed to predict the size of an animal's home range based on its body mass, These are all modifica- tions on McNab’s (1963) original hypothe- ses, and all depend on the basic assump- tion that home range size varies as a func- tion of metabolic requirements. Simply stated, larger mammals have larger home ranges because they need more energy resources. While density of food is consid- ered an important factor, Harestad and Bunnell (1979) found that body-weight accounted for 75-90% of the variation in mammalian home ranges. Using a mean body weight of 70 g for Heath Mice (Cockburn 1979), the allometric model of Harestad and Bunnell (1979) relating home range to body mass of herbivorous mam- mals (H = 2.71M"", where H is the home range in hectares and M is body mass in kg) predicts a home range of 0.180 ha for Heath Mice. The predicted home range 199 Research Reports based on the equation HW = 4.90M'™ as pro- posed by Swihart e¢ a/. (1988) calculates a home range area of 0.07 ha. These predicted home ranges are sigmifi- cantly smaller than the mean home range (MCP) of Heath Mice calculated from trapping data (0.74 ha) and from radio- tracking data (5.65 ha), The core home ranges of 0.27 ha for females and 0.31 ha for males determined in this study are stil 1.5 times larger than those predicted by either equation. These calculations of core home range are based on trapping data, which underestimate actual home range area (Bubela and Happold 1993). Hence it is clear that the home range of the Heath Mouse does not fit either of the proposed allometric equations relating home range to body mass. Other Pseudomys species While there is only limited published information available on the home range of the Pseudonrys species, the Heath Mouse appears not to be alone within the genus in having a disproportionately large home range. Anstee ef al. (1997) reported that radio-tracking revealed a home range of up to 14.4 ha for the Pebble-mound Mouse Pseudomys chapmani (12-15 g), with core areas also being very large. Radio-tracking studies of the Shark Bay Mouse Pseudomys fieldi have revealed that this species also has a large home range of between 3-4 ha (Speldwinde pers. comum.). The New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae (20-25 g¢) was found to have a home range (MCP) of 0.84 ha for males and 0.51 ha for females (Lock 1995). Again, this is much larger than would be predicted from body size alone, despite this latter study using trapping to determine home range — a technique that usually underestimates the home range of small mammals (Bubela e¢ al. 1991). However, not all Pseudomys species have disproportionately large home ranges. Stoddart and Challis (1991) estimated the mean home range of the Long-tailed Mouse Pseudomys higginsi as 0.20-0,26 ha, using the inclusive boundary strip method, This method estimates home range in a similar way to the MCP method, but includes the addition of a peripheral boundary strip around the polygon, the 200 width of which is equivalent to half the inter-trap distance (Trevor-Deutsch and Hackett 1980), Although the Long-tailed Mouse is of similar size and weight to the Heath Mouse, its estimated home range 1s closer to that predicted by the standard allometric equations. Given the different methods used, further investigation of the home range of the Long-tailed Mouse would be useful. One explanation of the apparent variation in home range sizes used by different species of Pseudomys may be that the recorded differences are not species specif- ic, but rather simply reflect habitat quality in a given area. For example, the home range of the Plains Rat Pseudomys aus- tralis appears to vary with habitat quality (Brandle and Moseby 1999), In areas con- taining high quality habitat, females occu- pied home range areas of around one hectare, while those of males were around 4-5 ha (Brandle pers commt.). In poor qual- ity habitat, female home range areas were seen lo increase to & ha. As this species weighs between 40-45 g, its home range is considerably larger than would be predict- ed by any of the allometric equations. However, this study found no differences in size of home ranges of Heath Mice in dif- ferent areas, despite variation in time since last fire and floristics between the study sites, which presumably reflected variation in habitat quality, Clearly, more detailed studies of the home range of Pseudomys species are required to determine the rea- sons for their apparently large home ranges, and how biotic and abiotic factors may influence and reflect home range. Acknowledgements We are grateful to G. Pitt and R. Zollinger for their assistance in the field, and to R. Brandle and R, Speldwinde for providing valuable advice during this study. R. Korn produced Figure 1, The Department of Natural Resources and Environment, Parks Victoria and the Animal Care and Ethics Committee (Charles Sturt University) provided the licences and approvals required to complete this work. E. Meulman was supported by an Australian Postgraduate Award, References Anstee, S.D., Roberts, J.D. and O'Shea, I.E. (1997). Social structure and patterns of movement of the Western Pebble-Mound Mouse, Pseudomys chap- mant, al Marandoo, Western Australia. Wildlife Research 24, 295-305, The Victorian Naturalist Attuquayefio, D.K., Gorman, M.L. and Wolton, RJ. (1986). Home range sizes in the Wood Mouse, Apodemus sylvaticus: habitat, sex and seasonal dif- ferences. Journal of Zoology 210, 45-53, Brandle, R. and Moseby, K,E. (1999), Comparative ecology of two populations of Pseudomys australis in northern South Australia. Wildlife Research 26. 541-564. Broughton, §.K. and Dickman, C.R. (1991). The effect of supplementary food on home range of the Southern Brown Bandicoot, /seodon obesulus, Australian Journal of Ecology 16, 71-78. Bubela, T.M. and Happold, D.C_D. (1993), The social Organization and mating system of an Australian sub- alpine rodent, the Broad-toothed Rat Mastacomys fuseus. Wildlife Research 20, 405-417, Bubela, T.M., Happold, D.C.D. and Broome, LS. (1991). Home range and activity of the Broad- toothed Rat, Mastacomys fuseus, in subalpine heath- land. Wildlife Research 18, 39-48 Cockburn, A. (1979). The ecology of Psendomys Species in South-Eastern Australia. PhD Thesis. Monash University, Melbourne, Desy. E.A., Batzli, G.O. and Jike, L. (1989), Comparison of vole movements assessed by live Irapping and radio-tracking. Journal of Mammualogy 70, 652-656, Dixon, K.R. and Chapman, J.A. (1980), Harmonic mean measure of animal activity areas. Ecology 61, 1040-1044, du Toit, J.T. (1990), Home range - body mass relations: a field study on African browsing ruminants. Oecologia 85, 301-303. Gaulin, SJ.C. and Fitzgerald, R.W. (1988). Home range sive as a predictor of mating systems in Microtus. Journal of Mammalogy 69, 311-319, Gompper, M.E. and Gittleman, J.L. (1991). Home range Sealing: intraspecihe and comparative trends. Oevelovia 8, 343-348. Hansson, L. (1979). Food as a limiting factor for small rodent numbers, Oecologia 37, 297-314. Happold. M. (1976). Social behayiour of the Conilurine rodents (Muridue) of Australia. Zoologica Tierpsychology 40, 113-182. Harestad, A.S. and Bunnell, F.L. (1979), Home range and body weight: a re-evaluation. Ecology 60, 389-402. Harris, 8., Cresswell, W.J,, Forde. P.G.. Trewhella, W.J., Wollard, T. and Wray, S. (1990). Home-range analysis using radio-tracking data: a review of prob- lems and techniques particularly as applied to the study of mammals, Maniunal Review 20, 97-123. Hawes, M.L. (1977). Home range, territoriality and ecological separation in sympatric shrews, Sorex vagrany and Sorex obscurus. Journal of Manmalogy 58, 354-367 Hixon. M.A, (1980). Food production and competitor density as determinants of feeding territory size. American Naturalist 115, 510-530, Jones, E.N_ and Sherman, LJ, (1983). A comparison of Meadow Vole home ranges derived from grid trap- ping and radio-telemetry, Journal of Wildlife Management 47, 555-561, Kleiman, D. (1977). Monogamy in mammals. Quarterly Review of Bialogy 52, 39-69, Lock, M_ (1995). The distribution and abundance of the New Holland Mouse Psendemys novaehollandiae in the Forest Road Réserve, Anglesea. B-Se (Hons) Thesis, Deakin University, Geelong, Vol. 116 (6) 1999 Research Reports Lindstedl, S.L., Miller, BJ. and Buskirk, S.W. (1986), Home range, time, and body size in mammals, Ecology 67, 413-418. Mace, G.M., Harvey, P.A. and Clutton-Brock, T.H, (1983). Vertebrate home-range size and energetic requirements. Jn “The Ecology of Animal Movement’. Eds LR. Swingland and P.J. (Clarendon Press: Oxford.) Meulman, E.P. and Klomp, N.L. (1996). A new hold- ing-cage for small mammals. Wildlife Research 23, 245-248. Meulman, E.P. and Klomp, N.I. (1997). Some princi- ples and limitations of radio-tracking small mam- mals. Report no.83. The Johnstone Centre, Charles Sturt University. MeNab, B.K. (1963), Bioenergetics and the determina- tion of home range size. American Naturalist 97, 133-140, McNab, B,K. (1988). Complications inherent in sealing the basal rate of metabolism in mammals. Quarterly Review af Biology 63, 25-54, Mineau, P. and Madison, D. (1977). Radio-tracking of Peromyscus leucopus. Canadian Journal of Zoology 55, 465-468. Mohr, C.O, (1947). Table of equivalent populations of North American mammals. American Midland Naturalist 37, 223-249. Montgomery, W.L. (1979). Trap-revealed home range in sympatric populations of Apodenms sylvaticus and Apodemus flavicollis. Journal of Zoology 189, 535-540, Montgomery, W.I., Wilson, W.L., Hamilton, R, and McCartney, P.(1991), Dispersion in the Wood Mouse, Apodemus sylvaticus: variable resources. in time and space, Journal of Animal Ecology 60, 179-192. O'Connor, PJ., Pyke, G.H. and Spencer, H. (1987). Radio-tracking honeyeater movements. Emu 87 249-252. Reiss, M, (1988). Scaling of home range size: body size, metabolic needs and ecology. Trends in Ecology and Evolution 3, 85-86. Stoddart, D,.M, and Challis, G. (1991), *The habitat and field biology of the Long-Tailed Mouse’, Research report no 6, Tasmanian Forest Research Council, Hobart. Swihart, R.K, and Slade, N.A, (1985). Testing for inde- pendence of observations in animal movements. Ecology 66, 1176-1184. Swihart, R.K. and Slade, N.A. (1989), Differences in home range size between sexes of Microms ochro- vaster, Journal of Mammalogy 70, 816-820. Swihart, R.K,, Slade, N.A. and Bergstrom, B.J. (1988). Relating body size to the rate of home range use in mammals. Eculogy 69, 393-399, Trevor-Deutsch, B. and Hackett, D.F. (1980), An eval- uation of several grid trapping methods by compari- son with radio-telemetry ina home range study of the Eastern Chipmunk (Tamias striaqus), In “A Handbook on Biotelemetry and Radio-Tracking’. Eds C.J, Amlaner and D.W. Macdonald, (Pergamon Press: Oxford.) Turner, F.B,, Jennrich, R.1, and Weintraub, J.D. (1969). Home ranges and body size of lizards, Ecology 50, 1076-1081, Wolton, R.J. (1985), The ranging and nesting behavior of Wood Mice, Apodemuy sylvaticus, as revealed by radio-tracking, Journal of Zoology 206, 203-224. 201 Research Reports Germination and Sowing Depth of Wallaby Grass Austrodanthonia eriantha: Techniques to Maximise Restoration Efforts C. O’Dwyer' Abstract Knowing the germination requirements of a particular population of plants is essential in the process of habitat restoration, so that germination and establishment in the field is maximised. This study investigated the temperature required for germination, the sowing depth for maximum emergence and the effects of treatments in overcoming dormancy in a population of Wallaby Grass Ausfrodanthonia eriantha from Mount Piper, Broadford, Victoria, the habitat of the endangered Golden Sun Moth Synemon plana, The temperature required for maximum germination was 15°C. Removing the palea and lemma trom freshly-harvested seeds or storing sceds for two years at room temperature resulted in a twenty-fold increase in germination. Treatment with sulphuric acid (chemical scarification) increased germination from 4% to 56%, whilst soaking in potassium nitrate and stratification for 50 days or LOO days had no significant effect on germination. Burial at a depth of 20 mm or greater had a pronounced inhibitory effect on the emergence of seeds of A, eriantha, Therefore these results suggest that establishing A. eriantha at Mount Piper would best be achieved by sowing caryopsides in autumn when air temperatures average 15°C and water is not limiting. Caryopsides should be collected in December, stored for approximately 4 to 5 months and sown directly on the surface of the soil. Further field trials are required to test these suggestions. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (6), 1999, 202-209.) Introduction Plants in the genus Austrodanthonia (family Poaceae), previously Danthonia (Linder 1997), are commonly known as Wallaby Grasses and are a common fea- ture of open forests, woodlands and grass- lands, Native grasslands are one of the most endangered vegetation types in Australia (Groves 1979; McDougall and Kirkpatrick 1994) and those that are domi- nated by Austrodanthonia spp. are becom- ing increasingly rare. These particular grassland types provide habitat for the endangered Golden Sun Moth Synemon plana (Figs 1 and 2). Once widespread throughout southeastern Australia, the Golden Sun Moth ts now known from only four sites in Victoria, 12 sites in the Australian Capital Territory and 15 sites in New South Wales (Clarke and O° Dwyer 1997), The population of Golden Sun Moths found at Mount Piper, 80 km north of Melbourne, inhabits a native grassland dominated by Wallaby Grass A. eriantha Linder, H.P. (Lindl. in T. Mitch.) (O"Dwyer and Attiwill 1999). Knowing the germination requirements of a particular plant population is essential in the process of habitat restoration, so that ' Chery! O'Dwyer, Biologist, Natural Ecosystems, Zoological Parks and Gardens Board, PO Box 74, Parkville, Vietorna 3052. 202 germination and establishment in the field is maximised. Previous work on the mech- anisms of seed germination and the effects of environmental influences on germina- tion to increase crop production has con- centrated on economically important species for agriculture, forestry and horti- culture (e.g. Pisum sativum, Eeuwens and Schwabe 1975; Phaseolus vulgaris, Van Onckelen ef al. 1980; Lupinus albus, Davey and Van Staden 1979; Hordeum vul- gare, Collins and Wilson 1975; Acer sac- charum, Webb et al. 1973; Pinus radiata, Donald and Jacobs 1990; Audouinia capi- tata, de Lange and Boucher 1990; Anigozanthos manglesti, Sukhvibul and Considine 1994; see Appendix for common names). However, Australian native species are now receiving considerably more atten- tion as conservation and restoration efforts are increasing (Morgan and Myers 1989; Myers and Morgan 1989; Sindel et al, 1993; Baxter et al. 1994), There has been little work on the germi- nation requirements of Austrodanthonia spp. (Toole 1939: Laude 1949; Lindauer 1972; Hagon 1976; Lodge and Whalley 1981; Lodge 1993; Lodge and Schipp 1993a, b). However, these investigations revealed that different Austrodanthonia spp., and different populations, differed in The Victorian Naturalist Fig. 1, Female Golden Sun Moth Synemon plana, Photo by E.D, Edwards, CSIRO. their germination requirements. For exam- ple, seeds of A. caespitosa (as Danthonia caespitosa) collected from areas in higher latitudes germinated at higher temperatures than those collected from lower latitudes (Hodgkinson and Quinn 1976). Trumble (cited in Cashmore 1932) found that Austrodanthonia (as Danthonia) seeds ger- minated at 18-20°C, whilst both Maze e7 al. (1993) and Lodge and Whalley (1981) found that A. caespitosa (as Danthonia caespitosa) germinated over a range of temperatures and concluded that Austrodanthonia was not significantly affected by temperature. This variability 1s also common in other grass species (Hagon 1976; Mott 1978: Sawhney and Naylor 1979: Groves ef al. 1982). Temperature, moisture and seed dormancy affect the ger- mination and establishment of native grass- es (Hagon 1976). No published information has been found on the germination requirements of A, eyt- antha. This study investigated the tempera- ture required for maximum germination, the sowing depth for maximum emergence and the effects of treatments in overcom- ing dormancy in a population of A. eri- antha from Mount Piper, Broadford, Victoria. The results will be used to attempt to maximise germination of A. eri- antha in the field at Mount Piper. Methods Fully mature dispersal units (caryopsides; the seed together with the surrounding palea and lemma) of Austrodanthonia eriantha were collected from Mount Piper. Broadford in December 1995. Germination Vol. 116 (6) 1999 Research Reports Fig, 2. Male Golden Sun Moth Synemon plana. Photo by G. Clarke, CSIRO, tests began soon after harvest. Air-dry, non- dormant caryopsides were collected from Mount Piper in 1993 and stored in paper bags in the dark for two years at 25°C. Prior to treatment, caryopsides were dusted with fungicide (Thirum). Laboratory germination at constant tem- peratures To examine the effects of temperature on germination, seeds were germinated in chambers at constant temperatures of 8°, 15°, 20°, 26°, and 32°C. The germination of caryopsides that were freshly harvested, dry- stored for 2 years, or cold-treated (method described below under Dormancy), were compared for each of the temperature regimes. Experiments ran for 30 days and under favourable conditions, all viable seeds germinated within 7 days of imbibition, In each treatment, five replicates of 20 caryopsides were placed in 9 cm sterile petri dishes with 5 ml of distilled water, on top of two layers of Whatman filter paper, No, 41. Petri dishes were sealed using clin- ical test-ware tape. Light intensity of 300 lux was supplied by Philips warm-white fluorescent tubes, set for a 12 hour pho- toperiod. A seed was considered to have germinated when the radical reached | mm in length. The viability of each seed lot was deter- mined by dissection of all the un-germinat- ed seeds at the completion of the germina- tion test. Seeds were classified as viable if the embryo and endosperm were still firm and intact, or as dead if the seeds had turned pulpy and begun to decay. Germination was expressed as the percentage of viable seed, 203 Research Reports Dormancy Freshly-harvested caryopsides of A. eri- aniha were treated in a variety of ways in an attempt to break dormancy. The treat- ments were (a) cold stratification, (b) removal of palea and lemma, (c) dry stor- age, (d) soaking in potassium nitrate KNO,, and (e) soaking in sulphuric acid H.SO,. For cold stratification caryopsides were placed in 9 em petri dishes, with 5 ml of distilled water. The petri dishes were sealed with clinical test-ware tape and placed in a refrigerator at 5°C for 50 days and 100 days. For the KNO, treatment, caryopsides were soaked in 20 ml of 0.8% (w/v) of KNO, at room temperature for 24 hours and rinsed once with distilled water. Treatment with H2SO, (chemical scarifica- tion) involved soaking caryopsides in 20 ml of 50% (v/v) of HoSO, at room temper- ature for 25 minutes. Caryopsides were washed thoroughly for 10 minutes with distilled water. Both untreated and treated caryopsides were placed in petri dishes and incubated in a controlled temperature incubator at 15°C, which was found in the first experi- ment to be optimal for the germination of A, eriantha. All other conditions were as described for the previous experiment. Only healthy, well-developed seeds were selected based on the results of viability developed in the preceding experiment. Emergence from varying depths Caryopsides of A. eriantha that had been kept in dry-storage for 2 years were sown at four depths (0 mm, 5 mm, 10 mm, 20 mm) in a commercial grade potting mix and in soil collected from the field site at Mount Piper. The soil was surface-sterilised and soaked with water for two days prior to sow- ing. Two wooden seedling boxes (S00 x 500 x 70 mm) were filled, one with field soil and the other with the potting mix. To prevent compaction in the box, soil collected from Mount Piper was mixed with commercial mineral sand in a 1:1 ratio prior to sterilisa- tion. There were four replicates of each treatment in each seedling box, with each treatment in a different row and column set out in a latin square design. Twenty-five caryopsides were sown, approximately 10 mm apart at each depth. A butfer-zone of 20 mm was left between each treatment. 204 Caryopsides were placed on the surface of the soil (0 mm) or at depth using a ruler to create a furrow. Seeds were kept in a glasshouse at 23°C with natural lighting and watered when required. The experiment ran for 60 days. Only healthy, well-developed seeds were used in these trials. Data analysis All data sets were tested for normality and homogeneity of variance and were log transformed if required. A t-test was used to compare means. A two-factor repeated measure ANOVA was calculated on the transformed data, which was then back- transformed for data presentation, Results Temperature The percentage germination (after 30 days) of viable dry stored seeds of Austrodanthonia eriantha (86%) was greatest at 15°C (Pig. 3). The decrease in germination of dry stored seeds at each temperature above and below 15°C was significant (p < 0,05), Seeds did not germi- nate at 32°C, for any treatment. Only a small percentage of fresh seed (17%) and cold stratified seed for 50 days (13%) ger- minated at 15°C. Viability was 50%. Dormancy Germination of A. eriantha increased twenty-fold after storage (p < 0.05; Fig. 4). Similarly removing the palea and lemma from freshly-harvested seeds also resulted in a twenty-fold increase in germination (p< 0.05; Fig. 4). Treatment with H,SO, (chemical scarification) increased germina- tion from 4% to 56% (Fig. 4). However, this was significantly less than increases due to air-dry storage or glume remoyal. Soaking in KNO, and stratification for 50 days or 100 days had no significant effect on germination relative to the control (p > 0.05; Fig. 4). Emergence from varying depths Seeds of A, eriantha germinated and emerged at all depths but there was a sig- nificant reduction in emergence when seeds were sown at 20 mm (p < 0,05; Fig. 5). There was no significant difference between the emergence of seeds sown at 0 mm, 5 mm, and 10 mm on either of the soils. Emergence was greatest when seeds were sown at 0 mm (38%). The Victorian Naturalist Percentage germination Research Reports Temperature °C Fig. 3. Effect of temperature on germination of Austrodanthonia eriantha, immediately after disper- sal (#, dotted line), after air dry storage for two years (MM, solid line), and after cold stratification of fresh seed for 50 days (a, dashed line). Percentage germination was determined from 5 replicates of 20 dispersal units after 30 days. (Intermediate temperatures were not tested.) Error bars show the standard error of the mean. Discussion Maximum germination of Austrodan- thonia eriantha was at 15°C (Fig. 3), and at Mount Piper this would be met in late autumn or early spring, when the air tem- perature averages 15°C. This supports the work by Lodge (1981) and Hagon (1976) who found that Austrodanthonia species and other cool-season grasses germinated from mid autumn to late winter. Lack of germination at 32°C (Fig. 3) suggests that high air temperatures in summer may restrict the germination of A. eriantha. Inflorescences of A. eriantha are produced in December and most of the seeds are dor- mant at the time of dehiscence (seed release). Dormancy is overcome by a time lag (Fig. 4) after dehiscence, during which seeds after-ripen. The loss of dormancy with time has been attributed to an increase in biosynthesis of gibberellins in the cary- opsis or a loss of inhibitors from the palea and lemma (Hagon 1976). In this study the exact nature of the physiological role of the lemma and palea in dormancy was not investigated, However, previous experi- ments have shown that these structures Vol. 116 (6) 1999 may contain inhibitors (Bradbeer 1988), may mechanically restrict the protrusion of the radicle (Ikuma and Thimann 1963), may reduce oxygen to the embryo (Roberts and Smith 1977), or may prevent the leaching of inhibitors, thus preventing ger- mination (Webb and Wareing 1972). The germination of dormant A. eriantha seeds increased after the removal of the palea and lemma (Fig. 4), ruling out the possibility that embryo dormancy has a major role in inhibiting germination, although embryo dormancy has been observed in other Austrodanthonia species. Lodge and Whalley (1981) showed that by removing the palea and lemma from Austrodanthonia linkii (as Danthonia linkii), germination did not increase and Laude (1949) found that hulling A. califor- nia (as D. california) only marginally increased germination. The lack of response to germination by chilling and soaking in KNO, (Fig. 4) also provides evidence for coat induced dormancy as both of these treatments involve conditions inside the embryo. Toole (1939) found that A. spicata (as D. spicata) germination 205 Research Reports 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 Percentage germination Bo) = 2 wo o ao Fresh seed soaked in sulphuric acid a] o > a E 2 n a e 2 mn Fresh seed with [i Fresh seed £ i= fe] oO soaked in | potassium nitrate Eo Cold stratification faa of fresh seed (50 | days) L Cold stratification of fresh seed (100 days) Treatment Fig. 4. Effects of different storage and dormancy breaking treatments on the germination of Austrodanthonia eriantha seeds, Percentage germination was determined from 5 replicates of 20 caryopsides after 15 days at 15°C. (Fresh seed was soaked in 50% H,SO, and 0.8% KNO,.) Error bars show the standard error of the mean. increased after chilling at 3°C for 63 days, and also responded to the addition of 0.2% KNO,. However, Toole (1939) concluded that dormancy was coat-induced as, at the time of publication, the effects of KNO, and cold stratification were unknown. It can be concluded that the dormancy of A. eriantha from Mount Piper is coat- induced, imposed by the palea and lemma. Chemical scarification did not result in complete germination (Fig. 4) and this may be due to the incomplete digestion of the palea and lemma; i.e. remnants may have had an inhibitory effect. Morgan and Myers (1989) found that germination of dormant Diplachne fusca seeds decreased when treated with a solution derived from macerated lemmas. It is likely that the lemma and palea of A. eriantha contain an inhibitor, as chemical searification would enable gas to be exchanged between the embryo and the external environment, and the radicle to protrude resulting in com- plete germination. As previously mentioned the degree of dormancy varies between populations, but 206 it also varies within populations, Laude (1949) found non-dormant seeds of A. cali- fornia (as Danthonia california) germinat- ed over a 16-week period illustrating the variability within the population. This was also shown in A. sericea (as D. sericea: Lindauer 1972), In the present study, the germination of A. eriantha was also vari- able. Some seeds (17%) germinated imme- diately after dehiscence, indicating that these seeds were non-dormant whilst the majority required an after-ripening period. A small percentage (14 and 16%) of both dry-stored seeds and those with palea and lemmas removed did not germinate. Dormancy in these seeds, which were prob- ably still viable, may be embryo-induced. This variability in dormancy would spread the risk of establishment and ensure that some seeds from the same population per- sist for several seasons (Lodge and Whalley 1981). Removing the palea and lemma may not be economically feasible on a large scale and may actually hinder germination in the field. Awns and glumes protect the seed in The Victorian Naturalist 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 5 Percentage emergence Research Reports r Depth (mm) Fig. 5. Effects of different sowing depths on seedling emergence of viable seeds of Austrodanthonia eriantha, in a commercial potting mix (solid bars), and in soil collected from Mount Piper, Broadford (shaded bars) Caryopsides were germinated under glasshouse conditions. Percentage emergence was determined from 4 replicates of 25 caryopsides after 30 days. Error bars show the standard error of the mean. the field, orientate the seed for maximum seed/soil contact and enable the seed to lodge in the most favourable microsite (Peart 1979; Peart 1981; Sindel e¢ a/. 1993), Burial at depth of 20 mm or greater has a pronounced inhibitory effect on the estab- lishment of seeds of A. eriantha (Fig. 5). The germination of buried seeds may be dependent upon the exposure to light (Wesson and Wareing 1969). At depths greater than 2 mm insufficient light pene- trates the soil to induce germination of some seeds (Woolley and Stoller 1978), Since some seeds of A. eriantha germinat- ed at depths of 20 mm, it can be concluded that light is not required for germination of all seeds. Work on other Austrodanthonia species found that germination of non-dor- mant units was not restricted by light (Hagon 1976; Maze er al. 1993). Wesson and Wareing (1969) showed that by aerat- ing the soil, inhibiting gases are removed allowing germination to proceed. As a light effect is not involved, soil aeration may be an active factor in preventing ger- mination. The present study showed that there was no difference in the emergence of A. eriantha in a well-aerated potting mix compared with that of the field soil (p > 0.05; Fig. 5) and therefore soil com- paction was not involved. It is more likely Vol. 116 (6) 1999 that the food reserves in the seed are depleted before the seedlings reach the sur- face and establish. Further field trials are required, nonethe- less these results suggest that establishing Austrodanthonia eriantha in the field would best be achieved by sowing caryop- sides in autumn, when air temperatures average 15°C and water is not limiting. Caryopsides should be collected in December, stored for approximately 4 to 5 months and sown directly on the surface. The presence of inhibitors in the palea and lemma limits germination immediately after seed fall even though temperature and moisture may be suitable for germination, This prevents the loss of seedlings due to high summer temperatures. A few months after seed fall, the concentration of inhibitors in the palea and lemma, enfore- ing dormancy would decrease as a result of after-ripening. By this time temperature at Mount Piper would be suitable for the ger- mination of A. eriantha (15°C) and seedlings would be expected to establish in the cool autumn conditions and continue growing through winter and spring. Acknowledgements This work was financially supported by the Zoological Parks and Gardens Board of Victoria. The research was undertaken at the 207 Research Reports University of Melbourne, School of Botuny, Special thanks to Dr P.M. Attiwill, References Baxter, BwLM., Van Staden J,. Granger, J.B. and Krown, N.A.C. (1994), Plant-derived smoke and smoke extracts stimulate seed germination of the fire climas grass Themeda iriandra, Enviranmentil ane Hvperimental Botany 34, 217-223, Bridbeer, J,W, (1988), “Seed dormaney and germina- lion’, (Chapman and Hall, New York.) Cushmore, A.B, (1932). An investigation of the taxo- nomic and agricultural characteristics of the Danthonia group. Report number 69. (CSIRO; Melbourne.) Clarke, G.M. and O’ Dwyer, C. (1997). A survey al fitive grassland sites in southeastern New South Wales for the endingered Golden Sun Moth, Swremon pland. A report prepared for the Threatened Species Unit, NSW National Parks and Wildlife Service, southern zone. (CSIRO: Canbernt.) Collins, DM. and Wilson, A.T. (1975). Embryo and endosperm metabolism of barley seeds during early germination. Journal of Experimental Botany 26, 747-TM). Davey. J.B, and Van Staden, J. (1979), Cytokinin aety- ity in Lupinus albus LV Distribution in seeds, Mlant Physialagy 63, 873-877, de Lange, JH. and Boucher, © (1990). Autecological studies on Avdouinia eapitara (Bruniaeeie), 1. Plant derived smoke as a seed germination cue. South African Journal af Botany 56, 700-703. Donald, D.G.ML and Jacobs, C.B. (1990), The effects of store time, temperature and container on the via- bility of the seed of four pine species. South African Forestry dournal 154, 41-46. Feuwens, C.L and Schwabe, W,W. (1975). Seed and pod wall development in Pivan sativum, Lo in rela- hon to extracted and applied hormones. Jounal of M\perimental Botany 26, 1-14. Croves, RH, (1979), The status and future of Australian grasslands. New Zealand Journal of Beoloyy 2, 76-81. Groves, RTL, Hagon, MW. and Ramakrishnan, PLS, (1982), Dormaney and germination of seed of eight populations of Themeda australis, Australian Journal of Botany WY, 373-386. Hhigon, MW. (1976), Germination and dormancy of Thomeda dustvalis, Danthonia spp., Supa bigenicula- fe und Bothriachloa macra. Australian Journal of Botany 24, 449-327. Hodgkinson, KC, and Quinn, JA, (1976). Adaptive variability in the prowth of Danthonia caespitosa Goud. Popubiions at different temperatures, Australian Jounal af Botany 24, 381-396, Laude, 1M. (1949), Delayed germination of California oatgrass, Danthonia califarnwa. Avrenomy Journal, 41. 404-408, Lindauer, L.L, (1972). Germination ecology of Dunathonia sericea populations. Dissertation Abstracts 32, 5061B-5062B- Linder, HEP (1997), Nomenelatural corrections in the Kyndosperma complex (Danthonieae, Poaceae), Telupea 7, 269-274. Lode, G.M, (1981). Establishment of warm and cool- SCASON MILve perenniil grasses on the north-west slopes of NSW, Estiblistiment and seedling survival in the field, Australian Journal of Botany 29, 121-133. Lodwe. GM. (1994). The domestication of the native grisses Danthonta pehardyonii Cashmore. and Danthonia linkit Kunth. for agricultural uses 1 Selecting for inflorescence yield. Australian Journal of Agriculnial Research 44, 59-77. Lodge, GM. and Sehipp, Awl (19939). The domestica Hion of the native geass Duarhenta richardson 208 Cashmore. and Danthomea linkin: Kunth, for agricultural use: 2. Agromic and morphological variation, Australian Journal of Agricultural Research 44, 79-88. Ladue, GM. und Sehipp, AL (1993b). Effects of depth and time of sowing on emergence of Danthonia richardson’ Cashmore. and Danthonia linkit Kunth, Australian Journal of Agricultural Research 44, 1311-1322, Lodge, GM. and Whalley, R.D.B, (1981), Estublishment of warm-and Cool-season native peren- nial grasses on the north-west slopes of NSW, | Dormancy and germination. Australian Journal of Botany 29, 111-119. McDougall, Ko and Kirkpatrick, J.B. (1994). Conservation of lowland native grasslands in south- easter Australia. (WorldWide Fund for Nature Australia; Sydney.) Maze. K.M., Koen, T.B, and Watt, L.A, (1993), Factors influencing the germination of six perennial grasses of central New South Wales. Australian Journal of Botany 41, 79-90, Morgin, WC, and Myers, B.A. (1989), Germination of the salt-tolerant yrass Diplachne fusca 1. Dormancy and temperuture responses, Australian Journal of Botany 37, 225-237, Mott, J.J, (1978). Dormancy and germination in five native grass species from savannah woodland com munities of the Northern Territory, Australian Journal of Botany 26, 621-631. Myers, B.A. and Morgan, W.C, (1989). Germination of the salt-tolerant grass Diplachne fusca Ul, Salinity responses, Australian Journal of Botany 37, 239-251. O'Dwyer, C. and Attiwill, PM, (1949). A comparative study of the habitats of Swiemon plana Walker (Lepidoptera; Castnitdae): Implications for restora+ lion. Biological Conservation 89, 131-141. Peart, M.H. (1979). Experiments in the biological sig- nificanee of the morphology of seed dispersal units tn grasses. Journal of keblogy 67, 843-863. Peart, M.FL (1981). Further experiments on the biologi- cal significance of the morphology of seed-dispersul units in grasses, Journal of Ecology 69, 425-436, Roberts, E.H. and Smith, R.D. (1977). Dormaney and the pentose phosphate pathway. In “The physiology and biochemistry of seed dormancy and germina tion”. Bd. A.A. Khan. (North Holland Publishing Company: Netherlands.) Sawhney, R. and Naylor, J.M. (1979). Dormaney stud- ies im seeds of Avena fatua. 9. Demonstration of genetic variability affecting the response to lempera- ture during seed development. Canadian Journal of Borany 57. 59-63. Sindel, B.M., Davidson, S.J, Kilby, MJ. and Groves, R.EL (1993). Germination and establishment of Themeda triandra (Kangaroo grass) as affected by sor and seed characteristics. Australian Journal of Botany AL, 105-117. Sukhvibul, N. and Considine, J.A, (1994), Regulation of germination of seed of Anigozanthos mttnglesil, Australian Journal of Botany 42, 191-203, Toole, V-K. (1939). Germination of the seed of poverty grass, Danthonia spicata. Journal of America Society of Agronomy 31, 954-965, Van Onckelen, H,, Caubergs, R.. Horemans, S. and DeGreel, 1A. (1980), Metabolism of Abscisic acid in developing seeds of Phaseolus vulgaris L. and its correlation to germination and a-Amylase activitity. Journal of Experimental Botany 31. 913-920, Wesson, G, and Wareing, PLP. (1969). The induction of light sensitivity in weed seeds by burral. Jannal of Experimental Botany 20, 414-425, Woolley, JT. and Stoller, E,W. (1978), Light penetra tion and light-induced seed germination on soil, Plant Physiology 61, 597-600, The Victorian Naturalist Glossary awn — a fine bristle-like appendage, especially occurring on the glumes of grasses. caryopsides (caryposis) — a dry, indehiscent, one-seeded fruit in which the seed coat is close- ly fused to the fruit wall, e.g. in most grasses. dehiscence — to open spontaneously along cer- tain lines or in a definite direction when ripe, as seed capsules. gibberellins — plant growth substances; can have spectacular effects upon stem elongation in cer- tain plants; can break dormancy in some seeds. glume — the chaffy lower-most organs of a spikelet, which forms the inflorescence of grass- es and similar plants. inhibitors —a restraining or preventing factor. lemma — the lower of two bracts enclosing an individual grass flower. palea — the upper of two bracts enclosing an individual grass flower. radicle — the part of an embryo giving rise to the shoot system of a plant. Research Reports Appendix. Common names of plants mentioned in the text. Acer saccharum Maple Anigozanthos manglesii | Kangaroo Paw Audouinia capitata False Heath Hordeum vulgare Barley Lupinus allus Lupin Phaseolus vulgaris Bean Pinus radiata Monterey Pine Pisum sativum Pea Australian Plants for the Garden: An Australia’s Best Garden Guide by Gwen Elliot Publisher: Hyland House Publishing, Melbourne. Paperback, 128 pp. full colour throughout, 150 colour photos. ISBN 1 86447 039 9. RRP $14.95. Gwen Elliot has been involved in Australian plant horticulture since the 1960s. She is an honorary life member of the Society for Growing Australian Plants, Victoria, and of the Arboretum Associates, University of California, Santa Cruz, USA. Gwen has written numerous books on Australian native plants. This is an easy-to-use guide to creating a delightful garden filled with Australian natives. Australian Plants for the Garden is a selection of the most attractive and reliable Australian plants. Tips on growing Australian plants for cut-flowers, to attract native birds and but- terflies or for fragrance, are among many of the handy hints which are also offered by other experienced gardeners. Vol. 116 (6) 1999 Colour photographs allow easy identifi- cation and inspiration for even the most novice of gardeners! Australia-wide culti- vation notes will allow you to pick out the best native plants for your own garden. Also available Trees and Shrubs: An Australia’s Best Garden Guide by Graeme Purdy Paperback, 128 pp., full colour throughout, 150 colour photos. ISBN 186447 040 2, RRP $14.95, | 209 Research Reports Barbed Wire Fencing as a Hazard for Wildlife Rodney van der Ree! Abstract Anecdotal reports from landholders and biologists suggest that the entanglement and subsequent death of animals on barbed wire fences is widespread in Australia. In this report, I collate records of at least 62 species of wildlife that have become entangled on barbed wire fences in Australia, This paper is divided into two components; the first focuses on an area near Euroa in northern Victoria as a case study, and the second lists records from throughout Australia. In the Euroa study area, the species most commonly encountered on fences were gliding marsupials (Sugar Glider Peraurts bre- viceps and Squirrel Glider P. norfolcensis) (26 individuals), followed by birds (7 individuals), On a continental scale, species found entangled in barbed wire include gliding marsupials, flying-foxes, aquatic birds, night birds and birds of prey. Records were collected from a wide range of habitats and localities, including the urban-rural fringe, forests and woodlands, agricultural landscapes, semi- arid areas and around water bodies. All individuals were found entangled with barbed wire, and more than 95% of entanglements occurred on standard height farm fencing, Recommendations for alternatives to barbed wire fencing are discussed, (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (6), 1999, 210-217.) Introduction During a study of the ecology of arboreal marsupials in a network of roadside and streamside vegetation near Euroa, Victoria, a number of Squirrel Glider Petaurus nor- folcensis and Sugar Glider P. breviceps carcasses were discovered suspended from barbed wire fences (Fig, 1). There have been several incidental observations of ear strips along roads and streams (van der Ree, unpubl, data), The remaining 15% is made up of small patches of woodland. The major land use is agriculture, with extensive dryland cropping and grazing (Bennett er al. 1998). Observations of animals caught on barbed wire fences were made opportunis- such deaths for a range of species in Australia and overseas (Russell 1980; Allen and Ramirez 1990; Andrews 1990; Krake 1991; Nero 1993: Land for Wildlife 1994; Platt and Temby 1994; Johnson 1995; Anonymous 1996; Tischendorf and Johnson 1997; van der Ree 1997; Campbell 1998; Johnson and Thiriet 1998) but the extent of this problem is still rela- tively unknown. The aim of this study was to quantify the extent of the situation by collecting records from a range of sources and describing the actual event (e.g. species, fence type, which strand of wire, location). Study area and methods Case study — Euroa, Victoria The study area lies within the northern plains of Victoria and is bounded by the towns of Euroa, Violet Town, Nagambie, Avenal and Murchison. Formerly dominat- ed by open eucalypt woodland, there is now 3.6% remnant vegetation cover, approximately 85% of which occurs as lin- Fig. 1, Dead Squirrel Glider Peraurus norfol- censis caught in a barbed wire fence. Photo by R. van der Ree. ' School of Ecology and Environment, Deakin University, Rusden Campus, 662 Blackburn Rd, Clayton, Victoria 3168. 210 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports Table 1. Observations of wildlife entangled with barbed-wire fencing from the Euroa case study area. Species listed in taxonomic order according to Christidis and Boles (1994) (birds) and Menkhorst (1995) (mammals). ON 2 Se ene Species Scientific name Number of — Fencetype Wire type individuals Mammals Squirrel Glider Petaurus norfolcensis 15 f b Sugar or Squirrel Glider — Petaurus sp. U1 f b Birds Spoonbill Platalea sp. | f b Rock Dove Columba livia | f b Galah Eolophus roseicapilla | f b Southern Boobook Ninox novaeseelandiae I f b Australian Magpie Gymnorhina tibicen 2 f b White-winged Chough — Corcorax melanorhamphos I f b Fence type: f = standard height farm fence. Wire type: b = barbed wire. tically while undertaking fieldwork on the Australasian Wildlife Management ecology of arboreal marsupials, Additional records were obtained from local landhold- ers. There was no systematic searching to detect entangled animals, and consequently the results of this study are likely to under- estimate the severity of the problem. Whenever possible, the following para- meters were obtained for each entangle- ment: e date found; © approximate time since death or entan- glement; *species, sex and approximate age (the approximate age of Pefaurus species was determined using the level of upper incisor wear (refer Suckling 1984; Quin 1995); elocation (latitude and longitude), and description of site: * the point of entanglement on the animal's body (e.g. wing, neck, tail, gliding mem- brane); ethe fence characteristics (fence type, barbed or plain wire strand, strand posi- tion in the fence). Australia-wide Perspective This section is a preliminary report of records from a wide range of people across Australia and is intended to highlight the issue and present initial findings. I collated the same information as that collected for the Euroa study area, from sources includ- ing Field Naturalist groups, Landcare groups, landholders and biologists, between 1996 and the present. I also requested records from members of the Ecological Society of Australia, Vol. 116 (6) 1999 Society, Field Naturalist Club of Victoria, and Birds Australia via their electronic mail discussion lists and newsletters. The wildlife atlas data-bases from Victoria and New South Wales were investigated, as was the Wildlife Information and Rescue Service (WIRES) data-base. Results Euroa study area Number and type of species entangled A total of 33 animals was recorded entangled on barbed wire between 1994 and 1998 in the Euroa study area (Table 1). Fifteen were positively identified as Squirrel Gliders and 11 gliders could not be reliably identified to species and are referred to as Pefaurus sp. (this group includes only Sugar Gliders and Squirrel Gliders). Other species entangled with barbed wire fencing included the Australian Magpie Gymnorhina tibicen (2 individuals) (Fig. 2), and a single Rock Fig. 2. Ausralian Magpie Gymnorhina tibicen caught on barbed wire fence, Photo by R. van der Ree, 211 Research Reports Table 2, Point of entanglement of gliders found on barbed wire fences in the Euroa study area, 1994-1998. No, = number of gliders found. Point of entanglement No. ‘Tail only lI Tail and gliding membrane d Gliding membrane and leg 2 Unable to tell (decomposed too far) 3 Not recorded 6 Total found 26 Dove (Feral Pigeon) Columba livia, Spoonbill Platalea species, Southern Boobook Ninox novaeseelandiae, White- winged Chough Corcorax melanorham- phos and Galah Eolophus roseicapilla. Fence characteristics All individuals were entangled with barbed wire on standard farm fences approximately one metre high. The appar- ent point of entanglement of the animal wits with the barb on the wire. Where entanglement position was recorded (n=17), 12 entanglements occurred on the top strand of the fence, one occurred on the second strand from the top, and four occurred on the third strand from the top. Once caught on the barbed wire, it appeared that many gliders and birds became further entangled as they struggled to free themselves. On one occasion, the strand of wire was cut and the glider taken, with the wire in-situ, to a wildlife shelter for removal and rehabilitation. In the Euroa study area, all 33 records occurred where fences were positioned between cleared paddocks and vegetated roadsides. Carcass characteristics The advanced decomposition of many carcasses limited observations on the sex and age of the animals. Four female and one male Squirrel Glider were identified: the sex of 21 gliders and seven birds was not determined. Using the degree of tooth wear on the upper incisors of the gliders as an index of age. four individuals were identified as juvenile and four as adults. Age was not determined for the remaining 18 gliders or seven birds. For gliders, the most common point of entanglement was the tail (11 records) (Table 2), followed by a combination of the tail and gliding membrane (four records) and the gliding membrane and leg (two records). Three gliders were too decomposed to determine the point of entanglement, and point of entanglement was not recorded for six individuals, Only two gliders were found alive and released, and these were entangled by the tail only. One magpie was entangled by a combina- tion of wing and neck, and the feral pigeon was caught by its leg ring; the point of entanglement was not recorded for the remaining birds. Australia-wide perspective Number and type of species entangled Sixty-two species of wildlife have been observed entangled with barbed wire fene- ing across Australia (Table 3). The types of species include gliding marsupials, bats, ground-dwelling birds, water birds, night birds and birds of prey. The most numer- ous group reported entangled with barbed wire fencing were flying foxes from north- ern Australia, The Litthe Red Flying-fox Preropus scapulatus appears particularly susceptible to entanglement in north Queensland, with a published report of over 450 individuals entangled in one year (Johnson 1995), and another respondent reported 200 individuals on one fence at the same time (Jon Luly, pers. commi.). Many respondents reported observing numerous macropods (Black Wallaby Wallabia bicolor, Bastern Grey Kangaroo Macropus giganteus, Western Grey Kangaroo M. fuliginosus, and Red Kangaroo M. rufus) and Emus Dromiaiuy novaehollandieae with their legs entangled in the top two strands of fences but could not give detailed information about specif- ic incidents because of the regularity with which they were observed. This problem is nol specifically related to barbed wire, as plain wire also entraps kangaroos and Emus by their legs as they attempt to jump the fence, and hence these records have not been included in Table 3. Mesh fencing may pose a barrier to those species that are too large to pass through the mesh and unable to jump or climb over the fence. Certain species of reptile appear to be particularly susceptible because their rear facing scales and body shape allows them to place their heads through the tight- ly fitting mesh — but does not allow the rest The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports Table 3. Observations of wildlife entangled with barbed-wire fencing from across Australia (excluding the Euroa case study records) as reported by volunteer observers. Species listed in taxonomic order according to Christidis and Boles (1994) (birds) and Menkhorst (1995) and Strahan (1983) (mammals). Species Mammals Koala Greater Glider Yellow-bellied Glider Sugar Glider Squirrel Glider Sugar or Squirrel Glider Mahogany Glider Brush-tailed Bettong Tasmanian Pademelon Grey-headed Flying-fox Little Red Flying-fox Black Flying-fox Spectacled Flying-fox Flying-fox Queensland Tube-nosed Bat Ghost Bat White-striped Freetail Bat Long-eared Bat Microchiropteran Bat Grassland Melomys Red Fox Birds Southern Cassowary King Quail Australian Wood Duck Pacific Black Duck Hoary-headed Grebe Short-tailed Shearwater Australian Pelican White-faced Heron White-necked (Pacific) Heron Nankeen Night Heron Royal Spoonbill Wedge-tailed Eagle Brown Falcon Australian Hobby Peregrine Falcon Sarus Crane Buff-banded Rail Little Button-quail Red-chested Button-quail Lathams Snipe Bush Stone-curlew Black-fronted Dotterel Masked Lapwing Silver Gull Little Corella Sulphur-crested Cockatoo Red-rumped Parrot Southern Boobook Masked Owl Barn Owl Grass Owl Tawny Frogmouth Australian Owlet-nightjar Vol. 116 (6) 1999 Scientific name Phascolarctos cinerus Petauroides volans Petaurus australis Petaurus breviceps Petaurus norfolcensis Petaurus sp. Petaurus gracilis Bettongia penicillata Thylogale billardierri Preropus poliocephalus Pteropus scapulatus Pteropus alecto Pteropus conspicullatus Pteropus sp. Nyctimene robinsoni Macroderma gigas Tadarida australis Nyctiphilus sp. species unknown Melomys burtoni Vulpes vulpes Casuarius casuarius Coturnix chinensis Chenonetta jubata Anas superciliosa Poliocephalus poliocephalus Puffinus tenuirostris Pelecanus conspicillatus Egretta novaehollandiae Ardea pacifica Nycticorax caledonicus Platalea regia Aquila audax Falco berigora Falco longipennis Falco peregrinus Girus antigone Gallirallus philippensis Turnix velox Turnix pyrrhothorax Gallinago hardwickii Burhinus grallarius Charadrius melanops Vanellus miles Larus novaehollandiae Cacatud sanguinea Cacatua galerita Psephotus haematonotus Ninox novaeseelandiae Tyto novachollandiae Tyto alba Tyto capensis Podargus strigoides Aegotheles cristatus State (Number of individuals) Fence Wire type type NSW (2), QLD (4) Vic (2), NSW (6), Qld (4) Vic (3), NSW (3), Old (8) Vic (25) NSW (9), Qld (44) Vic (24), NSW (12), Qld (5) Vie (12) NSW (1) Qld (5) Qld (1) Tas (1) Qld (4), NSW (3) Qld (666%), NSW (5), NT (6), WA (1) Qld (23), NSW (81), NT (20) Qld (25) NSW (4), Qld (2), NT (75) Qld (41) NT (1) Vie (1) NSW (1) NSW a Qld (2) NSW (1 ‘7 Qld (1) NSW (2) Qld (1) NSW (3), Qld (1) Vic (1) Vie (<5) Vic (1) Vic (1), NSW (3) Vie (1) NSW (1) Qld (2) Vic (1) NSW (1) NSW (1), Vie (1) Vie (1) Qld (1) Qld (4) NSW (2) NSW (1) NSW (1) Qld (2) Vic (1) Vic (1), Qld (1) Vic (<5) Qld (1) Qld (1) Vic (1) NSW (1), Qld (1), Vie (3) NSW (2) NSW (2), Qld (1), Vie (3) Qld (1), SA (1) Qld (2), SA (2), Vie (4) Vic (1) ft { { f f f I t f f oan nan b,m b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Research Reports Table 3 continued. Species Scientific name State (Number of individuals) Fence Wire type type Laughing Kookaburra Dacelo novaeguineae NSW (2), Vic (1) f b Dollarbird Eurystomus orientalis Qld (1) f b Eastern Spinebill Acanthorhynchus NSW (1) f b tenuirostris Magpie-lark Grallina cyanoleuca Vic (1) f b Willie Wagtail Rhipidura leucophrys Qld (1) f b Australian Magpie Gymnorhina tibicen ACT (1), Qld (2), SA (2), try 2b Vic (1) na Silvereye Zosterops lateralis Vic (1) f b Common Starling Sturnus vulgaris Vice (1) f b “= Includes records of 200 individuals (Jon Luly pers. comm.) and 450 individuals from Ravenshoe district, north Queensland Fence type: f = standard height farm fence. c = 6 to 8 foot cyclone wire mesh fence, na = not assessed Wire type: b = barbed wire. m = mesh. of their bodies to pass through or retreat. Goats were reported to become entangled with mesh fencing as their horns prevent them from remoying their heads from the Wire mesh once pushed through. Electrified strands of wire too close to the ground may electrocute Short-beaked Echidnas Tachyglossus aculeatus if they attempt to push underneath the wire. Fatal collisions by various bird species with mesh fencing was frequently recorded. Wildlife also became entangled with wire in non-fence situations; a Kookaburra Dacelo novaeguineae was found impaled on a protruding wire on a tree-guard, five White-throated Needletails Hirundapus Caudacutus and Black Swans Cygnus atraius were observed dead on overhead powerlines and a small insectivorous bat was impaled by a piece of wire on the top of a shed. Records of fauna entangled with barbed wire were received from across the Australian continent. Wildlife were entan- gled with barbed wire fences in a wide range of habitats, including arid and semi- arid rangelands, temperate woodlands, forests, rainforest, wetlands, urban areas and the rural-urban interface. Discussion A localised and widespread problem The most commonly encountered species entangled with barbed wire in the Euroa area was the Squirrel Glider. In parts of the study area, roadside vegetation supports high densities of the Squirrel Glider and other arboreal marsupials (van der Ree, unpubl. data). The total number of Squirrel 214 Gliders that became entangled with barbed wire is probably much greater than that reported here because many carcasses could not be reliably identified. Moreover, this report only includes those individuals that have been found and reported. In Victoria, the Squirrel Glider is present in only a few large reserves (e.g. Chiltern National Park, Killawarra State Park) and is largely restricted to small patches of woodland habitat or linear reserves along roads and streams. This species has under- gone a significant decline in abundance and in Victoria is classified as vulnerable to extinction (CNR 1995). The additional threat of mortality from barbed wire fences for small and isolated populations may be detrimental to their long-term persistence. The records collated from across Australia indicate that the problem is wide- spread. Records were collected from all states of Australia, with most originating from the eastern mainland states, The absence of records from many areas may be due to a paucity of observers and entan- glements going unreported rather than an absence of entanglements. As many entan- glements undoubtedly go unobserved and unreported, the results of this study must be considered an underestimation. To realise the full extent of the problem, observations of entanglements need to be reported and systematically collated. Of the data-bases interrogated, only the New South Wales Wildlife Atlas was able to easily retrieve records of wildlife entan- gled with fences. It would be useful for other data-bases to include a specific code for records that originate from such entan- The Victorian Naturalist glement so that in future the extent of the situation can be accurately described. Wildlife behavior In the Euroa area, 85% of remnant vege- tation occurs along roads and streams, and the remaining 15% as small patches. The practice of fencing on both sides of roads, streams and around patches places wildlife at risk of encountering a fence. The move- ment patterns and behaviour of Squirrel Gliders (as revealed by radiotelemetry) in the Euroa area (van der Ree, unpubl. data) may increase the risk of becoming entan- gled with barbed wire fences. Squirrel Gliders, and probably other gliders, risk entanglement with barbed wire fencing when gliding to and trom woodland vege- tation in paddocks and along roads and streams. Gliders also glide diagonally across corners at 90° intersections to min- imise travel distance and energy demands. These behaviours require the glider to reg- ularly cross fencelines. The potential for entanglement also increases as gliding dis- tance increases; the longer the glide, the lower the animal will land on its target tree and the closer it is to the herght of the barbed wire fence. The placement of barbed wire fences in activity paths of other species may also increase the rate of entanglement. In north Queensland, barbed wire fences in fruit bat flight paths regularly cause the entangle- ment and mortality of at least five species of fruit bat. Removal of bats from barbed wire fences may place humans at risk of infection with bat viruses, and extreme care should be taken when removing these animals'. New fencing erected in existing wildlife travel paths can cause the entan- glement and death of many individuals. Many respondents reported that kangaroos appear to be highly susceptible to entan- glement in new fencing, and that consider- ation to wildlife movements when design- ing fences can minimise the problem. There were insufficient data to determine whether mortality by collision and entan- glement with barbed wire is specific to age or sex in any group of species. ' Guidelines on how to handle bats are given at the following web address: http://www.bush- net.qid.edu,au/~melissa/finft/ Vol. 116 (6) 1999 Research Reports Management implications Habitat restoration and revegetation is a goal of many government agencies, con- servation groups and landholders. Fencing is essential to control stock access in order to protect native vegetation and allow for natural regeneration of palatable species. Wildlife populations in many rural areas have already undergone considerable declines, and often exist in small isolated patches of habitat. The loss of individuals by entanglement with fencing is an avoid- able and unnecessary additional threat. All fencing that utilises barbed wire to con- serve or protect vegetation may conceiy- ably place the fauna using that habitat at risk of local extinction. High risk areas It appears from these results that areas of potentially high risk can be identified: e Highly fragmented areas where animals must regularly cross barbed wire fences to reach different parts of their habitat. This is particularly apparent in the Euroa study area and is probably true for many agricultural areas, e Regular flight paths for bats and birds, and movement paths for mammals that may include areas of fragmented and continuous habitat. e Areas with high density populations of species vulnerable to entanglement such as marsupial gliders in the Euroa case study and fruit bats in north Queensland. e Wetland areas where barbed wire is exposed above the water level. Fencing alternatives For an alternative fencing style to be adopted, it must be of equal or greater ben- efit for stock management. Depending on the farming enterprise, a number of alter- natives to barbed wire are available: e Plain high-tensile fencing wire, if ten- sioned correctly, can contain most stock. When a fence is being constructed with new materials, consider using multiple strands of high tensile plain wire or plain wire and ringlock mesh (but beware using fine mesh which may also entrap animals or act as a barrier to movement). e If additional security is required, investi- gate the option of electric fencing instead of barbed wire. However, beware of the potential risk of electrocution of wildlife, 215 Research Reports elf using existing fenceposts, consider removing the existing strands of barbed wire and replacing them with plain wire. In addition, consider adding an electrified strand to the fence for increased security. elf a plain wire or ringlock mesh option does not offer sufficient security, an elec- trified strand is not feasible, and the use of barbed wire can not be avoided, then consider avoiding barbed wire on the top two or three strands of the fence — this will reduce, but not eliminate the risk. In high-risk areas, use plain wire or sheath the barbed wire inside poly-pipe to pro- tect animals from the barbs. Design the fence to avoid right angles where marsupial gliders may cross diago- nilly across the corer (Fig. 3), such as at the intersection of two road reserves. This would benefit other wildlife by cre- ating extra habitat as well as reducing fencing costs. Future investigation should consider: e Documenting the extent of the problem more fully by government agencies and wildlife rehabilitation organisations through wildlife databases by specifically including ‘entanglement with barbed wire’ as the cause of death. e Investigating alternative fence designs that contain stock, are cost-effective to erect and maintain, and do not pose a threat to wildlife. « Education programs to ensure land man- agers are aware of the potential risk to wildlife and are able to identify high risk areas or “hot spots’. Government agencies and other bodies 141m 100m 100m Fig. 3. Fencing diagonally at a 90° corner reduces the amount of fencing materials required, provides additional habitat for wildlife, and potentially minimises the risk of entanglement by wildlife. 216 providing funds for fencing and revegeta- tion projects should consider these findings and encourage the use of non-barbed wire alternatives as a condition for receiving funding. This will reduce the amount of barbed wire fencing being erected, and as old fences are gradually replaced with non- barbed wire alternatives, the loss of fauna to barbed wire fencing will be greatly reduced, Acknowledgements This is a contribution from the Landscape Ecology Research Group, Deakin University. The financial support of the Holsworth Wildlife Research Fund is gratefully acknowledged. | thank the 120 plus people who provided me with their observations on wildlife mortality associated with fencing and for discussions about fencing requirements. Thanks also to the landholders and residents of the Euroa district who initially alerted me to the problem and gaye generously of their time and local knowledge. I thank Andrew Bennett, Jenny Wilson and Sally Kimber and an anonymous reviewer for com- ments on the manuscript. References Allen, G.T., and Ramirez, P. (1990). A review of bird deaths on barbed wire. The Wilson Bulletin 12 (3), Andrews, A, (1990). Fragmentation of habitat by roads and utility corridors: a review. Australian Zoologist 26 (3), 3-4. Anonymous (1996), Wings and prayers. The Kookaburra, Outdoor Australia August ~ September, 23-24, Bennett, A.F., Brown, G., Lumsden, L., Hespe, D.. Krasna, S., and Silins, J. (1998), ‘Pragments for the future. Wildlife in the Victorian Riverina (the Northern Plains)’, (Department of Natural Resources and Environment; East Melbourne, ) Campbell, J. (1998). More on fishing line - and another barbed hazard. Victorian Wader Study Group Bulletin 22 (July), 59. Christidis, L., and Boles, W.E. (1994). “The taxonomy and species of birds of Australia and its territories’. (Royal Australian Ornithologists Union: Melbourne.) CNR (1995), Threatened Fauna in Victoria. (Department of Conservation and Natural Resources.) Johnson, A. (1995). A real nightmare for little reds. Newsletter af the Friends of the Far North Flying Faxes 2 (October), Johnson, A., and Thiriet, D, (1998), Barbed wire fences and flying foxes don't mix. Animals Today February - April, 10-11, Krake, G. (1991), Observation of a dynastid beetle impaled on barbed wire. Victorian Entomologist 21, ol. Land For Wildlife (1994). Untitled. Land far Wildlife News 2. (3), 9. Menkharst, PW, (ed.) (1995), “Mammals of Victoria: Distribution, ecology and conservation’. (Oxford University Press: South Melbourne.) Nero, R.W. (1993). Norther flying squirrel and red bat caught on barbed-wire, Blue Jay 51, 215-216, Plau, S.. and Temby,. 1, (1994), Fencing wildlife habi- tat. Land for Wildlife Note Number 29, p. 4. The Victorian Naturalist (Department of Conservation and Natural Resources, ) Quin, D.G. (1995). Population ecology of the Squirrel Glider (Peraurus norfolcensis) and the Sugar Glider (P. breviceps) (Marsupialia, Pelauridae) at Limeburners Creek. on the central north coast of New South Wales, Wildlife Research 22, 471-505. Russell, R. (1980). “Spotlight on Possums’. (University of Queensland Press: St Lucia, Queensland.) Strahan, R, (1983). “The Australian Museum Complete Research Reports Book of Australian Manimals’. (The Australian Museum: Sydney.) Suckling, G.C. (1984), Population ecology of the sugar glider, Pefaurus breviceps, in a system of fragmented habitats. Australian Wildlife Research 11, 49-75, ‘ischendorf, J.W., and Johnson, C.L. (1997). Long- eared owl snagged on barbed-wire fence. Blue Jay 55, 200. van der Ree, R. (1997). Barbed wire a hazard to wildlife, Land for Wildlife News 3 (6), 11. One Hundred Years Ago THE BLACKFISH — Some interesting notes on the habits of the Blackfish, Gadopsis gra- cilis, McCoy, appear in the Australasian of 25th November, which, though written from an angling point of view, are worthy of attention, and possibly criticism, especial- ly by country naturalists. Blackfish can almost be claimed as purely Victorian fish, and even here are nearly confined to the southern streams. The only other habitat of the genus is Northern Tasmania. Professor McCoy recognizes three species, and remarks, in “The Prodromus of Victorian Zoology”, vol. i., p.39, that the colour is very variable. Large Blackfish are undoubtedly scarce, owing to the many enemies they now have to encounter, and are only to be found in the upper reaches of the streams in the most unfrequented portions of the colony. In the carly days of Melbourne fish of 6 Ibs. to 8 Ibs. in weight were of common occurrence, but one hears of such fish but seldom now. One was taken in the Cockatoo Creek, near Seville, in January last, which weighed 7!A Ibs., and it is on record that some twenty years ago a fish was caught in the Ringarooma River, Tasmania, which turned the scale at 13 Ibs. 4 oz. In seeking for Blackfish the size of the stream does not seem to matter: in fact, fine fish are often obtained in the smallest streams. They are very shy fish in daylight, seeking the shelter of sunken logs, stones, &c., and though with great care they may be caught in the daytime, especially if the water be discoloured by rain, the best time to secure them is in the brief period between sunset and darkness. They can sometimes be taken all night, but another good time is at just before or at daybreak. The writer, though in favour of protection for the Blackfish, states that the present close season, from 31st August to 15th December, is of no practical use, as in the first place it is rarely observed, and secondly his experi- ence leads him to believe that Blackfish spawn nearly all the year round, as he has taken the fish containing spawn in January, February, March, and April. He suggest that instead of a close season a minimum weight of half a pound should be adopted, and so give the small fish a chance to grow and provide sport worthy of the fisherman. From The Victorian Naturalist XVI, p. 130-131, December 1899, New Assistant Editor I am pleased to welcome Alistair Evans as Assistant Editor for The Victorian Naturalist. Alistair has worked on the journal every week for almost three years as a desk-top publisher, preparing articles for the printer. He has also been a regular proof- reader during this time, Alistair is a PhD student at Monash University, where his field of research is the func- tional morphology of teeth and cranial features in microchiropteran bats. I am looking forward to working with Alistair on your journal, where his expertise in computing, desk-top publishing and statistics will be welcome. Merilyn Grey Vol. 116 (6) 1999 217 Contributions Recent Foraminifera and Ostracoda from Erith Island, Bass Strait K.N. Bell' and J.V. NeiP Abstract The foraminiferal and ostracodal faunas from a sample at 15 m depth at Erith Island, Bass Strait, are described, The foraminiferal fauna consisted of 38 species; notable live species are Cribrobulimina polystoma (Parker and Jones), Rosalina irregularis (Rhumbler) and a spicular test form of Haplophragmoides pusillus Collins, There were 37 species of ostracodes present; notable species include Papillatabairdia elongata McKenzie, Reyment and Reyment, Prerygocythereis sp. aff. P. velivola (Brady) and a new species of Eucythere (Rotundracythere). The fauna has some similarities to that found on the Victorian coast. (The Victorian Naturalist 116 (6), 1999, 218-227.) Introduction Although the foraminiferal fauna of the Victorian coastline is fairly well known, little research has been undertaken on the faunas of Bass Strait or of the surrounds of the Bass Strait Islands. The fossil ostra- code faunas of the coastline have recently been the subject of a number of papers (McKenzie et al. 1990, 1991, 1993; Neil 1994), but the living faunas have received limited attention (Bell et al. 1995; Neil 1993: Yassini and Jones 1995). The Kent Group (39°29" S, 147°20° E), which consists of three main islands (Deal, Erith and Dover) and two smaller isolated ones (North East and South West Islands), lies approximately halfway between Wilsons Promontory and Flinders Island in Bass Strait (Fig. 1). The group lies on the Bassian Rise in water depths of about 54-64 metres (30-35 fathoms) (Jennings 1959), The immediate seafloor surrounding the islands is mainly barren sand swells but in the more protected areas near the islands there is a rich growth of algae, sponges, ascidians, sea urchins and encrusting and solitary corals (Kuiter 1981; Wiedenmeyer 1989). Some aspects of the history, plants, animal life and general environments of the Kent Group are given by Jones ef al. (1970). Marginson and Murray-Smith (1969) and Mullet and Murray-Smith (1967), During late March, 1981, a small expedi- tion of SCUBA divers visited the Kent Group to study the marine fauna (Kuiter 1981). One sample of bottom sediment '‘ Honorary Associate, Department of Natural Sciences, Museum of Victoria, GPO Box 666E, Melbourne, Victoria 3001, * Honorary Research Associate, Scientific and Industrial Research Facility, La Trobe University, Bendigo, Victoria 3550, 218 from 15 metre depth in West Cove, Erith Island, collected by this group, was avail- able for study. It consisted of a fine sand with only a small amount of silt-sized parti- cles and with some algal fragments, broken bryozoa, small gastropods, foraminiferans and ostracodes. The sample had been pre- served in 70% alcohol upon collection. This note deals with the foraminiferans and ostracodes found near Erith Island in the Kent group; responsibility for the vari- ous taxa lie with KNB for the foraminifer- ans and JYN for the ostracoda. Results Foraminiferans After staining with Rose Bengal (a proto- plasmic stain) and washing, a total fauna of 32 species of live foraminiferans and 6 species as dead specimens was found (Table |, dead species marked *), With the exception of Carterina spiculotesta (Carter), the other species have been previ- ously recorded from shallow waters around the Victorian coastline (Apthorpe 1980; Bell and Drury1992; Collins 1974; Parr 1932, 1945). Comparison with Tasmanian coastal faunas is not possible as the Recent Tasmanian faunas have not, as yet, been studied although the faunas from Port Dalrymple and the River Tamar are similar to those of the Victorian coast (Bell 1996). As species descriptions and illustrations can be found in the above cited references, and in Albani (1979), only selected species are commented upon here. Haplophragmoides pusillus Collins, 1974 (Fig. 2A, B). This species has been previously recorded from Port Phillip Bay (Collins, 1974), The Victorian Naturalist Contributions Erith Is. ow Dover |s. Bass ° Strait Kent Fig. 1. Locality map showing position of the sample studied (W) from Erith Island. Mallacoota Inlet (Bell and Drury 1992) in Victoria, and the River Tamar, Tasmania (Bell 1996). The specimens from Erith Island (although similar in size, shape and chamber arrangement to typical specimens from these other localities) differ in wall composition in that the wall is composed of fine quartz grains with various sized nee- dle-like sponge spicules arranged roughly parallel to the coiling direction (Fig. 3B). The test surface is fairly smoothly finished. The difference in wall construction may be a reflection of the large sponge fauna in the area (Wiedenmeyer 1989). This spicular form of H. pusillus seems to be identical to that described from shallow water off the Xisha Islands, Guangdong Province, China, by Zheng (1979: 201, pl. 1, figs 10, 11) as Cribrostomoides spiculotesta. Haplophragmoides australensis Albani, 1978. Rare dead specimens were found in the sample. This species differs from H. pusil- lus in having a coarsely agglutinated test. It has previously only been reported from New South Wales (Albani 1978; Yassini and Jones 1995). Vol. 116 (6) 1999 Textularia sp. (Fig. 3F). Many specimens of a small, ovate, com- pressed, biserial textulariid were present. In side view the periphery is either smoothly tapered or zigzag due to slightly protruding chambers. It appears to be an undescribed species. This taxon differs from T. tubulosa Zheng in not having the overhanging chambers or the domed aper- tural face of that species (as figured by Loeblich and Tappan (1994)), and they are not as fistulose as T. horrida Egger. It is to be described in full in a forthcoming paper on the agglutinated foraminiferan fauna of the Victorian deeper waters. Siphotextularia sp. cf. S. mestayeri Vella, 1957. Several small (0.3 mm long) but typical specimens of this taxon are described here. The test is compressed, tapering with flat lateral faces and square edges; the walls are finely agglutinated and the aperture is a short slit perpendicular to the final suture. Vella (1957) described the species as hay- ing an oblique apertural slit but Loeblich and Tappan (1994) figured specimens from the Sahul Shelf which have a perpendicu- 219 Contributions Table 1. List of foraminiferans found at Erith Island (* indicates species found only as dead speci- mens); % given as percentage of live foraminiferan fauna; P, indicates presence but percentage < 2% ick REDE tate tn oe) ren lg een ela ME GU ee Nes Ag erate Haplophragmoides pusilla Collins, 1974 — P M. labiosa H, australensis Albani, 1978* schauinslandi (Rhumbler, 1906) P Cribrobulimina polystoma M. oceanica (Cushman, 1932) IF (Parker and Jones, 1865) 15% Spirillina vivipara Ehrenberg, 1843 E Clavulina multicamerata Buliminella elegantissima Chapman ,1909 12% (d’Orbigny, 1839) P Textularia agglutinas a’ Orbigny, 1839 V3 Bulimina marginata d’ Orbigny, 1826* T. sagittula Defrance, 1824 P Bolivina sp. cl. B. pseudoplicata T. sp. 15% Heron-Allen and Earland, 1930 5% Siphotextularia sp. Brizalina cacozela (Vella, 1957) P cf. S. mestayeri Vella, 1957 P Rugobolivinella pendens (Collins 1974)* Gaudryina convexa(Karrer, 1865) E Elphidium macellum Trochammina sorosa Parr, 1950 P (Fitchel and Moll, 1798) 6% Tritaxis sp. P Planulina bassensis Collins, 1974 5% Spiroloculina antillarum @ Orbigny, 1826% Patellinella inconspicua (Brady, 1884) e Quinqueloculina moynensis Glabratella patelliformis (Brady, 1884) a Collins, 1953 P Lamellodiscorbis dimidiatus Q. poeyanum victoriensis (Jones and Parker, 1862) P Collins, 1974 3% Rosalina anglica (Cushman, 1931) 3% Q. subpolygona Parr, 1945 P R. irregularis (Rhumbler, 1906) 5% Triloculina oblonga (Montagu, 1803) P Cymbaloporetta bradyi Cushman 1915* T. sabulosa Collins, 1974 P Acervulina inhaerens Schultze, 1854 P T. trigonula Lamarck, 1804 7% Cibicidella variabilis (VC Orbigny, 1826)* Miliolinella australis Parr, 1932 8% Carterina spiculotesta (Carter, 1877)* Fig. 2. A, B. Haplophragmoides pusillus, A X120, B x600, C, Clavulina multicamerata. X45. D. Planulina bassensis, X150, 220 The Victorian Naturalist lar slit. Until this point is clarified I have not made a definite specific identification. Trochammina sorosa Parr, 1950 (Fig. 3B). This species was described by Parr (1950) from off Maria Island, east coast of Tasmania, in depths of 122-155m. Hedley et al, (1967) have reported it from the intertidal zone in New Zealand, and it is known from Mallacoota Inlet, Victoria (Bell and Drury 1992). The present speci- mens are somewhat flattened compared with the more typical conical form. Cribrobulimina polystoma (Parker and Jones, 1865) (Fig. 3A). This is a common live species in the fauna, with both the megalospheric and microspheric generation forms present. In many cases the aperture was found to be covered with sand and algal fragments which may represent collapsed feeding cysts. Later chambers may cover all of the earlier test so giving rise to a flattened, subglobular shape. This species has an interesting distribu- tion: it has not been reported from Victorian shallow waters but is found in shallow waters of Spencer and St. Vincent Gulfs. South Australia, [Cann and Gostin 1985: Cann and Murray-Wallace 1986; Cann et al. 1993; who all refer to it as C. mixta (Parker and Jones)|; in shore sands at Glenelg and Hardwicke Bay, South Australia (Parr 1932); from sediments of 550 m depth off Cape Nelson, Victoria (Parr 1932); and in the Great Australian Bight (Chapman and Parr 1935) in depths less than 165 m, However, none of these reports distinguish living from dead speci- mens. C. polystoma is also known from the Holocene of northern Spencer Gulf (Cann and Murray-Wallace 1986; as C. mixta) and the Pliocene of the Adelaide Plains bore at Cowandilla, South Australia (Howchin 1936). It has also been found in the Upper Pliocene beds at Tailem Bend, South Australia (pers. obs.). Parr (1932) has discussed this species in detail and showed that mixta represents the megalos- pheric generation and polystoma the microspheric generation of the same species. Vol. 116 (6) 1999 Contributions Gaudryina convexa (Karrer, 1865) (Fig. 3B). A common species in the sample; speci- mens show quite variable chamber shape and overlap of chambers. This species ranges from the Upper Eocene to Recent in the Australasian region (Burdett er al. 1963). The ‘Challenger’ expedition record- ed it from East Moncouer Island, Bass Strait (Brady 1884). Clavulina multicamerata Chapman, 1909, (Fig. 2C). This is a common species in the sample and growth stages from just the initial tri- angular section up to large specimens with nine linear chambers are present. Records of this species are from shallow waters along the Victorian coast and the River Tamar (Chapman 1907: Parr 1932; Collins 1974; Bell 1996). Miliolinella labiosa var. schauinslandi (Rhumbler, 1906). Rare specimens of this variable growing form of M. labiosa occurred. Initially the chambers resemble M, Jabiosa but the later chambers are straight or curved in a series of irregular chambers. It has been recorded from Victorian waters (Parr 1932, 1945). Miliolinella oceanica (Cushman, 1932) (Fig. 3L). Typical specimens of this widespread Pacific and Indian Ocean shallow water species were present. Collins (1974) recorded it from Bass Strait and Port Phillip as Quinqueloculina baragwanathi Parr 1945, but Ponder (1974) has shown Q. baragwanathi to be a synonym of M. oceanica, Quinqueloculina moynensis Collins, 1953. Rare specimens of this small, quadrate Quinqueloculina occurred, It is common in Victorian Bass Strait beach sands (Collins 1974). Ouinqueloculina poeyanum victoriensts Collins, 1974. This subspecies is characteristic of high energy environments (Collins 1974). It dif- fers from the low energy, sheltered environ- ment form, O. poeyanum poeyanum, in hav- ing narrower, straighter chambers and in the narrow aperture with a long, straight tooth. 221 Contributions «3. A. Cribrobulimina polystoma, x45. B. Gaudryina convexa, x45. C, D. Triloculina sabulosa, C x180; D x120. KE. Trochammina sorosa, x180, F, Textularia sp., X110. G. Acervulina inhaerens, x42 H. Bolivina sp. ef. B. pseudoplicata, X180. 1. Elphidium macellum, x90. J. Triloculina trigonula, X42, K. Rosalina irregularis, x90. L. Miliolinella oceanica, X75. 222 The Victorian Naturalist Table 2. List of ostracoda found at Erith Island. Arcacythere hornibrooki Yassini & Jones, 1995 Baltraella keiji Yassini & Jones, 1995 Bythocypris reniformis Brady, 1880 Callistocythere bermaguiensis Yassini & Jones, 1995 Callistocythere dorsotuberculata Hartmann, 1982 Callistocythere hieroglypica Yassini & Jones. 1995 Callistocythere keiji (Hartmann 1978) Callistocythere puri McKenzie, 1967 Cypridina sp. Cytheretta sp. Cytherura sp. Eucythere (Rotundracythere) sp. nov. Hemicytherura seaholmensis McKenzie, 1967 Kangarina sp. ct. K. radiata Hornibrook, 1952 Keijcyoidea keiji (McKenzie, 1967) Leptocythere generodubia (McKenzie, Reyment & Reyment, 1990) Loxoconchella pulchra McKenzie, 1967 Loxoconcha australis Brady, 1880 Loxocencha cumulus (Brady, 1880) Loxoconcha gilli McKenzie, 1967 Contributions Mckenzieartis portjackonensis (McKenzie, 1967) Microcythere dimorpha Hartmann, 1980 Munseyella puncata Yassini & Jones, 1995 Neonesides spp. Orloyibairdia sp. Papillatabairdia elongata McKenzie, Reyment & Reyment, 1990 Paradoxostoma crustaecolum Hartmann, 1980 Paradoxostoma geraldtonense Hartmann, 1978 Paradoxostoma horrocksense Hartmann, 1978 Paradoxostoma schornikovi Yassini & Jones, 1995 Paranesidea sinusaquilensis (Hartmann, 1979) Procythereis (Serratocythere) densuireticulata Hartmann, 1981 Pseudohemicytherideis ornatissima Yassini & Jones, 1995 Prerygocythereis sp. all. P. velivola (Brady, 1880) Semicytherura tenuireticulata McKenzie, 1967 Tasmanocypris dietmarkeyseri (Hartmann, 1979) Xestoleberis cedunaensis Hartmann, 1980 Triloculina sabulosa Collins, 1974 (Figs 3C, D). The small specimens placed in this taxon are more slender than the typical Port Phillip specimens and also the test usually has fewer larger grains in its construction. The length of the neck is variable which may be an age characteristic. Rosalina irregularis (Rhumbler, 1906) (Fig. 3K). The specimens present at Erith Island are very similar to those figured by Rhumbler (1906) and Hedley et al. (1967) from the New Zealand intertidal zone, in having normal, regular 1-2 whorls and then irregu- larly arcuate, flattened chambers with a narrow, thin peripheral rim. The rim is quite fragile and often broken producing a ragged edge to the test. Parr (1945) had specimens, from sands at Barwon Heads, which he referred to Discorbis globularis var. anglica Cushman but which are very similar to RX. irregularis from Erith Island.. Rosalina anglica (Cushman, 1931). The tests are usually deformed by having grown about a stem or leaf of alga or sea- grass. As used here R. anglica is restricted to specimens which have 1-2 regular whorls and then a series of grossly deformed cham- bers, usually also slightly inflated. These later chambers are opaque whereas in R. Vol. 116 (6) 1999 irregularis they are transluscent. Parr (1950) has suggested that R. angelica is only a growth form of R. globularis and should possibly not be separately distin- guished. Collins (1974) recorded it from Port Phillip Bay and nearby Bass Strait. Planulina bassensis Collins, 1974 (Fig. 2D). This small species is very common in the sample, and is easily identified by its slightly convex/concave shape and evolute whorls; most specimens have a white last chamber with other chambers pale brown. It was originally described from the entrance to Port Phillip Bay (Collins 1974), Rugobolivinella pendens (Collins, 1974). Only dead specimens were found in the sample. Originally described from Port Phillip, this species is now known to be widespread along the southern Australian coast, ranging from Eucla, Western Australia, to Port Phillip Bay (Hayward 1990) and from the River Tamar, Tasmania (Bell 1996). Aceryulina inhaerens Schultze, 1854 (Fig. 3G). This 1s a common species frequently found attached to seagrass fronds and so shows a variety of shapes. 223 Contributions Bolivina sp. cf. B. pseudoplicata Heron- Allen and Earland, 1930 (Fig. 3H). Although the test surface of the speci- mens from Erith Island show a randomly reticulate pattern they do not clearly show the characteristic two longitudinal ridges of B, pyendoplicata. The figured specimen shows incipient ridges on the final two chambers only. Carterina spiculotesta (Carter, 1877). One specimen of this unusual species was recovered but, as internally it only stained a pale pink, was questionably alive when col- lected. The specimen has only seven cham- bers. The wall of the chambers show the typical elliptical, parallel arranged, secreted particles, but no evidence of the fat spread- ing apron as deseribed by Loeblich and Tappan (1955), Previous records are all tropical — subtropical (Loeblich and Tappan 1964), Collins (1958) recorded it from the Great Barrier Reef. Ostracodes No distinction between live and dead specimens was possible with the ostracodes in the sample, though the one large speci- men of Cypridina sp. is stained and includes the soft parts. A total of over 400 specimens was picked, Carapaces and separated valves were counted as individual specimens. Only identifiable broken specimens larger than 50% of a whole valve were counted. The fauna comprised 37 species from a total of 28 genera (Table 2), There was a very high proportion of carapaces (over 75%), Detailed comparisons with faunas from the northern Tasmanian coast and the south- eastern coast of New South Wales are not possible here, but such a comparative study IS In preparation, The fauna ts typical of a shallow marine to inner shelf environment, with a few unusual characteristics. The dominant species are Nestoleberis cedunaenis, Eucythere (Rotundracythere) sp., Neonesidea sp. and Loxoconcha cumulus, The s spepies of Eueythere (Rotundracythere) is new, and it is unusual to find such large numbers of this genus i a fauna in this region. Other fea- tures of the fauna include the yanety of para doxostomatid species; the presence of the species Prerygocythereis sp. alt. P. velivola which was described from the Gulf of Carpentaria (Yassini ef al. 1993) and quite a 224 variety of callistocytherids. There are very few cytheropteronids as is characteristic of shallow marine and inner shelf assemblages. On the other hand, there is a complete absence of hemicytherids and trachyleberi- dids which are often very numerous in fossil faunas from these environments. A detailed analysis of the ecological implications of the fauna, and a description of the new species of Eucythere (Rotundracythere) is being prepared, to accompany the comparisons with assem- blages from the beach at Wynyard (Fossil Blulf), Tasmania, and at Twofold Bay, New South Wales, Papillatabairdia elongata McKenzie, Reyment and Reyment, 1990 (Pig. 46). This species is characteristic of an estuar- ine to inner shelf environment. It was recorded by Hartmann (1978) from a deposit of coral debris in a pool on the reef off Heron Island, Queensland (one speci- men) as Bythocypriy sp., and initially described by McKenzie et a/, (1990) from the Pleistocene deposits of Goose Lagoon Drain in southwest Victoria. Yassini and Jones (1995) record it from Lake Macquarie and Broken Bay in New South Wales. Its oecurrence in the Erith Island fauna sug- gests its persistence in a cooler environ- ment, in spite of 11s origin in warmer Pleistocene waters and Recent occurrences m warm temperate and subtropical loca- tions, Only one specimen was found. Xestoleberis cedunaensis Hartmann, 1980, This is the most common species in the fauna, It has been recorded by Hartmann (1980); Yassini and Jones (1987, 1995) from saline lakes, lagoons and the inter- tidal zone. Its abundance in this fauna is somewhat unusual because of the more marine aspect of the assemblage though it may have been transported from the inter- tidal zone in the Kent Group. Procythereis (Serratocythere) densuiretic- wata Hartmann, 1981 (Fig. 41). This species is found typically in the intertidal zone of sheltered embayments and the entrance channels of coastal lagoons. Only four specimens were found but this occurrence reinforces the inner shelf signal of the fauna. The Victorian Naturalist Contributions Fig. 4. A. Loxoconcha cumulus, x55 B. Tasmanocypris dietmarkeyseri, x26 C. Neonesidea sp., x33 D. Pterygocythereis sp. aff. P. velivola, x44 E. Papillatabairdia elongata, x44 F, Eucythere (Rotundracythere) n. sp., X66 H. Paranesidea sinusaquilensis, x44 I. Procythereis (Serratocythere) densuireticulata, x44 J. Semicytherura illerti, x66 K. Loxoconcha gilli, x55 L. Callistocythere keiji, x55 M. Munseyella punctata, x66 N. Arcacythere hornibrooki, x58 O. Cytherura sp., X55. Vol. 116 (6) 1999 225 Contributions Eueythere (Rotundracythere) n. sp. (Fig. 4F,G). The second most abundant species in the fuuna, Rofundracythere n. sp. differs from the only other Recent species of this genus, R. bassiana Yassini and Jones 1995, in being more strongly ornamented and hav- ing a more rounded dorsal margin. R. bassiana is described as being ’rare in Bass Strait’ (Yassini & Jones 1995). Two species of this genus from the Eocene and Oligocene are figured by McKenzie et al. (1991, 1993), The presence of the genus usually suggests shallow, open, marine conditions, rather than the intertidal zone favoured by many other species in the assemblage. Neonesidea spp. (Fig. 4C). Although there are 25 specimens of this genus in the fauna, they probably represent more than one species, of which N. aus- traliy (Chapman 1914) is the most com- mon, The genus is generally representative of shallow, open marine conditions. Loxoconcha cumulus (Brady, 1880) (Fig. 4A). Loxoconcha cumulus is the most com- mon of the three species of the genus in the fauna, The others are L. australis Brady 1880, and L. gilli McKenzie 1967 (Fig. 4K). Of the range of environments favoured by Loxoconcha in this region, L. cumulus is generally found in estuaries in association with seagrasses. Loxoconcha gilli, which favours an open marine enyi- ronment, and 1. australis, lagoons, estuar- ies and the shallow shelf, are both quite rare in this assemblage. Pterygocythereis sp. aff. P. velivola (Brady, 1880) (Fig. 4D). Only one specimen occurs in this assem- blage. It has close affinities with the speci- mens figured by Yassini ef al. (1993) from the Gulf of Carpentaria. This genus has not been identified previously in fossil or Recent faunas from southern Australia, Callisteytherids (four species) form a sig- nificant proportion of the assemblage. This genus is generally indicative of shallow marine conditions. The Paradoxostomatids present (four species), although not numer- ically common, also give a clear indication of this kind of environment, 226 Discussion It is not customary to present data from just one sample, However, we feel that the dearth of knowledge of the microfauna of Bass Strait and some of the interesting ostracod and foraminiferan occurrences in this sample from Erith Island warrants reporting. Although the Victorian shallow marine foraminiferal fauna is fairly well document- ed that of the Tasmanian side of Bass Strait is almost totally unresearched but with the exception of C. polystoma, the other species occur widely in Victorian shallow marine faunas (see references already given); C. polystoma has never been reported in Victorian shallow waters nor from Bass Strait so its occurrence is significant. It may be that currents flowing from the Great Australian Bight eastwards (Gibbs et al. 1986; Tomezak 1985) transport specimens from the South Australian Gulfs into Bass Strait and they there find suitable habitats near the Bass Strait Islands (it was not found at East Moncouer Island by the Challenger’ expedition (Brady 1884)). This point warrants further sampling in the shal- low areas about other Bass Strait Islands. The ostracode fauna is characteristic of a cool-water, shallow marine, or intertidal environment, Most of the commonly occur- ring species of Neonesidea and Callistocythere are cosmopolitan and do not reflect narrow environmental constraints. However, Xestoleberis cedunaensis, although found in the intertidal zone, favours estuarine or lagoonal conditions and Procythereis (Serratocythere) densuireticu- lata has similar preferences, Loxoconcha cumulus, which is common in the assem- blage, is another species favouring estuarine conditions in association with seagrasses. This range of conditions suggested by the Species of the fauna is consistent with the location of the sample. References Albani, A.D. (1978). Recent foraminifera of an estuarme environment in Broken Bay, NSW. Australian Journal of Marine and Freshwater Researvh 29, 355-398, Albani, A.D. (1979). Recent shallow water Foraminiferida from New South Wales. Australian Marine Sciences Association Handbook No.3. 57 p. Apthorpe, M, (1980), Poraminiferal distribution in the estuarine Gippsland Lakes system, Proceedings of the Royal Soctety of Victoria 91, 207-232. Bell, K. N. (1996), Foraminiferan faunas of the River Tamar and Port Dalrymple, Tasmania: A preliminary study. Records of the Queen Victoria Musewn 102, 25p. Bell, K.N. and Drury, §.R. (1992), The foraminiferal The Victorian Naturalist fauna of Mallacoota Inlet, East Gippsland, Victoria. The Victorian Naturalist 109, 7-16. Bell, K.N., Burn, R, and Neil, JV, (1995), Recent foraminiferal, ostracodal and mollusean faunal changes in a short core from Corner Inlet, Victoria. The Vietorian Naturalist 112, 72-78, Brady, H.B. (1884). Report on the foraminifera dredged by H.M.S. Challenger Expedition during the years 1873- 1876. Reporton the Scientific Results of the voyage of HM.S. Challenger, Zoology 9(2 vols), 1-814, 115 pls. Burdett, .DJ_, Hedley, R-H., Hornibrook, N.deB, and Hurdle, C.M. (1963), Gandryina conyexa (Karrer) 1865 — Upper Eocene to Recent: an example of varia- tion and synonymy among Foraminifera. New Zealand Journal of Science 6, 513-530, Cann, J.-H. and Gostin, V.A, (1985). Coastal plant/sedi- ment zonation, sedimentary facies and foraminiferal biofacies of the St. Kilda Formation at Port Gawler, South Australia. Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia 109, 121-142, Cann, J.H. and Murray-Wallace, C.V. (1986), Holocene distribution and amino acid racemisation of the benthic foraminiter Massilina millerti, northern Spencer Gulf, South Australia, Aleheringa 10, 45-54. Cann, J.H., Belperio, A.P.. Gostin, VA, und Rice, R.L- (1993), Contemporary benthic foraminifera in Gulf St. Vincent. South Australia, and a refined Late Pleistocene sea-level history. Auyiralian Journal of Earth Science. 40, 197-211. Chapman, F. 1909. Recent foraminifera of Victoria: Some littoral gatherings. Journal of the Quekert Microscopical Club 10: 1t7-146- Chapman, P. and Parr, W.J. (1935). Foraminifera and ostracoda from soundings made by the trawler Bonthorpe in the Great Australian Bight, Journal of the Royal Soviery af Western Australia 21, 1-7. Collins, A.C. (1958). Great Barrier Reef Expedition 1928-29, Foraminifera, Report 6(6), 335-436. Collins, A.C. (1974), Port Phillip Survey 1957-63, Foraminiferida, Memoirs of the National Museum of Vitoria 35, 1-61, Gibbs, C\F.. Cowdell. R.A. and Longmore, A.R. 1986. Seasonal variation in density patterns in relation to Bass Strait caseade, Australian Journal of Marine and Freshwater Research 37; 2\-25. Hartmann. G. (1978). Zour Kenntins des Eulitorals de australischen Kusten unter besonderer Berucksichtigung der Polychaeten und Ostracoden. Tiel 1. Der Ostracoden der Ordnung Podocopida G,W- Muller, 1894 der tropisch-sublropischen Westkuste Austniliens (Zwischen Derby in Norden und Perth im Suden). Mintellungen aus dem Hambureoischen Zovlogischen Museum und lnstitat 75, 63-219, Hartmann, G,. (1980). Die ostracoden der Ordnung Podocopa G.W.Mueller, 1894. der warmtempericten und subtropisch-tropischen Kustenabsehnitte der Sud- und Sudostkuste Australiens (zwisehen Cedana tm Westen und Lakes Entrance im Osten). Mitte/lungen ans dem Hambursivchen Zooloyisehen Musenm und Jastinut 78, 97-149, Hayward, B.D. (1990), Taxonomy, paleohiogeoyraphy and evolutionary history of the Bolivinelidae (FPoraminiferida), New Zealaid Geological Survey Palueontolagical Bulletin @3, \32 p. Hedley, R.H., Hurdle, C.M. and Burdett, 1,D,J. (1967), The marine fauna of New Zealand: Intertidal foraminifera of the Corallina effivinalis Zone. New Zealand Oceanographic Iustitute Memoir 38,86 p. Howehin, W. (1936), Notes on the geological sections obtained by several borings situated on the plains beiween Adelaide and Gulf St, Vincent. Part 2 Cowandilla (Government Bore). Pratsactions of the Royal Soviety af South Australia. 60, 1-34. Jennings, J-N, (1959). The submarine topograplry of Bass Strait, Proceedings of the Royal Saciety of Victoria 71, 49-72, Jones, J., Marginson. M.A. and Murray-Sruth, S. (1970). Southwest Island and other investigations in the Kent Group. The Victorian Naturalist 87, 344-371. Kuiler, R,H. (1981). The inshore fishes of the Kent Group Vol. 116 (6) 1999 Contributions in Bass Strait. Mie Vicrorian Naturalist 98, 184-187. Loeblich, A.R. and Tappan, H. (1955). Revision of some Recent foramimiferal genera. Smithsonian Institution, Miscellaneous Collections 128, |-37. Loeblich, A-R. and Tappan, H, (1964). Treatise of Invertebrate Paleontology, Part C, Protista 2. R.C.Moore (ed). Geological Society of America and University of Kansas Press, 2 vols. 900 p. Loeblich , A-R. and Tappiin, H. (1994), Foraminifera of the Sahul Shelf and Timor Sea. Cushman Foundation for Foraminiferal Research, Special Publication 31, 1-661, McKenzie, K.G. (1969), Notes on the paradoxostom- atids. Jn JLW_Neale (ed) The Taxonomy, Morphology and evology of Recent Ostracods, pp 48-66. McKenzie, K.G., Reyment, R.A. and Reyment, E.R. (1990). Pleistocene and Recent Ostracoda from the Goose Lagoon Drain, Victoria and Kingston, South Australia, Bulletin af the Geolagical Institutions of the University of Uppsala ns. 16, 1-46, MeKenzie, K.G., Reyment, R.A. and Reyment, E.R(1991), Bacene-Oligocene Ostracoda from, South Australi and Victoria, Australia. Revista EspaQola de Paleontologia 6, 135-175. Mckenzie, K.G., Reyment, R.A, and Reyment, E.R, (1993). Eocene Ostracoda trom the Browns Creek Clays at Browns Creek and Castle Cove, Victoria, Australia. Revista Espanola de Paleontolowia 8, 75-116. Marginson, M.A, aod Murray-Smith, $8, (1969), Purther investigations in the Kent Group, The Vietarian Naturalist 84, 239-250, Mullett, JH. and Murray-Smith, S$, (1967). First footing on 4 Bass Strait Island: an investigation of Dover Island in the Kent Group. Te Victorian Naturalist 84, 239-250, Neil, J.V. (1993). Comparisons between some Middle Miocene and Recent southeastern Australian ostracode assemblages, /7 K.G.MeKenzie and PJ.Jones (eds) Ostracoda th the Earth and Life Sciences, pp 277-288, Neil. J.V. (1994). Miocene Ostracoda of the Trachyleberidae and Hermeythendae from (he Muddy Creek area, southwest Victoria. Memvirs of the Museum of Victoria. 54, 1-49, Parr, W.J, (1932), Vietonan and South Australian shal- low-water foraminifera, Parl 1. Praceedings of the Royal Soviety of Vietaria 44, 1-14. Parr. WJ, (1945), Recent Foraminifera from Barwon Heads, Victoria. Proceedings vf the Royal Sovtety of Victoria 56, 1S9-218. Parr, WJ. (1950). Foraminifera. British, Australian and New Zealand Antarctic Research Expedition 1929- 1931, Report ser. B (Zool, and Bot.) 5, 233-392, Ponder, R.W_ (1974). A revision of two Australian species of Miljolinella, Journal of Foraminifera! Research 4, 126-138. Rhumbler, L. (1906), Foraminiferen von Laysan und den Chatham Inseln. Zoclegischer dahresbericht Abel ing Systemarisehe 24, 21-80, Tomezak. M, 1985, Bass Strait water cascade during winter 1981. Continental Shelf Research 4: 255-278. Vella, P. (1957). Studies in New Zealand Foraminifera, New Zealand Gevlogivul Survey, Paleontological Bulletin 28. 6Ap. Wiedenmeyer, Ff. (1989). Demospongiae (Porifera) from northern Bass Strait, Southern Australia. Memoirs of the Museum of Victoria 50, 1-242. Yassini. 1. and Jones, B.G. (1987), Ostracada in Lake Illawarra: Environmental factors, assemblages and sys fematics. Australian Journal of Marine ane Freshwater Research 48, 795-843. Yassini. |, and Jones, B.G. (1995). Recent Poraminiferida and Ostracoda from estuarine and shell environments on the southeastern coast of Australia. University of Wollongong Press, Wollongong, New South Wales. 484 p, 1971 illust. Yassin, |, Jones, B.G. and Jones, M.R, (1993), Ostraceds from the Cult of Carpentaria, northeastern Australia, Senckenbergiana lethaea 73, 375-406. Zheng, 5. (1979), The Recent foraminifera of the Xisha Islands, Guangdong Province. China. Part 2. Simi Marina Sinica US, 2001-232, 227 Naturalist Note Bizarre Encounters with Wildlife: Obs Different animal species using the one nest hollow Staywatehing a tree with a large tree hol- low with obvious scratchings around it, led to the discovery of a couple of possum species using this tree. The tree, which is a large senescing Red Stringybark Eucalyptus macrorhyncha was found to be home to a Brushtail Possum (in the hollow described) and a colony of Sagar Gliders in another hollow. This tree is also home to a colony of feral Kuropean Honeybees. Repularly watching this tree at dusk, | was surprised to discover that the Brushtail’s hollow was used annually by a pair of nesting Kookaburras (1 observed this for three Consecutive years), Presumably they Kick the Brushtail out. This leads to a num- ber of questions, Where does the Brushtail Possum vo? Must it find another tree hol- low or does if sleep out for the summer? How often do birds, which use tree hol- lows for nesting, evict arboreal mammals during their breeding season? Is this the Kookaburras’ preferred tree hollow or is it an indication of lack of suitable tree hol- lows in the area? Have any field naturalists observed similar events? An eyen more bizarre encounter with a Black Wallaby While walking in bushland close to home | realised our two knee-high (kind of fox looking) dogs had sneakily followed me. | didnt send them home. They continued on with me into the base of a gully which drains into a dam, [twas here that we stimulated some uncharacterisic: behaviour ina Black Wallaby, The Black Wallaby rapidly and repeatedly circled us (at a radius of approxi nuitely 30m), It occasionally stopped and ook a series of deep breaths (as if smelling the surroundings), My initial thought was rvations from Around Wattle Glen that there was a young wallaby around, but | couldn't see it. The Black Wallaby contin- ued this behaviour, giving no indication it was about to stop. In order not to continue the disturbance T decided to leave. While this was happening the dogs showed no interest in the Black Wallaby and contin- ued sniffing around the tussock grasses Poa labillardieri. As we \elt the gully (1 look a path which would have been about a 200 m walk up the ridge), the Black Wallaby followed behind, The circling behaviour of the Black Wallaby occurred on (WO separate Occasions and the dogs were with me both times (the wallaby did- n't follow us out the second time), Ive walked this area many times and never experienced anything like it. Character- istically, as you would know, as soon as these animals are aware of your presence they take off. So what does this mean? Is this typical behaviour or is this Black Wallaby a nut? Was it the same wallaby on both occasions (Vd suspect so but [couldn't be sure)? Has it had an encounter with dogs before which stimulated this behaviour? After thinking about it for a while | wondered whether the wallaby thought the dogs were foxes, Are foxes a threat to Black Wallabies? [ve seen Eastern Grey Kangaroos and foxes within the one area and neither seemed interested in the other. Once again has any- one else had a similar encounter? Vd be interested in other field naturalists describing their bizarre encounters with wildlife during their wanderings. | have no doubt they would be many and varied. Maria Belvedere 18 Stradbroke Road, Boronia, Victoria 3155, Nditor’s note: Regarding the sharing of nest hollows, it has been reported that Sugar Gliders sometimes share a nest hollow with Galahs (7he Bird Observer, no, 794, March 1999, p.9), ‘Thank you to Virgil Hubregtse for pointing this out, Mm tM x The Victorian Naturalist Book Review Plant Collecting for the Amateur by T. Christopher Brayshaw Publisher: Royal British Columbia Museum, Canada. ISBN 0-7718-9439-2, 44 pp., paperback.. RRP $12.95. Distributed by UniREPS, University of New South Wales, Sydney NSW 2052. Collecting plants is one of the most enjoyable experiences for any botanist, allowing the opportunity to get outdoors and seek out and examine interesting plants. The book, ‘Plant Collecting for the Amateur’ by T.C. Brayshaw (1996), pro- vides a very basic yet informative guide on how to get started. It includes some very important aspects about collecting, what to collect, and how and when to collect. It discusses the types of information that should accompany any collection, which is of critical importance if collections are to retain some sort of meaning in the years to come. The chapter on mounting and filing specimens gives some valuable informa- tion on ensuring collections are timeless. Brayshaw provides some good advice on pressing and drying plant specimens, including some wonderful ideas for build- ing your own press and drying racks. It was good to see discussion of how to deal with pressing and drying some of the more tricky plant types, such as succulents and plant materials with large cones or fruits. | was also happy to see treatment on collec- tion of non-vascular plants (mosses, liver- worts and lichens), an often neglected area of botanical study. However, [ don’t rec- ommend pressing lichens as their shape can be an important diagnostic feature. Unfortunately, Brayshaw did not cover fungi and algae (micro or macro) and these two groups can cause difficulty for inter- ested amateurs. Overall, Brayshaw has written a very readable and informative little book with all the information necessary on how to collect, preserve and file plant specimens for both personal and public herbaria. The only detraction being that the book contains potentially useful information on herbaria Vol. 116 (6) 1999 to send specimens to tor identification, books to aid in identification and references to what is legal/illegal to collect - provided you live in British Columbia! For the Victorian naturalist, this aspect of the book is of limited practical value and perhaps relegates the book to the category of ‘a really good book to borrow from the library’. Out of interest, the Melbourne Herbarium generally charges $10 for each identifica- tion, and reserves the right to charge by the hour for particularly difficult specimens. Collectors should also remember that, in Victoria, permits are required to remove any plant material from national parks and state forests, which limits the range of material that may be available for collec- tion. Many plants are rare or threatened in Australia due to reductions in habitat. Some rare plants turn up in some very unexpected places, and, indeed, in many cases it has been the amateur collector that has drawn attention to these populations, However, for particularly interesting plants with limited distribution, the potential for viable populations to be ‘collected out of existence’ can be a real threat. | would question the need to collect apparently rare or non-abundant plants from an area, espe- cially where the identity of the plant is unknown. Amateur collectors, being curi- ous, yet eternally fond of our native bush- land, should be able to find plenty of enjoyment in collecting and identifying the plants that appear numerous and abundant in an area, Sharon E. Ford Deakin University, Rusden Campus 662 Blackburn Road, Clayton, Victoria 3168. 229 Guidelines for Authors Guidelines for Authors Submission of all Manuscripts Authors may submit material in the form of research reports, contributions, natural ist notes, letters to the editor and book reviews, Research reports and contribu lions must be aecompanied by an abstract of not more than 200 words. The abstract should state the scope of the work, give the principle findings and be complete enough for use by abstracting services, Research reports and contributions will be refereed by external referees. A Research Report is a suecinet and original setentific paper written in the traditronal format meluding abstract, introduction, methods, results ard discussion, A Contribution may consist ol reports, Comments, observations, survey results, bibliographies or other material relating: to natural history, The scope of a contribution is broad and little defined to encourage materuil on a wide range of top ics and ina range of styles. This allows melusion Of material that makes a contre bution to our Knowledge of natural history but for which the traditional format of sei entific papers is not appropriate. Naturalist Notes are penerally short, personal accounts Of observations made in the field by anyone with an miterest in natural histo ry. These may also include reports on excursions and talks, where appropriate, Letters to the Editer must be no longer than 500 words. Book Reviews are usually commissioned, but the editors also wel come enquiries from potential reviewers, Submission of a manuscript will be taken to mean that the material has not been published, nor ty being considered for publication elsewhere, and that all authors agree to ity submission. Three copies of the manuscript should be provided, each imeluding all tables and copies of figures, Original artwork and photos can be withheld by the author until aceeptinece of the manuscript, Manuscripts should be typed, double spaced with wide margins and pages qumbered, The name and address of all authors should be on a separate page to ensure anonymity for rel- ereeing, Indicate the telephone number of the author who is to receive correspon denee 230 Please note that we use the desk-top pub- lishing programme PC Quark Xpress which only accepts MSWord for Windows 2. Thus, the editors would prefer the dise (required only for the final paper) in this programme, However, we can deal with most PC programmes. Manuscript Corrections Authors can verify their final copy manu- script before it goes to the printer, A copy of their article as ‘ready for the printer’ will be sent and minor final changes may be made at this stage. Taxonomic Names Cite references used for taxonomic names, References used by The Victorian Naturalist ave listed at the end of these auidelines, Abbreviations Italics are used for the following abbrevi ations: efal.t pers, comm; pers, obs; unpubl, data and in press which are cited in the text — (R.G. Brown 1994 pers, comm. 3 May), Note that ‘ssp. is now “subsp,” ‘Tables and Figures All illustrations (including photographs) are considered as figures and will be designed to fit within a page (11S mim) or a column (55 mm) width, Tables must also fit into 55 mm/l15 mm. iis important that the legend is clearly visible at these sizes. For preference, photographs should be of high quality/high contrast which will repro- duce clearly in black-and-white and they may be colour slides, colour or black-and- white prints, Line drawings, maps and graphs may be computer generated or in black Indian Ink on stout white or tracing paper. On the back of each figure, write the figure number and the paper's tithe in pencil, All figures and tables should be referred to in the text and numbered consecutively. Their captions must be numbered consecutively (Fig. 1, Fig, 2, ete.) and put on a separate page at the end of the manuscript. Tables should be numbered consecutively (Table 1, Table 2, ete) and have an explanatory caption at the top. Units The International System of Units (SI units) should be used for exact measure- ment of physical quantities, The Victorian Naturalist Journal Style Authors are advised to note the layout of headings, tables and illustrations as given in recent issues of the Journal, Single spaces are used after full stops, and single quotation marks are used throughout (in most cases). In all papers, at the first reference of a species, please use both the common name and binomial. However, where a lot of species are mentioned, a list (an appendix at the end), with both common and binomi- al names, may be preferred. Lists must be in taxonomic order using the order in which they appear in the references listed below, The journal uses capitalised common names for species then the binomial in ital- ics, e.g. Kangaroo Grass Themeda triandra, References References in the text should cite author and year, e.g. Brown (1990), (Brown 1990), (Brown 1990, 1991), (Brown 1995 unpubl.), (Brown and Green 1990), (Brown and Green 1990; Blue 1990; Red 1990). If there are more than two authors for a paper use (Brown ef al. 1990). These should be included under References, in alphabetical order, at the end of the text (see below), The use of unpublished data is only accepted if the data is held in a public institution, and the location must be cited in the references. Pers, obs. and pers. comm. should not be included in the list of references. Guidelines for Authors Journal titles should be quoted in full. Leigh, J., Boden, R. and Briggs, J. (1984), ‘Extinct and Endangered Plants of Australia’. (Macmillan: South Melbourne.) Lunney, D. (1995). Bush Rat. /a *The Mammals of Australia’, pp. 651-653. Ed, R. Strahan. (Australian Museum/ Reed New Holland: Sydney.) Phillips, A. and Watson, R. (1991), Xanthorrhoea; Consequences of *horti- cultural fashion’, The Victorian Naturalist 108, 130-133. Smith, A.B. (1995), Flowering plants in north-eastern Victoria. (Unpublished PhD thesis, University of Melbourne.) Other methods of referencing may be acceptable in manuscripts other than research reports, and the editors should be consulted. Por further information on style, write to the editors, or consult the latest Victorian Naturalist or “Style Manual for Authors, Editors and Printers’ (Sth edition) (Australian Government Publishing Service: Canberra). Complimentary Copies After publication of an article in the jour- nal, five complimentary copies of that issue are sent to the author(s) for each paper. Authors of Naturalist Notes and Book Reviews will receive two compli- mentary copies of the journal. Additional copies of The Victorian Naturalist: 25 copies, $38.00 (+ postage); 50 copies, $75.00 (+ postage). Checking species names is the responsibility of authors. The books we would like to be used as references for articles in The Victorian Naturalist are listed below. Authors should refer to the sources used for species names in their papers. In every case, the latest edi- tion of the book should be used. Mammals — Menkhorst, P.W. (ed.) (1995). ‘Mammals of Victoria: Distribution, ecology and conservation’. (Oxford University Press: South Melbourne.) Reptiles and Amphibians — Cogger, H. (1992). ‘Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia’, (Reed Books: Chatswood, N.S.W.) Insects — CSIRO (1991). ‘The Insects of Australia: a textbook for students and research workers’. Volumes | and II. (MUP: Melbourne.) Vol. 116 (6) 1999 Birds — Christidis, L. and Bowles, W. (1994), ‘The Taxonomy and Species of Birds of Australia and its Territories’. Royal Australian Ornithologists Union Monograph 2. (RAOU: Melbourne.) Plants — Ross, J.H. (ed.) (1996). ‘A Census of the Vascular Plants of Victoria’, (Royal Botanic Gardens of Victoria: Melbourne.) 231 The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc. Reg No AO033611X Established 1880 In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria OBJECTIVES: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian flora and fauna. Membership is open to any person interested in natural history and includes beginners as well as experienced naturalists, Registered Office: FNCV, | Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. Postal Address; FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia, Phone/Fax (03) 9877 9860; International Phone/Fax 61 3 9877 9860, Patron His Excellency, The Honourable James Gobbo, The Governor of Victoria Key Office-Bearers President: Dr TOM MAY, ¢c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra 3141. 9252 2319 Vice Presidents: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, | Astley Street, Montmorency 3094, 9435 8408 and Mr JOHN SEEBECK, 113 Arundel Road, Park Orchards 3114. AH 9876 1762 Hon. Secretary: Mrs ANNE MORTON, 10 Rupicola Court, Rowville 3178. 9790 0656 Hon. Treasurer: Vacant Subscription-Secretary: FNCY, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. 9877 9860 Editor, The Vic, Nat. Mrs MERILYN GREY, 8 Martin Road, Glen Iris 3146, 9889 6223 Assist, Editor, The Vie, Nat: Mr ALISTAIR EVANS, 2/5 Glenbrook Avenue, Clayton 3168. 9545 6134. Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. AH 5428 4097 Excursion Co-ordinator: Mt DENNIS MELTZER, 8 Harcourt Avenue, Caufield 3162. 9523 1853 Book Sales: Dr ALAN PARKIN, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. AH 9850 2617 Book Brokerage: Mr RAY WHITE, 20 Alfred Street, Essendon 3040, 9379 3602 Newsletter Editors: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, as aboye and Mr KEITH MARSHALL, 8/423 Tooronga Road, Hawthorn East 3123. 9882 3044. Conservation Coordinator; Ms NATALIE SMITH, 37 Childers Street, Kew 3101. AH 9853 1339 Group Secretaries Botany: Mr RAY MACPHERSON, 8 Jean Street, Lower Templestowe 3107. 9850 4319 Geology; Mr ROB HAMSON, 5 Foster Street, McKinnon 3204, 9557 5215 Fauna Survey; Ms SOPHIE SMALL, 107 Bondi Road, Bonbeach 3196. AH 9772 2848 Marine Research; Mr MICHAEL LYONS, 2/18 Stonnington Place, Toorak 3142, AH 9822 8007 Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 Schotters Road, Mernda 3754. 9717 3511 MEMBERSHIP Members receive The Victorian Naturalist and the monthly Field Nat News free, The Club organis- es several monthly meetings (free to all) and excursions (transport costs may be charged). Field work, including botany, mammal and invertebrate surveys, is being done at a number of locations in Victoria, and all members are encouraged to participate. SUBSCRIPTION RATES for 2000 Add GST , for 6 months First Member Metropolitan $40 $2.00 Concessional (pensioner/student/unemployed) $30 $1.50 Country (more than 50km from GPO) $30 $1.50 Junior (under 18) $15 $0.75 Additional Members Adult $15 $0.75 Junior $5 $0.25 Institutional Australian Institutions $55 $2.75 Overseas Institutions AU$65 $3.25 Schools/Clubs $35 $1.75 “10% GST must be added to all subscriptions for the period from 1 July 2000 Send to: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. Printed by Brown Prior Anderson, 5 Evans Street, Burwood, Victoria 3125.